7011B-34B Im 73892-012 PDF

NORMARC 7000 ILS
INSTRUCTION MANUAL
NORMARC 7011B-7034B
73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17
© Indra Navia AS
NORMARC 7000 ILS
Instruction Manual
73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B
© Indra Navia AS
NORMARC 7000 ILS
DOCUMENT CONTROL
Name Signature Date
Author/Owner John Saugstad JSA (Sign.) 06-Jul-15
Approved by John Saugstad JSA (Sign.) 06-Apr17
REVISION STATEMENT
Product Name NORMARC 7011B-7034B
Product Group Instrument Landing System
Manual Type Instruction Manual
Part number: 73892
Part revision: 1.2
Date: 05-Apr-17
File: 7011B-34B_im_73892-012.pdf
Document part/Chapter Number Rev

Front page and preface, including table of con- *
tents
Chapter 1 General Description I1 2
Chapter 2 Technical Description I2 3
Chapter 3 Operation Instructions I3 2
Chapter 4 Periodic Maintenance I4 3
Chapter 5 Corrective Maintenance I5 2
Chapter 6 Parts Lists I6 2
Chapter 7 Installation and Initial Set-up I7 3
Chapter 8 Detailed Technical Description I8 2
Appendix A: Monitor and Maint. parameters IAPA 1
Appendix B: Far Field Monitors IAPB 1
Appendix C: Power Supply IAPC 1
Appendix D: RMM Software IAPD 1
* The revision status for the document front page and preface, including table of contents, is
identical to “Part revision”.
Instruction Manual
INDRA NAVIA PROPRIETARY INFORMATION

The information contained herein is proprietary to Indra Navia AS and may not be copied, used or disclosed in whole or in part without prior
written permission, The copyright and the foregoing restrictions on use and disclosure extend to all media in which this information may be
preserved including magnetic storage, punched card, paper tape, computer printout, visual display, etc.
© Indra Navia AS Page -i

NORMARC 7000 ILS
RECORD OF CHANGES
Chg. No. Date Doc.part / Chapter Rev Description Acc.
by.
- 06-Jul-15 All P1.0 New BGR/
JSA/
RAJ/
- 13-Feb-17 All 1.0 New BGR/
JSA/
SKR/
RAJ/
JDA/
AEN/
TMA/
JAA/
MHU
PR18022 06-Mar-17 Ch. 2, 4 and 7 Rev.1.1 2.7.6.3: Add text for SC/TRM alarm BGR/
PR18019 2, 2 to table AEN/
and 2 2.7.7: change heading to Shutdown SKR/
Integrity Test. JSA/
4.2.4.8/9: Add text under Monitor
Alarm Limit checks Alt.1/Alt. 2
7.2: Correct heading numbering
7.3.3 Correct Master Password
PR 18163 05-April Ch. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 Rev.1.2 1.7.9.1: Correct setting med ref til BGR/
and 8 2, 3, 2, 7.3.3 JSA/
3, 2, 2, 2.6: Remove figure for RCA 1750A SKR/
3&2 3.2.1: Remove section for RCA RAJ/
1750A
3.2.2: Add new text for RCA 1750B
4.1/4.2: Correct text and formatting
5.3.1: Correct new module name
6.1.2.1: Add OS 1706B to Parts
List. 6.1.2.3: Correct Table
7.3.8: Correct Protocol Table 7-15
and use this table as a ref.
7.3.8.2/3: Correct tables 7-16,
remove Table 7-17, Remove text
from Table 17 to Table 7-19
7.7 Add text for 7.7.1. Update two
figures
7.7.1: New section - text & figure
7.8: Correct several tables’ meas-
urements
8.1.10: Remove Table 8-2 & 8-5
Ref to Table 7-15
8.2.1: Fig 8-27: New figure
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page -ii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page iii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
- Page intentionally blank -
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page iv

NORMARC 7000 ILS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................ 1-1

1.1 Purpose and scope......................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Document overview ........................................................................................ 1-1
1.3 ILS Description ............................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 1-3
1.3.2 ILS Overview .................................................................................................. 1-3
1.3.3 Localizer ......................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.4 Localizer Description ...................................................................................... 1-4
1.3.5 Glide Path ....................................................................................................... 1-5
1.3.6 Glide Path Description .................................................................................... 1-5
1.4 Product Type Numbers................................................................................... 1-7
1.5 Technical Specifications ................................................................................ 1-8
1.5.1 Localizer Systems........................................................................................... 1-8
1.5.2 Glide Path Systems ........................................................................................ 1-12
1.6 Physical Organization ..................................................................................... 1-17
1.6.1 Module and Assembly Location...................................................................... 1-17
1.6.2 Service Kit Assembly ...................................................................................... 1-17
1.6.3 Power Supply.................................................................................................. 1-17
1.7 System Description......................................................................................... 1-18
1.7.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 1-18
1.7.2 Physical Description ....................................................................................... 1-19
1.7.3 Monitors .......................................................................................................... 1-19
1.7.4 Transmitters.................................................................................................... 1-19
1.7.5 Transmitter Control ......................................................................................... 1-20
1.7.6 Remote Control............................................................................................... 1-20
1.7.7 Remote Monitoring System (RMS) ................................................................. 1-20
1.7.8 Remote Slave Panel ....................................................................................... 1-20
1.7.9 Remote Maintenance Monitoring (RMM)........................................................ 1-21
2 SECTION 2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 2-1

2.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Monitors .......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.3 Transmitters.................................................................................................... 2-3
2.4 Transmitter Control ......................................................................................... 2-7
2.5 CI 1748A Connection Interface....................................................................... 2-9
2.6 RCA 1750 Remote Control Assembly ............................................................ 2-10
2.7 Remote Monitoring System (RMS) ................................................................. 2-12
2.7.1 General Description ........................................................................................ 2-12
2.7.2 PC and Modem............................................................................................... 2-13
2.7.3 RMS Data bus ................................................................................................ 2-13
2.7.4 Maintenance Data Collection.......................................................................... 2-14
2.7.5 Storage Functions........................................................................................... 2-14
2.7.6 RMS Events.................................................................................................... 2-15
2.7.7 Shutdown Integrity Test .................................................................................. 2-20
2.8 Power Supply.................................................................................................. 2-22
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page v

NORMARC 7000 ILS
3 SECTION 3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .................................................... 3-1

3.1 Main Cabinet................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 Power on/off.................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2 Local Control Operation.................................................................................. 3-2
3.1.3 Glossary.......................................................................................................... 3-2
3.1.4 Push-buttons................................................................................................... 3-3
3.1.5 Switches/Switch-locks .................................................................................... 3-4
3.1.6 System Status Indications .............................................................................. 3-5
3.1.7 Local Keyboard/Display Operation ................................................................. 3-9
3.1.8 The RMS Front Panel ..................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.9 The menu structure......................................................................................... 3-9
3.1.10 Navigating between screens........................................................................... 3-10
3.1.11 The Parameter Window tree........................................................................... 3-15
3.1.12 IP address....................................................................................................... 3-19
3.2 Tower Equipment............................................................................................ 3-20
3.2.1 Remote Control Assembly RCA 1750B .......................................................... 3-20
3.2.2 Slave Panel SP 1754A, SP 1754B ................................................................ 3-22
3.2.3 Category Status Unit CSA 1816A (Option)..................................................... 3-24
3.2.4 Remote Slave Operation ................................................................................ 3-26
3.2.5 Interlock Switch Operation.............................................................................. 3-28
3.3 Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Software.............................................. 3-29
3.3.1 User Manual ................................................................................................... 3-29
3.4 Startup / shutdown procedures....................................................................... 3-30
3.4.1 Startup ............................................................................................................ 3-30
3.4.2 Shutdown........................................................................................................ 3-33
4 SECTION 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 4-1

4.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule ..................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 On-site Performance Checks.......................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Other On-Site Maintenance ............................................................................ 4-2
4.1.3 Off-Site Maintenance ...................................................................................... 4-2
4.2 Periodic Maintenance CAT I, II and III ............................................................ 4-2
4.2.1 Quarterly Inspections (CAT I) / Monthly inspections (CAT II / CAT III)........... 4-2
4.2.2 Quarterly Inspections...................................................................................... 4-3
4.2.3 Six Monthly (CAT II/III) Annual (CAT I)........................................................... 4-3
4.2.4 Annual inspections.......................................................................................... 4-5
4.3 Recommended snow and grass/ vegetation removal..................................... 4-29
4.3.1 LOC site.......................................................................................................... 4-29
4.3.2 GP Site ........................................................................................................... 4-30
4.4 Flight Checks .................................................................................................. 4-31
4.4.1 Flight Check Requirements ............................................................................ 4-31
4.4.2 Scenarios that may require Flight Check........................................................ 4-31
4.4.3 The different types of Flight Check ................................................................. 4-31
4.4.4 Pre Flight Check procedures .......................................................................... 4-32
4.4.5 Post Flight Check procedures......................................................................... 4-32
4.4.6 Flight Check LOC ........................................................................................... 4-32
4.4.7 Flight Check GP.............................................................................................. 4-48
5 SECTION 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................. 5-1

5.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 5-1
Instruction Manual
5.2 Diagnostic functions........................................................................................ 5-1

5.2.1 General description......................................................................................... 5-1
5.2.2 Current data diagnostics................................................................................. 5-1
© Indra Navia AS Page vi

NORMARC 7000 ILS
5.2.3 Alarm event diagnostics.................................................................................. 5-2

5.2.4 Manual fault diagnosis .................................................................................... 5-2
5.3 LRU change procedures................................................................................. 5-3
5.3.1 Replacing units ............................................................................................... 5-3
5.3.2 MO 1820 / MF 1821 replacement ................................................................... 5-3
5.3.3 PS 1227 replacement ..................................................................................... 5-5
5.3.4 RF Oscillator replacement .............................................................................. 5-6
5.3.5 TCA 1218 replacement................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.6 RMA 1822....................................................................................................... 5-7
5.3.7 LF 1576 replacement...................................................................................... 5-8
5.3.8 CO 1837/1838 replacement............................................................................ 5-9
5.3.9 LPA 1580/GPA 1581/GPA 1582 replacement ................................................ 5-9
5.4 Detailed description of the automatic diagnostic algorithms........................... 5-16
5.4.1 Overview......................................................................................................... 5-16
5.4.2 Possible diagnostic solutions.......................................................................... 5-16
5.4.3 Current data diagnostics................................................................................. 5-17
5.4.4 Alarm event diagnostics.................................................................................. 5-21
6 SECTION 6 PARTS LIST .......................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Parts Lists ....................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Explanation of Parts List Form........................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 Parts Lists ....................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Figures............................................................................................................ 6-6
7 SECTION 7 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SET-UP ......................................... 7-1

7.1 Mechanical Installation ................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.1 Mounting Kit MK 1343A .................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.2 Moving RF Connectors ................................................................................... 7-4
7.2 Electrical Installation ....................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.1 Connection Overview...................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.2 Power and Battery .......................................................................................... 7-8
7.2.3 RF Inputs ........................................................................................................ 7-15
7.2.4 RF Outputs ..................................................................................................... 7-16
7.2.5 DC-Loop (Localizer only) ................................................................................ 7-17
7.2.6 Remote Control............................................................................................... 7-18
7.2.7 PC and Modem............................................................................................... 7-19
7.2.8 DME (LOC Only)............................................................................................. 7-20
7.2.9 Analog Inputs.................................................................................................. 7-30
7.2.10 Digital Inputs and Outputs .............................................................................. 7-32
7.2.11 Auxiliary Digital Inputs .................................................................................... 7-34
7.2.12 Battery Warning .............................................................................................. 7-36
7.2.13 Remote control connections ........................................................................... 7-37
7.2.14 MB 1753 and MB 1801 connections............................................................... 7-40
7.2.15 Connecting Markers or DME to OPT inputs ................................................... 7-47
7.2.16 Automatic shutdown of GP ............................................................................. 7-51
7.2.17 Remote slave connection ............................................................................... 7-52
7.2.18 Interlock switch connection............................................................................. 7-59
7.2.19 Remote Control Auxiliary Channels................................................................ 7-61
7.2.20 MB 1575A Configuration................................................................................. 7-65
7.3 Tests and Adjustments ................................................................................... 7-67
Instruction Manual
7.3.1 Configuration Settings .................................................................................... 7-67

7.3.2 ILS Configuration ............................................................................................ 7-67
7.3.3 Resetting Master Password............................................................................ 7-68
© Indra Navia AS Page vii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
7.3.4 Lost contact with RC configuration ................................................................. 7-68

7.3.5 Changeover configuration............................................................................... 7-68
7.3.6 Service mode configuration ............................................................................ 7-69
7.3.7 Remote Ports Access Level Configuration ..................................................... 7-69
7.3.8 Configuration for CI 1748, RCA 1750, MB 1753 and SP 1754....................... 7-71
7.4 Using Modems................................................................................................ 7-83
7.4.1 About using modems ...................................................................................... 7-83
7.5 Transmitter Setup ........................................................................................... 7-87
7.5.1 Transmitter setup............................................................................................ 7-87
7.5.2 RF output level................................................................................................ 7-88
7.5.3 LF Phase Check ............................................................................................. 7-89
7.5.4 SDM adjustment ............................................................................................. 7-90
7.5.5 DDM adjustment ............................................................................................. 7-91
7.5.6 CSB / SBO phase adjustment ........................................................................ 7-91
7.5.7 Course Sector adjustment .............................................................................. 7-93
7.5.8 Ident Morse code ............................................................................................ 7-94
7.5.9 Ident modulation adjustment........................................................................... 7-94
7.5.10 Flight Check value setting............................................................................... 7-94
7.6 Antenna System Adjustments......................................................................... 7-95
7.7 Monitor Alignment........................................................................................... 7-96
7.7.1 Stand by Monitor alignment ............................................................................ 7-103
7.8 Factory Default Configuration Settings ........................................................... 7-104
7.8.1 Cat I monitor LIMIT configuration ................................................................... 7-104
7.8.2 DC-loop Alarm Limits (LOC Only)................................................................... 7-106
7.8.3 Description of the FFM EXE AL limits............................................................. 7-106
7.8.4 Description of the CL IDENT and CLR IDENT limits ...................................... 7-108
7.8.5 Cat II monitor LIMIT configuration .................................................................. 7-109
7.8.6 Cat III monitor LIMIT configuration ................................................................. 7-109
7.8.7 Executive Monitor delay configuration ............................................................ 7-109
7.8.8 Maintenance parameter configuration ............................................................ 7-110
7.8.9 Maintenance delay configuration .................................................................... 7-116
7.8.10 Morse code configuration ............................................................................... 7-116
7.9 Typical TX Adjustments values....................................................................... 7-117
7.10 User administration configuration ................................................................... 7-117
7.11 Frequency configuration strap settings........................................................... 7-118
7.11.1 OS 1706A Strap settings for LOC systems ................................................ 7-119
7.11.2 OS 1706B strap settings for GP systems ...................................................... 7-120
8 SECTION 8 DETAILED TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................... 8-1

8.1 Main Cabinet................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 MF 1821A Monitor Front-end.......................................................................... 8-1
8.1.2 MO 1820A Monitor.......................................................................................... 8-9
8.1.3 TCA 1218C Transmitter Control Assembly..................................................... 8-18
8.1.4 LF 1576A Low Frequency Generator ............................................................. 8-29
8.1.5 RF Oscillators ................................................................................................. 8-33
8.1.6 LPA 1580A Localizer Power Amplifier Assembly, GPA 1581A GP COU
Power Amplifier Assembly and GPA 1582A GP CLR Power Amplifier
Assembly (NM 7033B-34B Only).................................................................... 8-35
8.1.7 Changeover Unit CO 1837/ CO 1838 ............................................................. 8-42
8.1.8 PS 1227 Power Supply................................................................................... 8-45
Instruction Manual
8.1.9 RMA 1822A RMS Assembly........................................................................... 8-46

8.1.10 CI 1748A Connection Interface....................................................................... 8-54
8.1.11 PC 1749A Power Connection ......................................................................... 8-59
© Indra Navia AS Page viii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
8.1.12 MB 1575A Monitor Section Motherboard........................................................ 8-61

8.1.13 Coaxial Cabling............................................................................................... 8-63
8.2 Tower Equipment............................................................................................ 8-67
8.2.1 RCA 1750 Remote Control Assembly ............................................................ 8-67
8.2.2 MB 1753A Motherboard.................................................................................. 8-76
8.2.3 CSA 1816A Category Status Unit................................................................... 8-77
8.2.4 SP 1754A and SP 1754B Slave Panel ........................................................... 8-85
8.2.5 IL 1379 / IL 1380 Interlock switch ................................................................... 8-94
8.2.6 DS 1512A DME status interface ..................................................................... 8-95
SECTION 9 APPENDIXES .......................................................................................... A-1
APPENDIX A MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS .......................................... A-1

A.1 Monitor Parameters ........................................................................................ A-1
A.2 Maintenance Parameters................................................................................ A-2
APPENDIX B FAR FIELD MONITOR - (LOC ONLY) ..................................................... B-1

B.1 System Description......................................................................................... B-1
B.1.1 Functional Description .................................................................................... B-1
B.1.2 Detailed Description FC 1927......................................................................... B-1
B.1.3 Detailed Description FI 1392B ........................................................................ B-4
B.2 Installation....................................................................................................... B-5
B.2.1 Mechanical and electrical installation ............................................................. B-5
B.2.2 Interfacing the NORMARC 7720 Far Field Monitor ........................................ B-5
APPENDIX C POWER SUPPLY .................................................................................. C-1

C.1 BC 1361 K and L ............................................................................................ C-1
C.1.1 Description...................................................................................................... C-1
C.1.2 Details............................................................................................................. C-2
C.1.3 Redundancy.................................................................................................... C-4
C.1.4 Batteries.......................................................................................................... C-4
C.1.5 Operation ........................................................................................................ C-5
C.1.6 Configuration .................................................................................................. C-6
C.2 Suppliers’ Documentation............................................................................... C-10
APPENDIX D WINDOWS RMM PROGRAM ................................................................. D-1

Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page ix

NORMARC 7000 ILS
-Page Intentionally Blank-
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page x

NORMARC 7000 ILS
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 Typical ILS installation ............................................................................... 1-3

Figure 1-2 Localizer Block Diagram ............................................................................ 1-4
Figure 1-3 Glide Path Block Diagram .......................................................................... 1-5
Figure 1-4 ILS Block Diagram ..................................................................................... 1-18
Figure 1-5 The NORMARC 7000B series RMM/RMS systems................................... 1-21
Figure 2-1 ILS Block Diagram ..................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2 Monitor section Block Diagram .................................................................. 2-3
Figure 2-3 System Block Diagram of a Localizer/Glide Path Course Transmitter....... 2-4
Figure 2-4 System Block Diagram - Localizer Clearance Transmitter......................... 2-5
Figure 2-5 System Block Diagram - Glide Path Clearance Transmitter ...................... 2-6
Figure 2-6 TCA 1218C Block Diagram ........................................................................ 2-7
Figure 2-7 RCA 7150B Front Panel............................................................................. 2-10
Figure 2-8 The RMM configuration.............................................................................. 2-12
Figure 2-9 The RMS Data bus..................................................................................... 2-13
Figure 2-10 The IIC Serial Bus and ADC Channels ...................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-11 Single Power Supply Functional Diagram.................................................. 2-22
Figure 2-12 Dual Power Supply Functional Diagram .................................................... 2-23
Figure 3-1 Power ON/OFF and GND Sockets Location .............................................. 3-1
Figure 3-2 LC 1217C Front Panel ............................................................................... 3-2
Figure 3-3 KD 1824A Keyboard/Display...................................................................... 3-9
Figure 3-4 Typical top level LCD screen ..................................................................... 3-10
Figure 3-5 The Parameter window with Monitor branch expanded ............................. 3-12
Figure 3-6 A typical readout screen: DS parameters .................................................. 3-13
Figure 3-7 Select and press OK to edit ....................................................................... 3-13
Figure 3-8 Login menu ................................................................................................ 3-14
Figure 3-9 Edit screen for Mon1 CL DDM ................................................................... 3-14
Figure 3-10 RMS Network Interface .............................................................................. 3-19
Figure 3-11 RCA 1750B Front Panel............................................................................. 3-20
Figure 3-12 SP 1754A Slave Panel Front ..................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-13 SP 1754B Slave Panel Front ..................................................................... 3-22
Figure 3-14 CSA 1816A Front Panel............................................................................. 3-24
Figure 3-15 SF 1344A Front Panel................................................................................ 3-26
Figure 4-1 SBO Waveforms ........................................................................................ 4-7
Figure 4-2 LF phase check.......................................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-3 Typical LOC site......................................................................................... 4-29
Figure 4-4 M-array Glide Path BFA ............................................................................. 4-30
Figure 4-6 Global phasing ........................................................................................... 4-38
Figure 4-14 Cat I ........................................................................................................... 4-42
Figure 4-15 Cat II .......................................................................................................... 4-42
Figure 4-16 Cat III ......................................................................................................... 4-42
Figure 4-19 CL al. limit check ........................................................................................ 4-44
Figure 4-27 Flight profile - global phasing ..................................................................... 4-52
Figure 4-28 Flight profile - sector width ......................................................................... 4-53
Figure 4-31 Flight profile - GP angle ............................................................................. 4-54
Figure 4-32 Flight profile - CL alarms ............................................................................ 4-55
Instruction Manual
Figure 4-34 Flight profile - DS al. limit check................................................................. 4-56

Figure 4-36 Flight profile - below path DDM.................................................................. 4-57
Figure 5-1 Loop Phase Tab......................................................................................... 5-10
Figure 5-2 Offset Tab .................................................................................................. 5-11
© Indra Navia AS Page xi

NORMARC 7000 ILS
Figure 5-3 Before adjustment ..................................................................................... 5-12

Figure 5-4 After adjustment ......................................................................................... 5-12
Figure 5-5 Offset Tab .................................................................................................. 5-13
Figure 5-6 Before adjustment ..................................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-7 After adjustment ......................................................................................... 5-14
Figure 5-8 Power Tab.................................................................................................. 5-15
Figure 5-9 Flow diagram for Monitor warning tests ..................................................... 5-20
Figure 5-10 Flow diagram for diagnosing a changeover-only alarm ............................. 5-21
Figure 5-11 Flow diagram for diagnosing changeover/shutdown alarms ...................... 5-22
Figure 6-1 NORMARC 7011B-7012B LOC cabinet..................................................... 6-6
Figure 6-2 NORMARC 7013B-7014B LOC cabinet..................................................... 6-7
Figure 6-3 NORMARC 7031B-7032B GP cabinet....................................................... 6-8
Figure 6-4 NORMARC 7033B-7034B GP cabinet....................................................... 6-9
Figure 6-5 NORMARC 7011B-7012B LOC Cabinet, Rear View ................................. 6-10
Figure 6-6 NORMARC 7013B-7014B LOC Cabinet, Rear View ................................. 6-10
Figure 6-7 NORMARC 7031B-7032B GP Cabinet, Rear View ................................... 6-11
Figure 6-8 NORMARC 7033B-7034B GP Cabinet, Rear View ................................... 6-11
Figure 6-9 NORMARC 70xxB LOC & GP cabinet, wall mount side ............................ 6-12
Figure 6-10 BC 1361K &BC 1361L Battery Charger, with and without cover ............... 6-13
Figure 6-11 NORMARC 7000B Cabinet........................................................................ 6-14
Figure 7-1 NORMARC 70XXB required mounting space (top view) ........................... 7-1
Figure 7-2 NORMARC 70XXB mounted on wall with MK 1343A ................................ 7-2
Figure 7-3 Wall mount dimensions (MK 1343A).......................................................... 7-3
Figure 7-4 Moving RF connectors ............................................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-5 ILS main cabinet connection overview for NORMARC 7011B/12B/31B/32B 7-6
Figure 7-6 ILS main cabinet connection overview NORMARC 7013B/14B/33B/34B.. 7-7
Figure 7-7 BC 1361K on wall mount............................................................................ 7-8
Figure 7-8 Shows packing the foam for transport........................................................ 7-9
Figure 7-9 Mounting Instructions for Controller and Rectifier ...................................... 7-10
Figure 7-10 Interconnection BC 1361K and BC 1361L (charger 1)............................... 7-12
Figure 7-11 RF input connections - 2 Freq, NORMARC 7013B/14B/33B/34B.............. 7-15
Figure 7-12 RF input connections NORMARC 7011B/12B/31B/32B ............................ 7-15
Figure 7-13 RF output connections ............................................................................... 7-16
Figure 7-14 DC-loop connections.................................................................................. 7-17
Figure 7-15 Remote control connection ........................................................................ 7-18
Figure 7-16 PC and modem connections ...................................................................... 7-19
Figure 7-17 DME connections ....................................................................................... 7-20
Figure 7-18 LOC master connections (recommended) ................................................. 7-21
Figure 7-19 LOC master connections (alternative)........................................................ 7-22
Figure 7-20 Circuit Diagram, LOC master ..................................................................... 7-22
Figure 7-21 DME master connections ........................................................................... 7-23
Figure 7-22 Circuit diagram, DME master .................................................................... 7-23
Figure 7-23 Keying Interconnection............................................................................... 7-25
Figure 7-24 Keying Interconnection............................................................................... 7-27
Figure 7-25 LOC master via RC (Old Fernau)............................................................... 7-28
Figure 7-26 LOC master via RC (New MOOG Fernau)................................................. 7-29
Figure 7-27 Analog input connections ........................................................................... 7-30
Figure 7-28 Typical circuit diagram ............................................................................... 7-31
Figure 7-29 Digital input/output connections ................................................................. 7-32
Figure 7-30 Equivalent circuit diagrams ........................................................................ 7-33
Instruction Manual
Figure 7-31 Digital Inputs .............................................................................................. 7-34

Figure 7-32 Digital Input ................................................................................................ 7-35
Figure 7-33 Battery warning connections ...................................................................... 7-36
Figure 7-34 Connectors for remote control interface on CI 1748 .................................. 7-38
© Indra Navia AS Page xii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
Figure 7-35 Connectors for Remote Control interface on MB 1753A............................ 7-38

Figure 7-36 Connectors for Remote Control interface on MB 1801A............................ 7-39
Figure 7-37 Cable MKR-MB 1753A/1801A ................................................................... 7-47
Figure 7-38 Connections for Fernau RSP to MB 1753A/1801A .................................... 7-49
Figure 7-39 Slave Connector J11.................................................................................. 7-52
Figure 7-40 Slave Connector P5, MB 1753................................................................... 7-53
Figure 7-41 SP 1754 Connector pinout ......................................................................... 7-54
Figure 7-42 CAN Bus .................................................................................................... 7-56
Figure 7-43 Slave Connector J5.................................................................................... 7-57
Figure 7-44 Slave Connector J6.................................................................................... 7-58
Figure 7-45 Interlock connector P18 ............................................................................. 7-59
Figure 7-46 Interlock switch........................................................................................... 7-60
Figure 7-47 Connector location, MB 1753 (Remote Control) Aux channel ................... 7-62
Figure 7-48 Connector Location, MB 1575 (ILS Rack).................................................. 7-63
Figure 7-49 Typical circuit diagram, Remote Control End............................................. 7-64
Figure 7-50 Typical circuit diagram, ILS Rack End ....................................................... 7-64
Figure 7-51 Transmitter Control strap platforms............................................................ 7-69
Figure 7-52 RF output level .......................................................................................... 7-88
Figure 7-53 Maintenance Measurements...................................................................... 7-88
Figure 7-54 LF phase CSB illustration........................................................................... 7-89
Figure 7-55 SDM Adjustment ........................................................................................ 7-90
Figure 7-56 DDM Adjustment ........................................................................................ 7-91
Figure 7-57 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (Transmitter settings) .................................. 7-92
Figure 7-58 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (flight check)................................................ 7-92
Figure 7-59 Course Sector Adjustment ......................................................................... 7-93
Figure 7-60 Flight Check value setting .......................................................................... 7-95
Figure 7-61 Part of CO 1837B showing the potentiometer............................................ 7-103
Figure 8-1 MF 1821A Block Diagram .......................................................................... 8-2
Figure 8-2 MF 1821 FPGA Block Diagram.................................................................. 8-3
Figure 8-3 MF 1821 SPU Block Diagram .................................................................... 8-4
Figure 8-4 Monitor frontend adjustment points............................................................ 8-8
Figure 8-5 MO 1820A Block Diagram.......................................................................... 8-10
Figure 8-6 MO 1820 FPGA Block Diagram ................................................................. 8-11
Figure 8-7 MO 1820 CPLD Block Diagram ................................................................. 8-12
Figure 8-8 TCA 1218C Block Diagram ........................................................................ 8-28
Figure 8-9 Connection Diagram TCA 1218C............................................................... 8-29
Figure 8-10 LF 1576A Block Diagram ........................................................................... 8-32
Figure 8-11 OS 1706A/B Block Diagram....................................................................... 8-33
Figure 8-12 LPA 1580A, GPA 1581A and GPA 1582A Assembly ................................ 8-39
Figure 8-13 LPA 1580A, GPA 1581A and GPA 1582A CSB Block Diagram ................ 8-40
Figure 8-14 LPA 1580A and GPA 1581A SBO Block Diagram ..................................... 8-41
Figure 8-15 Block schematic for CO 1837B and CO 1838B ......................................... 8-43
Figure 8-16 Block schematic for CO 1838C .................................................................. 8-44
Figure 8-17 PS 1227 Block Diagram ............................................................................. 8-45
Figure 8-18 RMA 1822A Block Diagram ....................................................................... 8-46
Figure 8-19 RMA 1822A Front Panel (KD 1824A) ........................................................ 8-47
Figure 8-20 CI 1748 Block Diagram .............................................................................. 8-55
Figure 8-21 Block Diagram PC 1749A .......................................................................... 8-59
Figure 8-22 Connection Diagram .................................................................................. 8-62
Figure 8-23 Coax Cable Connection - NORMARC 7011B-7012B ................................ 8-63
Instruction Manual

Figure 8-27 RCA 1750 on MB 1753 (without frame) ..................................................... 8-67
© Indra Navia AS Page xiii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
Figure 8-28 Remote Control with SP 1754 Slave Panel................................................ 8-68

Figure 8-29 Remote Control with SF 1344 or SP 1394 slave panel.............................. 8-69
Figure 8-30 RCA 1750 Block Diagram .......................................................................... 8-70
Figure 8-31 MB 1753 Interconnection Diagram............................................................. 8-76
Figure 8-32 Typical set up example with one or none external/additional remote
controls....................................................................................................... 8-77
Figure 8-33 Typical set up example with two external/additional remote controls ........ 8-78
Figure 8-34 CSA 1816 Block Diagram .......................................................................... 8-80
Figure 8-35 SP 1754 Block Diagram ............................................................................. 8-86
Figure 8-38 SP 1754A Slave Panel Front ..................................................................... 8-90
Figure 8-39 SP 1754B Slave Panel Front ..................................................................... 8-90
Figure 8-40 Interlock switch connections ...................................................................... 8-94
Figure B-1 NORMARC 7000B Block Diagram for FFM interface ................................ B-1
Figure B-2 FC 1927 Block Diagram ............................................................................. B-2
Figure B-3 Block Diagram FI 1392B ............................................................................ B-4
Figure B-4 FFM modem mounted in ILS cabinet ......................................................... B-6
Figure C-1 ILS cabinet with BC1361 K (left) and 2 pcs of BC 1361L (right) ................ C-1
Figure C-2 BC 1361K and BC 1361L Battery Charger, with and without cover........... C-3
Figure C-3 Circuit Breakers and connection terminals................................................. C-3
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page xiv

NORMARC 7000 ILS
LIST OF TABLES
Table 4-1 Periodic Maintenance Checks.................................................................... 4-1

Table 4-2 Field Modulation check .............................................................................. 4-25
Table 4-3 Field DDM measurement (LOC Only) ........................................................ 4-25
Table 4-4 Monitor Integrity Test (Alternative 2) .......................................................... 4-26
Table 4-5 Transmitter waveform checks .................................................................... 4-26
Table 4-6 RF Frequency check .................................................................................. 4-26
Table 4-7 LF Frequency check................................................................................... 4-26
Table 4-8 SB output power......................................................................................... 4-27
Table 4-9 Monitor Alarm Limits check ........................................................................ 4-27
Table 4-10 Near Field Monitor Delay and 20 seconds inhibit....................................... 4-28
Table 4-11 Battery maintenance .................................................................................. 4-28
Table 4-12 Field modulation check (LOC Only) .......................................................... 4-28
Table 7-1 RC Line Connection .................................................................................. 7-37
Table 7-2 RC RS-232 connection .............................................................................. 7-37
Table 7-3 Switch settings for SP 1754 ....................................................................... 7-48
Table 7-4 DME in position 3 ....................................................................................... 7-49
Table 7-5 DME in position 4 ....................................................................................... 7-50
Table 7-6 CAN Bus connections ................................................................................ 7-52
Table 7-7 CAN Bus Connections ............................................................................... 7-53
Table 7-8 Connector P2 ............................................................................................. 7-54
Table 7-9 Setting ILS configuration platform U6 ........................................................ 7-67
Table 7-10 Setting RC link shutdown delay ................................................................. 7-68
Table 7-11 Setting RC Main select at changeover....................................................... 7-68
Table 7-12 Setting RC indication in Service Mode....................................................... 7-69
Table 7-13 Access level strap settings. Warning Configuration ................................... 7-69
Table 7-14 Configuration options CI 1748.................................................................... 7-71
Table 7-15 Protocol selection....................................................................................... 7-72
Table 7-16 Configuration settings for RCA 1750.......................................................... 7-76
Table 7-17 DIP switches options.................................................................................. 7-79
Table 7-18 Module address.......................................................................................... 7-80
Table 7-19 Straps......................................................................................................... 7-80
Table 7-20 Buzzer Attention......................................................................................... 7-80
Table 7-21 CSA 1816A Configuration .......................................................................... 7-82
Table 7-22 Normal operating power level .................................................................... 7-88
Table 7-23 CAT I alarm and warning limits .................................................................. 7-105
Table 7-24 DC-Loop alarm Limits (LOC Only) ............................................................ 7-106
Table 7-25 Alarm and warning limits for Cat II equipment ........................................... 7-109
Table 7-26 Alarm and warning limits for Cat III equipment .......................................... 7-109
Table 7-27 Factory default delay values ...................................................................... 7-109
Table 7-28 Typical TX adjustment values .................................................................... 7-117
Table 7-29 OS 1706A strap settings for 2-frequency LOC........................................... 7-119
Table 7-30 OS 1706B GP frequency settings and configuration.................................. 7-120
Table 8-1 The different configurations of changeover units in the ILS ....................... 8-42
Table 8-2 MB 1575A plug-in module connectors ....................................................... 8-61
Table 8-3 CAN Address ............................................................................................. 8-73
Instruction Manual
Table 8-4 Category Status panel interface................................................................. 8-79

Table 8-5 Connectors and Signals ............................................................................. 8-84
© Indra Navia AS Page xvii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
Table 8-8 Connector J3/P6 ........................................................................................ 8-89

Table 8-9 Connector P4 ............................................................................................ 8-89
Table 8-10 Addresses .................................................................................................. 8-91
Table 8-11 Alternative inputs (POS3-4) ....................................................................... 8-92
Table 8-12 Alternative outputs (POS3-4) ..................................................................... 8-92
Table A-1 Monitor Alarm/Warning Parameters........................................................... A-1
Table A-2 Maintenance Parameters (Part 1) .............................................................. A-3
Table A-3 Maintenance Parameters (Part 2) .............................................................. A-4
Table A-4 User Defined Analog Inputs Maintenance Parameters .............................. A-4
Table A-5 User Defined Logical Inputs/Outputs Maintenance Parameters ................ A-4
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page xviii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS
AC Alternating Current
ADC Analog to Digital Converter
AGC Automatic Gain Control
CL Course Line
CLR Clearance
COU Course
CPLD Complex Programmable Logic Device
CPU Central Processing Unit
CS Course Sector
CSB Carrier and Side Bands
DAC Digital to Analog Converter
DC Direct Current
DDM Difference in Depth of Modulation
DF Difference Frequency
DL DC-Loop
DS Displacement Sensitivity
DSP Digital Signal Processor
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory
EMC ElectroMagnetic Compatibility
EMI ElectroMagnetic Interference
EPROM Erasable Programmable Read Only
Memory
FFT Fast Fourier Transform
FIFO First-In-First-Out
FPGA Field Programmable Gate Array
GPA Glide Path Power amplifier Assembly
I/F InterFace
I²C Inter Integrated Circuit
IIC Same as I²C
ILS Instrument Landing System
LED Light Emitting Diode
LF Low Frequency
LOC Localizer
LPA Localizer Power amplifier Assembly
LRU Line Replaceable Unit
MCU Monitor Combiner Unit
NAV Navigation signals
NF Near Field
Instruction Manual
PC Personal Computer
PLL Phase Locked Loop
PIR Portable ILS Receiver
© Indra Navia AS Page xix

NORMARC 7000 ILS
RAM Random Access Memory

RF Radio Frequency
RMM Remote Maintenance Monitor
RMS Remote Monitoring System
ROM Read Only Memory
RTC Real Time Clock
SBO Side Bands Only
SC Station Control
SDM Sum in Depth of Modulation
SPA Same Parameter Alarm
SPU Signal Processing Unit
SRAM Static Random Access Memory
STB Standby
STBY Standby
SW SoftWare
TRM Terminator
TX Transmitter
VCO Voltage-Controlled Oscillator
VTCXO Voltage Temperature Compensated
X-tall Oscillator
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page xx

NORMARC 7000 ILS
FIRST AID IN CASE OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

Artificial respiration (mouth-to-mouth) is the recommended technique for use in any case of
electrical shock. It is comparatively simple and produces the best and quickest results when
correctly applied.
Send for medical assistance if possible.
Start without delay but do not touch the victim until the circuit is broken.
1. Break the electrical circuit by switching OFF or, if not possible, PROTECT YOURSELF
with dry insulating material and pull the victim clear of the conductor
2. Make a brief inspection of the mouth and throat and
ensure that they are clear of obvious obstruction
3. Place your hand on his forehead, and pinch his nostrils
together with the thumb and index finger of this hand.Let
this same hand exert pressure on his forehead to main-
tain the backward head tilt and maintain an open airway.
With your other hand, keep your fingertips on the bony
part of the lower jaw near the chin and lift
4. Take a deep breath and place your mouth (in an airtight
seal) around the casualty's mouth.If the injured person is
small, cover both his nose and mouth with your mouth,
sealing your lips against the skin of his face
5. After blowing, turn your head to watch for chest move-
ment, and allow him to exhale passively
6. If the chest does not rise, do the following steps below
and then attempt to ventilate again
• Take corrective action immediately by re-establishing the airway. Make sure that
air is not leaking from around your mouth or out of the casualty's pinched nose
• Reattempt to ventilate
• If the chest still does not rise, take the necessary action to open an obstructed air-
way
NOTE
If the initial attempt to ventilate the casualty is unsuccessful, reposition the casualty's head
and repeat rescue breathing. Improper chin and head positioning is the most common cause
of difficulty with ventilation. If the casualty cannot be ventilated after repositioning the head,
proceed with foreign-body airway obstruction manoeuvres
7. Repeat the procedure 12 to 15 times per minute, till medical aid is arranged
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page xxi

NORMARC 7000 ILS
CAUTIONARY NOTE
Do not give mouth-to-mouth resuscitation during CPR in the presence of toxins such as cya-
nide, hydrogen sulphide, corrosives and organo-phosphates. Ventilate the casualty by using a
face mask or bag/valve/mask assembly.
Avoid mouth-to-mouth resuscitation if there is possibility of transmission of infection between

the victim and the rescuer, such as HIV, Hepatitis-B, Tuberculosis, Shigellosis, Meningococcal
meningitis, Herpes simplex virus and Salmonella. Use an interposition airway device, which
must function effectively in both its resuscitation and protective roles, and be immediately
available at all times.
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page xxii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
WARNING - HEALTH HAZARD

Beryllium Oxide is used internally in the high frequency power transistors. It is used for heat
transfer between the transistor chip and casing and is fully enclosed in the transistor case. In
this form it is harmless. However, if the transistor casing is broken, the oxide may be exposed
and represent a health hazard if touched or inhaled.
Beryllium Oxide dust presents a health hazard unless adequate safety precautions are
taken.
THE HAZARD
The material is highly dangerous in dust form when it might be inhaled or enter a cut or an
area of skin irritation.
If dust is caused by chafing, filing or breakage and is inhaled, a single exposure lasting sec-
onds or minutes can cause injury to skin or muscular membranes severe enough to endanger
life or cause permanent injury. Particles penetrating the skin through wounds or abrasions are
liable to cause chronic ulcerations.
Symptoms of poisoning, indicated by respiratory troubles or cyanosis (grey or blue discolora-

tion of the skin), may develop within a week, or after a period extending to several years.
PRACTICAL PRECAUTIONS
Modules containing components with beryllium oxide are clearly marked on the outside.
These modules shall be handled as special waste when decommissioned.
Spare RF Power transistors, received in the manufacturer’s packing, are clearly identified by
attached information. They should be stored in the original packing and not mixed with other
items. The Beryllium Oxide is encapsulated and components are safe to handle for replace-
ment purposes. Care should be exercised in removing defective items to ensure that they do
not become physically damaged.
Components must not be:

1. Carried loosely in pocket, bag or container with other components where they may rub
together or break and disintegrate into dust
2. Heated excessively (normal soldering is quite safe)
3. Broken open for inspection or in any way scratched by tools
Defective and broken components must not be:

1. Disposed of in containers used for general refuse
2. Thrown into the sea unless the circumstances make it unavoidable, e.g. broken cath-
ode ray tubes
Disposal of components containing Beryllium Oxide is described in the next section.

Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page xxiii

NORMARC 7000 ILS
DISPOSAL
Defective components should be individually wrapped, clearly identified as «DEFEC-

TIVE BERYLLIUM OXIDE COMPONENTS» and returned for subsequent disposal. Such
components, securely packed and suitably identified, may also be returned directly to the
manufacturer when known.
Broken components should be individually wrapped and identified as «BROKEN

BERYLLIUM OXIDE COMPONENTS». They must NOT be sent through the post but must be
returned to a depot by hand.
Defective modules containing components with beryllium oxide should be returned for
repair and any defective RF transistors handled as defective components described above.
Modules that are not repaired should be identified as "Module containing components with
Beryllium Oxide" and handled as special waste.
MEDICAL PRECAUTIONS
If Beryllium Oxide is believed to be on, or to have entered the skin through cuts or abrasions,
the area should be thoroughly washed and treated by normal first-aid methods followed by
subsequent medical inspection.
A doctor should treat suspected inhalation of Beryllium Oxide dust as soon as possible, pref-
erably at a hospital.
WARNING ENERGY HAZARD
High levels of electrical energy are supplied by the AC/DC power supplies and distributed by
the 27VDC supply inside the cabinet. Be careful not to contact the connectors supplying the
27VDC, or any component connected to the 27V DC, with any metallic object while servicing
the cabinet.
Note that to fully remove 27VDC turn off mains AC/DC power supplies/Chargers and isolate
the standby batteries if connected.
Only authorized maintenance personnel shall be given access to and perform maintenance
on the cabinet.
WARNING - This equipment is unintended for installation in a RESTRICTED ACCESS

LOCATION (RAL) only
i.e where both of the following apply:

• access can only be gained by SERVICE PERSONS or by USERS who have been
instructed about the reasons for the restrictions applied to the location and about any
precautions that shall be taken; and
• access is through the use of a TOOL or lock and key, or other means of security, and is
controlled by the authority responsible for the location
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page xxiv

NORMARC 7000 ILS
PROTECTING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT AGAINST
ELECTRO-STATIC DISCHARGE, ESD
This electronic equipment and its spare parts are built from semiconductor components which
are sensitive to ESD. The equipment may be damaged or suffer from reduced performance
and lifetime if improperly handled during servicing and transportation.
WARRANTY
To retain the Indra Navia AS warranty the following precautions must be taken:
• All semiconductor components and modules containing semiconductors shall be han-
dled and transported as ESD-sensitive
HANDLING PROCEDURE
To achieve ESD-protection, the operator shall use a portable static-dissipative field kit contain-
ing dissipative mat, wrist strap and ground cord or equivalent protection connected to same
potential as the equipment, see picture.
• Connect the dissipative mat to the equipment via the
ground cord and connect the wrist strap cord to the
mat
• The operator must wear the wrist-strap before
modules are removed or components touched
• Anytime a module must be laid down, it should be
placed only on the grounded dissipative mat
• All electronic equipment must be properly reinserted
in the rack or protected by placing in ESD-shielding
bags or boxes before the ground cord, wrist strap
cord or wrist strap are removed
Non-conductive objects such as synthetic clothing, Styrofoam coffee cups, cigarette packs,
vinyl work order envelopes or common plastics shall be removed from the work area as they
may cause damage to semiconductor components.
TRANSPORTATION PROCEDURE
Electronic equipment, spare part modules or faulty modules removed from the equipment, to
be returned for repair shall be stored and transported in ESD-shielding bags or equivalent.
The electrostatic shielding package shall not be opened without the operator and work area
being properly protected as stated above.
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page xxv

NORMARC 7000 ILS
SHIPPING PRECAUTIONS
Do not ship the rack or sub-rack assemblies (i.e. transmitter sections) with heavy mod-
ules inserted. All encapsulated modules must be pulled out and packed separately before
shipping.
All modules must be packed in electrostatic conductive (ESD) bags or boxes before shipping.
Modules to be shipped for service must always be identified by module no. and serial
no. See section 1.4, Product Type Numbers for proper identification rules. Use the
assembly level as identifier if assembly consists of one or more modules.
REVISION NUMBERS
Modules used in the system, which have the same type of designation, might in particular
cases have different revision numbers.
This is due to the production of modules in different batches where changes have taken place
from one batch to the next.
New revisions of modules, always replace the old revisions.
Documentation of the latest revision is enclosed in the manual.
Please contact us if information on older revisions of modules are needed for servicing pur-
poses.
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS Page xxvi

SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION
1 Section 1 General Information
1.1 Purpose and scope
The purpose of this document is to provide the reader with sufficient information to understand
how the NORMARC 7000B-series LOC/GP operates and is maintained when used together
with the relevant Antenna System handbook. The handbook also contains equipment specific
information for installation; general installation information is given in the Installation hand-
book.
The handbook is written for personnel with a good prior knowledge of ILS, users should partic-
ipate in a NORMARC ILS training course to get the required training.
The handbook covers both the cold standby and hot standby version of the equipment. Where
relevant, paragraphs are marked cold standby only or hot standby only, or alternatively by the
NORMARC type number.
The corrective maintenance strategy supported is LRU (Line Replaceable Unit) replacement.
Fault isolation to LRU level is supported by the RMM system, minimizing downtime caused by
repairs.
Repair of LRUs require specialized training and equipment, and should be done by
Indra Navia AS or other authorized repair facilities.
1.2 Document overview
Section 1 General Information (this section)
This section contains a general overview of this document, a general description of the ILS
system and a description of the Product Type number system.
Section 2 Technical Description
This section gives a functional description of how the ILS rack operates.
Section 3 Operating Instructions
This section gives instructions for operating the system by the Remote and Local Controls,
and it gives an introduction to using the RMM software.
Section 4 Periodic Maintenance
This section contains periodic maintenance tasks and descriptions.
Section 5 Corrective Maintenance
This section contains procedures for locating and replacing faulty LRUs (modules).
Section 6 Parts List

Instruction Manual
This section contains part lists and part location figures.
73892-I1/Rev.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B
© Indra Navia AS Page 1-1

Section 7 Installation and Initial Set-up
This section contains instructions for mechanical and electrical installation, configuration of
the equipment, and initial adjustment. The configuration and adjustment instructions can also
be used for maintenance purposes.
Section 8 Detailed Technical Description
This section contains detailed technical description and block diagrams for all the modules in
the rack and in the tower.
Section 9 Appendixes
This section contains the following appendixes:
Appendix A: Listing of all monitor and maintenance parameters.
Appendix B: Description of the optional Far Field Monitor system (LOC only).
Appendix C: External Power Supplies.
Appendix D: User Handbook for the RMM Software.
Instruction Manual

1.3 ILS Description
This paragraph gives a description of a typical ILS installation and the NORMARC Localizer
and Glide Path systems.
1.3.1 Introduction
This is an overview of a NORMARC 7000B ILS system.
1.3.2 ILS Overview
A complete Instrument Landing System comprises:

• A LOCALIZER SYSTEM, producing a radio course to furnish lateral guidance to the
airport runway
• A GLIDE PATH SYSTEM, producing a radio course to furnish vertical guidance down
the correct descent angle to the runway
• MARKER BEACONS, to provide accurate radio fixes along the approach course
The layout of a typical ILS airport installation is shown below.
Glide Path Localizer

330 MHz 110 MHz
Marker Beacon
75MHz 3°
HBK547-1
Figure 1-1 Typical ILS installation

Instruction Manual

1.3.3 Localizer
The complete ILS Localizer system comprises:

• A LOC transmitter/monitor cabinet
• An antenna distribution network
• A monitor network
• A LOC antenna array
• Near-field monitor antenna
Figure 1-2 shows the Block diagrams for the Localizer System.
LOCALIZER ANTENNA
ILS LOCALIZER ARRAY
TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER CSB CL
AND ANTENNA
SBO CL
MODULATOR DISTRIBU-
I and II CSB CLR* TION NETW.
SBO CLR*
ILS Localizer
REMOTE CL
MONITOR MONITOR
CONTROL I and II CLR*
NETWORK RUNWAY CL.
UNIT DS
NF
SLAVE
PANEL
24V
BATTERY
RMM
SYSTEM
MONITOR
POWER OUTPUT PROBE
SUPPLY
* CLR SIGNALS N/A on single-frequency equipment
MAINS INPUT HBK204-1

220V/110V AC
Figure 1-2 Localizer Block Diagram
1.3.4 Localizer Description
The antenna array of the ILS localizer transmitter is located on the extension of the centre line
of the instrument runway of an airfield, but is located far enough from the stop end of the run-
way to prevent it being a collision hazard. The localizer antenna radiates a field pattern
directed along the centre line of the runway towards the middle and outer markers. The
antenna also furnish information outside the front course area in the form of full fly-left or full
fly-right indications (CLEARANCE).
All localizer installations transmit a STATION IDENTIFICATION in Morse code at periodic

intervals. This is a 1020 Hz tone that is keyed to form the basic station identifier.The localizer
Instruction Manual
is designed to provide a signal at a minimum distance of 25 miles within +/- 10 degrees, and at
a minimum distance of 17 nautical miles between +/- 10 and +/- 35 degrees from the front
course line. (Refer to ICAO Annex 10 Chapter 3.1.3.3.1).

1.3.5 Glide Path
The complete ILS Glide Path system comprises:

• A GP transmitter/monitor cabinet
• An antenna distribution network
• A monitor network
• A GP antenna array
Figure 1-3 shows the Block diagram for the Glide Path System.
GP
TRANSMITTER
TRANSMITTER
AND CSB CL ANTENNA U
SBO CL DISTRIBUTION
MODULATOR
NETWORK
ILS Localizer I and II CSB CLR*
**
and Glide Path
REMOTE CL
MONITOR MONITOR
CONTROL CLR*
I and II NETWORK
UNIT DS
NF NF
M ***
SLAVE
PANEL
24V
BATTERY
POWER L
SUPPLY
MAINS INPUT
220V/110V AC
* CLR signals only used for 2-frequency systems.
** Antenna distribution network not used for Null Reference.
HBK205-4 *** Middle antenna used for M-Array and Modified M-Array.
GP-BLOCK DIAGRAM
Figure 1-3 Glide Path Block Diagram
1.3.6 Glide Path Description
To shape the glide path signal, ground plane reflection from an area in front of the antenna
array is necessary. The specific requirements to the area are given in the antenna handbook.
The glide path site may be located on either side of the runway, but the most reliable operation
will be obtained if the site is selected on terrain least obstructed by taxi ways, aircraft holding
aprons, parking ramps, buildings, power lines etc. The site should offer the widest area of
smooth ground with possibilities of levelling without excessive physical or economical effort, if
indeed levelling is deemed necessary.
Instruction Manual
The glide path antenna system should be located at a distance of 75-200 m from the runway
centre line. The distance from the runway threshold is a function of several factors upon which
establishment of the optimum operational conditions depend. These factors are:

1. The glide path angle

2. Threshold crossing height requirements
3. Obstruction clearance requirements
4. The slope of the terrain in front of the antenna system
5. The extent of smooth terrain in the site area and beyond the threshold
Instruction Manual

1.4 Product Type Numbers
The NORMARC product numbering system is based on the following three levels:
• System
• Assembly
• Module
Systems have type numbers starting with NORMARC, for example NORMARC 7033. Sys-
tems consist of assemblies, modules and parts.
Assemblies have type numbers consisting of three letters, a three- or four- digit number and a
letter, for example RMA 1822A. RMA is an abbreviation of Remote Maintenance System
Assembly, 1822 is a running number, and the last letter is the variant designator. Assemblies
can consist of assemblies, modules and parts.
Modules have type numbers consisting of two letters, a three- or four- digit number and a let-
ter, for example MO 1820A. MO is an abbreviation of MOnitor, 1820 is a running number, and
the last letter is the variant designator. Modules consist of parts.
Instruction Manual

1.5 Technical Specifications
1.5.1 Localizer Systems NORMARC NORMARC NORMARC NORMARC

7011B 7012B 7013B 7014B
1.5.1.1 Transmitter Dual Dual Dual Dual

Frequency range 108-112 MHz 108-112 MHz 108-112 MHz 108-112 MHz
Frequency tolerance ± 4.0ppm ± 4.0ppm ± 4.0ppm ± 4.0ppm
Output power CSB course 8-25W, adj. 8-25W, adj. 8-25W, adj. 8-25W, adj.
Output power SBO course 1.6W 1.6W 1.6W 1.6W
Output power CSB clear. NA NA Max 25W, adj. Max 25W, adj.
Output power CSB clear. NA NA 1.6W 1.6W
Harmonic radiation 0.5 µW maximum 0.5 µW maximum 0.5 µW maximum 0.5 µW maximum
RF difference frequency (2-frq. only) NA NA 10 kHz ± 2 kHz 10 kHz ± 2 kHz

Spurious 1 µW maximum 1 µW maximum 1 µW maximum 1 µW maximum
Output power stability ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB
Course Sector stability ≤±0.02° ≤±0.02° ≤±0.02° ≤±0.02°
CSB/SBO stability ± 0.3dB / ± 5° ± 0.3dB / ± 5° ± 0.3dB / ± 5° ± 0.3dB / ± 5°
Output impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω 50 Ω 50 Ω
1.5.1.2 Modulator Dual Dual Dual Dual
Modulation depth 90/150 Hz 20% 20% 20% 20%
-adjustable range (each tone) 10-30% 10-30% 10-30% 10-30%
- 90/150 Hz mod stability ± 0.15% ± 0.15% ± 0.15% ± 0.15%
-SDM stability ± 0.3% SDM ± 0.3% SDM ± 0.3% SDM ± 0.3% SDM
DDM stability ± 0.1% DDM ± 0.1% DDM ± 0.1% DDM ± 0.1% DDM
Frequency tolerance ± 0.01% ± 0.01% ± 0.01% ± 0.01%
Total harmonic dist. (90/150 Hz) 1% maximum 1% maximum 1% maximum 1% maximum
Phase locking (90 Hz to 150 Hz) 1° maximum ref. 1° maximum ref. 1° maximum ref. 1° maximum ref.
150Hz 150Hz 150Hz 150Hz
SBO phase adjustment range ± 180° ± 180° ± 180° ± 180°
1.5.1.3 Identity Keyer Dual Dual Dual Dual

Modulation frequency 1020 Hz 1020 Hz 1020 Hz 1020 Hz
Modulation depth 5-15% 5-15% 5-15% 5-15%
adjustable adjustable adjustable adjustable
Stability modulation depth ± 0.1% ± 0.1% ± 0.1% ± 0.1%
Distortion 2% maximum 2% maximum 2% maximum 2% maximum
Speed of identification 7 words/min. 7 words/min. 7 words/min. 7 words/min.
Instruction Manual


7011B 7012B 7013B 7014B
1.5.1.4 Monitoring Dual Dual Dual Dual

Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range
Asymmetrical Asymmetrical Asymmetrical Asymmetrical
limits are possi- limits are possi- limits are possi- limits are possi-
ble ble ble ble
Alarm Functions:
RF Power 1-5 dB 1-5 dB 1-5 dB 1-5 dB
Change of nominal CL ± 4-25 µA ± 4-25 µA ± 4-25 µA ± 4-25 µA
Change of nominal DS from nominal ± 10-50 µA ± 10-50 µA ± 10-50 µA ± 10-50 µA
value
Change of nominal CLR N/A N/A ± 10-60 µA ± 10-60 µA
Change of nominal NF ± 4-25 µA ± 4-25 µA ± 4-25 µA ± 4-25 µA
Change of nominal SDM ± 20% SDM ± 20% SDM ± 20% SDM ± 20% SDM
Difference frequency N/A N/A ± 2-5 kHz ± 2-5 kHz
Total period of radiation out of tolerance/ 0-10 sec./0.1 sec 0-10 sec./0.1 sec 0-10 sec./0.1 sec 0-10 sec./0.1 sec
stability (Time Delay)
Additional NF time delay 0-20 sec. 0-20 sec. 0-20 sec. 0-20 sec.
Line break, ILS-Remote Control (disable
optional)
Identification lost or continuous (optional)
Monitor input levels:
Adjustment range, nominal level: -5 to -34 dBm -5 to -34 dBm -5 to -34 dBm -5 to -34 dBm
AGC range for less than 1% change in 5dB 5dB 5dB 5dB
SDM:
Monitor stability/:
RF power values ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB
DDM values ± 1 µA ± 1 µA ± 1 µA ± 1 µA
SDM values ± 0.5% SDM ± 0.5% SDM ± 0.5% SDM ± 0.5% SDM
Warning functions:
RF power reduction 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit limit limit
Change of nominal CL 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
Change of nominal DS 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
Change of nominal CLR N/A N/A 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Change of nominal NF 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
Change of nominal SDM 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
Main failure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Difference frequency N/A N/A 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Instruction Manual


7011B 7012B 7013B 7014B
1.5.1.5 Hot Stand-by N/A adjustable range N/A adjustable range

Monitoring
Asymmetrical Asymmetrical
limits are limits are
possible possible
Alarm Functions:
RF Power 1-5 dB 1-5 dB
Change of nominal CL ± 4-25 µA ± 4-25 µA
Change of nominal DS from nominal ± 10-50 µA ± 10-50 µA
value
Change of nominal CLR N/A ± 10-60 µA
Change of nominal SDM ± 2-6% SDM ± 2-6% SDM
Difference frequency N/A ± 2-5 kHz
Total period of radiation out of tolerance/ 0-10 sec./0.1 sec 0-10 sec./0.1 sec
Identification lost or continuous optional optional
Adjustment range, nominal level: -5 to -34 dBm -5 to -34 dBm
AGC range for less than 1% change in 5dB 5dB
SDM:
Monitor stability/resolution at nominal lev-
els:
RF power values ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB
DDM values ± 1 µA ± 1 µA
SDM values ± 0.5% SDM ± 0.5% SDM
Warning functions:
RF power reduction 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Change of nominal CL 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Change of nominal DS 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Change of nominal CLR N/A 40-75% of alarm
limit
Change of nominal SDM 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Difference frequency N/A N/A N/A 40-75% of alarm
limit
1.5.1.6 Remote Control

Interface
Either
-Data transmission medium 2-wire line,
600 ohm
-Data modulation serial, QAM
-Transmitter level -10dBm ± 2 dB
-Receiver dynamic range -10dBm to - 34 dB
Instruction Manual
Or
-RS-232 interface in both Local-
izer and Remote Control


7011B 7012B 7013B 7014B
1.5.1.7 Remote
Maintenance and
Monitoring System
PC RMM SW Windows based RMM SW on Windows 7,8, 8.1 and 10
Number of Ports Three serial ports RS232; one local and two remote connections, one local
USB port, one Ethernet port with up to 5 sessions
Security Three level password access
1.5.1.8 Environmental
Characteristics
Operating temperature -10 to +55°C
Storage temperature -30 to +60°C
Operation humidity 95% to +35°C, decreasing linearly to 60% at + 55°C
Storage humidity Up to 80% non-condensing
Operating altitude Up to 5,000m
storage altitude Up to 40,000 feet
Vibration 0.15mm or 19.6m/s2(2g) vertical, 10Hz to 500Hz
1.5.1.9 EMC Characteristics

General specifications for EMC/EMI/ESD 1999/5/EC (R&TTE directive)
1.5.1.10 Mechanical
Characteristics
Dimensions (H x B x D)mm (H x B x D)mm (H x B x D)mm (H x B x D)mm
ILS rack 1020 x 600 x 500 1020 x 600 x 500 1020 x 600 x 500 1020 x 600 x 500
Remote Control 129 x 71 x 170 129 x 71 x 170 129 x 71 x 170 129 x 71 x 170
Slave Panels 129 x 41 x 170 129 x 41 x 170 129 x 41 x 170 129 x 41 x 170
Weight 80 Kg 80 Kg 85 Kg 85 Kg
The ILS rack is wall mounted. The remote control and slave panels fit a
standard 3U (132mm) high 19" sub-rack.
1.5.1.11 Power Supply

External supply Redundant Dual Redundant Redundant Dual Redundant
Input voltage 230V ±20%, 0- 230V ±20%, 0- 230V ±20%, 0- 230V ±20%, 0-
66 Hz 66 Hz 66 Hz 66 Hz
Opt. 120V AC Opt. 120V AC Opt. 120V AC Opt. 120V AC
Output voltage 27.2V 27.2V 27.2V 27.2V
Output power 960W 2x720W 960W 2x720W
ILS Cabinet
Input voltage 22-28V DC 22-28V DC 22-28V DC 22-28V DC
Current consumption Typ. 9A plus Typ. 11A plus Typ. 15A plus Typ. 22A plus
charging charging charging charging
Stand-by battery 24V nominal, 24V nominal, 2x 24V nominal, 24V nominal, 2x
50Ah valve regu- 50Ah valve regu- 90Ah valve regu- 90Ah valve regu-
lated lead-acid lated lead-acid lated lead-acid lated lead-acid
battery recom- battery recom- battery recom- battery recom-
Instruction Manual
mended. Pro- mended. Pro- mended. Pro- mended. Pro-

vides min. 4 vides min. 4 vides min. 4 vides min. 4
hours of opera- hours of opera- hours of opera- hours of opera-
tion tion tion tion

1.5.2 Glide Path Systems NORMARC NORMARC NORMARC NORMARC

7031B 7032B 7033B 7034B
1.5.2.1 Transmitter Dual Dual Dual Dual

Frequency range 328.6-335.4 328.6-335.4 328.6-335.4 328.6-335.4
MHz MHz MHz MHz
Frequency tolerance ± 4.0ppm ± 4.0ppm ± 4.0ppm ± 4.0ppm
Output power CSB Course 3-8W, adj. 3-8W, adj. 3-8W, adj. 3-8W, adj.
Output power SBO Course 0.15-0.8W 0.15-0.8W 0.15-0.8W 0.15-0.8W
Output power CSB Clear. NA NA 0.3-1W, adj. 0.3-1W, adj.
Harmonic radiation 1 µW maximum 1 µW maximum 1 µW maximum 1 µW maximum
Spurious 5 µW maximum 5 µW maximum 5 µW maximum 5 µW maximum

RF difference frequency (2-freq. only) NA NA 10 kHz ± 2 kHz 10 kHz ± 2 kHz
Output power stability ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB
Full sector width range (nom. ±0.24ϴ) 0.5-2.5° 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5 0.5-2.5
CSB/SBO stability ± 0.3dB / ± 5° ± 0.3dB / ± 5° ± 0.3dB / ± 5° ± 0.3dB / ± 5°
Output impedance 50 Ω 50 Ω 50 Ω 50 Ω
1.5.2.2 Modulator: Dual Dual Dual Dual
Course-Line
Modulation depth 90/150 Hz 40% 40% 40% 40%
-adjustable range (each tone) 10-50% 10-50% 10-50% 10-50%
- 90/150 Hz mod stability ± 0.15% ± 0.15% ± 0.15% ± 0.15%
-SDM stability ± 0.3% SDM ± 0.3% SDM ± 0.3% SDM ± 0.3% SDM
DDM stability ± 0.1% DDM ± 0.1% DDM ± 0.1% DDM ± 0.1% DDM
-SDM resolution ±0.01% ±0.01% ±0.01% ±0.01%
DDM resolution ±0.01% ±0.01% ±0.01% ±0.01%
Total harmonic dist. (90/150 Hz) 1% maximum 1% maximum 1% maximum 1% maximum
Phase locking (90 Hz to 150 Hz) 5° maximum ref. 5° maximum ref. 5° maximum ref. 5° maximum ref.
150Hz 150Hz 150Hz 150Hz
SBO phase adjustment range ± 180° ± 180° ± 180° ± 180°
1.5.2.3 Modulator: N/A N/A Dual Dual

Clearance
Modulation depth 80% 80%

90Hz component 20% 20%
150 Hz component 60% 60%
Adjustable range DDM dominance 20-100%, 150 20-100%, 150
Hz Hz
Adjustable range SDM 20-90% 20-90%
Stability ± 0.8% ± 0.8%
Frequency tolerance ± 0.05 Hz ± 0.05 Hz
Total harmonic dist. (90/150 Hz) 1% maximum 1% maximum
Phase locking (90Hz to 150 HZ) 5° maximum ref. 5° maximum ref.
Instruction Manual
150Hz 150Hz


7031B 7032B 7033B 7034B
1.5.2.4 Monitoring Dual Dual Dual Dual

Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range Adjustable range
Asymmetrical Asymmetrical Asymmetrical Asymmetrical
limits are possi- limits are possi- limits are possi- limits are possi-
ble ble ble ble
Alarm Functions:
RF Power 1-5 dB 1-5 dB 1-5 dB 1-5 dB
Change of nominal CL (Glide Path) ± 10-60 µA ± 4-25 µA ± 4-25 µA ± 4-25 µA
Change of nominal DS from nominal ± 10-60 µA ± 10-50 µA ± 10-50 µA ± 10-50 µA
value
Change of nominal CLR N/A N/A ± 10-60 µA ± 10-60 µA
Change of nominal NF ± 10-60 µA ± 10-60 µA ± 10-60 µA ± 10-60 µA
Change of nominal SDM ± 20% SDM ± 20% SDM ± 20% SDM ± 20% SDM
Difference frequency N/A N/A ± 2-5 kHz ± 2-5 kHz
Total period of radiation out of tolerance/ 0-6 sec./0.1 sec 0-10 sec./0.1 sec 0-10 sec./0.1 sec 0-10 sec./0.1 sec
Additional NF time delay 0-20 sec. 0-20 sec. 0-20 sec. 0-20 sec.
Line break, ILS-remote Control (disable
optional)
Adjustment range, nominal level: -5 to -34 dBm -5 to -34 dBm -5 to -34 dBm -5 to -34 dBm
AGC range for <1% change in SDM: 5dB 5dB 5dB 5dB
Monitor stability/-resolution at nominal lev-
els:
RF power values ± 0.3 dB ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB ± 0.2 dB
DDM values ± 1 µA ± 1 µA ± 1 µA ± 1 µA
SDM values ± 1.0% SDM ± 0.5% SDM ± 0.5% SDM ± 0.5% SDM
Warning functions:
RF power reduction 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
Change of nominal CL 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
Change of nominal DS 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
Change of nominal CLR N/A N/A 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Change of nominal NF 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
Change of nominal SDM 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
Main failure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Difference frequency N/A N/A 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Mains failure Yes Yes Yes Yes
Instruction Manual


7031B 7032B 7033B 7034B
1.5.2.5 Hot Stand-by N/A Asymmetrical N/A Asymmetrical

limits are limits are
Monitoring possible possible
Alarm Functions:
RF Power reduction 1-5 dB 1-5 dB
Change of nominal CL ± 10-60 µA ± 10-60 µA
Change of nominal DS from nominal ± 10-60 µA ± 10-60 µA
value
Change of nominal CLR N/A ± 10-60 µA
Change of nominal SDM ± 2-8% SDM ± 2-8% SDM
Difference frequency N/A ± 2-5 kHz
Total period of radiation out of tolerance/ 0-6 sec./0.1 sec 0-6 sec./0.1 sec
Adjustment range, nominal level: -5 to -34 dBm -5 to -34 dBm
AGC range for less than 1% change in 5dB 5dB
SDM:
Monitor stability at nominal levels:
RF power values ± 0.3 dB ± 0.3 dB
DDM values ± 1 µA ± 1 µA
SDM values ± 1% SDM ± 1% SDM
Warning functions:
RF power reduction 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Change of nominal CL 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Change of nominal DS 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Change of nominal CLR N/A 40-75% of alarm
limit
Change of nominal SDM 40-75% of alarm 40-75% of alarm
limit limit
Difference frequency N/A 40-75% of alarm
limit
1.5.2.6 Remote Control

Interface
Either
-Data transmission Medium 2-wire line,
600 ohm
-Data modulation serial, QAM
-Transmitter level -10dBm ± 2 dB
-Receiver dynamic range -10dBm to - 34 dB
Or
-RS-232 interface in both Local-
izer and Remote Control
Instruction Manual


7031B 7032B 7033B 7034B
1.5.2.7 Remote
Maintenance and
Montering System
PC RMM SW Windows based RMM SW on Windows 7,8, 8.1 and 10
Number of Ports Three serial ports RS232; one local and two remote connections, one local
USB port, one Ethernet port with up to 5 sessions
Security Three level password access
1.5.2.8 Environmental
Characteristics
Operating temperature -10 to +55°C
Storage temperature -30 to +60°C
Operation humidity 95% to +35°C, decreasing linearly to 60% at + 55°C
Storage humidity Up to 80%
Operating altitude Up to 5,000m
Storage altitude Up to 40,000 feet
Vibration 0.15mm or 19.6m/s2(2g) vertical, 10Hz to 500Hz
1.5.2.9 EMC Characteristics
General specifications for EMC/EMI/ESD 1999/5/EC (R&TTE directive)
1.5.2.10 Mechanical
Characteristics
Dimensions (H x B x D)mm (H x B x D)mm (H x B x D)mm (H x B x D)mm
ILS rack 1020 x 600 x 500 1020 x 600 x 500 1020 x 600 x 500 1020 x 600 x 500
Remote Control 129 x 71 x 170 129 x 71 x 170 129 x 71 x 170 129 x 71 x 170
Slave Panels 129 x 41 x 170 129 x 41 x 170 129 x 41 x 170 129 x 41 x 170
Weight 85 Kg 85 Kg 85 Kg 85 Kg
The ILS rack is wall mounted. The remote control and slave panels fit a
standard 3U (132mm) high 19" sub-rack.
1.5.2.11 Power Supply

External supply Redundant Dual Redundant Redundant Dual Redundant
Input voltage 230V ±20%, 0- 230V ±20%, 0- 230V ±20%, 0- 230V ±20%, 0-
66 Hz 66 Hz 66 Hz 66 Hz
Opt. 120V AC Opt. 120V AC Opt. 120V AC Opt. 120V AC
Output voltage 27.2V 27.2V 27.2V 27.2V
Output current 25A max 25A max 25A max 25A max
ILS Cabinet
Input voltage 22-28V DC 22-28V DC 22-28V DC 22-28V DC
Current consumption Typ. 7A plus Typ. 9A plus Typ. 9A plus Typ. 11A plus
charging charging charging charging
Output power 960W 2x720W 960W 2x720W
Instruction Manual


7031B 7032B 7033B 7034B
Stand-by battery 24V nominal, 24V nominal, 2x 24V nominal, 24V nominal, 2x
50Ah valve regu- 50Ah valve regu- 90Ah valve regu- 90Ah valve regu-
lated lead-acid lated lead-acid lated lead-acid lated lead-acid
battery recom- battery recom- battery recom- battery recom-
mended. Pro- mended. Pro- mended. Pro- mended. Pro-
vides min. 4 vides min. 4 vides min. 4 vides min. 4
hours of opera- hours of opera- hours of opera- hours of opera-
tion tion tion tion
Instruction Manual

1.6 Physical Organization
1.6.1 Module and Assembly Location
Refer to Section 6 for module location drawings
1.6.2 Service Kit Assembly
The Service Kit Assembly SKA 1229B includes two different extension boards for mainte-
nance operations:
EB 1349B Extension Board - for use with the Power Supply PS 1227, Monitor
MO 1820A, RMS Assembly RMA 1822A, Transmitter Control Assem-
bly TCA 1218C and Low Frequency Generator LF 1576A plug-in
boards.
EB 1245A Extension Board with coax cables - for use with Monitor Front-end MF
1821A and Oscillator OS1706AB plug-in boards.
In addition, the following items are included:

• Static-dissipative work mat and wrist strap to ensure ESD-protected environment when
performing maintenance operations on the equipment
• Torque wrench, screw drivers etc.
1.6.3 Power Supply
An external Power Supply operating at 230V mains input and providing 27V for the operation
is normally supplied with the equipment.
Instruction Manual

1.7 System Description
This chapter gives a functional overview of the NORMARC 70xxB ILS systems.
1.7.1 Overview
The complete ILS electronic system is housed in a compact, wall mounted cabinet. The cabi-
net and the electronics, except for transmitter RF units, are common to the LOC and GP
systems.
Monitor
input Monitor
signals Transmitter
Remote
Control NAV
signals
External
out
sensors Changeover
RMS TX control
Relays
Comm.
ports
Data and
diagnostics
Monitor
input Transmitter
signals Monitor
HBK573-2
Figure 1-4 ILS Block Diagram
The ILS cabinets can be configured for Cat I, Cat II, or Cat III requirements with no basic
changes.
Eight models are available:
NORMARC 7011B Single frequency LOC
NORMARC 7012B Single frequency LOC with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
NORMARC 7013B Two frequency LOC
NORMARC 7014B Two frequency LOC with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
NORMARC 7031B Single frequency GP
NORMARC 7032B Single frequency GP with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
NORMARC 7033B Two frequency GP
NORMARC 7034B Two frequency GP with hot standby monitoring (Cat III)
The system is based on modern technology with extensive Remote Monitoring and Mainte-
Instruction Manual
nance capabilities, and very high reliability and integrity. To meet this objective, the monitor
comparator and station control are based on digital hardware, while the RMS interface is
microprocessor based.

1.7.2 Physical Description
The cabinet contains two sections:

• The electronics card cage
• The transmitter / PA section including changeover relays
The electronics card cage contains the RF oscillators, the LF signal generators, the monitors,
the station control, the RMS processor, and the voltage regulators.
The transmitter / PA section contains the PA blocks including couplers etc. for each output
with the changeover section in the rear and RF outputs mounted on bottom or top.
The cabinet is divided in two parts, with the rear part fixed to a wall, and the front part hinged
to give access to interior of the cabinet.
All external connections are made to the rear part of the cabinet.
1.7.3 Monitors
The ILS has duplicated monitors with inputs for Course Line (CL), Displacement Sensitivity
(DS), Near Field (NF), and Clearance (CLR) (Dual Freq. only). The signals are sampled at the
RF inputs and then processed and filtered by digital hardware. The results for each parameter
is then compared with stored limits in a digital hardware comparator.
Each of the two monitors consists of two modules. For Cat III use, hot standby monitoring can
be added by using one additional monitor and associated RF couplers and combiners.
The design of the monitors ensures a very high integrity due to the use of digital hardware for
the alarm comparators signal processing. In addition, the monitor is checked by automatic
self-tests.
The alarm limits are stored locally in non-volatile memory, and can be updated from the RMS
processor, with a separate hardware write protection to ensure that the integrity is not affected
by the RMS system.
1.7.4 Transmitters
The transmitters are duplicated, either single frequency or dual frequency. Each transmitter
consists of a RF oscillator, a LF generator, and one or two PA blocks (single or dual fre-
quency).
The RF oscillator uses synthesizers for easy frequency changes and simple logistics. The
oscillator has two outputs for use in dual frequency systems.
The LF generator contains the circuits to generate CSB and SBO (90Hz and 150Hz) and key-
ing (1020Hz) modulating signals. It also contains the ident keyer / sequencer and interface for
DME master or slave keying. A digital signal processor generates all signals ensuring very
stable phase and amplitude relations between the modulation signals.
Instruction Manual
All modulation parameters, such as Modulation Balance, Modulation Sum, RF level, SBO
attenuation, SBO phase, Ident code and Ident modulation are controlled by this module. The
values are stored locally in EEPROM and can be updated from the RMS processor with hard-

ware write protection.
The same LF generator is used for single and dual frequency systems.
1.7.5 Transmitter Control
The transmitter control module controls the system dependent on alarms from the monitors
and inputs from the local control, the remote control and, optionally, the RMS. It also gener-
ates status information to the same modules. The local control and status indicators are a part
of the transmitter control module.
All functions in the transmitter control are based on digital hardware to ensure the highest
integrity.
1.7.6 Remote Control
The remote control is used in the tower or in the technical control room. It has indicators for
operating status as well as detailed warnings and an aural alarm device with reset. It can con-
trol equipment on/off and changeover, and has an Access Grant-switch to allow remote con-
trol from the RMS.
The Remote Control is connected to the ILS by one telephone pair cable.
1.7.7 Remote Monitoring System (RMS)
The RMS module contains the system microprocessor. It handles storage and read-out of
monitor parameters, measurements for maintenance and fault finding, and performs fault
analysis to isolate faults to line replaceable modules. It is also used to set monitor limits and
transmitter adjustments.
The RMS handles communication to local and remote RMM computers, and in addition it han-
dles a colour display and keypad for parameter setting and read-out.
1.7.8 Remote Slave Panel
The slave panel is connected to the remote control by a multipair wire. It is intended for use in
the control tower. It has indicators for normal / warning / alarm and has an aural alarm device.
in addition it can turn the equipment on and off, and has an aural alarm reset.
Optionally a slave panel with remote control functionality can be delivered.

Instruction Manual

1.7.9 Remote Maintenance Monitoring (RMM)
The NORMARC 7000B series has a built-in Remote Maintenance Monitoring system. This
system consists of the RMS, remote PC terminals with the RMM program installed, and the
local keyboard/display. Figure 1-5 illustrates the RMM/RMS systems.
Figure 1-5 The NORMARC 7000B series RMM/RMS systems

Instruction Manual
The core of the RMS is a CPU with the RMS core program. The RMS collects measurements
and diagnostic data, and makes them available to the user. The collected information allows
easy and cost effective maintenance, fault finding and routine reporting.

In addition, system settings are distributed and parameter readings are collected via the RMS/
CPU.
External personal computers are used for a user-friendly interface to the RMM system. The
equipment has three serial output ports, an USB port and an Ethernet port typically used to
connect a local PC, a PC in the airport technical equipment room, and a modem for connec-
tion to a central maintenance facility.
The local keypad/display allow readings and control through an LCD display and a seven-but-
ton keypad. This gives access to the RMM functionality without the need for a PC.
1.7.9.1 RMM Access
Access to the RMM system is controlled by multiple hardware and software access controls.
One password is required for each access level, i.e. one password for level 1, two for level 2
and three for level 3. Optional hardware controls may inhibit writing in the upper access levels.
The operations that are permitted to a logged on user depend on the logon access level.
The NORMARC 7000B ILS defines four access levels:
Access Number Allowed operations

level of pass-
words
Level 1 1 Read-out of all measurements and all configuration data, except
user passwords.
Level 2 2 Level 1 operations + turning transmitters and LF signals on/off.
Level 3 3 Level 1 and 2 operations + setting all configuration data, except
user passwords.
MASTER 3 Level 1, 2 and 3 operations + setting/viewing users and pass-
words, setting the ILS real time clock.
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, more than one password must be entered. The
passwords must be separated with a single space.
The user name and password(s) are case-insensitive.
To logon as MASTER, which is a special built-in administrative user, the user name “master”
and all three master passwords must be entered (logon at access levels 1 or 2 with the master
user is therefore not possible). The factory default master passwords are: MASTER1
MASTER2 MASTER3
To logon at other access levels a user account must be first be set up by the master user.
If the master user passwords have been lost, see Ch.7.3.3.
Note that to logon at access level 2 or higher, straps on the TCA board must be set to enable
this. Refer to 7.3.3 for more information about this.
Instruction Manual

1.7.9.1.1 Local Keyboard/Display Functions
Through a menu-based interface all main commands, adjustments and monitor limits are
accessible from the front panel keypad and LCD display. In addition a quick-read function
gives read-out of all main monitor parameters at a glance.
1.7.9.2 Diagnostic functions
The system contains internal measuring points and diagnostic functions to isolate faults to
failed modules. The values measured are referred to as maintenance parameters. Please
refer to Appendix A.
Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual

SECTION 2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
2 Section 2 Technical Description
2.1 Introduction
The NORMARC 7000B-series Instrument Landing System is a fourth generation system fea-
turing extensive remote maintenance and monitoring features and systematic use of modern
electronic components and processors.
Careful analysis has guided the partitioning of the system into analog hardware, digital hard-
ware and software to meet the reliability and integrity objectives as well as easy maintenance
and low cost of ownership.
In the monitor, comparison between monitor measurements and stored monitor limits is per-
formed by digital hardware. Thus safety critical software is avoided in those functions. The fil-
tering functions are performed by a dedicated signal processor running a FFT algorithm, with
the signals sampled after base-band detection.
The transmitter/modulator uses a synthesizer as a RF source. In two-frequency systems a

common reference crystal is used, avoiding drift in difference frequency. The LF and ident sig-
nals and ident keying are generated and controlled by digital circuits.
Local and remote control, and changeover and shut-down functions are performed by digital
hardware.
Software is used for the remote maintenance and monitoring functions, including alarm and
parameter storage, diagnostic functions, transmitter adjustments and change of monitor limits.
Appropriate hardware protection is used to avoid that the software becomes safety critical.
Technology
Most of the modules in the NORMARC 7000-series ILS are based on surface mount compo-
nents on multi-layer boards. This reduces the number of modules, and gives very good EMC/
EMI performance. Most of the digital hardware is contained in field programmable gate arrays
(FPGA), giving very high reliability. The processors used are well proven Texas, Analog
Devices and Intel types. In the RF stages, modern RF power FET transistors are used.
Instruction Manual

Monitor 1 Transmitter 1
Monitor Monitor Monitor LF oscillator

input Frontend MO 1820 LF 1576
Transmitter
signals MF 1821
LPA/GPA
RF oscillator
OS 1706
Remote
Control
NAV
External signals
Connection
sensors RMS TX control Changeover out
Interface
Comm. CI 1748 RMA 1822 TCA 1218 Section
ports
Data and
diagnostics RF oscillator
OS 1706
Monitor Transmitter
Monitor Monitor
Frontend LPA/GPA
input MO 1820 LF oscillator
signals MF 1821
LF 1576
Monitor 2 Transmitter 2
HBK 2216-1
Figure 2-1 ILS Block Diagram
Each block is described separately in section 8.
2.2 Monitors
The monitor electronics main task is to generate alarms if the transmitters or antenna system
fail. The alarm signals are interpreted by the station control section that decides whether to
change transmitter or to shut the ILS signals down. Warning information is treated by the
RMS. The monitor logic can be arranged for a 1 of 2 or 2 of 2 voting for alarms.
The input signals to the monitor are RF signals, Course Line (CL), Displacement Sensitivity
(DS), Near Field antenna (NF) and CLeaRance (CLR-2 freq. only), from the antenna system.
In addition the DC-loop detects failures in the antenna system (open circuit), and an optional
front-end can monitor alarm-generating parameters from a far field monitor. The outputs are
alarm status to the transmitter control section, parameter values to the RMS and DC-loop ref-
erence voltages for the antenna system.
The monitor chain consists of the Monitor Front-end module, MF 1821A, and the Monitor mod-
ule MO 1820A. When connected to a Far Field Monitor (FFM), the Far field monitor Controller
module FC 1927A is added. This chain is duplicated to increase reliability. In hot standby con-
figurations an additional chain monitors the standby transmitter.
The Monitor Front-end module is mainly an AM digital receiver which samples the RF signal
and filters and detects it digitally. It also checks the received frequency against its own local
oscillator. The monitor front-end output consist of digital representations of the demodulated
signals.
The Monitor passes the parameters to the comparators. The comparators generate alarm sig-
nals if the parameters are outside the programmed limits for a period longer than the config-
Instruction Manual
ured alarm delay. Two separate comparator chains are used to increase integrity. If the
parameter(s) returns inside the alarm limits before the alarm delay has run out, the alarm will
be cleared.

The Far field monitor Controller FC 1927A module (option) receives data from the far field
monitor on serial form via the interface module FI 1392A. FFM data are decoded according to
the NORMARC 7720 protocol in a local microprocessor. The FFM parameters are passed on
to the monitor and the RMS, and handled as all other monitor signals, except that the FFM
can be set to give either executive or non-executive alarms.

- &!%" +#

+#
#23

#+-
#
&!%"
#-

,- .

/
#+
#

#+
!"

/-
# + )0

) )1
#

$%

$%$ &"' $(
+3

# ) '*(
+%.
Figure 2-2 Monitor section Block Diagram
2.3 Transmitters
The transmitter section generates the ILS signal with the required RF power levels and modu-
lations levels. The section comprises two identical transmitters, TX 1 and TX 2, where one is
connected to the antenna, while the other is connected to dummy loads, acting as a back-up.
The reference signals in the transmitter section are RF signals from the oscillator OS 1706,
and LF modulation signals (90Hz and 150Hz) from the low frequency generator LF 1576. The
LF 1576 also generates the keyed 1020Hz signal for the LOC Ident. System DC voltages
comes from the Power Supply board PS 1227.
In each transmitter, the RF oscillator has separate outputs for Course and Clearance. These
two channels are offset by 10 kHz for LOC and 15 kHz for GP. The LF Generator also has
independent outputs for Course and Clearance.
The LPA 1580 Localizer Power Amplifier Assembly and the GPA 1581 Glide Path Course
Power Amplifier Assembly each contains two feedback controlled output amplifiers, one for
the CSB signal and one for the SBO signal. GPA 1582 contains one feedback controlled out-
put amplifier for GP clearance.
Each amplifier is controlled by a "Cartesian Loop" feedback. This employs separate I and Q
Instruction Manual
(in-phase and quadrature-phase) modulators, demodulators and integrator stages. The

demodulators are fed from a directional coupler in the amplifier output, and the IQ feedback
loops keeps precise control of output amplitude and phase. The CSB to SBO RF phase is pre-

cisely controlled from 0-360º by the ratio between the SBO I and SBO Q modulating signals,
and the levels of the combined modulation signals accurately controls RF power, modulation
levels and CSB to SBO power ratio.
The Change Over section uses PIN diodes switching to connect the CSB and SBO outputs
from one transmitter to the antenna while the other is connected to dummy loads. The PIN
diodes are controlled by a Coax-control signal coming from the TCA-board.
The block diagrams are shown on the following pages.
I(CSB)
IQ POWER
AMPLIFIER
Q(CSB)
CSB from 2nd

IQ Transmitter
IQ POWER
AMPLIFIER
SBO
SBO
TEST
IQ
TX ON/OFF
LOCALIZER, GLIDE PATH

HBK 2291-2 COURSE TRANSMITTER
Figure 2-3 System Block Diagram of a Localizer/Glide Path Course Transmitter

Instruction Manual

I(CSB)
IQ POWER
AMPLIFIER
Q(CSB)
CSB from 2nd

IQ Transmitter
IQ POWER
AMPLIFIER
SBO
SBO
TEST
IQ
TX ON/OFF
To course transmitter
LOCALIZER
HBK 2292-2 CLEARANCE TRANSMITTER
Figure 2-4 System Block Diagram - Localizer Clearance Transmitter

Instruction Manual

I(CSB)
IQ RF POWER
BUFFER AMPLIFIER
Q(CSB)
CSB from 2nd

IQ Transmitter
TX ON/OFF
HBK 2293-2
GLIDE PATH
CLEARANCE TRANSMITTER
Figure 2-5 System Block Diagram - Glide Path Clearance Transmitter

Instruction Manual

2.4 Transmitter Control
The transmitter control section’s main purpose is to control the transmitters on/off state. This
is done based on alarm inputs from the monitors, inputs from remote control, inputs from local
keyboard (front panel for station control) and inputs from the RMM system.
The station control receives alarm information from the monitors. Based on the alarm status
and the current mode of operation, the station control decides if a changeover/shutdown
should occur. The station control unit also receives user/state inputs from remote control
(example: Interlock) and the RMM system (example: Warning lamp outputs). Configuration
selections on the TC 1216A board also affects the operation of the station control.
TC 1216A Transmitter Control
STATION CONTROL
ALARM
DETECTION
AND ALARM
TX control bus
VOTING
STANDBY TX CONTROL
ALARM
REMOTE
Station control CONTROL
alarm bus INTERFACE
M1
M2 RC bus
CONTROL
STBM CONFIG AND
UART
RC i/f bus
RMS bus
LC 1217C
LOCAL bus
Local Controls
Terminator
alarm bus With
M1 hot standby LEDs
TERMINATOR
M2
Terminator alarm
TERMINATOR
ALARM SHUTDOWN
DETECTION ALARM
UNIT
AND
VOTING
HBK2224-1
Figure 2-6 TCA 1218C Block Diagram
The transmitter control assembly, TCA 1218C consists of the transmitter control (TC) module
TC 1216A and the local control (LC) front panel LC 1217C. See Figure 2-6.
Instruction Manual

The main functions of the TCA 1218C are performed by the station control (SC) part of the
transmitter control (TC). The SC takes care of the normal operating tasks like turning transmit-
ters on/off based on various inputs that may affect the transmitter status. The SC also has a
RMS interface enabling the RMM system to read the status of the SC and to illuminate warn-
ing lamps etc.
The terminator (TRM) part of the TC takes over and shuts the ILS down if the SC is not able to
operate as expected. The TRM shuts down the power to the transmitters approximately 1 sec-
ond after an alarm situation or interlock state has occurred.
The remote control interface processes serial data from/to the remote control. This unit also
detects and reports faults in data transmission with remote control. The data from the remote
control are sent to both SC and TRM.
The Transmitter control unit displays the transmitter status of the ILS. It also provides a user
interface, enabling the user to perform basic operations on the ILS.
Instruction Manual

2.5 CI 1748A Connection Interface
The CI 1748A Connection Interface (CI) module unit provides a connection point for all signals
except RF signal and high current signals into to the ILS cabinet. The CI module is located in
the rear of the ILS cabinet. The CI module is used together with one or two PC 1749 modules
that handles the power input and associated signals.
The CI module is one circuit board with the following blocks.

• DME interface
• Analogue multiplexer
• USB to serial converter
• RS-232 drivers and receivers
• Micro controller
• Modem
• Shift registers
• LEDs
• Configuration
• Connectors
The main task of the CI module is to provide connection points for external signal for the ILS
cabinet. It interfaces the external signals (voltages) to levels that can be handled by the inter-
nal modules in the cabinet.
The Connection Interface also formats serial data to and from the remote control depending
on the configuration. The RC data to/from the TX control is always routed through the micro
controller on the CI module, and then to the internal or external modem. If configured, the
micro controller will include RMM data from the RMS and RC data in the same data stream. If
not configured, the RMM data will be routed to Remote 1. Depending on the configuration dif-
ferent formats on the data and bit rates will be selected.
Instruction Manual

2.6 RCA 1750 Remote Control Assembly
NORMARC
SILENCE
CAN ERR
IDENT
STBY
ALARM MAINT
MON DIS
WARNING STBY ON
AIR
NORMAL PARAM
TX1 ON AIR MAINS 1
TX2 ON AIR MAINS 2
SERVICE LO BATT 1
COMMS LO BATT 2
ON / CHANGE
OFF OVER
GRANT DENY
ACCESS
HBK2049-3
Figure 2-7 RCA 7150B Front Panel
The RCA 1750B Remote Control Assembly consists of the RC 1752A Remote Control board
and RF 1752B Front Panel mounted and connected together.
It provides the user’s interface to the ILS Cabinet from the control tower or technical equip-
ment room. All interconnection is provided by the MB 1753A Backplane that can interface up
to 4 RCA 1750 assemblies.
The Remote Control unit’s purpose is to provide an interface for the ILS cabinet from the con-
trol tower (where normally a Slave Panel is located), or technical equipment room at the air-
port. The remote control provides the ILS cabinet with user inputs and selections and displays
the status of the ILS.
The Remote Control is communicating with the ILS cabinet via a serial link over a telephone
line using an integral modem in the Remote Control, or via an external modem. Inputs from
the front panel switches such as ON/OFF, Changeover and Access Grant and Interlock signal
from an operational runway direction selector are sent to the ILS cabinet (Transmitter Control)
and ILS status and other information is received and displayed on LED indicators or other out-
Instruction Manual
puts.

The remote control system typically comprises the RCA 1750 Remote Control with MB 1753
Backplane described here, and SF 1344, SP 1394 or SP 1754 Slave Panel and IL 1379 or
IL 1380 Interlock Switch module to be located in the control tower. Other special panels/sys-
tems such as Category Status panel (CSU) and Runway Selector Unit (RSU) module can also
be connected.
In addition to providing the control signal interface between the ILS cabinet and the Remote
Control, the RCA 1750 can be configured to operate on protocols that combines the remote
control data and the RMM data for the RMS system over the same serial channel, thus saving
modem and line cost. This protocol is only available when the ILS cabinet is equipped with
Connection Interface CI 1748.
To permit that the RCA 1750 can be used with older types of ILS cabinet, other protocols can
be selected for interface with Connection Interface CI 1748 and Serial Interface SI 1618.
Instruction Manual

2.7 Remote Monitoring System (RMS)
2.7.1 General Description
The Remote Monitoring System consists of a CPU-board located inside the main cabinet, with
several means of collecting data from both inside and outside the equipment. The RMS also
constitutes the operator interface, offering up to three RS 232 interfaces, and the Local Key-
board/Display. The main tasks are:
• Collection of executive monitor parameters and maintenance parameters
• Generation of system warnings
• Maintaining historical storages of all data
• ‘Snap-shot’ of all monitor and maintenance data immediately before alarm occurrence
• Setting of alarm limits and tx parameters
• Fault isolation
• Controlling the Local Keyboard/Display
The RMS SW comprises a resident part located in the ILS. It communicates with the RMM PC
program via dedicated lines or a MODEM. The PC SW is the main operator interface with the
ILS.
Data collection is facilitated in 3 different ways: A parallel high speed data bus offering both
read and write operations, a IIC-standard serial bus, and a set of 24 different ADC channels.
RC
data Ethernet USB
CI 1748 MAIN CABINET
RS232 Line
PC RCA 1750 MODEM
RS232
μC RMA 1822A
LCD / Keyboard
Serial Interface
RS232 Remote 1 CPU

MODEM MODEM
RS232 Remote 2
MODEM MODEM
Interface Circuitry
Channels
data bus
serial bus
Local RS232 Local

Analog
RMS
PC
IIC
Local USB
USB IF
PC
Digital Analog Monitor

and Inputs Data
Analog and
Inputs System
Settings
HBK 2222-1
Figure 2-8 The RMM configuration

Instruction Manual

2.7.2 PC and Modem
The main operator interface is locally or remotely connected personal computers, running
dedicated SW and communicating with the main cabinet resident SW via a dedicated proto-
col. The system facilitates three channels for PC connections. The Local channel can be con-
nected to a local PC by USB or a serial link. Remote channel 1 can be multiplexed with the
remote control data and transmitted to the Remote Control through internal or external leased
line modems. The remote PC can then be connected to the Remote Control shelf. Alterna-
tively, Remote 1 can be separately connected to a PC through external modems or a serial
link. Remote 2 can be connected to a PC through external leased line or dialup modems. In
addition, PCs can be connected via Ethernet. All PC’s can be logged on simultaneously, but
only one of them can have write access at a given point in time.
2.7.3 RMS Data bus
The main operation of the RMS parallel data bus is continuously to collect data from the
Monitor MO 1820A. Additional functions are setting of monitor alarm limits and delays on the
MO 1820A, setting of TX-parameters on LF-generator LF 1576A, and reading of system sta-
tus from the TX Control Assembly TCA 1218C. Writing of warning status to the TCA 1218C is
also done via the RMS data bus.
MO 1820A MO 1820A MO 1820A LF 1576A LF1576A

MON1 MON2 STB MON TX1 TX2 TCA 1218C
RMS Databus
RMA 1822A
HBK 2218-3
Figure 2-9 The RMS Data bus
Instruction Manual

2.7.4 Maintenance Data Collection
In order to facilitate fault isolation and presentation, several analog and digital measuring
points are distributed throughout the system. These points are primarily accessed via the IIC
serial bus. In addition, 24 ADC-channels are read directly into the RMA 1822A board.
LPA1580/ LPA1580/ LPA1580/ LPA1580/

LF 1576A LF 1576A OS 1706A/B OS 1706A/B GPA1581A GPA1582A GPA1581A GPA1582A
TX1 TX2 TX1 TX2 TX1 COU TX1 CLR TX2 COU TX2 CLR
IIC serial bus

RMS bus
RMA 1822A CI 1748A
ADC channels
MO 1820A MO 1820A MO 1820A PS 1227 #1 PS 1227 #2

MF 1821A MF 1821A MF 1821A MON1 MON2 STB MON
MON1 MON2 STB MON
HBK 2219-3
Figure 2-10 The IIC Serial Bus and ADC Channels
The IIC serial bus collects digital status information from MF 1821A, MO 1820A, LF 1576A,
OS 1706 and the CI 1748 connection interface card. 6 of these are user configurable inputs/
outputs. The LF 1576 boards control one additional IIC bus each. These serial buses are used
for data collection and control of TX1 and TX2.
The ADC-channels are mainly used to measure power amplifier current consumptions, as well
as system voltages. These measurements are obtained from the Power Supply boards
PS 1227. In addition system current consumption, as well as several user configurable inputs,
are measured on the CI 1748 board.
2.7.5 Storage Functions
The ILS has flash EEPROM in the RMS subsystem (RMA 1822) board that is used to store
historical data. Four different types of historical data are stored:
Medium time periodic storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters stored
periodically at user specified intervals (see Medium time periodic settings). The storage con-
tains the last 96 samples.
Long time periodic storage: For every day through a 180 days period, the mean value and
standard deviation of all monitor and analogue maintenance parameters are stored.
Warning storage: One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters at the instant when
a warning LED is activated. The 25 last warnings are stored.
Alarm storage: Samples of all monitor and maintenance parameters for a period starting from
Instruction Manual
30s before an alarm occurred and ending with the actual alarm sample. The last seven alarms
are stored in the ILS. Two alarms will be stored in the ILS for each alarm condition that results
in a transmitter changeover that is followed by a shutdown.

Event storage: Stores the last 300 major operational events, including user logins and logouts,
TX on/off operations, alarms and warnings, monitor parameter changes and changes in sys-
tem status.
2.7.6 RMS Events
2.7.6.1 TCA related events
User Description Detailed description

Local/Remote Turned ON (TXx on air) The transmitters was turned on by local
or remote user and TXx is directed to air.
Local/Remote Turned OFF (with main on air) The transmitters was turned off by local
or remote user while the main transmitter
is directed to air. This event is only
reported when in manual mode
Local/Remote Turned OFF (with stby on air) The transmitters was turned off by local
or remote user while the standby trans-
mitter is directed to air. This event is only
reported when in manual mode.
Local/Remote Turned OFF w/integrity check The transmitters was turned off by local
or remote user and the shutdown integrity
check started. This event is only reported
when in auto mode.
Local/Remote Changeover to TXx The transmitter directed to air was
changed to TXx.
Local Main select TXx The main transmitter was changed. This
event is only reported while in auto mode.
System Integrity check: TXFB not 0 The main transmitter was changed. This
event is only reported while in auto mode.
System Integrity check: OSC not off When checking output levels of the RF
oscillators, the RMS detected a valid RF
signal which should not be present in the
current state.
System Integrity check: 27V not off When checking output levels of the RF
oscillators, the RMS detected a valid RF
signal which should not be present in the
current state.
System Integrity check: No RF alarm When checking the CL and CLR RF
measurements from monitor 1 and 2 after
the complete changeover/shutdown
sequence had completed the RMS did
not detect that the monitors did activate
the alarm state when they should.
System Integrity check: Mon dly fail While reading the state of the main and
standby alarm signals (LEDs) on the TCA
the RMS detected the signals not to be in
alarm state at the time set in the “Monitor
Instruction Manual
alarm verification” delay after the forced

changeover/shutdown sequence was
started.


System Shutdown integrity check FAILED Reported if any of the above integrity
check events were reported.
System Shutdown integrity check OK Reported when all integrity checks after a
forced changeover/shutdown sequence
was successful.
System Timeout waiting for force off Internal error in RMS/TCA or communi-
cation error between RCA and TCA
System Shutdown integrity check CAN- A user performed an operation which
CELLED meant the shutdown integrity check could
not be completed.
System RC connection [lost|OK] The TCA reported that the RC communi-
cation link status signal changed state.
System RC error shutdown The transmitters were shutdown due to
error on the RC communication link
Remote TXOFF [active|inactive] The TXOFF input on the remote control
system changed state.
System TXOFF shutdown The transmitters were shutdown due to
activation of the TXOFF input on the
remote control system.
System Alarm changeover to TXx The main transmitter was shutdown due
to alarm situation detected by the moni-
tors or TCA, and TXx was then directed
to air. The event also contains which
monitor parameters that were causing
the changeover. A log of measurements
taken up to 30 seconds before the event
can be downloaded from the ILS (alarm
storage). This event will only be gener-
ated when the system is in AUTO and not
in SERVICE.
System Auto changeover to TXx Same as Alarm changeover event, but
generated when in SERVICE and AUTO.
No alarm log is generated in this case
System Alarm shutdown from TXx The standby transmitter (TXx) was shut-
down due to alarm situation detected by
the monitors or TCA. The event also con-
tains which monitor parameters that were
causing the changeover. A log of meas-
urements taken up to 30 seconds before
the event can be downloaded from the
ILS (alarm storage). This event will only
be generated when the system is in
AUTO and not in SERVICE.
System Auto shutdown from TXx Same as Alarm shutdown event, but gen-
erated when in SERVICE and AUTO. No
alarm log is generated in this case.
System Standby alarm shutdown The standby transmitter was shutdown
due to alarm detected by the standby
Instruction Manual
monitor.
System Terminator alarm [active|inactive] The terminator alarm signal on the TCA
changed state.


System TXC integrity fail [active|inactive] The terminator integrity fail signal on the
TCA changed state.
System Terminator alarm shutdown The “terminator” function on the TCA
turned off the transmitters after alarm.
System Terminator interlock shutdown The “terminator” function on the TCA
turned off the transmitters after interlock
deselect
Remote Interlocked [ON|OFF] The interlock input changed state to
ON=selected or OFF=deselected.
System Interlock shutdown The transmitters was shut down due
interlock input changed to deselected
state.
System Service [ON|OFF] [(TXx on air)] The SERVICE mode of the TCA changed
state. If a transmitter was active then the
transmitter that is directed to air is also
reported.
System Manual mode [ON|OFF] The manual mode (monitor override)
state changed.
Local Switch REMOTE The local/remote switch on the TCA front
panel was set in REMOTE position. May
cause SERVICE to off.
Local Switch WRITE PROTECT The write protect switch was set in the
WRITE PROTECT position. May cause
SERVICE to off
Local Switch INTERLOCK OVERRIDE The interlock override switch was set in
OFF the normal position. May cause SER-
VICE to off.
Remote Switch ACCESS GRANT OFF The access grant switch on the remote
control system was switched off. May
cause SERVICE to off.
Local Switch LOCAL The local/remote switch on the TCA front
panel was set in LOCAL position. Will
cause SERVICE to go on if off.
Local Switch WRITE ENABLE The write protect switch was set in the
WRITE ENABLE position. Will cause
SERVICE to go on if off.
Local Switch INTERLOCK OVERRIDE The interlock override switch was set in
ON the OVERRIDE position. Will cause SER-
VICE to go on if off.
Local Switch ACCESS GRANT ON The access grant switch on the remote
control system was switched on. Will
cause SERVICE to go on if off.
Instruction Manual

2.7.6.2 Power supply related warning events

System Battery low warning Battery voltage monitoring detected low or
[activated|deactivated] restored battery voltage. AND/OR logic
between battery 1 and battery 2 depends
on setting in the lamp mappings window.
System Mains failure warning Mains failure status detected or restored
[activated|deactivated] mains failure. AND/OR logic between
mains 1 and mains 2 depends on setting in
the lamp mappings window.
2.7.6.3 Warning Events
These events are only generated if the system is in auto and normal mode (main normal LED
on).

System MON1/2 parameter warning [acti- Executive MON1 or MON2 parameter
vated|deactivated] warning activated or deactivated (1/2 or 2/
2 voted according to voting setup). Ident
measurements and TST channels not
included in this warning calculation
System STB parameter warning [acti- Standby monitor warning activated or
vated|deactivated] deactivated. TST channels not included in
this warning calculation. Only generated
while in auto, main normal and standby
normal.
System MON1/2 disagree warning [acti- An executive delayed alarm was detected
vated|deactivated] by either MON1 or MON2 but not both.
The “activated” event is generated when
one monitor only is in alarm for at least 500
ms.
System Ident warning [activated|deacti- Executive MON1 or MON2 ident parame-
vated] ter warning activated or deactivated (1/2 or
2/2 voted according to voting setup).
System Maintenance warning [acti- Delayed warning state on one of the main-
vated|deactivated] tenance parameters activated or deacti-
vated
System MONx self test error [acti- TCA detected self test error on MONx
vated|deactivated] data.
Instruction Manual

The following events are generated independently of system auto/manual and alarm/normal

System SC/TRM voted alarm disagree The SC and TRM blocks on the TCA
warning [activated|deactivated] board disagrees about voted delayed
alarm state. The “activated” event is
generated when either SC or TRM are
in alarm for at least 500 ms.
System SC/TRM MONx disagree A delayed alarm was detected by the
warning [activated|deacti- TCA from MONx by either SC or TRM
vated] and not both SC and TRM as required.
The “activated” event is generated
when SC or TRM are in alarm for at
least 500 ms.
2.7.6.4 RMM and local LCD access related events

<Username> Logged in at level x (<Connec- User successfully logged in at access level
tion>) x (x is in range 1 to 3). <Connection> is the
IP address or port of the user connection,
e.g. “Local USB”.
<Username> Logged out from level x (<Con- User successfully logged out. See above
nection>) for <Connection> description. Logout
event is not reported for the local LCD user
for access levels lower than 3.
<Username> Switch forced logout from level x User with name <Username> was auto-
(<Connection >) matically logged out because the current
access level was not allowed after a switch
change (switches LOCAL/REMOTE,
switch WRITE PROTECT/ENABLE, switch
REMOTE ACCESS GRANT). See above
for <Connection> description
<Username> Lost connection logout from level User with name <Username> was auto-
x (<Connection>) matically logged out because no data was
received.
See above for <Connection> description.
<Username> Authentication failure (<Connec- User login failed due to invalid credentials.
tion>)
<Username> <TAGID> changed Configuration for <TAGID> was success-
fully changed. <TAGID> is a short descrip-
tion of the setting or parameter that was
changed
<Username> <TAGID> config update [unspeci- Configuration update failed. “read/write” is
fied|read/write|verification] error reported if a update failure was detected in
Instruction Manual
the read or write access phase of the

update process. “verification” is reported if
detected when comparing the read-back
data after the write to the data written.


<Username> <TCACMD> command Reported when a logged on user sends a
TCA command. <TCACMD> is one of: ON/
OFF, CHANGE OVER, MAIN SELECT,
TX[1|2] [COU|CLR] ON/OFF, MANUAL/
AUTO.
2.7.6.5 Miscellaneous events

System MONx data timeout No data received from the specified moni-
tor for 500 ms
System MONx IntTst: <result> Monitor integrity self-test result.
System Powered [on|off] Reports time for when the cabinet was
powered on or off.
2.7.7 Shutdown Integrity Test
After each turn-off of the equipment when the equipment is not in manual mode, the RMS soft-
ware on the RMA 1822 performs the following integrity tests. All tests, except test 5, are per-
formed 30 seconds after the turn-off command. Test 5 is performed a configurable time after
the turn-off command (see description below).
Test 1: RF OSCILLATOR OUTPUTS
The RMS verifies that the COU and CLR output level maintenance measurements on the OS
boards are below the warning limit.
Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: OSC not off”
Test 2: LPA/GPA 27V POWER SUPPLY
The RMS verifies that the 27V power supply input on each power amplifier assembly is below
2 volt.
Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: 27V not off”
Test 3: MONITOR RF ALARM STATUS (Text in event list)
The RMS verifies that monitor 1 and 2 reports alarm status on the CL RF and the CLR RF
monitor parameters 30 seconds after the turn-off command.
Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: No RF alarm”
Test 4: TXFB
Instruction Manual
The TXFB[3:0] are four internal signals on the TC board. The signals are the feedback of sig-
nals used for turning the RF oscillators on and off.

Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: TXFB not 0”)
Test 5: MONITOR ALARM DELAY
The RMS verifies that the transmitter control has detected alarm from the monitors after a
configurable time after the turn-off command.
The time is configured in the Monitor settings window, on the “Integrity test” tab:
Text in event list in case the test fails: “IntTst: Mon dly fail”
Additional test result reporting:

• If any of the above tests fails the following event will also be stored in the event list:
“Shutdown Intgrt test FAILED”
• If none of the tests fails the event “Shutdown Intgrt test ok” will be stored
• The RMS generates the event “Shutdown Intgrt tst cancelled” if the integrity test is not
executed. This can occur if the user turns the equipment on again after less than 30
seconds
If the parameter warning LED has been configured to show Integrity Failure (ILS settings –
General Setting – System Options tab – “Signal integrity failure on Param LED”) and an
“Shutdown Intgrt test FAILED” occur, the only way to reset the LED is to turn the power of the
system off and back on again.
Instruction Manual

2.8 Power Supply
The system normally uses an external BC 1361 Power Supply operating at 230V AC mains
input and providing 27V DC for the operation of the ILS cabinet and charging of backup batter-
ies.
The cold standby models (NORMARC 7011B/13B/31B/33B) use a power supply with 4 recti-
fier modules, providing up to 40A. The power supply will supply sufficient power even with one
failed rectifier module. In addition one set of backup batteries may be connected to ensure no
break operation in case of mains failure.
MAIN CABINET
Terminator
Alarm PS 1227-1 MODULE CONNECTIONS
V27_CSB_COU_1
A CSB COU
V27_SBO_COU_1 LPA 1580/GPA 1581
A SBO COU
TX 1
V27_CSB_CLR_1
A CSB CLR
V27_SBO_CLR_1 LPA 1580/GPA 1582
A SBO CLR
DC V15P
MF 1821A OS 1706x
DC V MO 1820A CI 1748A
PC 1749A DC V15N
TCA 1218C
RMA 1822A
DC LF 1576A
V
Main DC VDD
LPA 1580/GPA 1581/82
Battery Warning Cabinet
DC
Switch V
DC V8P5P
MF 1821A
DC V OS 1706x
LPA 1580/GPA 1581/82
AC PS 1227-2
A
DC DC
+
- DC
V
DC
DC
V
DC
A DC
V
DC
DC V
V27_CSB_COU_2 CSB COU
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1581
V27_SBO_COU_2
A SBO COU
V27_CSB_CLR_2 CSB CLR TX 2
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1582
V27_SBO_CLR_2
SBO CLR
HBK 2220-1
Figure 2-11 Single Power Supply Functional Diagram Instruction Manual

The hot standby models (NORMARC 7012B/14B/32B/34B) use dual power supplies with 3
rectifier modules each, providing up to 30A for each power supply. The power supply will sup-
ply sufficient power even with one failed rectifier module. In addition two sets of backup batter-
ies may be connected to ensure no break operation in case of mains failure.
MAIN CABINET
Terminator
PC 1749-1 Alarm PS1227-1 MODULE CONNECTIONS
V27_CSB_COU_1 CSB COU
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1581
V27_SBO_COU_1
Battery Warning A SBO COU
TX1
V27_CSB_CLR_1 CSB CLR
A
V27_SBO_CLR_1 LPA 1580/GPA 1582
A SBO CLR
AC
A V15P
DC
DC MF 1821A OS 1706x
+ DC V MO 1820A CI 1748A
- DC V15N
RMA 1822A TCA 1218C
DC
Main
V LF 1576A
DC VDD LPA 1580/GPA 1581/82
Cabinet DC
A Switch V
DC V8P5P
DC
MF 1821A
V OS 1706x
PC 1749-2 LPA 1580/GPA 1581/82
PS1227-2
Battery Warning DC
DC
V
DC
DC V
DC
AC DC
A V
DC DC
+ DC V
- V27_CSB_COU_2 CSB COU
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1581
V27_SBO_COU_2
A SBO COU
TX2
A V27_CSB_CLR_2 CSB CLR
A
LPA 1580/GPA 1582
V27_SBO_CLR_2
A SBO CLR
HBK 2221-1
Figure 2-12 Dual Power Supply Functional Diagram
The 27V is regulated down to 15V, 8.5V and 5V. The transmitter power amplifiers are fed
directly from the 27V supply, while the rest of the system uses the regulated voltages.
Current measurements are done on the power supply, the battery and each power amplifier.
Each regulated voltage is measured in the PS 1227 module. The results are presented to the
user through the RMS system.
When the ILS signals are shut down, the power supply to the power amplifiers are actually
turned off by relays. This is controlled by the terminator alarm signal from the station control
section.
The backup battery is protected against deep discharge with a protection circuit. This circuit
disconnects the battery when the voltage drops below 22V.
A battery warning is given through the RMS system when the primary power supply (supplies)
fails.
Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual

SECTION 3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
3 Section 3 Operating Instructions
3.1 Main Cabinet
3.1.1 Power on/off
The power ON/OFF switches are located on front of the main cabinet. Adjacent to the
switches are GND sockets for connecting wrist strap to ensure ESD-protected environment
when performing maintenance operations.
HBK548-1
GND SOCKETS POWER ON/OFF
Figure 3-1 Power ON/OFF and GND Sockets Location
NOTE:
The upper switch removes power from PS1 and TX1. The lower switch removes power from
PS2 and TX2. To fully remove power turn off the mains power supplies/battery chargers and
isolate the batteries.
Instruction Manual

3.1.2 Local Control Operation
Figure 3-2 LC 1217C Front Panel
3.1.3 Glossary
Changeover The transition from a normal ILS «on» state (Tx to Air = main select
and active main transmitters on air) to a normal ILS «standby on»
state (Tx to Air not equal to main select, and standby transmitters
active on air).
Shutdown The transition from any ILS state to a normal ILS «off» state (Tx to Air
= main select and no active transmitters).
Automatic When the ILS is in automatic mode of operation, any detected

alarm(s) will lead to either CHANGEOVER or SHUTDOWN.
Instruction Manual
Manual When the ILS is in manual mode of operation, the ILS state will not
change if alarm(s) are detected.

Interlock When an ILS is in active interlock mode (the interlock signal is an input
to the remote control), the ILS will turn off all active transmitters and
not allow them to be turned on before the interlock condition is
removed. This signal overrides local/auto mode of operation, but not
local/manual mode of operation.
3.1.4 Push-buttons
ON/OFF
Used to:
• Toggle the ILS transmitters on/off
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in LOCAL position,
and
• The interlock signal is not active if the ILS is configured for interlock
CHANGEOVER
Used to:
• Toggle the coax relay and transmitters between
TX1/TX2 as the active transmitter(s)
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in AUTO position, if the ILS is “ON”, or
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, if the ILS is “OFF”
MAIN SELECT
Used to:
• Toggle between TX1/TX2 as the main transmitter
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position
COURSE TX1/TX2
Used to:
• Toggle the COURSE TX1/TX2 on/off
Instruction Manual

Valid when:
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, and
• The interlock signal is active if the ILS is configured for interlock
CLeaRance TX1/TX2 - 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only
Used to:
• Used to toggle the CLEARANCE TX1/TX2 on/off
Valid when:
• CLEARANCE transmitters are present, and
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, and
• The interlock signal is active if the ILS is configured for interlock
3.1.5 Switches/Switch-locks
LOCAL / REMOTE
Used to:
• Select between LOCAL and REMOTE mode of operation. REMOTE
mode of operation will inhibit use of the local push-buttons (as described
above) and the use of the local serial communication port for entering
RMS access level 2 and 3. LOCAL mode of operation will inhibit use of
the remote control push-buttons (ON/OFF, CHANGEOVER) and the use
of the remote serial communication ports for entering RMS access level 2 and 3. Local
mode will cause a service condition at equipment and alarm at Remote Control
Valid when:
• Always
MANUAL / AUTO
Used to:
• Select between AUTOMATIC and MANUAL mode of operation. Setting
this switch in the manual position will cause a service condition at equip-
ment and alarm at Remote Control
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position
Instruction Manual

WRITE PROTECT
Used to:
• Prevent changing of alarm limits and other ILS parameter adjust-
ments. Setting this switch-lock in vertical/horizontal position will
prevent/not prevent entering of access level 3
Valid when:
• Always
INTERLOCK OVERRIDE
Used to:
• Override the interlock input to allow testing in AUTO mode. Setting
this switch-lock in vertical/horizontal position will prevent/not pre-
vent the user from using the local panel push-buttons (ON/OFF,
CHANGEOVER and the individual TX on/off keys)
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, and
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position
3.1.6 System Status Indications
Service
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
BATT
• Indicate that the ILS is currently in SERVICE mode of opera-
IDENT
tion. This will also set the remote control to alarm state WARNING
MAINT
Activated by:
STBY NORMAL
HBK608-1
• EXTERNAL SERVICE line forced low (by LF1576A set in ser-

vice condition), or
• RMS in access level 2 or 3, or
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch is in LOCAL position, or
• The MANUAL/AUTO switch is in MANUAL position, or
• MANUAL mode entered from RMS, or
• Access grant switch on the Remote Control in grant position
• Interlock override switch in horizontal position
• Mismatch between the WRITE PROTECT switch and configuration strap setting on U6
(strap position 6-15)
Instruction Manual

ALARM
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
BATT
• Indicate that the ILS has detected an alarm condition
IDENT
WARNING
Activated by:
MAINT
STBY NORMAL
• One or more alarms present HBK613-1
WARNING
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning condi-
BATT
tions
IDENT
WARNING
MAINT
Activated by: STBY

HBK614-1
NORMAL
• Warning condition(s) detected by RMS
NORMAL
PARAM SERVICE
Used to: DISAGR

ALARM
BATT
• Indicate that no alarm conditions are detected by the ILS
IDENT
WARNING
MAINT
Activated by:
STBY NORMAL
• No alarms present HBK615-1
STBY ALARM (hot standby only)

SERVICE STAND
BY
Used to: ALARM
• Indicate that the ILS has detected an alarm condition on the

WARNING
standby transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not configured
for hot standby NORMAL
HBK635-1
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and alarm(s) detected on the standby transmitter
STBY WARNING (hot standby only)

SERVICE STAND
BY
Used to: ALARM
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning condi-
tions on the standby transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not
WARNING
configured for hot standby NORMAL
HBK636-1
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and one or more warnings detected by RMS for the standby
transmitter
Instruction Manual

STBY NORMAL (hot standby only)

SERVICE STAND
BY
Used to: ALARM
• Indicate that no alarm conditions are detected by the ILS on

the standby transmitter. Disabled when the ILS is not config-
WARNING
ured for hot standby NORMAL
HBK637-1
Activated by:
• Hot standby configuration and no alarm(s) detected on the standby transmitter
PARAMeter Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that there are one or more monitor parameter warnings present. The warnings
from the monitor 1/monitor 2 are voted before displayed
Activated by:
• One or more monitor parameters outside the warning limits
Monitor DISAGRee
Used to:
• Indicate that monitor 1 and monitor 2 disagrees on which parameters that are in alarm
state
Activated by:
• Difference in monitor 1/monitor 2 alarm detection
BATTery Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS is running using the 27V battery
Activated by:
• Loss of mains for charging the 27V battery
IDENT Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that the ident is faulty for LOC
Activated by:
• Loss of ident Morse coding for LOC
• Ident continuous for LOC
Instruction Manual

MAINTenance Warning
Used to:
• Indicate that one or more of the maintenance parameter warnings detected
Activated by:
• One or more maintenance parameters faulty or outside limits
STandBY transmitter on air
Used to:
• Indicate that coax position directs the standby transmitters to the antenna and the
main transmitters to the dummy load
Activated by:
• Coax position differs from transmitter main select
TX to Air TX1/TX2
Used to: TX TO AIR
• Indicate the position of the coax relay HBK616-2
Activated by:
• Coax relay position
MAIN TX1/TX2
Used to:
• Indicate which transmitter that is defined as main
Activated by:
• Main select position
COUrse TX1/TX2
Used to:
• Indicate the status of the TX1 and TX2 Course transmitters. If illu-
minated the transmitter is on
Activated by:
• Transmitter «on»
CLeaRance TX1/TX2 - 7013B/14B/33B/34B only
Used to:
Instruction Manual
• Indicate the status of the TX1 and TX2 Clearance transmitters. If

illuminated the transmitter is on

Activated by:
• Transmitter «on»
NOTE: The TX1 and TX2 LEDs will remain on for up to 10 seconds with CAT I alarm delays. when the
ILS is turned off in AUTO mode. This is because the TX Control performs a monitor integrity
check. If the check fails the LEDs will stay on for 20-30 seconds, and an “integrity fail” event is
placed in the RMS event list. In MANUAL mode the LEDs are turned Off immediately, and no
integrity check is made.
3.1.7 Local Keyboard/Display Operation
Figure 3-3 KD 1824A Keyboard/Display
3.1.8 The RMS Front Panel
The front panel menu system includes a 320 x 240 graphical colour LCD and seven push-but-
tons. The buttons are used for navigating in the menus displayed on the LCD and to control/
adjust various parameters and settings.
3.1.9 The menu structure

Instruction Manual
There are three main screens:

• The Top Window Screen: Information about the ILS setup and status

• The Parameter Window Screen: Measurement display, organized in sections. It is also

the gate to altering setup and limits through the use of the LCD/Keyboard in various
edit mode screens.
• The Quick Read Screen: Shows monitor parameter measurements only. This screen is
meant as a quick way to view monitor parameters while the user working in the Param-
eter Window Screen
3.1.10 Navigating between screens
To navigate between the main screens use the “QUICK READ”, “BACK” and “OK” buttons.
Button Effect
QUICK READ Toggles between the Quick Read Screen and whatever was shown prior to
entering the Quick Read Screen last.
BACK • If in Quick Read Screen, this works as the QUICK READ-button
• If in Parameter Window Screen, the use of this button will go up one
level in the menu tree, until Top Window Screen is reached.
• If in Top Window Screen this button has no effect
OK • If in Top Window Screen, this button opens the Parameter Window
Screen.
• If in Parameter Window Screen and the cursor is highlighting a branch,
this branch will toggle between open and closes.
• If in Parameter Window Screen and the cursor marks a group of param-
eters, the parameter screen will open for that group.
• If in Parameter Window Screen and the cursors marks a parameter, an
edit window will open. If editing the parameter requires a higher access
level, the user must go through a login screen first.
• If in Quick Read Screen, this button will have no effect
3.1.10.1 The Top Window screen
A typical top-level screen is shown in Figure 3-4. This is the screen that is displayed when the
ILS is powered on. This screen displays information about the ILS configuration, remote con-
trol status and what access level the user currently have.
Instruction Manual
Figure 3-4 Typical top level LCD screen

The information in the Top Window Screen is:
Item Description
NORMARC 27R User defined cabinet name
7033B Equipment configuration:
7011B - 1 freq. LOC
7012B - 1 freq. LOC w/interlock
7013B - 2 freq. LOC
7014B - 2 freq LOC w/interlock
7031B - 1 freq. GP
7032B - 1 freq. GP w/interlock
7033B - 2 freq. GP
7034B - 2 freq GP w/interlock
[GP selected] Information about the interlock status. Either [LOC/GP selected] or [LOC/GP
deselected]
[REMOTE] Information about who controls the ILS. Either [REMOTE] or [LOCAL]
depending on the LOCAL/REMOTE switch on the ILS front panel.
[AUTO] Information about how the ILS operates at the moment. Either [AUTO] or
[MANUAL]
[RC OK] Shows the status of the remote control link. Either [RC OK] or [RC FAIL].
Access level: 1 The access level using the local front panel. The shown access level is in
the range 1-3. The value of the access level determines what the user can
do:
• Level 1: Basic readout functions. Operation at this level has no effect on
the ILS operation
• Level 2: Test and control functions. Operation at this level generates
SERVICE for the ILS, and the user may do non-permanent operative
changes. Switching the REMOTE/LOCAL switch to LOCAL position
gives access level 2.
• Level 3: System configuration and adjustments functions (requires enter-
ing a four character password). Operation at this level generates SER-
VICE for the ILS, and the user may do permanent alterations of the ILS.
Pressing OK on the top level screen brings you to parameter window, which is a tree structure
of the available measurements and configuration for the ILS.
3.1.10.2 The Parameter Window Screen
The parameter window is organized as a top-down tree-structure, starting with the ILS at the
top item, and with branches for the different main sections of the ILS (Monitors/Maintenance/
Transmitters/RMS). Each of these main sections have their own sub trees and sub screens.
Instruction Manual

Figure 3-5 The Parameter window with Monitor branch expanded
Figure 3-5 shows the layout of the parameter window screen. For a full expanded tree see
3.1.11
To navigate in the Parameter Window Screen:

• Use the arrows to move in the tree and in sub screens
• Use the OK-button to expand/collapse branches or to enter view/edit mode for a
parameter or group of parameters
• When editing groups of parameters (i.e. CL), use the arrow keys to navigate to the
parameter to edit
• When editing parameters, use the arrow buttons to select options or entering a
numeric value. Edit mode ends by pressing the OK-button (accept) or the BACK but-
ton (cancel)
• Use the BACK-button to cancel changes if in edit mode
• Use the BACK-button to navigate up on level in the Parameter Tree
3.1.10.3 The Quick Read Screen
The Quick Read screens display the various monitor and maintenance parameter readings.
The screens are entered by stepping through the menu options. The <ESC> key brings the
user back to the last menu-screen again. The parameter readings are continuously updated.
The Quick Read Screen consists of several groups of parameters. Use the left and right arrow
keys to navigate sideways between the Quick Read screens. Entering Quick Read mode will
automatically navigate to the last used Quick Read screen.
Instruction Manual

Figure 3-6 A typical readout screen: DS parameters
3.1.10.4 Editing Mode
To change parameter limits, selecting options and so on, you must go through the Parameter
Window Screen.
First navigate to the parameter you want to change and press OK.
Figure 3-7 Select and press OK to edit
If you need access level 3 and you have not logged in yet, you will be presented for å login
screen where you can enter a correct password. If you already have sufficient access level,
the login screen will be skipped.
Instruction Manual

Figure 3-8 Login menu
To enter level 3, the following must be valid:

• The front panel switch must be in LOCAL position.
• Access grant from the remote control must be active
• The front panel Write Protect switch must be in disabled
If not, you will get one or more error messages when trying to log in.
After this you will enter the edit mode for the highlighted parameter. The screen may consist of
several values, so you may have to navigate to the value you want to change.
Figure 3-9 Edit screen for Mon1 CL DDM
The parameters type defines how you can alter it:

1. Numeric values: Here there may be several values that can be edited like upper/lower
alarm and warning limits. Select the value you want to change with the arrow keys and
Instruction Manual
press enter. The cursors changes and you may use the left/right arrows to position the
cursor on a digit, and alter that digit with the up/down arrow. Note that the numbers are
semi-automatic, meaning that if you press the up-arrow and have the cursor on the

"9"-digit in "0.9", the value will change to "1.0". Press OK when done. Then edit the
other values in the same way. When you are done, navigate to the "Apply"-field and
press OK
2. Options: Here there are two or more options to select from. Navigate to the parameter
and press OK. The options pops up. Select the correct option by using the up/down
arrows and press OK when done
3. IP-address: Same as for numeric values, but there are no semi-automatic update of
the numbers
3.1.11 The Parameter Window tree
The levels of the Parameter Window tree:
NORMARC 70xxB
Monitor
CL
MON1/2/STBY: DDM/SDM/RF
Ident: ID MOD, ID ACT, ID CODE
DS
NF
MON1/2: DDM/SDM/RF
CLR/DF
Ident: ID MOD, ID ACT, ID CODE
DIFF FREQ
FFM
MON1/2: DDM/SDM/RF
DC-loop
MON1/2: DC 1/2/3/4
Ant-tilt
MON1/2: TILT 1/2
Delays
MON1/2/STBY: GEN/NF/IDENT/FFM
Maintenance
Monitor front end
MF1/2/STBY: CL/DS/NF/CLR RF LEVEL/BASEBAND, V8P5, V15P, VINT, FPGA
RESET, FPGA STAT, SEU ERROR
Instruction Manual
Monitor
MON1/2: V5P, V15P, V15N, VINT

CPLD STAT, FPGA STAT, STS ACT, DSP PFO, DSP ERR, DIAG RST, SYNC
ERROR
DS 180HZ, DS 270HZ, DS 300HZ, DS 450HZ,
CLR 180HZ,CLR 270HZ, CLR 300HZ, CLR 450HZ,
CL PHASE, CLR PHASE, CL RF FREQ, CLR RF FREQ,
DS VOICE, DS NOISE, CLR VOICE, CLR NOISE, 30Hz Phase Diff,
FFM Batt, FFM mains fail, FFM comm fail
STBY: V5P, V15P, V15N, VINT
CPLD STAT, FPGA STAT, STS ACT, DSP PFO, DSP ERR, DIAG RST, SYNC
ERROR
DS 180HZ, DS 270HZ, DS 300HZ, DS 450HZ,
CLR 180HZ,CLR 270HZ, CLR 300HZ, CLR 450HZ,
CL PHASE, CLR PHASE, CL RF FREQ, CLR RF FREQ,
DS VOICE, DS NOISE, CLR VOICE, CLR NOISE, 30Hz Phase Diff
Internal CL
DDM, SDF, RF
Transmitter Control
RC Link Status, EPROM PARITY, INTEGRITY
Oscillator
OS1/2: COU OUTPUT LEVEL, COU TUNE VOLT, COU SYNTH LOCK, COU
LOCK DETECT, CLR OUTPUT LEVEL, CLR TUNE VOLT, CLR SYNTH LOCK,
CLR LOCK DETECT
LF-generator
LF1/2: V15N, V15P, V2P5, V3P3, WATCHDOG, DSP EXECUTION, DSP MEM-
ORY, EEPROM PARITY
COU transmitter
TX1/2: V5P, V8P5, V15N, CSB POW FWD, CSB PW REV, SBO POW FWD, SBO
POW REV, CSB I DRIVE, CSB Q DRIVE, SBO I DRIVE, SBO Q DRIVE, TEM-
PERATURE, CSB V27P, SBO V27P, CSB I27P, SBO I27P
CLR transmitter
TX1/2: V5P, V8P5, V15N, CSB POW FWD, CSB PW REV, SBO POW FWD, SBO
POW REV, CSB I DRIVE, CSB Q DRIVE, SBO I DRIVE, SBO Q DRIVE, TEM-
PERATURE, CSB V27P, SBO V27P, CSB I27P, SBO I27P
Power supply
PS1/2: V15N, V5P, V8P5, V15P, BATTERY CURRENT, POWER CURRENT, BAT-
TERY, VOLTAGE, MAINS FAILURE, BATTERY LOW, BATTERY ISOLATED
RMS
RMS V5P, RMS BATTERY
Instruction Manual
Delays
DLY MAINT GEN, DLY MAINT USER

Hours
Operational hours
Transmitters
Test modes
Ident mode
LF1/2: Ident mode
CL test
LF1/2: CL test
DS test
LF1/2: DS test
SBO 90 deg stub
LF1/2: SBO 90 deg. test
150Hz off
LF1/2: 150Hz off
90Hz off
LF1/2: 90Hz off
Voice off
LF1/2: Voice off
Adjustments
COU RF
LF1/2: COU RF
COU SBO level
LF1/2: COU SBO
COU SBO phase
LF1/2: COU SBO Phase
COU DDM
LF1/2: COU DDM
COU SDM
LF1/2: COU SDM
COU 1020Hz level
LF1/2: COU 1020Hz level
COU/CLR LF phase
LF1/2: COU/CR 30Hz phase
CLR RF
LF1/2: CLR RF
Instruction Manual
CLR SBO level

LF1/2: CLR SBO

CLR SBO phase

LF1/2: CLR SBO Phase
CLR DDM
LF1/2: CLR DDM
CLR SDM
LF1/2: CLR SDM
CLR 1020Hz level
LF1/2: CLR 1020Hz level
COU DDM Test1
LF1/2: COU DDM Test1
COU DDM Test2
LF1/2: COU DDM Test2
COU SBO narrow
LF1/2: COU DDM Narrow
COU SBO wide
LF1/2: COU DDM Wide
Ident speaker
LF1/2: Ident
RMS
Serial ports: Local port/Remote 1/Remote 2: bps
Network interface: DHCP, IP address/netmask/gateway, Current IP-address
DDM and RF unit: DDM Unit, RF unit
Clear historical data: General/Operational events, Periodic/Average/Warning/Alarm
logs
System info: SW versions
Login level 3
Instruction Manual

3.1.12 IP address
Network settings
The network settings screen can be found in the parameter window (RMS/Network interface).
If "DHCP on" is selected, the system will acquire an IP address from a DHCP server. If you
instead want to set up a static IP configuration, select "DHCP off" and manually enter the IP
settings. No settings will be permanently stored before pressing "Apply".
On this screen, it is also possible to see the current IP address of the system.
Figure 3-10 RMS Network Interface
Instruction Manual

3.2 Tower Equipment
3.2.1 Remote Control Assembly RCA 1750B
NORMARC
SILENCE
CAN ERR
IDENT
STBY
ALARM MAINT
MON DIS
WARNING STBY ON
AIR
NORMAL PARAM
TX1 ON AIR MAINS 1
TX2 ON AIR MAINS 2
SERVICE LO BATT 1
COMMS LO BATT 2
ON / CHANGE
OFF OVER
GRANT DENY
ACCESS
HBK2049-3
Figure 3-11 RCA 1750B Front Panel
The RCA 1750B Remote Control Assembly is used for both cold standby and hot standby
equipment. It has the following functions:
Display
• ALARM – Alarm/OFF
• NORMAL – Normal/operating
• WARN – general Warning
• STBY ALARM - Standby transmitter Alarm/OFF - Not used on cold standby equipment
• STBY NORMAL - Standby transmitter Normal - Not used on cold standby equipment
• STBY WARN - Standby transmitter Warning - Not used on cold standby equipment
• IDENT - Ident warning (NA for GP)
Instruction Manual
• MAINT - Maintenance parameter warning

• MON DIS - Monitor disagree warning

• STBY ON AIR - Stand-by transmitter operating warning

• MAINS 1 - Mains (charger) failure 1 (Battery operation) warning
• MAINS 2 - Mains (charger) failure 2 (Battery operation) warning
• IDENT - Ident warning (NA for GP)
• LO BATT 1 – Battery 1 low or isolated, warning
• LO BATT 2 – Battery 2 low or isolated, warning - Not used on cold standby equipment
• TX1 ON AIR - TX1 transmitter on-air indication
• TX2 ON AIR - TX2 transmitter on-air indication
• PARAM - Parameter warning (may optionally be used for INTEGRITY - Integrity fault
warning)
• COMMS - Communication link failure from ILS cabinet
• SERVICE – Maintenance mode operation
• CAN ERR – Communication link failure on the CAN bus from the Slave Panel
Control
• ON/OFF - On/off push-button switch
• CHANGE OVER – Transmitter Changeover push-button switch
• SILENCE - Aural alarm reset combined with lamp test, push-button switch
• ACCESS GRANT - RMS access grant toggle switch
Instruction Manual

3.2.2 Slave Panel SP 1754A, SP 1754B
The SP 1754A and SP 1754B panels are used in towers and other locations that need an ILS
status display. The panels can display status for up to 4 navaids, typically LOC, GP and DME
or LOC, GP, MM and OM.
The difference between the two panels is that SP 1754B has indicators for Far Field Monitor
and Category Status for sites where these units are installed.
NORMARC
SERVICE
ALARM ALARM COM
FAILURE
WARN WARN MAINS
FAILURE
NORM NORM RUNWAY
SELECTED
SILENCE
LAMP DIM
ON
OFF
HBK2033-2
Figure 3-12 SP 1754A Slave Panel Front
NORMARC
CAT STATUS
CAT III
FFM CAT II SERVICE
COM
ALARM ALARM CAT I FAILURE
MAINS
WARN WARN LOC
FAILURE
NORM NORM OFF RUNWAY

SELECTED
SILENCE LAMP DIM
ON
OFF
Instruction Manual
HBK2032-2
Figure 3-13 SP 1754B Slave Panel Front


Display
• ALARM - Alarm/OFF (4 total, 1 for each navaid)
• WARN - General Warning (4 total, 1 for each navaid)
• NORMAL - Normal/operating (4 total, 1 for each navaid)
• FFM ALARM - Alarm/OFF (SP 1754B only)
• FFM WARNING - General Warning (SP 1754B only)
• FFM NORMAL - Normal/operating (SP 1754B only)
• CAT III - Runway operates in CAT III (SP 1754B only)
• CAT II - Runway operates in CAT II (SP 1754B only)
• CAT I - Runway operates in CAT I (SP 1754B only)
• LOC - Runway operates with LOC only (SP 1754B only)
• OFF - Runway is off (SP 1754B only)
• SERVICE - One or more of the navaids are in Service (Maintenance) Mode
• COM FAILURE - Communication failure between one or more of the remote controls
and navaids or between the remote controls and the slave panel
• MAINS FAILURE - One or more of the navaids has a mains failure
• RUNWAY SELECTED - The runway is selected by the Interlock switch (if used)
Controls
• ON/OFF - Turns on and off the navaid if enabled (4 total, 1 for each navaid)
• SILENCE - Silences the aural alarm buzzer
• LAMP DIM - Toggles between five LED brightness levels
Instruction Manual

3.2.3 Category Status Unit CSA 1816A (Option)
NORMARC
UPGRADE SILENCE
UPG AVAIL
ILS
FFM STATUS
ALARM CAT III
WARNING CAT II
NORMAL CAT I
LOC
OFF
MAINT
CAT II
CAT I CAT III
COMM
MAINT FAULT
RECIPROCAL
MAX
INDICATION
HBK2073-2
Figure 3-14 CSA 1816A Front Panel
The Category Status Unit is normally used for hot standby Cat III systems to display the status
of the Far Field Monitor and to calculate the category status of the ILS and optionally DME or
Marker Beacons. It has the following functions:
Display
• CAT III - Runway operates in CAT III
• CAT II - Runway operates in CAT II
• CAT I - Runway operates in CAT I
• LOC - Runway operates with LOC only
• OFF - Runway is off
• MAINT - Runway is under maintenance
• COMM FAULT - Failure to received correct remote control message on CAN-bus from
either of LOC/GP RC
• RECIPROCAL - The status of the opposite runway is not positively OFF
• UPG AVAIL - A higher category, based on inputs to the CSU, is available, and may be
activated by pressing the UPGRADE button
Instruction Manual
• FFM ALARM - Status from connected FFM

• FFM WARNING - Status from connected FFM

• FFM ALARM - Status from connected FFM
The colours of the LEDs:

• CAT III, CAT II, CAT I, UPG AVAIL and FFM NORMAL lamps are green
• OFF, MAINT, COMM FAULT, RECIPROCAL are red
• All other LEDs are amber
Control
• UPGRADE - Button to upgrade the operational status of the runway (optional, may be
internally set for automatic upgrade)
• SILENCE - Aural alarm reset combined with lamp test, push-button switch
• MAX INDICATION - Maximum allowed operational runway category, rotary switch
Instruction Manual

3.2.4 Remote Slave Operation
NORMARC ILS
SILENCE
ALARM
WARNING
NORMAL
ON/
OFF
HBK 599-3
Figure 3-15 SF 1344A Front Panel
3.2.4.1 Glossary
INTERLOCK When an ILS is in active interlock mode (the interlock signal is an input
to the remote control), the ILS will turn off all active transmitters and
not allow them to be turned on before the interlock condition is
removed. This signal overrides manual mode of operation.
Instruction Manual

3.2.4.2 Push-buttons
ON/OFF
Used to:
• Toggle the ILS on/off
Valid when:
• The LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in REMOTE position, and
• The interlock signal is not active if the ILS is configured for interlock
SILENCE
Used to:
• Turn off the audio alarm on the slave panel (generated by remote control). Also used
for lamp test (all lamps are illuminated when this push-button is held down)
Valid when:
• Always
3.2.4.3 System Status Indications
ALARM
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected an alarm condition
Activated by:
• One or more alarms present on the ILS, or
• Communication failure with ILS
WARNING
Used to:
• Indicate that the ILS has detected one or more warning conditions
Activated by:
• Warning condition(s) detected by RMS
NORMAL
Used to:
• Indicate that no alarm conditions are detected by the ILS
• Indicate by blinking that the ILS is on when it should be interlocked off
Instruction Manual

Activated by:
• No alarms present, and
• Communication with ILS is OK
• Blinking: ILS is on when the RC interlock input is off
3.2.5 Interlock Switch Operation
The interlock function is used when mutual exclusive operation on different ILS systems is
required. An active interlock for a station shall prevent transmission of ILS signals. The inter-
lock signal is connected to the remote control RC1241 and transmitted to the ILS through the
remote control connection.
The interlock function on the ILS is enabled/disabled from configuration settings on the
TC1216A. The rest of this chapter describes an ILS configured for interlock.
When an active ILS receives an active interlock signal, the ILS performs a shutdown. If the
interlock signal is deactivated, the ILS will automatically be turned on after a 20 second delay
period.
For maintenance purposes, an interlock override function has been implemented. This func-
tion makes it possible to operate the ILS locally in manual mode with an active interlock sig-
nal. To activate the interlock override function the following conditions must be met:
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch must be in LOCAL position,
• AUTO/MANUAL switch must be in MANUAL position and
• INTERLOCK OVERRIDE switch-lock must be set in horizontal position
The remote control will always be set in ALARM state when the interlock override function is
activated.
Instruction Manual

3.3 Remote Maintenance and Monitoring Software
3.3.1 User Manual
Please refer to Appendix D for the user manual.
Instruction Manual

3.4 Startup / shutdown procedures
3.4.1 Startup
This section provides a step-by-step check list for starting the ILS from power-off and verifying
that it is in a normal operating state.
Refer to (Figure 3.1) and (Figure 3.2) for switch and indicator locations and orientation.
Location Item Action Indications
1) Initial Conditions
Power Supply Mains Circuit Break- Verify OFF Power indicators not illumi-
ers nated
Power Supply Load Circuit Break- Verify OFF (none)
ers
Power Supply Battery Circuit Verify OFF (none)
Breakers
Main Cabinet - top Power switches Verify OFF (0) System is powered off.
Local Control Panel LOCAL/REMOTE Verify / set to (none)
switch LOCAL
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Verify / set to MAN- (none)
switch UAL
Local Control Panel WRITE PROTECT Verify / set to vertical (none)
switch position
Local Control Panel INTERLOCK Verify / set to vertical (none)
OVERRIDE switch position
2) Startup sequence
Power Supply Mains Circuit Break- Set to ON Power indicators illuminated
ers
Power Supply Load Circuit Break- Set to ON (none)
ers
Power Supply Battery Circuit Set to ON (none)
Breakers
Main Cabinet (top) Power switches Set to ON (1) System will power up.
Local Keyboard/Display RMS LCD screen Verify ILS is not [SELECTED]
interlocked off
NOTE: If equipment is interlocked off and it is desired to start the system, secure permission to oper-
ate the ILS before proceeding. Then, set the INTERLOCK OVERRIDE switch to the horizontal posi-
tion.
Local Control Panel ON/OFF switch Press Transmitter TX1 COURSE
lampwill illuminate
NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B
Only:
Transmitter TX1 COURSE
and CLR lamp(s) will illumi-
Instruction Manual
nate


3) Normal Indications (during normal operation): Tx1 main , Tx1 to Air
Local Control Panel NORMAL lamp Verify lamp illumi- Green light
nated
Local Control Panel SERVICE lamp Verify lamp illumi- Red light
nated (due to
LOCAL mode of
operation and
INTERLOCK
OVERRIDE if appli-
cable)
Local Control Panel ALARM lamp Verify lamp off (no light)
Local Control Panel Main WARNING Verify lamp off (no light)
lamp
Local Control Panel Individual warning Verify lamps off (no light)
lamps (six)
Local Control Panel MAIN lamp Verify that TX1 lamp Green light
is illuminated
Local Control Panel TX to Air lamp Verify that TX1 lamp Green light
is illuminated
Local Control Panel TX1 Course lamp Verify that TX1 Green light
COURSE lamp is
illuminated
Local Control TX2 Course lamp Verify that TX2 cold standby: No light
COURSE lamp is hot standby: Green light
illuminated .
Local Control TX1 Clearance lamp Verify that TX1 CLR Green light.
lamp is illuminated
Local Control TX2 Clearance lamp Verify that TX2 CLR cold standby: No light
lamp is illuminated hot standby: Green light
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, first Verify Equipment “NORMARC 70XXB” or local
line name name if set.
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, sec- Verify interlock sta- Either blank line, “LOC
ond line tus SELECTED” or “GP
SELECTED” or “Interlock
Override” if interlock has been
manually overridden.
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, third Verify system switch “LOCAL” and “MANUAL”.
line status
Local Keyboard/Display LCD screen, fourth Verify remote control “RC OK”.
line connection
Instruction Manual


4) Tests and verification
Local Control Panel LAMP TEST button Press momentarily All lamps on.
Local Control Panel CHANGEOVER but- Press Verify that TX to Air changes
ton from TX1 to TX2.
Verify that no alarms or warn-
ings other than STBY are pre-
sent.
Local Control Panel CHANGEOVER but- Press Verify that TX to Air and trans-
ton mitter indicators return to orig-
inal state.
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Set to AUTO Verify that LCD third line
switch reads “LOCAL” and “AUTO”.
Local Control Panel LOCAL/REMOTE Set to REMOTE Verify that LCD third line
switch reads “REMOTE” and
“AUTO”.
Verify that transmitters remain
on.
Local Control Panel INTERLOCK Set to vertical posi- Verify that either:
OVERRIDE switch tion No interlock: LCD second line
blank, SERVICE lamp off and
transmitters remain ON.
Interlock, system selected:
LCD second line reads “LOC
SELECTED” or
“GP SELECTED”, SERVICE
lamp off and transmitters
remain ON.
Interlock, system deselected:
LCD second line reads “LOC
DESELECTED” or “GP
DESELECTED” transmitters
go off and SERVICE lamp off.
5) Final check
To verify system in normal status before leaving site, perform the following checks:
Local Control Panel INTERLOCK Verify vertical posi-
OVERRIDE switch tion
Local Control Panel LOCAL/REMOTE Verify REMOTE
switch position
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Verify AUTO posi-
switch tion
Local Control Panel WRITE PROTECT Verify vertical posi-
switch tion
Local Control Panel SERVICE lamp Verify off (no light)
Local Control Panel ALARM lamp Verify off (no light)
Local Control Panel Main WARNING Verify off (no light)
lamp
Local Control Panel NORMAL lamp Verify on Green
Instruction Manual
Local Control Panel Individual warning Verify off (no light)

lamps (six)
Local Control Panel Main lamp Verify TX1 on Green


Local Control Panel TX to air lamp Verify TX1 selected Green
Local Control Panel TX1 COURSE lamp Verify on Green
Local Control Panel TX2 COURSE lamp Verify on cold standby: No light
hot standby: Green light
NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only:
Local Control Panel TX1 CLR lamp Verify on Green
Local Control Panel TX2 CLR lamp Verify on cold standby: No light
hot standby: Green light
3.4.2 Shutdown
1) Normal shutdown
Local Control Panel MANUAL/AUTO Set to MANUAL Service lamp on (red)
switch
Local Control Panel ON/OFF switch Press Transmitters off; alarm and
warning lamps on.
Main cabinet top Main power Set to off (0) System will power off.
switches
Power Supply Mains Circuit Break- Set to OFF Power indicator on rectifiers
ers not illuminated
Power Supply Load Circuit Break- Set to OFF Power indicator on Controller
ers not illuminated
Power Supply Battery Circuit Set to OFF (none)
Breakers
2) Emergency shutdown
Main cabinet top Main power Set to off (0) System will power off.
switches
Note: No harm will be done to the ILS system if the emergency shutdown procedure is used instead
of normal shutdown. It is nevertheless advisable to follow the normal shutdown procedure if
possible.
CAUTION: If the main power is turned off at the shelter circuit breaker panel, the ILS can con-
tinue to operate on battery power. The locally installed circuit breaker for battery power must
be turned OFF to disable battery operation. The main power switches at the top of the cabinet
remove both battery and AC-supplied power from the system, but do not remove the 27 VDC
from the ILS cabinet.
Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual

SECTION 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE
4 Section 4 Periodic Maintenance
4.1 Periodic Maintenance Schedule
The content of and period between procedures given below are Indra Navia AS recommen-
dations under a normal operational environment. The responsible Authority may have
requirements that replaces, modifies or comes in addition to the procedures given below.
4.1.1 On-site Performance Checks
Checks and procedures listed in Table 4-1 are required following initial installation, following
modification, or when corrective maintenance is performed, prior to returning the equipment to
service. Standards and tolerances for the procedure are listed in Table 4-1. The applicable
setup and test procedure is listed for convenient reference. Since most performance checks in
Section 4 are referenced to maintenance procedures, the section containing the maintenance
procedure is listed here.
Performance check and maintenance intervals may be adjusted in accordance with the user’s
policies and they may also be relaxed (except Monitor integrity tests) for equipment that has
shown stability over time.
Performance Check Tolerance or Criteria for Maintenance/ Performance

acceptable performance Check Procedure
Quarterly (CAT I) / Monthly (CAT II/ CAT III) (LOC only)
Field DDM Measurements* - (LOC only) As established for facility 4.2.1.1/4.2.1.3
Quarterly
Observe and record monitor data No alarms or warnings 4.2.1.2
Observe Maintenance Parameters No alarms or warnings 4.2.1.2
Course Structure along runway (CATIII) - (LOC only) As established for facility 4.2.2.1
Six Monthly (CAT II/CAT III) / Annual (CAT I)
Shutdown Integrity Check Changeover/Shutdown 4.2.3.2 or 4.2.3.3
Annual
Full data report TX Parameters and DC supply Record- As established at installation 4.2.4.1
ings and flight inspection
RF Frequency Check 4.2.4.2 4.2.4.2
LF Frequency Check 4.2.4.3 4.2.4.3
Transmitter Waveforms Check As indicated 4.2.4.4
CSB Output Power As established for facility 4.2.4.5
Monitor Frontend ADC Frequency Check 4.2.4.6 4.2.4.6
Periodic Monitor Integrity Check All tests OK 4.2.4.7
Monitor Alarm Limits Check As established for facility 4.2.4.8 or 4.2.4.9
Near Field Monitor Delay As set ±2 sec. 4.2.4.10
20 seconds inhibit -0 +2 sec 4.2.4.11
Battery Maintenance Per battery specifications 4.2.4.12
Harmonic Content 90 and 150 Hz 2% 4.2.4.13
Final Check Visual Inspection 4.2.4.14
* LOC Only:
To check for any changes in the environment; e.g. new airport constructions, snow piles, vege-
Instruction Manual
tation, aircraft parking, car parking. If these factors are under control by formal procedures, field
measurement intervals may be extended to yearly for CAT I if approved by the Authority.
Table 4-1 Periodic Maintenance Checks

4.1.2 Other On-Site Maintenance
Clean and inspect equipment, inspect batteries for corrosion, cracks, and other deterioration,
check and tighten RF and battery connections as required.
Check any installed environmental sensors and other equipment connected to user analog or
digital inputs for proper operation.
Check operation of interlocks, if installed. Check operation of remote controls if installed.
In addition, grass cutting, snow clearing and Flight inspection are parts of the preventive main-
tenances. Refer to Ch. 4.3 for grass cutting and snow removal and Ch. 4.4 for flight checks.
4.1.3 Off-Site Maintenance
All module and circuit board repair is to be performed off site, at the factory or authorized
repair depot. No modules are user-serviceable.
4.2 Periodic Maintenance CAT I, II and III
IMPORTANT:
No adjustments / alignments shall be done during a Periodic Maintenance.
The parameters should be recorded and compared with their nominal values only.
Over some time, the parameters may change due to natural variations. Variations of less than
50% of their alarm limits, are considered normal. If a parameter is changing more than 50% of
it's alarm limit, it is likely due to a discrepancy / degeneration of a module, cable, etc. In this
case, the reason for the discrepancy should be searched for. If the result calls for changing a
module, rephasing of cables, etc., a flight check is often required to verify that parameters are
inside operating tolerances.
All maintenance instruction items apply to CAT I and CAT II installations except where
(CAT III only) is denoted.
All instruction items apply to CAT III installations.
4.2.1 Quarterly Inspections (CAT I) / Monthly inspections (CAT II / CAT III)
Test equipment
• PIR (Portable ILS Receiver) / NAV Analyzer with portable antenna - (LOC Only)
• PC with RMM software and printer
4.2.1.1 Field modulation measurements - (LOC Only)
Note: For Cat III installations this routine presumes that a FFM system is installed.
Instruction Manual
On the established reference marks for Course Line (THR CL), Sector Width (THR 90)) and
(THR 150) carry out modulation measurements, record the values in Table 4-2.

4.2.1.2 Monitor Parameters recordings
Use File/View report/Custom report/Measurements and settings to generate a report of all

measured values and settings.
Generate the report for both transmitters. Change Over may be carried out from the Remote
Control without taking the ILS out of service.
Print or save as required
4.2.1.3 Field DDM measurements (optional procedure) - (LOC Only)
Using the PIR carry out DDM measurements versus azimuth angles according to established
marks in the near field area of the antenna array.
Record in Table 4-3. Also record Tx1 or Tx2 used.
4.2.2 Quarterly Inspections
4.2.2.1 Course Structure along runway (CAT III only) - (LOC Only)
Measure and record the course alignment structure using a vehicle equipped with the PIR and
antenna from the threshold to point E.
For details including output time constants refer to Manual on Testing of Radio Navigation
Aids Volume II paragraph 4.2.2.1.
4.2.3 Six Monthly (CAT II/III) Annual (CAT I)
Test equipment
• Oscilloscope
• Stop watch
• PC with RMM and printer
4.2.3.1 Complete report
Use File/View report/Complete status and configuration report to generate a report of all
measured values and settings. Print or save as required.
Tx1 to antenna. Tx2 active to dummy load.
Compare values with previous recordings
4.2.3.2 Shutdown Integrity Check (Alternative 1)
Can be performed from a remote location if Level 2 access is allowed from a remote RMM PC
Instruction Manual
or the remote control is configured for combined Main Select/Changeover)
NOTE: On systems with Interlock, the rack must be selected (interlocked off) to run the integrity check.

4.2.3.2.1 Check Tx1 Main
Turn the Auto/Manual switch to Auto.
Tx1 shall be selected as main and shall be radiating. The RMM shall be connected and shall
display the Event List.
Push the On-Off button to turn off the equipment. Observe the Event List. The events "Turned
OFF" and approximately 30 sec. later "Intgrt test ok" shall occur.
If the test fails the text "Intgrt test FAILED" will occur.
4.2.3.2.2 Check Tx2 Main
Tx2 shall be selected as main and shall be radiating. Otherwise, repeat the procedure in
4.2.3.2.1
4.2.3.2.3 Store or print result
Use File/View Report/Event List Report to print or store the test result.
4.2.3.3 Shutdown Integrity Check (Alternative 2)
NOTE: On systems with Interlock, the rack must be selected (interlocked off) to run the integrity check.
4.2.3.3.1 False radiation time Tx1 Main
Equipment in mode AUTO. Main Select Tx1. Tx 1 on.

• Remove the CL monitor cable from the monitor input
• Note the time elapsed*) from the signal was removed until Tx2 was shut off
• Record in Table 4-4 line a) the measured delay time from cable removal until the
standby transmitter has switched off. Check that the equipment carries out a change-
over to Tx 2 before shutoff. Record in Table 4-4 line b)
• Open Maintenance measurements window
• Check that Course Transmitter 1, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V
• Check that Clearance Transmitter 1, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V
Reconnect the monitor cable.
4.2.3.3.2 False radiation time Tx2 Main
Equipment in mode AUTO. Main Select Tx2. Tx 2 on.

• Remove the CL monitor cable from the monitor input
• Note the time elapsed*) from the signal was removed until Tx1 was shut off. Check
Instruction Manual
that the equipment carries out a changeover to Tx 1 before shutoff

• Record in Table 4-4 line d) the measured delay time from cable removal until the
standby transmitter has switched off. Check that the equipment carries out a change-

over to Tx 1 before shutoff. Record in Table 4-4 line e)

• Open Maintenance measurements window
• Check that Course Transmitter 2, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V
• Check that Clearance Transmitter 2, +27V CSB and +27V SBO parameters are 0V
Reconnect the monitor cable.
Note:*) Near immediate change if short delays are used.
4.2.4 Annual inspections
Test Equipment
• PC including NM 7000 RMM program
• ILS Field Test Set/ NAV Analyzer, including attenuator 20 dB or 30 dB
• Oscilloscope
• Frequency counter 10 Hz to 350 MHz
• RF Signal generator including calibrated ILS modulation
• Digital voltmeter
• Wattmeter with probe covering - LOC: 108 - 112 MHz, 30 watts
GP: 328 - 336MHz, 10 watts
• Stop watch
4.2.4.1 Tx Parameters and DC Power supply recordings.
Use File/View report to generate a report of all measured values and settings. Print or save as
required.
Tx1 to antenna. Tx2 active to dummy load.
Compare values with previous recordings.
4.2.4.2 RF Frequency check.
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to MANUAL and REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL.
Note: in order to improve channel isolation between TX1 and TX2, the COU/CLR frequency offset is
swapped for OS #2, giving a COU TX2 frequency 5kHz (GP: 7,5kHz) below the channel fre-
quency, and a CLR TX2 frequency 5kHz (GP: 7,5kHz) above the channel frequency
4.2.4.2.1 Course Transmitter Frequency
Switch on Course Tx1.

• Connect the Frequency Counter to CSB COU test connector in the Change Over Sec-
Instruction Manual
tion via a 50 ohm test cable. (Use 50 ohm input port of the counter)
• If necessary switch off the 90 Hz and 150 Hz modulation through the Local Display
and Keyboard or the RMM Program

COU TX1 Nominal frequency: LOC: (Channel frequency + 5kHz) ±0.002%)

GP: (Channel frequency + 7.5kHz) ±0.002%
Repeat the measurements for Course Tx2.
COU TX2 Nominal frequency: LOC: (Channel frequency - 5kHz) ±0.002%)

GP: (Channel frequency - 7.5kHz) ±0.002%
Note: When OS 1706 is used, the TX2 frequency is intentionally shifted an additional 300Hz (LOC) /
900Hz (GP) downwards relative to TX1. This Frequency offset should be maintained if the RF
frequency is adjusted.
Record the frequency readings in Table 4-6.
4.2.4.2.2 Clearance Transmitter Frequency - (NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only)
Switch on Clearance Tx1.

• Connect the Frequency Counter to CSB CLR test connector in the Change Over Sec-
tion via a 50 ohm test cable. (Use 50 ohm input port of the counter)
• If necessary switch off the 90 Hz and 150 Hz modulation through the Local Display
and Keyboard or the RMM Program
CLR TX1 Nominal frequency: LOC: (Channel frequency + 5kHz) ±0.002%)

GP: (Channel frequency + 7.5kHz) ±0.002%
Repeat the measurements for Clearance Tx2.
CLR TX2 Nominal frequency: LOC: (Channel frequency - 5kHz) ±0.002%)

GP: (Channel frequency - 7.5kHz) ±0.002%
Note: When OS 1706 is used, the TX2 frequency is intentionally shifted an additional 300Hz (LOC) /
900Hz (GP) downwards relative to TX1. This Frequency offset should be maintained if the RF
frequency is adjusted.
4.2.4.3 LF Frequency check.
90/150Hz/ (LOC:1020Hz) MODULATION FREQUENCY checks

• Connect the Frequency Counter to CSB test connector on Course Tx1 Section via a
50 ohm test cable. (Use high impedance input port of counter)
• Turn off the 90 Hz modulation, (LOC: and the ident (1020Hz) modulation) for Course
Tx1 through the Local Display and Keyboard or the RMM Program
• Read the 150 Hz frequency. Tolerance ±0.05 Hz
• Turn the 90 Hz modulation on and turn 150 Hz modulation off through the Local Dis-
Instruction Manual
play and Keyboard or the RMM Program


LOC:
• Turn off the 90 Hz modulation and the 150 Hz modulation and set the Ident modulation
to continuous through the Local Display and Keyboard or the RMM Program
Repeat the test for Course Tx2.
4.2.4.4 Transmitter waveforms checks
Carry out the tests outlined in paragraphs 4.2.4.4.1 to 4.2.4.4.5 for COU Tx2
(NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only): CLR Tx1 and CLR Tx2.
Record the results of the outlined tests in Table 4-5.
4.2.4.4.1 SBO waveform checks

• Connect the Oscilloscope to SBO test connector on Course Tx1 Section via 50 ohm
test cable
• Set Oscilloscope input mode to DC
• Check that the waveform resembles the graph below, left
For best signal resolution on the scope, it is advisable to set the oscilloscope in double sweep
rate and FREE RUN trigger mode (“kissing pattern” mode). The two halves of the 30 Hz wave-
form will then overlap and look like one waveform when perfect power balance is achieved.
DEMODULATOR DC OFFSET APPROXI-

DEMODULATED SBO: NORMAL MATELY 5% OF PEAK VOLTAGE
Figure 4-1 SBO Waveforms

Instruction Manual

4.2.4.4.2 CSB waveform check - LF phase

• Connect the Oscilloscope to CSB test connector on Course Tx1 Section via 50 ohm
test cable
• Set the Oscilloscope input mode to DC
Look for the intermediate peaks of the CSB demodulated waveform. Check that the waveform
resembles the graph below (left). The intermediate waveform peaks shall have the same max-
imum and minimum level, indicating 90/150 Hz zero phase start.
DEMODULATED CSB: NORMAL DEMODULATED CSB: 10° LF PHASE ERROR
Figure 4-2 LF phase check
4.2.4.4.3 DDM and SDM check
Switch on Tx1.
• Connect the PIR to the CSB COU test connector on the Change Over Section through
a 20 or 30 dB attenuator
• Use a double shielded 50 ohm coaxial test cable. On the PIR read DDM. The nominal
reading should be 0.0% DDM
• On the PIR read SDM. The nominal reading should be LOC: 40.0% /
GP: 80.0% or the same as the previous reading/ commissioned value
4.2.4.4.4 Ident modulation check (LOC Only)
Switch on Tx1.
• Connect the PIR to the CSB COU test connector on the Change Over Section through
a 20 or 30 dB attenuator
• From the local panel/display or from the RMM program set COU Ident modulation to
CONTINUOUS
• Use a double shielded 50 ohm coaxial test cable. On the PIR read IDENT MOD. The
nominal reading should be 10% MOD, alternatively the same value as previous
Instruction Manual
recording. (If voice modulation is applied the Ident modulation shall be 5% modulation
depth.)

4.2.4.4.5 Voice modulation check (If voice ident is used) (LOC Only)
Switch on Tx1.
• Connect the Oscilloscope to CSB test connector on Course Tx1 Section via 50 ohm
test cable
• From the local panel/display connect the audible transducer by command “Set ident
speaker”
• Listen to the voice message and check that the waveform has a peak amplitude
approximately six times the Ident waveform peak amplitude seen on the oscilloscope
4.2.4.5 CSB output power
a) Course Tx CSB. Switch off the transmitters. Select Tx1 as Main Tx

• Insert the power meter into the Course CSB output path of the Cabinet. Switch on Tx1.
Read and record the Tx1 power in Table 4-8
• Change over to Tx2. Read and record the Tx2 power in Table 4-8
NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only:
b) Clearance Tx CSB. Switch off the transmitters. Select Tx1 as Main Tx.
• Insert the power meter into the Clearance CSB output path of the Cabinet. Switch on
Tx1. Read and record the Tx1 power in Table 4-8
• Change over to Tx2. Read and record the Tx2 power in Table 4-8
4.2.4.6 Monitor Frontend ADC Frequency Check
Connect a frequency counter to J9 (upper SMB connector) on Monitor Frontend and if outside
40Hz measure the frequency. Adjust if necessary the ADC reference clock using R95 (below
J9) to 20 MHz +/- 60 Hz (3 ppm). Repeat for all Monitor Frontend cards. Ref to Figure 8-4.
4.2.4.7 Periodic Monitor Integrity Checks
The periodic monitor integrity check must be run at least at every yearly test. This is neces-
sary in order to keep the integrity level below the figures required by ICAO.
This check can be done in the RMM program from the menu ILS Settings - Monitor Integrity
Check.
Please note that the test must be done in Manual and Normal mode, i.e. transmitters on and
no alarms.
Select All Monitors and push Start Test.

Instruction Manual

After a successful test you will get a confirmation screen as shown below. The result of the
integrity test will also be available in the Event List
Instruction Manual

Note 1:
It's quite normal that the alarm parameters will go in and out of alarm during the test as shown
in the picture below.
Note 2:
This test is not a replacement for the periodic testing of alarm limits.
4.2.4.8 Monitor Alarm Limit checks (Alternative 1)
This procedure uses the transmitter as the signal source. The values in the Flight check win-
dow must have been set to values that shall give alarms previously, preferably during commis-
sioning of the equipment.
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to MANUAL and REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL.

Instruction Manual
Log on with the RMM program in level 2.

Open the Front panel, Monitor measurements and Flight check windows. In the Flight check
window select the Tx tab for the transmitter currently on air. Then select the Alarm limit check
tab.
4.2.4.8.1 CL DDM
Connect a PIR (Portable ILS Receiver) to the test connector CSB COU.
Select CL test signal 1 (90 Hz dominance). Check the following after waiting the time set con-
figured in the GEN delay parameters for MON1 and MON2:
1. Activation of alarm on the CL DDM monitor 1 and 2 measurements (capital letter A
appears)
2. Activation of the main alarm LED in the RMM Front panel window (ignore the corre-
sponding LED on the physical TCA module)
3. DISAGR LED is not activated in Front panel window
4. Verify that the test instrument reading is within ±1 µA (±0.1%DDM) of the monitor read-
ing
Repeat with CL test signal 2
Return to CL test off
4.2.4.8.2 DS DDM
Select DS test Narrow. Check the following after waiting the time configured in the GEN delay
parameters for MON1 and MON2:
1. Activation of alarm on the DS DDM monitor 1 and 2 measurements (capital letter A
appears)
4. Disconnect the DS monitor cable from the feed-through connector in the rear cabinet,
and connect a PIR to the DS Monitor input. Verify that the test instrument reading
(measured DS DDM) is within ±2 µA (±0.2%DDM) of the monitor reading. Use the for-
mula (displayed DS DDM + DS DDM nominal - displayed CL DDM) to get the meas-
ured DDM value. Reconnect the DS monitor cable
Repeat with DS test Wide.
Return to DS test off.
4.2.4.8.3 CLR DDM (NM 7013B-7014B Only)
Select CLR test Wide. Check the following after waiting the time configured in the GEN delay
parameters for MON1 and MON2:
Instruction Manual
1. Activation of alarm on the CLR DDM monitor 1 and 2 measurements (capital letter A
appears)

4. Disconnect the CLR monitor cable from the feed-through connector in the rear cabinet,
and connect a PIR to the CLR Monitor input. Verify that the test instrument reading
(measured CLR DDM) is within ±2 µA / (±0.2%DDM) of the monitor reading. Use the
formula (displayed CLR DDM + CLR DDM nominal) to get the measured DDM value
Reconnect the CLR monitor cable.
Return to CLR test off.
4.2.4.8.4 CL RF alarm
Select Test RF attenuation COU. Check the following after waiting the time configured in the
GEN delay parameters for MON1 and MON2:
1. Activation of alarm on the CL RF monitor 1 and 2 measurements (capital letter A
appears)
Deselect Test RF attenuation COU
4.2.4.8.5 CLR RF alarm (NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only)
Select Test RF attenuation CLR. Check the following after waiting the time configured in the
GEN delay parameters for MON1 and MON2:
1. Activation of alarm on the CLR RF monitor 1 and 2 measurements (capital letter A
appears)
Deselect Test RF attenuation CLR
4.2.4.9 Monitor Alarm Limit checks. (Alternative 2)
After completion and recording of the alarm parameters into Table 4-9, compare and check
that the values are the same as in the previous records.
External RF Signal Generator applied as signal source.
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to MANUAL, the REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL and

MAIN SELECT to Tx1.
Instruction Manual
Switch on Course Tx1 (NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B only): and Clearance Tx1.
Check both Monitor 1 and Monitor 2


Open the Monitor measurement and Front panel windows in the RMM program.
NOTE: If a calibrated signal generator is used, DDM, SDM and RF values read on the generator
may be used instead of readings from a PIR (Portable ILS Receiver).
4.2.4.9.1 CL DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the CL input connector in the back of the
cabinet.(Disconnect first the signal cable from the Monitor network). Adjust the signal to the
same RF level and frequency as the normal signal applied to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: 0.0µA / 0.0%DDM, LOC: 40.0%SDM / GP: 80.0%SDM.
Verify modulation setting (DDM, SDM) by checking the test signal with the PIR.
Use the RMM Program to display the measured values for CL DDM.
• Change DDM from the generator slowly towards 150 Hz dominance until a point where
the letter a or A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is
shown beside the measured parameter for Monitor 1 and Monitor 2. The difference
between Monitor 1 and Monitor 2 should be less than 0.2µA / 0.02%DDM
• Check the following after waiting the time configured in the GEN delay parameters for
MON1 and MON2:
Activation of the main alarm LED in the RMM Front panel window (ignore the cor-
responding LED on the physical TCA module)
DISAGR LED is not activated in Front panel window
• Check the new generator DDM value with the PIR
• Record in Table 4-9 line a)
shown beside the measured parameters
MON1 and MON2:
• Record in Table 4-9 line aa)
• Adjust DDM value back to 0.0µA / 0.0%DDM
4.2.4.9.2 CL SDM ALARM
The test setup is the same as in 4.2.4.9.1

Instruction Manual
Use the RMM Program to display the measured values for CL SDM
• Increase SDM from the generator slowly until a point where the letter a or A (indicates
that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown beside the mea-

sured parameters for Monitor 1 and Monitor 2. The difference should be less than
0.2%SDM.
MON1 and MON2:
DISAGR LED is not activated in "Front panel" window
• Check the new generator SDM value with the PIR
• Record in Table 4-9 line b)
• Decrease SDM from the generator slowly until a point where the letter a or A (indicates
0.2%SDM.
MON1 and MON2:
• Record in Table 4-9 line bb)
• Adjust SDM value back to 40.0%SDM / 80%SDM
4.2.4.9.3 CL RF ALARM
Use the RMM Program to display the measured values for CL RF.
• Decrease RF from the generator slowly until a point where the letter a or A (indicates
sured parameters for Monitor 1 and Monitor 2. The difference should be less than 0.1
dB
MON1 and MON2:
• Record the RF level reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line c)
4.2.4.9.4 DS DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the DS input connector in the back of the
Instruction Manual

Modulation shall be: LOC: 150µA / 15.5%DDM, 40.0%SDM /

GP: 150µA / 17.5%DDM, 80.0%SDM.
Use the RMM Program to display the measured values for DS DDM.
• Increase DDM from the generator slowly above nominal value until a point where the
letter a or A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is
shown beside the measured parameters for Monitor 1 and Monitor 2. The difference
MON1 and MON2:
• Record in Table 4-9 line d)
• Decrease DDM from the generator slowly below nominal value until a point where the
MON1 and MON2:
• Record in Table 4-9 line dd)
4.2.4.9.5 NF DDM ALARM
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the NF input connector in the back of the
cabinet.(Disconnect first the signal cable from the Near Field Antenna). Adjust the signal to
the same RF level and frequency as the normal signal applied to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: 0.0µA% / 0.0%DDM, LOC: 40.0%SDM/ GP: 80.0%SDM.
Use the RMM Program to display the measured values for NF DDM
the letter a (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is
Instruction Manual

• Check the following after waiting the time configured in the NF delay parameters for
MON1 and MON2:
• Record in Table 4-9 line e)
the letter a (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is
• Check the following after waiting the time configured in the NF delay parameters for
MON1 and MON2:
• Record in Table 4-9 line ee)
4.2.4.9.6 CLR DDM ALARM - (NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only)
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the CLR input connector in the back of the
Modulation shall be: Same as commissioned values DDM and SDM from CLR output of Mon-
itor network.
Verify modulation setting (DDM, SDM) by checking the test signal with the PIR
Use the RMM Program to display the measured values for CLR DDM.
• Increase DDM from the generator slowly from nominal value until a point where the let-
ter a or A (indicates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown
beside the measured parameters for Monitor 1 and Monitor 2. The difference
MON1 and MON2:
Instruction Manual
• Record in Table 4-9 line f)

• Decrease DDM from the generator slowly from nominal value until a point where the

MON1 and MON2:
• Record in Table 4-9 line ff)
• Adjust DDM value back to the nominal value you started with
4.2.4.9.7 CLR SDM ALARM - (NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only)
Use the RMM Program to display the measured values for CLR SDM.
0.2%SDM.
MON1 and MON2:
• Record in Table 4-9 line g)
0.2% SDM.
MON1 and MON2:
• Record in Table 4-9 line gg)
• Adjust SDM value back to the nominal value you started with
Instruction Manual

4.2.4.9.8 CLR RF ALARM - (NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only)
Use the RMM Program to display the measured values for CL RF.
• Decrease slowly RF level on the generator until a point where the letter a or A (indi-
cates that monitor has an ALARM for the displayed parameter) is shown beside the
measured parameter for Monitor 1 and Monitor 2. The difference should be less than
0.1 dB
MON1 and MON2:
• Record the RF reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line h)
4.2.4.9.9 STB CL DDM ALARM (NM 7012B/14B/32B/34B only)
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the STB CL channel. This is easiest done
by disconnecting the cable on connector J8 on the Course CO 1837B / CO 1838B (the right
one seen from behind) at the back of the cabinet, connect a QMA-N adapter to the cable and
connect the Signal Generator to the cable. Adjust the signal to the same RF level and fre-
quency as the normal signal applied to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: 0.0µA% / 0.0%DDM, LOC: 40.0%SDM / GP: 80.0%SDM.
Use the RMM Program to display the measured values for STB CL DDM.
• Increase DDM from the generator slowly above nominal value until a point where the
shown beside the measured parameter for STB MON
• Record in Table 4-9 line if)
• Decrease DDM from the generator slowly below nominal value until a point where the
• Record in Table 4-9 line iiff)
4.2.4.9.10 STB CL SDM ALARM (NM 7012B/14B/32B/34B only))

Instruction Manual
Use the Local Display and Keyboard or the RMM Program to display the measured values
for STB CL SDM

sured parameter for STB MON
• Record in Table 4-9 line jg)
sured parameter for STB MON
• Record in Table 4-9 line jjgg)
4.2.4.9.11 STB CL RF ALARM (NM 7012B/14B/32B/34B only)
for STB CL RF.
measured parameter for STB MON
• Record the RF level reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line kh)
4.2.4.9.12 STB DS DMM ALARM (NM 7012B/14B/32B/34B only)
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the STB DS input connector. This is easi-
est done by disconnecting the cable on connector J10 on the Course CO 1837B / CO 1838B
(the right one seen from behind) at the back of the cabinet, connect a QMA-N adapter to the
cable and connect the Signal Generator to the cable. Adjust the signal to the same RF level
and frequency as the normal signal applied to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: LOC: 150µA / 15,5%DDM, 40.0%SDM /

GP: 150µA / 17,5%DDM, 80.0%SDM
for DS DDM.
• Record in Table 4-9 line li)
Instruction Manual

• Record in Table 4-9 line llii)

• Adjust DDM value back to LOC: 150µA / 15,5%DDM, GP: 150µA / 17,5%DDM
4.2.4.9.13 STB CLR DDM ALARM (NM 7014B/34B Only)
Apply a test signal from the RF Signal Generator to the STB CLR input.
On LOC this is easiest done by disconnecting the cable on connector J10 on the CLR
CO 1837B (the left one seen from behind) at the back of the cabinet.
On GP this is easiest done by disconnecting the cable on connector J8 on the CLR CO 1838C
(the left one seen from behind) at the back of the cabinet.
Connect a QMA-N adapter to the cable that was loosened and connect the Signal Generator
to the cable. Adjust the signal to the same RF level and frequency as the normal signal
applied to the monitor.
Modulation shall be: the DDM that gives a STB CLR DDM reading of 0µA / 0%DDM,
LOC: 40.0%SDM / GP: 80.0%SDM.
for CL DDM.
shown beside the measured parameter for Standby monitor
• Record in Table 4-9 line m)
shown beside the measured parameter for Standby monitor
• Record in Table 4-9 line mm)
• Adjust DDM value back to the value that gives 0µA / 0%DDM in the monitor
4.2.4.9.14 STB CLR SDM ALARM (NM 7014B/34B Only)
for STB CLR SDM
sured parameter for Standby monitor
Instruction Manual

• Record in Table 4-9 line n)

sured parameter for Standby monitor
• Record in Table 4-9 line nn)
4.2.4.9.15 STB CLR RF ALARM (NM 7014B/34B Only)
for STB CL RF.
measured parameter for Standby monitor
• Record the RF level reading at alarm point in Table 4-9 line o)
4.2.4.10 Near Field Monitor delay
Set the AUTOMATIC/MANUAL switch to AUTOMATIC, the REMOTE/LOCAL to LOCAL and

MAIN SELECT to Tx1.
Switch on Course Tx1 and Clearance Tx1.
System Status Indications should be NORMAL and SERVICE
Make an alarm by removing the NF cable to the Cabinet. After the specified delay, the trans-
mitter shall change to Tx2, then after the same time lapse Tx2 shall shut down.
Record in Table 4-10 line a) the measured delay time from cable removal until the standby
transmitter has switched off.
4.2.4.11 20 seconds inhibit
After shutdown check that an immediate attempted restart of a transmitter is inhibited at least
20 seconds from the time the standby Tx is shut off.
Record in Table 4-10 line b) the measured time lapse from the standby transmitter has
switched off until the main transmitter is again radiating to the antenna.
Instruction Manual

4.2.4.12 Battery maintenance
For hot standby equipment, check both battery banks.
Check with digital voltmeter that the voltage across the battery terminals is approximately 26.6
Vdc. Record in Table 4-11 line a) the measured voltage.
Switch off the mains 220 V. After approximately 10 minutes battery operation with transmitter
to air check that the voltage across the battery terminals is not less than 23 V. Record in Table
4-11 line b) the voltage.
Switch back to mains 220 V. After 24 hours check that the battery terminal voltage is again
back approximately 26.6 Vdc. Record in Table 4-11 line c) the voltage. The 26,6 V can be
monitored from the RMM facility.
4.2.4.13 Harmonic content 90 and 150 Hz
Due to the construction principle of the LF tone generator, such checks (Annex 10 3.1.3.5.3 d/
e and 3.1.5.5.2 d/e) are done as a part of the system test in the factory, and are not required
by the equipment manufacturer as a Periodic Maintenance.
However, if such checks are required by the authority, the harmonic content can be measured
for each transmitter using a detector and a wave analyzer. The detected signal is feeding the
wave analyzer from which a value is obtained on a root mean square (RMS) calculation basis.
Other instruments as distortion factor meter or NAV Analyzer can also be used.
A third way to measure the harmonic is to use the built in measurements of the monitor. The
2nd and 3rd harmonics of the 90 and 150 Hz tones are measured by the monitor MO 1820A.
The measurements are listed in the RMM program and are only visible in MANUAL mode with
the standby transmitters OFF. The monitor measures the harmonic content on the DS and
CLR signals, which are a combination of CSB and SBO.
Instruction Manual

4.2.4.14 Final check
Check that all electrical contacts and connectors are not loose.
Carry out a visual check outside and inside of the equipment.
Check that all switches and keys are in NORMAL position.
Check that the System lamp status is NORMAL after the switches AUTO/MANUAL and
REMOTE ON/OFF are in AUTO and ON respectively.
Instruction Manual

Date
Tx1/Tx2
Azimuth %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM
THR CL
THR 90 Hz
THR 150 Hz
Table 4-2 Field Modulation check
Date
Tx1/Tx2
Azimuth % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM % DDM
35°
30°
25°
20°
15°
10°
5°
4°
3°
2°
1°
0°
1°
2°
3°
4°
5°
10°
15°
20°
25°
30°
35°
Table 4-3 Field DDM measurement (LOC Only)

Instruction Manual

a) General alarm delay Tx1 - Tx2 sec

b) Changeover carried out
c) PA 27V level
d) General alarm delay Tx1 - Tx2 sec
e) Changeover carried out
f) PA 27V level
Table 4-4 Monitor Integrity Test (Alternative 2)
Date
COU Tx1 COU Tx2 CLR Tx1 CLR Tx2
a) SBO waveform check (ok) N.A. *) N.A. *).
b) CSB/LF phase check (ok) N.A. *) N.A. *)
c) DDM check COU (%DDM) N.A. *) N.A. *).
d) SDM check COU (%SDM) N.A. *) N.A. *).
e) Course ident mod (%) N.A. **) N.A. **)
*) NM 7011B/12B/31B/32B **) NM 7011B-7012B

Table 4-5 Transmitter waveform checks
Date Tx1 Tx2

a) Course transmitter frequency MHz
b) Clearance transmitter frequency MHz
(NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only)
Table 4-6 RF Frequency check
Date
Tx1 Tx2
150 Hz frequency Hz
90 Hz-Frequency Hz
Ident (1020 Hz) Fre- Hz
quency (LOC Only)
Table 4-7 LF Frequency check

Instruction Manual

Date Tx1 Tx2

a) Course transmitter output power W
b) Clearance transmitter output power W
(NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only)
Table 4-8 SB output power
Date
Mon1/Mon2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2 M1 M2
Text Parameter Unit
ref.
a) CL DDM Alarm 150 µA/%DDM
aa) CL DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
b) CL SDM alarm high %
bb) CL SDM alarm low %
c) CL RF alarm dB
d) DS DDM alarm wide µA/%DDM
dd) DS DDM alarm narrow µA/%DDM
e) NF DDM alarm 150 µA/%DDM
ee) NF DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
f) CLR DDM alarm 150 *) µA/%DDM
ff) CLR DDM alarm 90 *) µA/%DDM
g) CLR SDM alarm high *) %
gg) CLR SDM alarm low *) %
h) CLR RF alarm *) dB
STB MON STB MON STB MON STB MON STB MON
if) STB CL DDM alarm 150 µA/%DDM
iiff) STB CL DDM alarm 90 µA/%DDM
jg) STB CL SDM alarm high %
jjgg) STB CL SDM alarm low %
kh) STB CL RF alarm dB
li) STB DS DDM alarm wide µA/%DDM
llii) STB DS DDM alarm narrow µA/%DDM
m) STB CLR DDM alarm 150 *) µA/%DDM
mm) STB CLR DDM alarm 90 *) µA/%DDM
n) STB CLR SDM alarm high *) %
nn) STB CLR SDM alarm low *) %
o) STB CLR RF alarm *) dB
Instruction Manual
if) to oii) hot standby only *) NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only

Table 4-9 Monitor Alarm Limits check

Date
a) Near Field Monitor Delay sec
b) 20 seconds inhibit sec
Table 4-10 Near Field Monitor Delay and 20 seconds inhibit
Date
a) Battery terminal voltage volts
b) Battery terminal voltage volts
c) Battery terminal voltage volts
Table 4-11 Battery maintenance
Date
Tx1/Tx2
Azimuth %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM %DDM %SDM
THR CL
THR 90 Hz
THR 150 Hz
Table 4-12 Field modulation check (LOC Only)
Instruction Manual

4.3 Recommended snow and grass/ vegetation removal
4.3.1 LOC site
Localizer snow and grass/vegetation removal area.
LOC Antenna Array
HBK 2301-1
Figure 4-3 Typical LOC site
Maximum snow depth and grass/vegetation height 60 cm.
Snow in front of LOC should have marginal effect as long as not drifting into piles that give
asymmetry for the radiation
Snow on LOC LPDA has normally minor effect due to the good protection the radomes. How-
ever, excessive amounts of wet snow may be removed buy a broom.
Note! The ILS localizer must be shut off during maintenance work immediately in front of the
antennas!
Instruction Manual

4.3.2 GP Site
4.3.2.1 Control of vegetation in BFA
Vegetation within the BFA must be controlled. Maximum allowable height of grass, bushes
and other vegetation is 20 cm. To avoid unnecessary shut down of the facility, the grass within
the BFA should be cut, and bushes and other vegetation should be removed before it reaches
this level.
8°
30m - 60m
Typical
Typical 320m - 365m

40m
Typical 120m
Beam Forming Area (BFA)
HBK 1226-1
Typical 290m - 310m
Figure 4-4 M-array Glide Path BFA
4.3.2.2 Snow removal from BFA
In regions with snow, the accumulation of snow in the BFA must be controlled. The maximum
allowable snow height within the BFA is 20 cm. To avoid unnecessary shut down of the facility,
the snow within the BFA should be removed before it reaches this level. No steep banks at the
area borders are allowed.
4.3.2.3 Snow removal on GP antenna elements
Accumulated wet snow on the radome could affect the signal and result in shut-down
Excessive amount of snow should be removed. If snow build-up on the antenna elements is a
recurring problem, a technique to remove snow from antenna surface is to fix a rope to the top
of GP tower, which runs in front of the antenna elements. Move, from ground, the rope to-and-
fro and hence get rid of antenna snow layers
Instruction Manual
Note! The ILS glide path must be shut off during maintenance work in the BFA!

4.4 Flight Checks
4.4.1 Flight Check Requirements
The purpose of Flight Checks, together with adequate monitoring, ground testing and mainte-
nance on a routine and continuing basis, is to ensure that the ILS signal in space performs
within the specified tolerances and that the operational integrity and serviceability of the ILS
facility is maintained. The specific purpose of flight-testing is to confirm the correctness of
essential signal in space parameters and to determine the operational safety and acceptance
of the installation.
Flight Checks are primarily carried out the first time an ILS installation is put into operation,
and thereafter on a regular basis.
The National flight check procedures are normally based on one of the two following docu-
ments:
• ICAO DOC 8071 Manual on testing of radio navigation aids
• FAA Order 8200.1C U.S. Standard Flight Inspection Manual
These two documents have slightly different requirements for some few parameters (LOC
coverage, GP course sector etc.). In addition where the ICAO document only specifies the
requirements for the parameters the FAA document specifies exactly how to flight check them.
This chapter uses the ICAO DOC 8071 as references since the majority of the Civil Aviation
Authorities in the world are using that document.
4.4.2 Scenarios that may require Flight Check

1. After any change, repair or modification of transmitter hardware that requires adjust-
ment of modulation balance, modulation depth (SDM), SBO phase, SBO amplitude,
output RF-level or Clearance audio phase
2. After any change, repair or modification of the antenna system including the Antenna
Distribution Unit (ADU) and coax cabling that may alter the radiated signal
3. After any change, repair or modification of the monitor hardware including the Monitor
Combining Unit (MCU) and coax cabling, unless there is no doubt as to the perfor-
mance of the monitor system. Monitor alarms must in any case be verified
Generally speaking, any incident, change, repair or modification that can change the signal in
space or the operation of the monitoring system may require Flight Check before the system
can be put into operation again.
4.4.3 The different types of Flight Check
There are a number of different types of Flight Checks:

1. Commissioning
Comprehensive Flight Check carried out before an ILS installation is published for
operational use. All flights are included in this check
Instruction Manual
2. Annual
A Flight Check performed once a year within a specified time interval. This Flight

inspection is more comprehensive than a Routine Flight Check but less comprehen-
sive than a Commissioning check
3. Routine
A Flight Check carried out on a regular interval based upon the category and perfor-
mance history of the facility. The interval varies but is typically 120 days ±30 days
when the system is normal. It is often increase to 180 days ±30 days when the perfor-
mance history shows a stable system.
4. Special
A Flight Check due to special circumstances, e.g. major equipment modifications,
repair, reported of suspected malfunctions, etc.
5. Site selection
A Flight Check conducted to determine the suitability of a proposed site for the perma-
nent installation of an ILS facility
4.4.4 Pre Flight Check procedures
Carry out the ground checks in [reference 4.4.6.3.1, 4.4.6.3.2, 4.4.7.3.1 and 4.4.7.3.2].
4.4.5 Post Flight Check procedures
After completion of a Flight Check, all data should be recorded in a suitable document.
4.4.6 Flight Check LOC
4.4.6.1 ICAO DOC 8071 requirements
The ICAO DOC 8071 lists all the requirements in the following table:
Annex
Inspection DOC8071
Parameter Measurement Tolerance 10
Type ref
ref
S C P
Identifica- Morse Code Proper Keying, clearly audible to the X X 3.1.3.9 4.3.12
tion limit of the range
Voice fea- Audibility, Clear audio level similar to IDENT, no X X 3.1.3.8 4.3.13
ture DDM effect on course line
Modula- DDM, Note: Recommended means of meas- X 3.1.3.5

tion- Bal- Modulation urement is ground check X
ance depth 0.002 DDM (0.2%DDM, 1.94μA) X X 4.3.14
- Depth 18% to 22% SDM X X 4.3.15
Instruction Manual

Annex
Inspection DOC8071
Type ref
ref
S C P
Displace- DDM Cat I: Within 17% of the nominal value X X X 3.1.3.7 4.3.16 to
ment sen- Cat II: Within 17% of the nominal value 4.3.20
sitivity Cat III: Within 10% of nominal value
Note: Recommended means of meas-
urements is by ground check. Provided
that correlation has been established
between ground and air measure-
ments.
Off-course DDM On either side of course line, linear X X X 3.1.3.7 4.3.21 to

clearance increase to 175μA, then maintenance 4.3.22
of 175μA to 10°. Between 10° and 35°,
minimum 150μA. Where coverage
required outside of ±35°, minimum of
150μA except in back course sector
High angle DDM Minimum of 150μA. X X N/A 4.3.23 to

clearance 4.3.25
Course DDM, Dis- Equivalent to the following displace- X X X 3.1.3.6 4.3.26 to

alignment tance, Angle ments at the ILS reference datum: 4.3.28
accuracy Cat I: ±10.5m (35ft)
Cat II: ±7.5m (25ft)
[±4.5m (15ft) for those Cat II LOC
which
are adjusted and maintained within
±4.5m]
Cat III: ±3m (10ft)
Phasing DDM = 10μA of the modulation balance X X X 4.3.39 to

value. 4.3.40
Note: Optional, at the request of the
ground technician, unless good corre-
lation between airborne and ground
phasing techniques has not been
established.
DDM DDM >180μA (linear increase from 0 to X X 3.1.3.7.

increase >180μA) 4
linear
Voice no DDM, Speech No interference X X 3.1.3.8

interfer-
ence to
basic func-
tion
Phase to Speech No nulls X X 3.1.3.8.

avid voice 3.1
null on
dual fre-
quency
systems
Instruction Manual

Annex
Inspection DOC8071
Type ref
ref
S C P
Course DDM Outer limit of coverage to Point A: X X X 3.1.3.4 4.3.29 to

structure 30μA all categories See 4.3.33
Annex1
Point A to Point B: 0 Vol-
Cat I: Linear decrease to 15μA ume I,
Cat II: Linear decrease to 5μA Attach-
Cat III: Linear decrease to 5μA ment C,
Note to
Beyond Point B: 2.1.3
Cat I: 15μA to Point C
Cat II: 5μA to Reference datum
Cat III: 5μA to Point D, then linear
increase to 10μA at Point E
Note: Course structure along the run-

way may be measured be flight inspec-
tion or by ground vehicle. Refer to
4.3.79 for guidance on structure analy-
sis.
Coverage Flag current, From the LOC antenna do distances X X X 3.1.3.3 4.3.34 to
(usable dis- DDM of: 4.3.36
tance) 46.3km (25NM) within ±10° from
course line
31.5km (17NM) within between 10°
and 35° from course line
18.5km (10NM) beyond ±35° if cover-
age is provided (See detailed proce-
dure for exceptions)
- Field >40 microvolts/metre (-114 dBW/m²)
strength
Polariza- DDM For a roll attitude of 20° from the hori- X X 3.1.3.2. 4.3.37
tion zontal: 2
Cat I: 15μA on the course line
Cat II: 8μA on the course line
Cat III: 5μA within a sector bounded by
20μA
either side of the course line
Back Not applicable to the Indra Navia localizer

Course
Instruction Manual

Annex
Inspection DOC8071
Type ref
ref
S C P
Monitor
system
-Alignment DDM, Distance Monitor must alarm for a shift in the X X

main course line from the runway cen-
tre line equivalent to or more than the
following distances at the ILS refer-
ence datum.
Cat I: 10.5m (35ft)
Cat II: 7.5m (25ft)
Cat III: 6m (20ft)
-Displace- DDM, Distance Monitor must alarm for a change in dis- X X

ment sensi- placement sensitivity to a value differ-
tivity
ing from the nominal value by more
than:
Cat I: 17%
Cat II: 17%
Cat III: 17%
-Off-course DDM
clearance
Required only for certain types of local- X X
izer. Monitor must alarm when the off-
course clearance cross-pointer deflec-
tion falls below 150μA anywhere in the
off-course coverage area
-Power Monitor must alarm either for a power X

Power field
reduction of 3dB. or when the cover-
strength
age falls below the requirement for the
facility, whichever is the smaller
change. For two-frequency localizers.
the monitor must alarm for a change of
1dB in either carrier, unless test have
proved that use of the wider limits
above will not cause unacceptable sig-
nal degradation (>150μA in clearance
sector)
Legend: N/A=not applicable, S=site, C=commissioning, P=periodic
4.4.6.2 The main types of LOC Flight Checks
To verify all the specification the LOC Flight Checks four different types of flights are used.
• Crossover / semi orbit
• A flight between ±35° in the horizontal plane at a given distance from the LOC and at a
height that correspond to the GP angle
• Approach on centreline
• Approach on half / full course sector
Instruction Manual

4.4.6.3 LOC alignment
Before the Flight Check starts, all necessary tools, instruments, equipment and Data record-
ing forms shall be present.
4.4.6.3.1 Confirm modulation balance and depth
Objective: To ensure that the carrier is modulated by equal amounts of 90 Hz and 150 Hz.
For a two-frequency system this check must be done separately on the course and clearance
transmitter.
• ICAO DOC8071 states that "Recommended means of mea-

surement is ground check"
Ground Check (Recommended):

• Turn on the transmitter to be checked
• Connect the PIR to the CSB course or Clearance front panel jack of the cabinet as
appropriate
• If the reading of the PIR is outside the requirement, adjust the DDM and/or the SDM of
the transmitter in the Flight check window
• Record the PIR readings
Flight Check (Optional):
Configure the transmitter to be checked to

radiate only CSB.
• In Flight Check window, click the
"Toggle SBO off" button so that the
text reads, "COU SBO signal is
off"
• Connect the PIR to the CSB
course or Clearance front panel
jack of the cabinet as appropriate
• Adjust the DDM and/or the SDM of
the transmitter in the Flight check
window accordingly to the infor-
mation from the plane
• Record the information from the
plane and the PIR readings
Figure 4-5 Mod. Bal and Mod. Sum
Instruction Manual

4.4.6.3.2 Adjust Global Phasing (CSB/SBO phase)
• Use ground check, ICAO DOC8071 states: "Optional, at the

request of the ground technician, unless good correlation
between airborne and ground phasing techniques has not
been established.”
Objective: Verify that the SBO phase to that of the CSB signal is optimum adjusted.
This test is in most cases carried out on the ground.
Ground Check (Recommended)

• Switch OFF the clearance transmitter
• Connect the PIR to the test connector in the ADU (See Localizer section 5.2.4.3)
• In Flight Check window adjust COU SBO phase (associated with TX to air) to
obtain 0.0% DDM reading
• Repeat the phasing procedure for the other transmitter
• Switch OFF the course transmitter
• With the clearance transmitter ON repeat the phasing procedure, now adjusting
the CLR SBO phase associated with TX to air
Flight Check (Optional)
The check should be performed on both transmitters, Course and Clearance separately. The
transmitter under test is configured to radiate CSB and SBO in quadrature (90° stub in SBO).
Flight profile
The recommended sampling area for the airborne phasing check is at an approach flight
between 10 NM and Point "A" on the ¼ course edge.
A clearance arc while in quadrature may also be performed to confirm proper phasing.
• In Flight Check window, click the "Insert/remove 90° stub" button so that the text
reads, "COU SBO 90° stub is inserted" for the appropriate transmitter.
• If instructed by the plane, adjust the COU SBO phase until correct signal has been
achieved
Instruction Manual

Figure 4-6 Global phasing
4.4.6.3.3 Adjust Course Sector
Objective: Determine the aircraft receiver deflection in µA

for a known angular displacement in aircraft position from
a predetermined reference. If necessary, adjust course
sector to correct value. Monitor correlation shall be
checked.
Flight Check setup
The transmitter under test shall be radiating normally.
Flight profile
Commencing outside Point "A" on the ¼ course line (150

Hz side) of the localizer, the pilot flies inbound to Point
"B".
The check will be repeated for the 90 Hz sector.
No information will be given from the plane until both

sides have been checked and the average course sector
has been calculated.
Figure 4-7 Flight profile - CS

Instruction Manual

• If adjustment is necessary, the course

sector is adjusted by changing the
SBO level for the transmitter under
test in the Flight Check window.
An increase of the SBO level will narrow the

course sector and vice versa.
The amount to increase/decrease can be cal-

culated accordingly to the formula:
CourseSectorMeasured
SBO Adjustment  20 log
CourseSectorCorrect
Figure 4-8 CS adjustment
• If the course sector is adjusted it is necessary to

recalibrate the output form the MCU so that it is
150 µA. Connecting the PIR to the DS output of
the MCU and adjusting the DS phaser inside the
MCU achieve this.
• Reconnect the DS cable to the cabinet and con-
firm that the DS monitor shows 0 µA. If not it is
necessary to change the nominal value of the
monitors DS channel until you get a reading of 0
µA
• Record the course sector information from the
plane
Figure 4-9 DS adjustment
Instruction Manual

4.4.6.3.4 Adjust Course Alignment
Objective: To determine Localizer on-course signal coincides with the

runway centreline, and to determine the course characteristics
including bends, scalloping and roughness (structure). Modulation
depth of navigational tones (90Hz and 150Hz) and Ident (1020Hz) is
also often checked during this flight. Monitor correlation shall be
checked.
Flight Check setup
The transmitter under test shall be radiating normal. Ident is turned

off until Ident check. Alignment, navigation tone modulation and Ident
modulation is checked and if necessary adjusted
Figure 4-10 Flight profile - CL alignment
Flight profile
Commencing from the appropriate evaluation point A, fly inbound on the extended runway
centreline to the threshold. Maintain a track as close to centreline as possible.
Alignment:
• If the course alignment needs adjustment it is
possible to shift it approximately ±2 µA with the
CL phaser inside the ADU network
• If a larger shift of the course alignment is neces-
sary, the flight check has to be temporary
stopped while the antennas system is mechani-
cally moved
Figure 4-11 ADU CL phaser

Instruction Manual

• If the alignment is adjusted, it is necessary to

recalibrate the CL output form the MCU so that it
is 0 µA. Connecting the PIR to the CL output of
the MCU and adjusting the CL phaser inside the
MCU achieve this.
• Reconnect the CL cable to the cabinet and con-
firm that the CL monitor shows 0 µA. If not it is
necessary to change the nominal value of the
monitors CL channel until you get a reading of 0
µA
Figure 4-12 MCU DS phaser
Modulation depth:
If required see earlier section 10.6.3.1 for adjustment
Ident check:
• To turn on the Ident when requested; Open Transmitter Settings - Modulation window
in the RMM program and select Normal Morse signal
• If Ident modulation depth or Ident code have to be changed; Open Transmitter settings
- Signal adj. window and change the Morse Code, COU 1020Hz level or CLR 1020Hz
level for the relevant transmitter
4.4.6.3.5 Adjust Off-course clearance
Objective: Inspect the clearance to ensure

that it is enough fly left /right on the sides
Flight Check setup
The transmitter under test shall be radiating

normal. Ident is turned off.
Flight profile
An semi orbit flight between ±35° in the hori-

zontal plane at a given distance from the
LOC and at a height that correspond to the
GP angle.
Alignment:
• If the DDM is to close to the limits,
increase the CLR SBO level
Instruction Manual
Figure 4-13 Flight profile - Off Course CLR

4.4.6.3.6 Check Course structure LOC
Objective: Inspect that bends and scalloping is inside the structure requirements.
Flight Check setup
The transmitter under test shall be radiating normal. Ident is turned off.
Flight profile
Commencing from the appropriate evaluation point outside point A, fly inbound on the
extended runway centreline to the threshold. Maintain a track as close to centreline as possi-
ble.
Figure 4-14 Cat I
Figure 4-15 Cat II
Figure 4-16 Cat III

Instruction Manual

4.4.6.3.7 Adjust coverage LOC
Objective: Check that the coverage requirements are met.
Flight Check setup
The transmitter under test shall be radiating normal.

Ident is turned off.
Flight profile
An semi orbit flight between ±35° in the horizontal plane

at a given distance from the LOC and at a height that
correspond to the GP angle.
Alignment
• If coverage cannot be reached the CSB power
can be increased to maximum 25W
Figure 4-17 LOC coverage requirements
4.4.6.4 LOC monitor checks
4.4.6.4.1 Adjust Course alarms
Objective: Inspecting the Course Position alarms to

ensure that the monitor will automatically turn off the
localizer system when an out-of-tolerance condition
occurs.
Flight Check setup
The test is done on transmitter one only.
Monitors are bypassed i.e. Manual/Auto switch set to

Manual.
After the check has been carried out it has to be verified

that the second transmitter has the same test settings as
the first transmitter.
Radiating DDM-test signal corresponding to the alarm

limit performs the test. Separate runs for 150Hz and
90Hz dominance. If necessary - alarm limits are adjusted.
Flight profile:
Aircraft flies inbound on centreline.

Instruction Manual
Figure 4-18 Flight profile - CL al.limit check

• Open Flight check window - Alarm limit check and activate CL test signal 1 or CL test
signal 2 when asked for
• If the shifted CL is not at the correct alarm point drag the slider for the activated test
point until the correct shift is achieved
• Verify that the monitor alarm limit is adjusted so that the monitor is just outside the limit
when this shift is active. If necessary change the alarm limit for CL / NF to achieve this
Figure 4-19 CL al. limit check
Instruction Manual

4.4.6.4.2 Adjust Wide Alarm and Narrow Alarm limits
Objective: Inspecting the width alarms (Displacement

sensitivity alarms) to ensure that the monitor will auto-
matically turn off the localizer system when an out-of-tol-
erance condition occurs.
Flight Check setup
The test is done on transmitter one only. Monitors are

bypassed, i.e. Manual/Auto switch set to Manual.
After the check has been carried out it has to be verified

that the second transmitter has the same test settings as
the first transmitter.
The equipment is radiating in Wide Alarm condition (both

Course and Clearance), respectively Narrow Alarm con-
dition (Only Course, Clearance normal).
Flight profile
Aircraft flies inbound at the predetermined ¼ course

track, with the system remaining in Wide alarm, respec-
tively Narrow alarm.
Figure 4-20 Flight profile - CS al. limit check
• Open Flight check window - Alarm

limit check and activate DS Narrow
or Wide when asked for
• If the change of course sector has
not reached the correct alarm point
increase/decrease the dB value for
the activated test point until the
correct change of course sector is
achieved
• Verify that the DS monitor alarm
limit is adjusted so that the monitor
is just outside the limit when this
change is active. If necessary
change the alarm limit for DS to
achieve this
Figure 4-21 CS al. limit check
Instruction Manual

4.4.6.4.3 Adjust Clearance Wide alarm limit
Objective: Inspecting Clearance Wide alarm to ensure

that the monitor will automatically turn off the localizer
system when an out-of-tolerance condition occurs.
Flight Check setup
The test is done on transmitter one only. Transmitter two

is adjusted accordingly. Monitors are bypassed (Manual),
Ident off.
The equipment is radiating in Wide Alarm condition (both

Course and Clearance).
Flight profile
An orbit flight between ±35° in the horizontal plane at a

given distance from the LOC and at a height that corre-
spond to the GP angle.
Figure 4-22 Flight profile - CLR wide al.check

limit check and activate DS Wide
and CLR Wide
• If the change of course sector has
not reached the correct alarm point
increase/decrease the dB value for
the activated test point until the
correct change of course sector is
achieved
• Verify that the CLR monitor alarm
limit is adjusted so that the monitor
is just outside the limit when this
change is active. If necessary
change the alarm limit for CLR to
achieve this
Figure 4-23 COU/CLR Wide Alarm
Instruction Manual

4.4.6.4.4 Adjust Power alarm limit
Objective: Inspecting power alarm settings to ensure that the monitors will automatically turn
off the localizer system when an out-of-tolerance condition occurs.
This check/adjustment is done without

flight inspection.
• Open Flight check window -
Alarm limit check and activate
Test RF attenuation fro COU
respectively CLR
• For a single frequency system
the slider should be set to 3
dB, for a dual frequency sys-
tem it should be set to 1 dB
• Verify that the COU / CLR RF
monitor indicates an alarm. If
necessary change the alarm
limit for COU / CLR RF to
achieve this
Figure 4-24 RF power al. limit check
Instruction Manual

4.4.7 Flight Check GP
4.4.7.1 ICAO DOC 8071 requirements
The ICAO DOC 8071 lists all the requirements in the following table:
DOC807
Inspection Annex 10
Type ref
ref
S C P
Angle DDM, Angle Cat I: Within 7.5% of nominal angle X X X 4.3.45 to

Cat II: Within 7.5% of nominal angle 4.3.46
Cat III: Within 4% of nominal angle
-Alignment 3.1.5.1.2.2
-Height of DDM Cat I: 15m (50ft) + 3m (10ft) X 3.1.5.1.5

reference (see Note 3) 3.1.5.1.6
datum Cat II: 15m (50ft) + 3m (10ft) 3.1.5.1.4
(see Note 3)
Cat III: 15m (50ft) + 3m (10ft)
(see Note 3)
Displace- DDM, Angle Refer to Annex 10, Volume I, 3.1.5.6 X X X 3.1.5.6 4.3.47 to
ment sen- 4.3.49
sitivity
-Value
-Symmetry
Clearance DDM, Angle X X X 4.3.50

-Below path Not less than 190μA at an angle 3.1.5.6.5
above the horizontal of not less than
0.3θ. If 190μA is realized at an angle
greater than 0.45θ, a minimum of
-Above 190μA must be maintained at least 3.1.5.3.1
path down to 0.45θ.
Must attain at least 150μA and not fall
below 150μA until 1.75θ is reached.
Glide Path DDM Note: Tolerances are referenced to the X X X 3.1.5.4 4.3.52
Structure mean course path between Points A
and B, and relative to the mean
curved path below Point B
Cat I: From coverage limit to Point C:
30 µA
Cat II/III: From coverage limit to Point
A: 30µA
From Point A to Point B: linear
decrease
from 30µA to 20µA
From Point B to reference datum:
20µA
Modulation Modulation Note: Recommended means of meas- X X X 3.1.5.5.1 4.3.53 to

depth urement is by ground check 4.3.54
-Balance 0.002 DDM
Instruction Manual
-Depth 37.5% to 42.5% for each tone.

DOC807
Inspection Annex 10
Type ref
ref
Obstruc- DDM Safe clearance at 180µA (Normal), or X X X N/A 4.3.55

tion at 150µA (wide alarm).
-Clearance
Coverage Flag Current Satisfactory receiver operation in sec- X X X 3.1.5.3 4.3.56

-Usable dis- tor 8° azimut either side of the local-
tance izer centre line for at least 18.5km
(10NM) up to 1.75θ and down to 0.45θ
above the horizontal, or at a lower
angle, down to 0.3θ as required to
-Field safeguard the glide path intercept pro-
strength cedure.
>400 μV/m (-95 dBW/m2) (refer to
Annex 10 for specific signal strength
requirements)
Monitor
system
DDM, Angle Monitor must alarm for a change in X X
-Angle angle of 7.5% of the promulgated
DDM, Angle angle. X X
-Displace- Cat I: Monitor must alarm for a change
ment sensi- in the
tivity angle between the glide path and the
line below the glide path at which
75μA
is obtained, by more than 0.037θ.
Cat II: Monitor must alarm for a
change in
Power displacement sensitivity by more than X X
25%.
-Power Cat III: Monitor must alarm for a
change in
displacement sensitivity by more than
25%.
Monitor must alarm either for a power
reduction of 3dB or when the cover-
age falls below the requirement for the
facility, whichever is the smaller
change.
For two-frequency glide paths, the
monitor must alarm for a change of
±1dB in either carrier, unless test have
proved that use of the wider limits
above will not cause unacceptable
signal degradation.
Phasing No fixed tolerances. To be optimized X X N/A 4.3.59 to

for the site and equipment. 4.3.65
Note: Optional, at the request of the
ground technician.
Note 3:
This requirement only arises during commissioning and categorization checks. The method of
Instruction Manual
calculating the height of the extended glide path at the threshold is described in 4.3.81, Analy-
sis - Reference datum height. For Category I approaches on Code 1 and 2 runways, refer to
3.1.5.1.6 of Annex 10, Volume I.

4.4.7.2 The main types of GP Flight Checks
To verify the specifications of the GP, two different types of flights are used:
• Approach on glide path angle
• Approach on half course sector (75µA)
4.4.7.3 GP alignment
Before the Flight Check starts, all necessary tools, instruments, equipment and Data record-
ing forms shall be present.
4.4.7.3.1 Modulation balance and modulation depth
Objective: To ensure that the carrier is modulated by equal amounts of 90 Hz and 150 Hz.
For a two-frequency system this check must be done separately on the course and clearance
transmitter.
• ICAO DOC8071 states that "Recommended means of mea-

surement is ground check"
Ground Check (recommended):

• Turn on the transmitter to be checked
• Connect the PIR to the CSB course or Clearance front panel jack of the cabinet as
appropriate
• If the reading of the PIR is outside the requirement, adjust the DDM and/or the SDM of
the transmitter in the Flight check window
• Record the PIR readings
Instruction Manual

Flight Check (Optional):
Configured the transmitter to be checked to

radiate only CSB.
• In Flight Check window, click the "Tog-
gle SBO off" button so that the text
reads, "COU SBO signal is off"
• Connect the PIR to the CSB Course or
Clearance front panel jack of the cabi-
net as appropriate.
• Adjust the DDM and/or the SDM of the
transmitter in the Flight Check window
accordingly to the information from the
plane
• Record the information from the plane
and the PIR readings
Figure 4-25 Mod. bal and Mod sum
4.4.7.3.2 Adjust Global Phasing (CSB/SBO phase)
Objective: Verify that the SBO phase to that of the CSB signal is optimum adjusted using the
ground-based or flight check procedures.
Ground Check (Recommended)

• Switch OFF the clearance transmit-
ter
• Connect the PIR to the monitor
return cable lower antenna (M1)
• In Flight Check window, click the
"Insert/remove 90° stub" button so
that the text reads, "COU SBO 90°
stub is inserted" for the appropriate
transmitter
• In Flight Check window adjust COU
SBO phase (associated with TX to
air) to obtain 0.0% DDM reading
• Repeat the phasing procedure for
the other transmitter
Figure 4-26 Gobal phasing
Instruction Manual

Flight Check (Optional)
• This method is not recommended unless there are detected

phasing problems that cannot be solved by ground phasing
The check should be performed on both transmitters, Course and Clearance separately. The
transmitter under test is configured to radiate CSB and SBO in quadrature (90° stub in SBO).
Flight profile
The recommended sampling area for the airborne phasing check is between 10 NM and Point
"A" on the lower ¼ course edge.
Figure 4-27 Flight profile - global phasing
4.4.7.3.3 Adjust Sector Width
Objective: Determine the aircraft receiver deflection in µA for a known angular displacement in
aircraft position from a predetermined reference. If necessary, adjust displacement sensitivity
(sector width) to correct value. Monitor correlation shall be checked.
Flight Check setup
Flight profile
Commencing outside Point "A" on the calculated lower ¼ course (150 Hz sector) of the Glide
Path, the pilot flies inbound to Point "B". The check will be repeated for the Upper width sector
(90 Hz sector).
No information will be given from the plane until both sides have been checked and the aver-
age course sector has been calculated.
Instruction Manual

Figure 4-28 Flight profile - sector width
• If adjustment is necessary, the

course sector is adjusted by chang-
ing the SBO level for the transmitter
under test in the Flight Check window
An increase of the SBO level will narrow the

course sector and vice versa.
The amount to increase/decrease can be

calculated accordingly to the formula
CourseSect orMeasured
SBO Adjustment  20 log
CourseSect orCorrect
Figure 4-29 Sector width adjustment
• If the course sector is adjusted it is

necessary to recalibrate the output
form the MCU so that it is 75 µA.
Connecting the PIR to the DS output
of the MCU and adjusting the DS
attenuator (AT2) inside the MCU
achieve this
• Reconnect the DS cable to the cabi-
net and confirm that the DS monitor
shows 0 µA. If not it is necessary to
change the nominal value of the
monitors DS channel until you get a
reading of 0 µA
Record the course sector information from

the plane
Instruction Manual
Figure 4-30 MCU DS adjustment

4.4.7.3.4 Adjust Glide Path Angle
Objective: Determine the Glide Path structure and if Glide Path on-course signal coincides
with the surveyed angle. Modulation of navigational tones is also checked. If necessary, Glide
Path angle will be adjusted.
Flight Check setup
The Monitors are bypassed, i.e. Manual/Auto set to Manual.
Flight Profile:
Commencing from the appropriate evaluation point A, fly inbound on the extended runway
centreline to the threshold. Maintain a track as close to centreline as possible.
Figure 4-31 Flight profile - GP angle
If Glide Path angle is out of tolerance, the angle is adjusted by changing the heights of the
antennas. Higher antennas - lower angle; lower antennas - higher angle.
Simulation software should be used to calculate how much the antennas should be moved.
Alt.1:
If a proper site survey has been carried out and the forward slope, sideway slope of the terrain
have been calculated using simulation software, the parameter of greatest uncertainty is the
height from the lower antenna to the average reflection plane. In this case it is recommended
to move all three antennas the same amount until the correct angle is achieved.
Alt. 2:
If there are any uncertainties of the forward slope, sideway slope of the terrain antenna 1
(lower) should be moved 1/3, antenna 2 (middle) 2/3 and antenna 3 (upper) 3/3.
Rule of thumb (for M-array): 15 cm change of height of antenna 1 (lower) corresponds approx.
to a 0.1º change in angle.
Example: To change from an angle of 2.9° to 3.0°, lower antenna must be moved down 15 cm,
Instruction Manual
middle antenna 30 cm and upper antenna 45 cm.
The position monitor, both integral (MCU) and Near Field shall be checked after a change in

antenna height, and if necessary, re-aligned. The monitor(s) shall be correlated to actual flight
inspection readings.
4.4.7.4 GP monitor checks
4.4.7.4.1 Adjust Glide Path alarms
Objective: Inspecting the Glide Path alarms to ensure that the monitor will automatically turn
off the Glide Path system when an out-of-tolerance condition occurs.
Flight Check setup
Monitors are bypassed i.e. Manual/Auto switch set to Manual..
After the check has been carried out it has to be verified that the second transmitter has the
same test settings as the first transmitter.
Radiating DDM-test signal corresponding to the alarm limit performs the test. Separate runs
for low angle and high angle. If necessary - alarm limits are adjusted.
Flight profile:
Aircraft flies inbound on glide path.
Figure 4-32 Flight profile - CL alarms

limit check and activate CL test signal
1 or CL test signal 2 when asked for
• If the shifted CL is not at the correct
alarm point drag the slider for the acti-
vated test point until the correct shift is
achieved
• Verify that the monitor alarm limit is
adjusted so that the monitor is just
outside the limit when this shift is
active. If necessary change the alarm
Instruction Manual
limit for CL / NF to achieve this

Figure 4-33 CL al. limit check

4.4.7.4.2 Adjust Wide Alarm and Narrow Alarm limits
Objective: Inspecting the width alarms (Displacement sensitivity alarms) to ensure that the
monitor will automatically turn off the Glide Path system when an out-of-tolerance condition
occurs.
Flight Check setup
Monitors are bypassed, i.e. Manual/Auto switch set to Manual.
After the check has been carried out it has to be verified that the second transmitter has the
same test settings as the first transmitter.
The equipment is radiating in Wide Alarm condition, respectively Narrow Alarm condition
(Only Course, Clearance normal).
Flight profile
Commencing outside Point "A" on the calculated lower ¼ course (150 Hz sector) of the Glide
Path, the pilot flies inbound to Point "B". The check will be repeated for the Upper width sector
(90 Hz sector).
No information will be given from the plane until both sides have been checked.
Figure 4-34 Flight profile - DS al. limit check

Instruction Manual

• Open Flight check window -

Alarm limit check and activate
DS Narrow or Wide when asked
for
• If the change of course sector
has not reached the correct
alarm point increase/decrease
the dB value for the activated
test point until the correct change
of course sector is achieved
• Verify that the DS monitor alarm
limit is adjusted so that the moni-
tor is just outside the limit when
this change is active. If neces-
sary change the alarm limit for
DS to achieve this
Figure 4-35 DS al. limit check
4.4.7.4.3 Check of below path DDM in alarm
Objective: Inspecting that the monitor will automatically turn off the Glide Path system when a
the DDM at 0.75θ0 is 75µA.
Flight Check setup
Monitors are bypassed, i.e. Manual/Auto switch set to Manual.
The equipment is radiating in Low angle and Wide Alarm condition.
Flight profile
Commencing outside Point "A" on the 0.75θ0 of the Glide Path, the pilot flies inbound to Point
"B".
Figure 4-36 Flight profile - below path DDM

Instruction Manual


limit check and activate CL test
signal for low angle and DS Wide
simultaneously
• If the reported fly up signal is
below 75µA the CL test signal and
DS wide test signal must be
reduced until 75µA is reached
• Adjust the CL and DS monitor
alarm limits so that the monitor is
just outside the limit when this
change is active
Figure 4-37 Below path DDM al. limit check
4.4.7.4.4 Adjust Power alarm limit
Objective: Inspecting power alarm settings to ensure that the monitors will automatically turn
off the Glide Path system when an out-of-tolerance condition occurs.
This check/adjustment is done without flight inspection.

limit check and activate Test RF
attenuation fro COU respectively
CLR
• For a single frequency system the
slider should be set to 3 dB, for a
dual frequency system it should be
set to 1 dB
• Verify that the COU / CLR RF mon-
itor indicates an alarm. If neces-
sary change the alarm limit for
COU / CLR RF to achieve this
Figure 4-38 RF al. limit check
Instruction Manual

SECTION 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE
5 Section 5 Corrective Maintenance
5.1 Overview
This section contains procedures for locating and replacing faulty Line Replaceable Units
(LRU).
5.2 Diagnostic functions
5.2.1 General description
If the LOC or GP fails, the RMM software should be used to locate the faulty LRU.
The RMM software can perform two types of diagnostic tests based on the measurements
made available by the embedded RMS software in the NORMARC 7000B cabinet:
1. “Current data diagnostics”. The diagnose is here based on live data received from an
connected ILS rack or based on historical data sets (snap shots) of measurements
previously stored to disk
2. Alarm event diagnostics”. This diagnostics function attempts to report the cause of a
transmitter changeover or a changeover/shutdown situation. The diagnose is based on
a particular alarm event in the event list and the corresponding measurements in an
alarm storage that will be downloaded from the rack
The diagnostic tests are based on passive reading of various measurement points inside the
NORMARC 70XXB cabinet and the data from the executive monitors. No special signals need
to be injected for the algorithms to work (although the transmitters must be turned on).
The operator needs to be logged in at access level 1 to perform a Current data diagnostics
and an Alarm event diagnostics. Since only access level 1 is required, the diagnostics tests
can therefore be performed locally or from a remote location using a modem connection.
5.2.2 Current data diagnostics
The Current data diagnostics is invoked by selecting the ILS | Current data diagnostics menu
item in the RMM software.
There are two typical cases in which the current data diagnostics function may be used:
1. On an operative ILS system, on which a warning situation is indicated. In this case the
current data diagnostics can be used to quickly find the cause of the warning without
taking the system out of service
2. In manual mode after a transmitter changeover or shutdown situation (monitor alarm).
The system can then be set to transmit on air, and the current data diagnostics used to
locate the module that is causing the monitor alarms
For detailed information about the algorithms used in the automatic Current data diagnostics,
refer to Section 5.4.3.
Instruction Manual

5.2.3 Alarm event diagnostics
The RMS subsystem in the NORMARC 7000B cabinet continuously reads data sets from
monitor 1, 2 and the standby monitor. The last 30 seconds of data are stored in an internal ring
buffer. This buffer is partitioned in groups with different sampling periods:
• For the last 2 seconds, 10 data sets are stored each second for monitor 1 and 2.
Standby monitor data sets are stored at ¼ of this frequency
• For the last 10 seconds, one data set is stored each second
• For the last 30 seconds, monitor 1, 2, standby and maintenance data are stored every
5th second
When a changeover or shutdown alarm occurs the RMS does the following:
1. Stores the ring buffer with the last 30 seconds of monitor and maintenance data from
before the alarm in an internal alarm storage buffer. This buffer resides in non-volatile
RAM
2. Places an changeover or shutdown alarm event in the event list. This event includes
alarm state information for each monitor-channel. This information is used by the RMM
software for diagnosing the alarm event
The RMS keeps the seven most recent alarm storage buffers. A changeover-only situation fills
one alarm storage buffer, while a changeover with subsequent shutdown situation uses two
alarm storage buffers.
No alarm storage buffers will be saved if the equipment is in service mode when the alarm
occurs. (Service mode is activated by any of the following switches: Local, Manual, Write Pro-
tect disable, Interlock Override and the Access Grant enable switch on the Remote Control.)
The data in the buffers can be downloaded by the RMM software when a user initiates an
alarm event diagnostics (if the data is not already downloaded), and used in the diagnostic
algorithms described in the following sections.
The operator initiates an alarm event diagnostics by first selecting a changeover or shutdown
alarm in the Event List and then selects the “Event diagnostics” button.
Once the alarm storage has been downloaded it is also possible to display the individual sam-
ples. This method can be used, in addition to the automatic diagnostic function, to find the
cause of changeover or shutdown alarms.
For information on how to download and display historical data see Appendix D.
For detailed information about the algorithms used in the automatic Alarm event diagnostics,
refer to Section 5.4.4.
5.2.4 Manual fault diagnosis
Should the automatic diagnostic functions fail or give misleading results, manual diagnosis
using external measurement equipment can be performed.
Instruction Manual

5.3 LRU change procedures
5.3.1 Replacing units
When replacing any faulty module(s), please follow this procedure:

• Make sure the ILS configuration file from the last flight check is available if one of the
following boards need to be replaced: MO 1820, LF 1576, or RMA 1822
• Make a print report of the monitor and maintenance values to document what the key
parameters were before the faulty module(s) was/were changed
• Power down the system
• Make sure you are wearing an ESD chain that is connected to either the ILS cabinet or
some other grounded point
• Replace the faulty module
• Power up the system
• Perform necessary adjustments for the unit in question; please refer to Section 5.3.2-
5.3.9
• Check the Monitor and Maintenance parameters, make a new printout and compare
with the printed report made when the system was operating normally
Due to the complexity of the boards and the major use of SMD components we do not recom-
mend trying to repair modules at site unless specially skilled personnel with extensive experi-
ence in repair techniques and the necessary repair equipment is present.
The ILS cabinet is modularly built up to make it possible to change smaller parts of the system
at a relatively low cost.
5.3.2 MO 1820 / MF 1821 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
By using a PIR (NORMARC 7710), check that all monitor inputs (CL, DS, NF, CLR) to the cab-
inet are correct. Compare the measurements with previously taken measurements.
Make a note of the values.
Check and note the version numbers of the firmware in the FPGA. This can be done in the
RMM program from menu ILS Settings-Monitoring-Monitor Configuration.
If possible, save the configuration of the modules to be replaced. If the module(s) to be

replaced is out of service and configuration cannot be downloaded, get hold of the latest con-
figuration file that was downloaded from the cabinet.
Power down the system and remove old unit(s). Insert new unit(s). All potentiometers are fac-
tory adjusted and shall normally never be touched.
Set the ILS in MANUAL and LOCAL mode. Power up the system.
Instruction Manual
Log on to the ILS with the RMM program in access level 3 or higher.

Factory mode
In the RMM program go to the Preferences menu and set Factory mode. This is necessary in
order to do some of the adjustments.
RF-level unit
There are no hardware adjustments for RF-level.
Any software adjustment for RF-level is easiest carried out by using dB as unit. In the RMM-
program set the RF-unit to dB from the menu ILS Settings-General-System Options.
If preferred, switch back to Volt after adjustment has finished.
ADJUSTMENT
Use the latest downloaded configuration file and upload the configuration for the monitors in
question.
Instruction Manual

If the configuration file used is a valid file quite recently downloaded from the cabinet, most of
the monitor settings should now be correct without any further need for adjustment.
However the software adjustment for RF-level should be carried out. Please see the "RF level
adjustment" section in the step-by-step adjustment procedure in Chapter 7.7
If only an old configuration file exists or no configuration file are available, the monitor has to
be adjusted from scratch as described in Chapter 7.7 Monitor Alignment
CHECK:
Verify that all monitor readings are normal.

Verify that all monitor maintenance readings are normal.
5.3.3 PS 1227 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and place the new unit in the vacant slot.
ADJUSTMENT:
No adjustments are necessary.
CHECK:
System: Remove the other PS 1227 unit. Power up the system. Turn transmit-
ters on and set the correct transmitter to air (Transmitter 1 to check
Power supply 1). Check the monitor readings to verify correct transmit-
ter behaviour.
Maintenance: Power down the ILS, re-insert the other PS 1227 unit, and power up
again. Check the RMM maintenance readings of the PS 1227 system
voltages; check both power supplies.
Instruction Manual

5.3.4 RF Oscillator replacement
5.3.4.1 OS 1706 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit. Write down the strap settings of the old OS 1706A
(LOC) or OS 1706B (GP) card and make sure the new card is identically configured. Please
refer to 7.10.1 to verify the frequency selection. If an illegal combination of strap positions is
set the error LED will light when the power is turned on.
Note: That for improved TX1/TX2 channel isolation, OS 1706 #2 shall be set up with the COU/CLR
frequency offsets reversed by inserting configuration strap #8 (COU below nominal channel fre-
quency, CLR above nominal channel frequency)
ADJUSTMENT:
The frequency of the RF output signal is factory adjusted. To adjust the frequency turn off the
90, 150, and 1020 Hz modulation tones using the RMM program, measure the RF frequency
at the CSB outlet at the front of the ILS cabinet and adjust the pot meters in front of the mod-
ule. The upper potentiometer adjusts the CLR carrier and the lower the COU carrier.
The frequency deviations shall be less than 1kHz from the operating frequency.
Note! When the module is put in TX2 position the frequency is by intention shifted an additional
+300Hz (LOC) 900Hz (GP) downwards to avoid frequency beating between TX1 and TX2 in
hot standby systems.
Remember to turn on the modulation tones after the adjustment is finished.
CHECK:
Use the RMM program to check the maintenance parameters for the OS module.
5.3.5 TCA 1218 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit.
ADJUSTMENT:
Make sure that all configuration straps (U6 and U13) are set as on the previous module. The
best way to do this is to exchange the U6 and U13 component platforms.
Compare the version numbers of the EPROM- and FPGA units on the board. Make sure the
new unit contains the same EPROM and FPGA versions.
CHECK:
Instruction Manual
Start up: Check that the ILS front panel display shows the correct equipment
setting (e.g. NORMARC 7013B Two-frequency Localizer).

Maintenance: Check the maintenance parameters for the TCA 1218 unit.
Front Panel: Set the local/remote switch in local position and the auto/manual
switch in manual position. Check that it is possible to turn transmitters
on/off and perform a changeover.
Integrity test: Turn main transmitter(s) on. Set the auto/manual switch in auto posi-
tion. Use RMM software to switch off the 90 Hz tones of both main
transmitters. Observe that a changeover, and after a while a shutdown
takes place.
For more extensive integrity testing of the monitors, please refer to Section 4.
5.3.6 RMA 1822
5.3.6.1 RMA 1822 Battery replacement
Battery replacement may lead to loss of the historical information (alarm log, medium time log,
long time log and event list) stored in the cabinet. The real time clock of the cabinet may also
be lost.
NO CRITICAL SETTINGS/CONFIGURATIONS ARE LOST.
To avoid loss of any historical information download this to the computer BEFORE changing
the battery.
If the battery is changed in less than 15 sec. loss of historical information and real time clock is
normally avoided.
PREPARATIONS:
Download all historical information (Alarm log, medium and long time log.). The events from
the cabinet are automatically downloaded when you connect to the cabinet.
Get hold of a new battery. Power down the system. Pull out the RMA 1822 module. Change
battery.
ADJUSTMENT:
After power up, log in as MASTER and check the real time clock of the cabinet [ILS settings –
General... – Date/time]. If necessary change the time.
Warning Lithium Battery Safety Hazard
Cabinet contains a Lithium Battery coin type CR2032 located on board RM 1823.
Replace only with CR2032 type battery and install with spring touching the back side of
the - pole.
Following precautions for Safe Handling and Use of Lithium Batteries should be noted:
Do not disassemble, crush, expose to fire or high temperatures/sunlight
Do not short or install with incorrect polarity
Instruction Manual
Dispose in accordance with appropriate regulations. Lithium button cell batteries such
as CR2032 contains so little lithium that it can normally be disposed of in the normal
municipal waste stream

5.3.6.2 RMA 1822 Module replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit.
Insert jumpers S1*) to connect to battery. If already inserted - change battery.
ADJUSTMENT:
• Use RMM software to upload configuration to RMA 1822
• The following settings are not stored in the configuration file and must be manually
updated: ILS Date/time and User configuration.
CHECK:
Monitor Make sure the ILS is operating in normal state (transmitters on) and
check that all parameters are normal.
Maintenance Check the maintenance parameters for the RMA 1822 unit.
5.3.7 LF 1576 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and place the new unit on an extender board.
ADJUSTMENT:
Turn on transmitters. It is important to use RMM software to upload LF 1576-configuration to

ILS. When the LF-configuration has been correctly uploaded, only minor adjustments should
be necessary. (Follow the procedure in Section 5 to re-adjust both/all transmitters.)
CHECK:
Monitor Make sure the ILS is operating in normal state (transmitters on) and
check that all parameters are normal.
Maintenance Check the maintenance parameters for the replaced LF 1576 board.
Transmitters Check waveforms as described in Sections 4 and 5 for all transmitters.

Instruction Manual

5.3.8 CO 1837/1838 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and mount new unit in the cabinet.
ADJUSTMENT:
If hot standby, tune potmeter to correct DDM on the monitor.
CHECK:
Set the equipment in LOCAL and MANUAL. Set MAIN SELECT and TX TO AIR to TX1. Turn
on TX1 COURSE and TX1 CLEARANCE (if applicable) by the TX1 push-buttons. Leave TX2
off. Verify that the monitor 1 and monitor 2 readings for CL, DS and CLR are normal. Turn off
the transmitters.
Set MAIN SELECT and TX TO AIR to TX2. Turn on TX2 COURSE and TX2 CLEARANCE (if
applicable) by the TX2 push-buttons. Leave TX1 off. Verify that the monitor 1 and monitor 2
readings for CL, DS and CLR are normal. Turn off the transmitters. Set the equipment to
AUTO and REMOTE.
5.3.9 LPA 1580/GPA 1581/GPA 1582 replacement
PREPARATIONS:
Power down system. Remove old unit and place the new unit in cabinet.
ADJUSTMENT:
Turn on transmitters. Follow the procedure below to check/re-adjust the transmitters.
CHECK:
Check waveforms as described here and in Section 7.
5.3.9.1 Adjustment of the IQ ILS transmitter
Field adjustment of the transmitter may normally only be necessary in the following situations:
• Installing a new system
• Changing channel frequency of existing system
• Replacing a faulty unit
The following procedure describes how the LPA/GPA modules should be checked/aligned if a
major discrepancy is observed. It may be necessary to carry out the procedure during the
installation phase of a new installation, if the channel frequency of the system is being
changed or when a replacement module is put into the system.
Instruction Manual
At the end of the procedure there is also a description describing how to set system parame-
ters as DDM, SDM CSB/SBO phase even if these parameter adjustment really are system
adjustments and will normally be done during antenna system alignment.

5.3.9.2 Detailed alignment of LPA/GPA module
All adjustments is to be accessed via the RMM program logged in as level 3 user or higher.
The alignments are to be carried out both for CSB and for SBO. The parameters to read and
adjust for the SBO transmitter are given in brackets after the CSB parameter.
5.3.9.3 List of external test instruments
DDM-meter / PIR
RF-power meter
LF-oscilloscope
5.3.9.4 Loop phase optimisation
NOTE: On GPA 1581A modules with serial no. above 1127 and GPA 1582A with serial no. above
1030 loop phase is preset from the factory and shall not be adjusted.
Explanation:
Provide optimal (symmetrical) operating point for the phase/amplitude feedback signal into the
Error Amplifier.
Open Transmitter settings window. Select PA Adj. tab. Select Transmitter TXx COU. Select
Loop phase tab. Click Enable test mode.
1. Select Tx
2. Activate
4. Adjust 3. Observe
HBK 1407-2
Figure 5-1 Loop Phase Tab
Observe Demodulator CSB/SBO angle measurements, they shall be -135° ±10°.
If the angle range is outside the range, adjust the value for CSB (SBO) Loop until the angle is
within the range given in the adjustment range
For adjustment double click on CSB (SBO) Loop Phase or select the parameter by clicking on
Instruction Manual
it and then click the Edit button.
Deactivate the Enable Test mode.


5.3.9.5 Offset adjustment CSB
Explanation:
Cancel demodulator dc offsets, i.e. provide zero dc output signal with no rf input signal to the
demodulator. In the SBO transmitter set a balanced SBO signal.
Connect a LF oscilloscope to CSB BNC test connector on TXx. Observe the normal demodu-
lated CSB waveform.
CSB
5
CSB
4
0
0 100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800
Select Offset tab. Click Enable test mode. Click on I-signal radio button. Observe feedback
message: Q off.
1. Select Tx
3. Observe
2. Activate
4. Adjust
HBK 1409-1
Instruction Manual
Figure 5-2 Offset Tab

Observe on the scope that the normal CSB waveform has changed to a lower level single
tone demodulated pattern. (Expand the scope level).
CSB: 90 Hz off and DC Offset
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,5
0,5
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Figure 5-3 Before adjustment

CSB: 90 Hz off
4,5
3,5
2,5
1,5
0,5
0
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
Figure 5-4 After adjustment
If the peak values levels are not equal, double click on CSB OFFSET I and adjust the value
until the peak levels are equal. Close the adjustments window.
Click on Q-signal radio button. Observe that text changes to I-Off. If the peak values levels are
not equal, double click on CSB OFFSET Q and adjust the value until the peak levels are
equal. Close the adjustments window.
Instruction Manual

5.3.9.6 Offset adjustment SBO (n/a for GP CLR transmitter)
Explanation:
Cancel demodulator dc offsets, i.e. provide zero dc output signal with no rf input signal to the
demodulator. In the SBO transmitter set a balanced SBO signal.
Move the oscilloscope to the SBO BNC test connector. Observe the normal demodulated
SBO waveform.
SBO: Normal signal
0
0 0,005 0,01 0,015 0,02 0,025 0,03 0,035
Select Offset tab. Click Enable test mode. Click on I-signal radio button. Observe feedback
message: Q off.
1. Select Tx
3. Observe
2. Activate
4. Adjust
Instruction Manual
HBK 1410-1
Figure 5-5 Offset Tab

Observe on the scope that the SBO waveform has decreased in level.
SBO: DC Offset Error
0
0 0,005 0,01 0,015 0,02 0,025 0,03 0,035
Figure 5-6 Before adjustment
SBO: Normal signal
0
0 0,005 0,01 0,015 0,02 0,025 0,03 0,035
Figure 5-7 After adjustment
Look for the smallest level peaks. If the peak values levels are not equal, double click on SBO
OFFSET I and adjust the value until the peak levels are equal. Close the adjustments window.
Click on Q-signal radio button. Observe that text changes to I-Off. If the peak values levels are
not equal, double click on SBO OFFSET Q and adjust the value until the peak levels are
equal. Close the adjustments window.
Deactivate the Enable Test mode.
5.3.9.7 Calibrate internal power measurements
Connect a calibrated power meter to the CSB (SBO) output of the Cabinet. Switch on TXx to
air.
Select Power tab. If the displayed value differs from the external power meter value, adjust
CSB forward Power (SBO forward Power) scaling factor.
Instruction Manual

1. Select Tx
2. Observe
3. Adjust
HBK 1404-1
Figure 5-8 Power Tab
Instruction Manual

5.4 Detailed description of the automatic diagnostic algorithms
5.4.1 Overview
The following sections begins with a description of the diagnostic solutions that may be
reported by the software, then continues with detailed descriptions of the Current data diag-
nostics and the Alarm event diagnostics function.
5.4.2 Possible diagnostic solutions
The following table lists and describes the diagnostic solutions that may be reported by the
diagnostic functions in the RMM software.
Diagnostic solution Description

MONITOR 1 Monitor 1 (MO1820) (LRU)
MONITOR 2 Monitor 2 (MO1820) (LRU)
STDBY MON Standby monitor (MO 1820) (LRU)
LF GENERATOR 1 LF generator 1 (LF 1576) (LRU)
LF GENERATOR 2 LF generator 2 (LF 1576) (LRU)
MONITOR FRONT-END 1 Monitor front-end 1 (MF 1821) (LRU)
MONITOR FRONT-END 2 Monitor front-end 2 (MF 1821) (LRU)
MONITOR FRONT-END Standby monitor front-end (MF 1821) (LRU)
STANDBY
OSCILLATOR 1 Oscillator 1 (OS 1706) (LRU)
OSCILLATOR 2 Oscillator 2 (OS 1706) (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX1 COURSE LPA/GPA TX1 COURSE (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX1 CLEARANCE LPA/GPA TX1 CLEARANCE (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX2 COURSE LPA/GPA TX2 COURSE (LRU)
LPA/GPA TX2 CLEARANCE LPA/GPA TX2 CLEARANCE (LRU)
RMS BOARD RMS board (RMA 1822) (LRU)
POWER SUPPLY 1 Power supply 1 (PS 1227) (LRU)
POWER SUPPLY 2 Power supply 2 (PS 1227) (LRU)
EXTERNAL POWER External power.
EXTERNAL FACTOR An external factor influencing monitor measurements.
COMMON CABLING Cabling or any part of the system that is common for
the transmitters or monitor system, e.g. antenna ele-
ment, cable, distribution- or monitoring networks.
TX CONTROL TX control board (TCA 1218) (LRU)
REMOTE CONTROL Remote control unit (RCA 1750) (LRU) or its commu-
nication link.
ANTENNA SYSTEM Antenna system.
USER INPUT User defined input on CI 1748 is in warning state.
UNABLE TO ISOLATE The diagnostic function was unable to determine a
possible faulty module.
Instruction Manual

5.4.3 Current data diagnostics
The following sub-sections describes the tests performed by the RMM software for current
data diagnostics. All diagnostic solutions detected are recorded and presented to the opera-
tor. If a diagnostic solution is found to be the result of more than one test, the solution that is
the result of most tests will be listed first.
5.4.3.1 I2C read error on any board implies a failure on that board
If a board is reported with “ERROR” status there is probably a fault on this board. “ERROR”
indicates that the RMS does not detect valid I2C-bus acknowledge signals from the board
when attempting to read its maintenance data. All boards, except the TX Control board, in the
NORMARC 70XXB cabinet have an I2C-interface to the RMS board.
Note: If several boards are indicated with “ERROR” status, the problem may be a faulty I2C interface
on the RMS board, or any of the boards may have a “stuck-at” error on the I2C bus signals. If
both the COU and CLR transmitters are instructed with “ERROR” status, the problem may be a
faulty I2C interface or RMS bus communication with the corresponding LF generator board.
5.4.3.2 Maintenance parameter warnings
5.4.3.2.1 External power supply tests
DIAGNOSTIC ALGORITHM:
If there is a maintenance warning indication (Battery Warning) for the external Power Supply,
there is a problem with the 27V supply (output), the rectifier modules or the system is on bat-
tery operation (mains fail).
Depending on the configuration of the alarm outputs on the Power Supply, the Battery Warn-
ing will normally be indicated in case of 2 or more of the redundant rectifier modules in operat-
ing parallel are failing. An optional output can be wired to the ILS cabinet, and will provide a
warning if only one of the rectifier modules is failing in which case the Power Supply is fully
operational but with some reduction in output power headroom. Normally this alarm is wired to
User I/O channel 2 for BC 1361H and User I/O Channel 2 and 3 for BC 1361J.
5.4.3.2.2 Power supply 1 and 2 tests
1. If there is a maintenance warning indication on power supply 1 and not on power sup-
ply 2, or vice versa, there is a fault on the power supply which has the warning
2. If there is a maintenance warning on both power supply boards AND not on the exter-
nal power module both power supplies are faulty
Instruction Manual

5.4.3.2.3 Maintenance warnings without follow-errors
A maintenance warning on a board listed in the following table indicates that there is a fault on
that board.
Board
LF generator 1 or 2
Oscillator 1 or 2
RMS board
Monitor 1 or 2
TX Control board
User defined inputs
5.4.3.2.4 Power amplifier tests
Warnings on a PA implies PA failure if there is no warning or error on the corresponding OS or

LF.
DESCRIPTION:
The algorithm assumes that a warning indication on any of the measurements on a PA means
there is a failure on this PA, if the corresponding OS and LF have no maintenance warning
indications. (A fault on the OS and LF may cause a warning on the PA.)
5.4.3.2.5 Monitor 1 and 2 front-end tests
Warning on monitor front-end 1 implies monitor front-end 1 failure if there is no warning on

monitor front-end 2 and vice versa.
DESCRIPTION:
The maintenance measurements from the monitor front-end boards will be affected by the
monitor input signals, i.e. the diagnostic algorithm can not use these measurements alone to
reliably diagnose fault on the monitor front-end boards. The algorithm assumes that both
front-ends are fed the same input signals. If a maintenance warning then exists on one, but
not both of the boards, this board is assumed to be faulty. If maintenance warnings exists on
both boards no knowledge is gained about monitor front-end health status.
Instruction Manual

5.4.3.2.6 Remote control tests
If there is a “RC link status” warning, there is a problem with the remote control or its data link.
DESCRIPTION:
A warning on the RC link status indicates that the TXC does not receive valid data from the
remote control unit.
5.4.3.2.7 Transmitter control tests
TX control “EPROM check” or “Integrity check” warnings indicate a failure on the TXC board.
5.4.3.2.8 Standby monitor tests
If there is a warning on the standby monitor board this board is faulty.
5.4.3.2.9 Standby monitor front-end tests
If there is a warning on the standby monitor front-end board AND there is no warning or alarm
indication on the standby monitor measurements then the standby monitor front-end board is
faulty.
5.4.3.2.10 User defined parameters
If there is a warning on any of the user defined inputs then “User defined input” is faulty.
5.4.3.3 Monitor self-test error
Monitor self-test failure indicates an error on the monitor board that reports this failure.
5.4.3.4 Monitor DC-loop alarm
Instruction Manual
If both monitor 1 AND monitor 2 reports DC-loop alarms or warnings the antenna has a broken
element.

5.4.3.5 Monitor warning tests
Figure 5-9 illustrates the tests done by the RMM software for automatically diagnosing faults
that result in monitor 1 and 2 warning indications.
Start monitor
warning tests.
CL or DS CLR warning
NF warning on DF warning on
warning on both No No on both No
both monitors? both monitors?
monitors? monitors?
Yes Yes No
Yes
Yes
Warning on NF
RF on one or No
Warning on both mon.?
Yes
active OS?
Yes
No
Active OS is faulty
Common cabling is "External factor" is

Warning on faulty reported as faulty.
Yes
active LF?
No Active LF is faulty
Active course or
clearance PA is faulty
Monitor warning
tests done.
Figure 5-9 Flow diagram for Monitor warning tests
5.4.3.6 Monitor disagree
If one monitor indicates delayed warning, raw alarm or alarm on any parameter and the other
Instruction Manual
monitor does not, then the monitor which indicates the delayed warning, raw alarm or alarm is
probably faulty.

5.4.4 Alarm event diagnostics
5.4.4.1 Changeover without shutdown
The flow diagram in Figure 5-10 describes the algorithm used to diagnosing a changeover
alarm that is not followed by a shutdown alarm. The RMM software uses the maximum config-
ured monitor alarm delay to determine whether a changeover alarm is followed by a shut-
down. If no shutdown alarm event occurred within the maximum configured alarm delay after
the changeover alarm event this algorithm will be used.
No maintenance
Start changeover
warnings
diagnostics
CL or DS Main COU TX is
Maint warn on Main OS is faulty Yes
Yes alarm? faulty
main OS?
No
No
External obstruction
NF alarm? Yes is blocking signal
Maint warn on
Yes Main LF is faulty
main LF?
No
No
Main CLR TX is
CLR alarm? Yes
faulty
Maint warn on Main COU TX is
Yes
main COU TX? faulty
No
No
DF alarm? Yes Main OS is faulty

Maint warn on Main CLR TX is
Yes
main CLR TX? faulty
No
No
Unable to diagnose
fault
No maintenance
warnings
Changeover
diagnose done
Figure 5-10 Flow diagram for diagnosing a changeover-only alarm
5.4.4.2 Changeover with subsequent shutdown
A changeover alarm event that is followed by a shutdown alarm event within the maximum
Instruction Manual
configured monitor delay will be diagnosed as described in this section. The algorithm used
depends on the voting configuration.

5.4.4.3 Algorithm for systems with 2/2 voting
Figure 5-11 shows the flow diagram for diagnosing changeover/shutdown situations on sys-
tems with 2/2 voting.
DESCRIPTION:
The algorithm is based on the fact that a fault (in a 2/2 voting system) which causes a com-
plete shutdown, must be some point that is common for the transmitter section and the moni-
toring section.
Start changeover/
shutdown diagnose.
Is NF DDM or SDM External obstruction

alarm the cause of Yes
is faulty.
both alarms?
No
Is there maint.
The TXC board is
warnings on the Yes
faulty.
TXC board?
No
Common cabling is
faulty.
No
Changeover/ shutdown
diagnose done.
Figure 5-11 Flow diagram for diagnosing changeover/shutdown alarms

Instruction Manual

SECTION 6 PARTS LIST
6 Section 6 Parts List
6.1 Parts Lists
This section contains a tabulation of electrical and certain mechanical assemblies and parts;
i.e. chassis-mounted components, circuit cards assemblies, and modules of the equipment to
the lowest replaceable unit (LRU).
6.1.1 Explanation of Parts List Form

• Symbol/Item No.: References the symbol and item no. for each replaceable electronic
part in the equipment
• Fig. No.: Lists the figure no of the illustration in which the part is shown
• Manufacturers Part No.: Indra Navia AS part number
Instruction Manual

6.1.2 Parts Lists
6.1.2.1 Main Rack
Electronic Subsystems group
Manufacturers Part No
Qty/ 7012B
Qty/ 7013B
Qty/ 7014B
Qty/ 7031B
Qty/ 7032B
Qty/ 7033B
Qty/ 7011B
Qty/7034B
Symbol/ Fig
Description
Item No No
NM 7011B 6-1 NORMARC 7011B Localizer Cabinet 73425 X -

NM 7012B 6-1 NORMARC 7012B Localizer Cabinet 73426 - X
NM 7013B 6-2 NORMARC 7013B Localizer Cabinet 73427 X -
NM 7014B 6-2 NORMARC 7014B Localizer Cabinet 73428 - X
NM 7031B 6-3 NORMARC 7031B Glide Path Cabinet 73433 X -
NM 7032B 6-3 NORMARC 7032B Glide Path Cabinet 73434 - X
NM 7033B 6-4 NORMARC 7033B Glide Path Cabinet 73435 X -
NM 7034B 6-4 NORMARC 7034B Glide Path Cabinet 73436 - X
CB1, CB2 6-1 to Circuit Breaker 23130 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

6-4
M2 6-1 to Cover Plate 22479 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6-4
M1 6-1 to Front Panel, Top 22488 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6-4
M4 6-1, Front Panel 22537 2 2 - - 2 2 - -
6-3
M5 6-1 to Collar Screw 22486 24 24 24 24 24 24 24 24
6-4
SPL 6-5 to Power splitter 11533 3 3 4 4 3 3 4 4
6-8
MF 1821A 6-1 to MF 1821A LOC Monitor Front-end 25150 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3

6-4
PS 1227D 6-1 to PS 1227D Power Supply 24409 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
6-4
OS 1706A 6-1 to OS 1706A LOC RF-oscillator 24144 2 2 2 2 - - - -
6-4
OS 1706B 6-1 to OS 1706B LOC RF-oscillator 24324 - - - - 2 2 2 2
6-4
MO 1820A 6-1 to MO 1820A Monitor 25149 2 3 2 3 2 3 2 3
6-4
MB 1575A 6-5 to MB 1575A Motherboard 22390 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6-8
TCA 1218C 6-1 to TCA 1218C TX Control Assembly 74386 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6-4
RMA 1822A 6-1 to RMA 1822A RMS Assembly 70613 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
6-4
Instruction Manual
LF 1576A 6-1 to LF 1576A LF-generator 22441 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

6-4
LPA 1580A 6-1, LPA 1580A LOC Power Amp. Assy 22272 2 2 4 4 - - - -
6-2

Qty/ 7012B
Qty/ 7013B
Qty/ 7014B
Qty/ 7031B
Qty/ 7032B
Qty/ 7033B
Qty/ 7011B
Qty/7034B
Symbol/ Fig
Description
Item No No
GPA 1581A 6-3, GPA 1581A GP Power Amp. Assy 22273 - - - - 2 2 2 2

6-4
GPA 1582A 6-3, GPA 1582A GP Power Amp. Assy 22274 - - - - - - 2 2
6-4
CO 1837B 6-5, CO 1837B Changeover LOC 70740 1 1 2 2 - - - -
6-6
CO 1838B 6-7. CO 1838B Changeover GP COU 70743 - - - - 1 1 1 1
6-8
CO 1838C 6-8 CO 1838C Changeover GP CLR 70744 - - - - - - 1 1
DL1, DL2 6-5 to Dummy Load 21980 1 1 2 2 - - - -

6-6
DL1 6-7 to Dummy Load 10602 - - - - 1 1 1 1
6-8
CI 1748A 6-9 CI 1748A Connection Interface Board 24597 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

PC 1749A 6-9 PC 1749A Power Connection 24493 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
F1 6-9 Fuse 13367 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
J8,J21,J26 6-9 Connector (CI 1748) 12408 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
J29 6-9 Connector (CI 1748) 12406 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
J3 6-9 Connector (PC 1749) 12408 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2
Battery Circuit Breaker 20332 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 4

6-10 BC 1361 K Battery Charger 71014 1 - 1 - 1 - 1 -
6-10 BC 1361 L Battery Charger 71109 - 2 - 2 - 2 - 2
Battery, 50Ah 24979 - - - - - - - 4
Battery, 90Ah 25226 2 4 2 4 2 4 2 -
Instruction Manual

6.1.2.2 Battery Chargers BC1361K/L
Symbol/ Fig
Description Manufactures Part No BC 1361
Item No No
K L
6-10 Rectifier Module 25230 4 3
6-10 Controller Module 25231 1 1
CB1, CB2 6-10 Circuit Breaker 71004 2 2
CB1, CB2 6-10 Aux Switch 71006 2 2
CB3 6-10 Circuit Breaker 71005 1 1
6.1.2.3 Tower Equipment
Qty/ 7012B
Qty/ 7013B
Qty/ 7014B
Qty/ 7031B
Qty/ 7032B
Qty/ 7033B
Qty/ 7011B
Qty/7034B
Symbol/ Fig
Description
Item No No
RCA 1750B Remote Control Assy 24634 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

MB 1753A Motherboard 24500 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2
CSA 1816A Category Status Assembly 25073 N.1 N.1 N.1 N.1 N.1 N.1 N.1 N.1
MB 1801A Motherboard 25006 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2 N.2
Note 1: Optional Item
Note 2: MB 1801A or MB 1753A are used in RC sub-rack
Instruction Manual

6.1.2.4 Test Equipment
Qty/ 7012B
Qty/ 7013B
Qty/ 7014B
Qty/ 7031B
Qty/ 7032B
Qty/ 7033B
Qty/ 7011B
Qty/7034B
Symbol/ Fig
Description
Item No No
SKA 1229B Service Kit Assy 22945 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

EB 1349B Extension Board 73769 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
EB 1245A Coax cable Ext. Board 18662 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Instruction Manual

6.2 Figures
&%&%
&RYHU
PPQRWVKRZQ
36
0) 26
0) 0%
10%RQO\
)& /)
2SWLRQDO
02
&RYHU
02
PPQRWVKRZQ
10%RQO\
&RYHU 50$
PPQRWVKRZQ
7&$
/3$
&RYHU
PP
+%.
VOGGUZ
Figure 6-1 NORMARC 7011B-7012B LOC cabinet

Instruction Manual

&%&% &RYHU
PPQRWVKRZQ
36
26
0)
0) 0%
10%RQO\
)& /)
2SWLRQDO
02
02
10%RQO\ &RYHU
PPQRWVKRZQ
&RYHU
PPQRWVKRZQ 50$
7&$
/3$
+%.
VOGGUZ
Figure 6-2 NORMARC 7013B-7014B LOC cabinet

Instruction Manual

&%&%
&RYHU
PPQRWVKRZQ
36
0) 26
0%
0)
10%RQO\
/)
02
02
10%RQO\ &RYHU
PPQRWVKRZQ
&RYHU 50$
PPQRWVKRZQ
7&$
*3$
&RYHU
PP
+%.
VOGGUZ
Figure 6-3 NORMARC 7031B-7032B GP cabinet

Instruction Manual

&%&%
&RYHU
PPQRWVKRZQ
36
0) 26
0%
0)
10%RQO\
/)
02
02
10%RQO\ &RYHU
PPQRWVKRZQ
&RYHU 50$
PPQRWVKRZQ
7&$
*3$
*3$
+%.
VOGGUZ
Figure 6-4 NORMARC 7033B-7034B GP cabinet

Instruction Manual

&DELQHW
6SOLWWHU
%DFNSODQH
0%
0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW &2%
'XPP\ORDG
'/
0RXQWHGRQWRSRIWKHFDELQHW
+%. RQ1250$5&%
VOGGUZ
Figure 6-5 NORMARC 7011B-7012B LOC Cabinet, Rear View
&DELQHW
%DFNSODQH
0% 6SOLWWHU
&/5 &28
&2% &2%
0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW
'XPP\ORDG
'/
'XPP\ORDG
'/
Instruction Manual
+%. 0RXQWHGRQWRSRIWKHFDELQHW
VOGGUZ RQ1250$5&%
Figure 6-6 NORMARC 7013B-7014B LOC Cabinet, Rear View

&DELQHW
6SOLWWHU
%DFNSODQH
0%
&28
&2%
0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW
'XPP\ORDG
'/
0RXQWHGRQWRSRIWKHFDELQHW
+%.
RQ1250$5&%
VOGGUZ
Figure 6-7 NORMARC 7031B-7032B GP Cabinet, Rear View
&DELQHW
6SOLWWHU
%DFNSODQH
0%
&/5 &28
&2& &2%
0RXQWLQJEUDFNHW
'XPP\ORDG
'/
'XPP\ORDG
'/ 0RXQWHGRQWRSRIWKHFDELQHW
RQ1250$5&%
Instruction Manual
+%.
VOGGUZ
Figure 6-8 NORMARC 7033B-7034B GP Cabinet, Rear View


!

Instruction Manual
Figure 6-9 NORMARC 70xxB LOC & GP cabinet, wall mount side

BC 1361K only
Rectifier Module
Controller Module
CB1 CB2 CB3
HBK 2156-3
Figure 6-10 BC 1361K &BC 1361L Battery Charger, with and without cover
Instruction Manual

PS 1227
MF 1821 OS 1706
MF 1821 MB 1575
(NM 7012B only)
FC 1391 LF 1576
(Optional)
MO 1820
MO 1820
(NM 7012B only)
RMA 1822
TCA 1218
LPA 1580 /
GPA 1581
LPA 1580 /
GPA 1582
HBK 2217-2
(slddrw)
Figure 6-11 NORMARC 7000B Cabinet

Instruction Manual

SECTION 7 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SET-UP
7 Section 7 Installation and Initial Set-up
7.1 Mechanical Installation
The NORMARC 70XXB cabinet is designed for mounting on a wall. For easy operation, the
keyboard/display section should be in eye/shoulder height (140-160cm). The RF connectors
may be mounted either on the cabinet top or the cabinet bottom. The free space required
around the cabinet is approximately one by one meter, see Figure 7-1
1.0m
0.9m
HBK594-2
Figure 7-1 NORMARC 70XXB required mounting space (top view)
7.1.1 Mounting Kit MK 1343A
If the wall is not able to carry the weight of the cabinet (see technical specifications),
Indra Navia AS supplies a wall mounting kit, MK 1343A. This kit is dimensioned for standard
60 cm space between studs. For easy mounting, place the cabinet on the rest screws (B)
before entering the mounting screws (A). This is shown in the enlarged view in Figure 7-2
Instruction Manual

A Screw M8x25
Split lock washer M8
Flat washer M8
(Both sides)
Figure 7-2 NORMARC 70XXB mounted on wall with MK 1343A

Instruction Manual

600
Hex. Screw 8x50 (B16)

Washer M8
808
606
1855 - 1890
919 - 954
Adjust. screw
HBK 1260-1
Figure 7-3 Wall mount dimensions (MK 1343A)

Instruction Manual

7.1.2 Moving RF Connectors
If desired the RF connectors may be moved from the cabinet top to the bottom or vice versa,
as illustrated in Figure 7-4. The back section (F) of the main cabinet has similar hole patterns
in the top and bottom flange. To move the connectors, follow these steps:
Remove all rubber grommets from the holes.
Disconnect all coaxial cables from the feed-through connectors.
Remove all feed-through connectors.
Move the metal bracket with anti-turn holes from the bottom to the top while disconnecting the
grounding strap from the lower end of the L-shaped vertical rail and reconnecting at the top or
vice versa.
Reinstall the feed-through connectors in the new position.
Reconnect the coaxial cables.
Reinsert the rubber grommets in all open holes.
Instruction Manual

Figure 7-4 Moving RF connectors

Instruction Manual

7.2 Electrical Installation
This paragraph describes the external electrical connections of the NORMARC 700XXB main
cabinet.
7.2.1 Connection Overview
The ILS main cabinet has three connector groups, illustrated in Figure 7-6
• The ILS RF signals to and from the antenna system are connected at the bottom of the
main cabinet. These connectors may be moved to the top, see Mechanical Installation
• The power supply (supplies) and the backup battery are connected to the power con-
nector rail inside the cabinet back section
• All other external connections are sited on the Connection Interface board CI 1748A
inside the cabinet back section
POWER RAIL CONNECTIONS
POWER +27V
SUPPLY 0V
+27V
BATTERY
0V
CI 1210 CONNECTIONS
4 DC LOOPS
3 RS 232
1 REMOTE CONTROL
1 DME
2 TEMP SENSORS
1 AC LEVEL MEASUREMENT
3 DIFFERENTIAL ANALOG
CABLE FEEDTHROUGH 8 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT
1 IIC EXTENSION
RF CONNECTIONS
NF
IN DS
CL
COU/CSB
OUT
COU/SBO
HBK640-3
Figure 7-5 ILS main cabinet connection overview for NORMARC 7011B/12B/31B/32B
Instruction Manual

PC 1749A CONNECTIONS
POWER +27V
SUPPLY 0V
+27V
BATTERY
0V
CI 1748A CONNECTIONS
4 DC LOOPS
3 RS 232
1 REMOTE CONTROL / RMM
1 DME
2 TEMP SENSORS
1 AC LEVEL MEASUREMENT
8 DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT
4 DIGITAL IN
CABLE FEEDTHROUGH
RF CONNECTIONS
NF
IN DS
CL
CLR
COU/CSB
COU/SBO
OUT
CLR/CSB
HBK574-4
CLR/SBO
Figure 7-6 ILS main cabinet connection overview NORMARC 7013B/14B/33B/34B
Instruction Manual

7.2.2 Power and Battery
7.2.2.1 BC 1361K/L
This description applies to the following versions:

• BC 1361K: 960W charger system using 4 rectifier modules, single mains, single bat-
tery bank (not part of the BC1361 unit) and one set of interconnection cables. One BC
1361K is used for cold standby systems.
• BC 1361L: 720W charger system using 3 rectifier modules, single mains, single bat-
tery bank (not part of the BC1361 unit) and one set of interconnection cables. Two
BC 1361Ls are used for hot standby systems.
BC 1361K and L are identical except for the number of rectifier modules operating in parallel,
and the configuration file uploaded to the controller modules. This installation procedure will
refer to the installation of a single BC 1361K. For hot standby systems, follow the same proce-
dure for charger #2.
Cabinet mounting
The charger cabinet is mounted on the ILS wall mount, under the ILS cabinet:
HBK 2155-1
Figure 7-7 BC 1361K on wall mount
Assembly and Interconnection
All cables (except mains) and power supply modules inside the charger are installed by the
factory. In order to connect the mains cable, the cover has to be removed to gain access to the
connection terminals.
Instruction Manual
To prevent damage to during transport, two foam inserts are mounted in the charger. These
foam inserts must be removed before the charger is connected to mains power. Failure to do
so will prevent the necessary convection cooling of the rectifier modules

HBK 2185-1
HBK 2184-1
Figure 7-8 Shows packing the foam for transport
Make sure that none of the signal wires are damaged when removing the insert between the
rectifier/control modules and the circuit breakers.
The foam inserts should be kept for future use (if the complete charger should need to be
returned to the factory).
If the control module/rectifiers need to be replaced, please refer to installation procedure

Figure 7-9 for mounting of the modules. Configuration of replacement controller modules in
BC 1361K or BC 1361L is described in the NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual. Additional
instructions on how to configure the Compack controller and the PowerSuite software required
to do so, are available for downloading in the Help & Support section at
http://www.eltek.com
If installation or replacement of a module is necessary, please refer to installation procedure

Figure 7-9 for mounting of the modules. How to configure the controller at replacement in
BC 1361K or BC 1361L is described in the Appendix C.
Instruction Manual

HBK 2160-1
Figure 7-9 Mounting Instructions for Controller and Rectifier
Interconnect the BC 1361K/L charger cabinet and the NORMARC 7000B ILS cabinet accord-
ing to the tables and figures on the next pages using the cables included.
The cables are connected to the screw terminals on the PC 1749 and the CI 1748 board(s)
inside the ILS cabinet. The other end of the cables is pre-installed to screw terminals and cir-
cuit breakers on the DIN rail and to alarm outputs on the controller unit in the BC 1361K/L
charger cabinet.
The two batteries normally supplied shall be connected in series using the supplied intercon-
nection (shunt) bar (plus from one to minus on the next). Connect the battery wires - note that
red wire shall be connected to the free plus pole and black wire to the free minus pole on the
batteries.
Instruction Manual
Finally, route the mains cable through the rightmost cable gland in the charger cabinet, and
connect mains to the mains terminals/Circuit breakers. An additional grounding terminal is
available next to the mains terminal in case a separate grounding is required.

BC 1361K Battery Charger:
PC 1749A BC 1361K Wire Comment

J1: Load supply (output): AWG10:
CHG (1) CB2 (Load +) Blue Ferrites in PC 1749 end
GND (3) - terminal (Load -) Black Ferrites in PC 1749 end
J1: Battery supply: AWG10:

BATT+ (6) CB1 (Battery +) Red
GND (5) - terminal (Battery -) Black
3x2pair cable
type 5473
P3: Auxiliary switch on CB1:
AUX (1) Terminal 22 (NC) Red Battery Isolated
GND (2) Terminal 21+ (C) Black (pair 1)
P3: Controller:
WARN A (3) Alarm Relay outp. 1 NC (3) Green Charger/Mains fail
GND (4) Alarm Relay outp. 1 C (1) Black (pair 2)
CI 1748A
Dig I/O#1 Controller:
User_DIG_2 (5) Alarm Relay outp. 2 NC (6) White Single Rectifier fail
Instruction Manual

Main Input
L
N
6
4
3
1
L
N
-
-
Figure 7-10 Interconnection BC 1361K and BC 1361L (charger 1)

Instruction Manual

BC 1361L:
Battery charger #1 is connected to the upper PC 1749A in the ILS cabinet. Charger #2 is con-
nected to the lower PC 1749A.
BC 1361L Battery Charger #1:
Upper PC 1749A BC 1361L #1 Wire Comment

CHG (1) BC2 (Load +) Blue Ferrites in PC 1749 end

3x2pair cable
type 5473
P3: Controller:
CI 1748A
Instruction Manual

BC 1361L Battery Charger #2:
Lower PC 1749A BC 1361L #2 Wire Comment

CHG (1) BC2 (Load +) Blue Ferrites in PC 1749 end

3x2pair cable
type 5473
P3: Controller:
CI 1748A
Instruction Manual

7.2.3 RF Inputs
The RF inputs are:

• Course Line - CL
• Near Field Antenna - NF
• Displacement Sensitivity - DS
• Clearance - CLR (two frequency applications only) (NM 7013B/14B/33B/34B Only)
These are connected as shown in Figure 7-11 and Figure 7-12 (front view).
HBK577-2 NF CL CLR DS
Figure 7-11 RF input connections - 2 Freq, NORMARC 7013B/14B/33B/34B
HBK641-3 DS
NF CL
Figure 7-12 RF input connections NORMARC 7011B/12B/31B/32B
Instruction Manual

7.2.4 RF Outputs
The RF outputs are connected as illustrated in Figure 7-13. The connections are:
All applications:
• COU SBO - COUrse Tx Side Band Only
• COU CSB - COUrse Tx Carrier and Side Band
Two frequency applications:

• CLR SBO - CLeaRance Tx SideBand Only
• CLR CSB - CLeaRance Tx Carrier and SideBand
HBK2242-1
CLR CLR
SBO CSB
SBO CSB
2.freq. Only
Figure 7-13 RF output connections
Instruction Manual

7.2.5 DC-Loop (Localizer only)
The DC-loops are connected to the Connection Interface board CI 1748A in the cabinet back
section. Location and pin out are illustrated in Figure 7-14
• Ch X in* are the reference voltages from the main cabinet
• Ch X out* are the return voltages from the antennas
• GND is main cabinet ground
Suitable female connectors are Weidemüller BLZ-5.08/6 or equivalent.

!#
!#
$& #
#
#
.
$"

$"!''
$"!''
$"!''
$"!''
$"!''
$"!''
$"!''
$"!''
!
%'$"
%'$"
#
$#!
#!$!
!'

" !

%
!!
%
!

%

,/+'

$" ,/+'
.
"42(1 ,/3+24+* &

"
"
"
! 2040)0- (4( "1++* 0//+)4,0/
! !!
,/+
& ! !! !"
#0
& ! ! /-5

,/+
& & ! ! /-5 !"
& "
! /-5 ,/+
#$! !!" "# ##!" ! & & "
! /-5 !"
!% #" %! $# # %! & & "
! /-5 !"
& & & !
! /-5 !"
#! "!% "42(1 "

,/3+24+* ! 2202 *+-(5 3

! ! ! ! !# !!

$" # $" !# $" !" !" !"
' '
$#'
$#' $#
'
'
#' $#
#'
' '

Figure 7-14 DC-loop connections

Instruction Manual

7.2.6 Remote Control
The remote control is connected to the Connection Interface board CI 1748A as illustrated in
Figure 7-15. The connection of the remote control, remote slave panel and interlock switch is
done at the remote control site and covered in Section 7.2.13 - 7.2.1.18.
• FSK_[P,N] is the modem line pair
• GND is main cabinet ground
Or
• Line on RS-232 is dependent on the procol setting, refer to 7.3.4.1 and 7.3.4.2
A suitable female connector is Weidemüller BLZ-5.08/4 or equivalent.
Figure 7-15 Remote control connection

Instruction Manual

7.2.7 PC and Modem
PC terminals and modems are connected to the standard pin out RS 232, 9 pins DSUB con-
nectors. The Remote 1 and Remote 2 connectors are located on the Connection Interface
board CI 1748A as illustrated in Figure 7-16. The Local connector can either be connected to
the connector on the front of the cabinet or to the CI board. Refer to 7.2.20 S1-S4. On the
CI board, RS-232 or USB is automatically selected.
Recommended connections are:

• LOCAL - the PC located at the ILS main cabinet site
• REMOTE 1 - the PC located at the airport technical maintenance site
• REMOTE 2 - distant PC terminals connected directly or through a modem
NOTE: REMOTE 1 is not available when a combined RC/RMM protocol is selected for the RC connec-
tion
Figure 7-16 PC and modem connections

Instruction Manual

7.2.8 DME (LOC Only)
7.2.8.1 DME LOC Ident synchronisation
Distance Measurement Equipment DME is connected to the Connection Interface board CI

1748A as illustrated in Figure 7-17.
• ACT_DME[P,N] is the positive and negative terminal of the DME active signal from the
DME, respectively
• IN_DME[P,N] is the positive and negative terminal of the Morse code envelope signal
or start pulse from the DME, respectively
• OUT_DME[P,N] is the positive and negative terminal of the Morse code envelope sig-
nal or start pulse to the DME, respectively
Note! Observe polarity on all signals
A suitable female connector is Weidmüller BLZ-5.08/6 or equivalent.
Figure 7-17 DME connections

Instruction Manual

7.2.8.2 LOC as Ident Master (direct connection)
This is the preferred configuration. Also refer to 7.2.8.5 for keying via Remote Control Units.
When the LOC shall be used as ident master, connect as shown in Figure 7-18 or Figure 7-19.
In the RMM program, ILS settings / Transmitter settings, DME interface tab (see Appendix D),
set LOC as master and the DME active signal according to the DME’s manual. The IDENT
TYPE can be set to CODE or PULSE. If set to CODE, the LOC will send the Morse code
envelope to the DME. If set to PULSE, the LOC send a start pulse to the DME. When the DME
is active, the LOC will send every forth ident word to the DME. When the DME is inactive the
LOC will be keying four out of four words. If the LOC shall be keying three out of four words
whether the DME is active or not, disconnect the DME ACTIVE wires and program the DME
active signal to OPEN.
NM 701x LOC
CI 1748
+27Vdc
2.7K
a 1 S1
1 2 3
S2
DME ACTIVE 1 2 3
b 2
S3
1 2 3
3 S4
1 2 3
V+
S5
4 1 2 3
S6
1 2 3
c 5
S7
1 2 3
IDENT TO DME
d 6
S8
1 2 3
DME P8
connector
HBK2035-1
Figure 7-18 LOC master connections (recommended)
Figure 7-18 shows the recommended configuration for colocation with Fernau 2020 and
Thales 415 DMEs’, refer to the DME handbook for configuration of the DME.
DME connector assignments:
Figure 7-18 Indra LDB-103 Fernau Thales

IDENT IN/OUT SK 2 SK4 (AF1, default) SK5 (AF2, alternate)
a Not used Not used 17 17
b Not used Not used 4 4
c 2 6 14 14
Instruction Manual
d 10 7 1 1

ILS
DME CI 1748
v+
1 S1
+ 1 2 3
2.7K
DME ACTIVE S2
2 1 2 3
-
S3
1 2 3
3 S4
1 2 3
S5
4 1 2 3
S6
+27Vdc
1 2 3
5 15k
+
S7
IDENT TO DME 1 2 3
6
- S8
1 2 3
P8
HBK2036-1
Figure 7-19 LOC master connections (alternative)
Figure 7-19 shows an alternative configuration of the keyer outputs with loop current sourced
from the outputs. This is set by S1, S2 and S3 for the DME active signal and with S7 and S8
for the Ident signal. Refer to Figure 7-20 for circuit details.
Instruction Manual
Figure 7-20 Circuit Diagram, LOC master

7.2.8.3 DME as Ident Master
In some installations, it may be necessary to use the DME as ident master.
If the DME shall be used as ident master, connect as shown in Figure 7-21. In the RMM pro-
gram, ILS settings / Transmitter settings, DME interface tab (see Appendix D), set DME as
master and DME active signal to OPEN. The IDENT TYPE can be set to CODE or PULSE. If
set to CODE, the LOC will receive the Morse code envelope from the DME. If set to PULSE,
the LOC will radiate its own programmed Morse code when it receives a start pulse from the
DME. If the LOC does not receive any ident signal for approximately 20 seconds, the LOC will
start to transmit its own programmed Morse code. When the DME signal returns, the LOC will
start to transmit the DME code instantaneously.
ILS
DME CI 1748
1 S1
1 2 3
S2
2 1 2 3
S3
1 2 3
3 S4
1 2 3
2.7K S5
IDENT FROM DME 4 1 2 3
S6
1 2 3
5
S7
1 2 3
6
S8
1 2 3
HBK 2037-1 P8
Figure 7-21 DME master connections
Current sourcing from the DME is shown, current can be sourced from the LOC by moving S4,
S5 and S6 to position 1-2. Refer to Figure 7-22 for details.
Instruction Manual
Figure 7-22 Circuit diagram, DME master

7.2.8.4 LOC as Ident Master via Remote Controls (Indra)
7.2.8.4.1 Via LOC-GP Remote Control
LOCALIZER SHELTERLOCALIZER SHELTER
NORMARC 7000B Localizer:
Connect a PC to the Localizer cabinet and use the RMM program to set the Localizer to be
the “Ident Keying Master” and to send the Ident as a “Pulse”, not as “Code” (Transmitter set-
tings > DME interface > Keying master: LOC, and Ident type: Pulse).
On the motherboard of the Localizer cabinet (MB 1575), insert jumper “S11”.
This will transfer the Ident Sync Pulse from the LOC (AUX_RI_IN2) to the Remote Control
(AUX_RC_OUT2).
TECHNICAL ROOM
NORMARC Remote Control:
On the motherboard of the Remote Control (MB 1753), there is a D-sub connector which is
common for station 1 (LOC) and station 2 (GP). On this D-sub connector “P14”, make a con-
nection (loop) from pin no. 10 (LOC AUX_RC_1_OUT2) to pin no. 15 (GP AUX_RC_2_IN2).
This will transfer the Ident Sync Pulse from LOC to GP.
Configuration of RCA1750 for Localizer:
Due to that the Indra DME is trigging on the falling edge, the trigger pulse from the Localizer
has to be inverted. This can be done by setting strap “S32“(CFG_AUX2_OUTPUT_INVERT)
on the Localizer RCA 1750.
GLIDE PATH / DME SHELTER
NORMARC 7000B Glide Path:
Make a 2-wire cable to transfer the Ident Sync Pulse from the Glide Path cabinet to the DME
cabinet.
On the motherboard of the Glide Path cabinet (MB 1575), connect the cable to the connector
“P15”, pin no. 7 (AUX_RI_OUT2) and pin no. 10 (GND).
Indra DME LDB-103:
On the NMP/EIU unit of Indra DME, connect the 2-wire cable to the D-sub connector “Ident
In/Out”, pin no. 2 (Ident In) and pin no. 10 (GND).
This will make the DME receive the Ident Sync Pulse coming from the Localizer (via the RC
and the GP motherboard).
Instruction Manual

Configuring the DME:
Connect a PC to the DME (using Firefox) to configure the Ident settings. Log on as “Installer”
and go to Configuration > Installation:
1. TXU Controls, Ident Association Mode: Select “Trigger Receiver”
2. TXU Controls, ID Code Selection: Select “First”
3. MTU Controls, Ident Code Transmitted: Select “Code 1”
Remember to scroll down to the bottom of the page and press the common “Apply”-button to
activate all the tree settings. Then press the relevant “Write to Flash”-buttons to save the set-
tings.
LOC Shelter Technical Room GP / DME Shelter

LOC RC GP DME
RCA 1750
RCA 1750
(LOC)
(GP)
MB 1575 MB 1575
S11 S32 Pin 7

MB 1753
P15
Pin 10
to 15
P14
NMP/EIU
Pin 2
Ident In/Out
HBK 2211-1
Figure 7-23 Keying Interconnection
Instruction Manual

7.2.8.4.2 Via LOC- DME Remote Control
When DME uses RTU 1874 as Remote Control interface and RCA 1750 as a Remote Control,
keying can be configured as described here.
LOCALIZER SHELTER
NORMARC 7000B Localizer:
Connect a PC to the Localizer cabinet and use the RMM program to set the Localizer to be
the “Ident Keying Master” and to send the Ident as a “Pulse”, not as “Code” (Transmitter set-
tings > DME interface > Keying master: LOC, and Ident type: Pulse).
On the motherboard of the Localizer cabinet (MB 1575), insert jumper “S11”.
This will transfer the Ident Sync Pulse from the LOC (AUX_RI_IN2) to the Remote Control
(AUX_RC_OUT2).
TECHNICAL ROOM
NORMARC Remote Control:
On the motherboard of the Remote Control (MB 1753), there is a D-sub connector which is
common for station 1 (LOC) and station 2 (GP) – D-sub connector “P14”, and one that is com-
mon for station 3 (DME) and station 4 (Spare) – D-sub connector “P15”.
If the DME remote control is in the third position in the remote control shelf:
Make a connection from “P14” pin no. 10 (LOC AUX_RC_1_OUT2) to “P15” pin no. 4 (DME
AUX_RC_3_IN2). This will transfer the Ident Sync Pulse from LOC to DME.
If the DME remote control is in the fourth position in the remote control shelf:
Make a connection from “P14” pin no. 10 (LOC AUX_RC_1_OUT2) to “P15” pin no. 15 (DME
AUX_RC_4_IN2). This will transfer the Ident Sync Pulse from LOC to DME.
Configuration of RCA 1750 for Localizer:
Due to that the Indra DME is trigging on the falling edge, the trigger pulse from the Localizer
has to be inverted. This can be done by setting strap “S32” (CFG_AUX2_OUTPUT_INVERT)
on the Localizer RCA 1750.
GLIDE PATH / DME SHELTER
The premade cable from the RTU to the DME includes the wiring for the Indent sync signal.
Connect the cable to the correct connectors on the NMP/EIU connectors as marked on the
connectors.
This will make the DME receive the Ident Sync Pulse coming from the Localizer
Instruction Manual

Configuring the DME:
Connect a PC to the DME (using Firefox/Chrome) to configure the Ident settings. Log on as
“Installer” and go to Configuration > Installation:
1. TXU Controls, Ident Association Mode: Select “Trigger Receiver”
2. TXU Controls, ID Code Selection: Select “First”
3. MTU Controls, Ident Code Transmitted: Select “Code 1”
Remember to scroll down to the bottom of the page and press the common “Apply”-button to
activate all the tree settings. Then press the “Write to Flash”-buttons for TXU 1, TXU2, MTU1
and MTU2 to save the settings.
LOC Shelter Technical Room GP / DME Shelter

LOC RC RTU 1874 DME
RCA 1750
RCA 1750
(LOC)
(DME)
Position 3 (4)
MB 1575
Pin31
S11 S32
MB 1753
Pin4
Pin10
(15)
P15 P14 NMP/EIU
Pin2
Ident In/Out
HBK 2212-1
Figure 7-24 Keying Interconnection
Instruction Manual

7.2.8.5 LOC as Ident Master via Remote Controls (Fernau)
OLDER Fernau DME
By routing the sync signal through the remote control system, no direct lines are needed
between the LOC and DME. This solution is supported with the Fernau 2020 and the Remote
Status Panel RSP 79-FAU.14A. Note that the "DME active" signal is not supported.
PL 1
RCA
10 2
1750
DME
LOC RSP
MB 1753/ 12 11 2020
MB 1801
J3
HBK 2069-1
Figure 7-25 LOC master via RC (Old Fernau)
Connect a cable from the NORMARC RC motherboard MB 1753 or MB 1801, J3 to the

Fernau RSP PL1 as shown in Figure 7-25. Refer to Figure 7-38
In the RMM program, ILS settings / Transmitter settings, DME interface tab (see Appendix D),
set LOC as master and the DME active signal to OPEN. Set the IDENT TYPE to PULSE.
On the MB 1575 Motherboard in the LOC rack, insert strap S11, refer to 7.2.20
In the Remote Control Unit RCA 1750, insert strap S32.In the Fernau 2020 DME, locate the
module 284-FAU.5A Communication Interface and verify that LK1 is set in position A=Ena-
bled. Refer to the Fernau DME handbook Volume 3, Section 9, Link Tables.
Instruction Manual

NEWER MOOG Fernau DME
A: On Keyer I/F set LK 1 and 2 to B.

B: On rear breakoutpanel of DME cabinet LINK SK1 Pin 4 to 6 and pin 5 to 7.
C: Settings in RMMS
1) Set Morse mode to SSI
2) Set AUX I/F channel 13 to output
D: Keyer I/O to RSP
1) Ident sync signal in PL3, pin 8+9.
PL 3
RCA
10 8
1750
DME
LOC RSP
MB 1753/ 12 9 2020
MB 1801
J3
HBK 2213-1
Figure 7-26 LOC master via RC (New MOOG Fernau)
Instruction Manual

7.2.9 Analog Inputs
7.2.9.1 General Description
The analog inputs are connected to the Connection Interface board CI 1748A as illustrated in
Figure 7-27
The inputs are:

• ANALOG CH.1-3 - three single ended DC analog inputs
Maximum voltage: ±15V

Input impedance: 10kOhms.
• TINDOOR, TOUTDOOR - temperature measurement inputs with interface to an LM35
temperature sensor
Maximum voltage: ±15V.
Input impedance: 10kOhms
• AC LEVEL - AC level measurement input. Intended for use with a battery eliminator
(i.e. 220/9VAC) to monitor the mains voltage
Maximum voltage: 24Vpp
Input impedance: 10kOhms
Figure 7-27 Analog input connections

Instruction Manual

7.2.9.2 Analog user inputs (CH.1-CH.3) details
Connectors: ANALOG CH.1, 2 and 3 on CI 1748A.
Input signal on pin 1, GND on pin 2 and 4.
Max input voltage relative to GND is ±15 V (zener diodes will clamp the signal if this limit is
exceeded).
Theoretically, full-scale positive is achieved by applying approx. +32 V, this would give a read-
ing = 2047 when scale=1 and offset=0. Fullscale negative approx.: -32 V (gives a reading of -
2048 when scale=1 and offset=0).
However, the full resolution of the A/D converter cannot be utilized in single ended mode since
the maximum input voltage relative to GND is ±15V, limiting the readings to approx. ±1000.
Read-out value = Ax + B
where
A is the “scale” value configured in the RMM “Analog user parameter” setup window,
B is the “offset” value configured in the RMM “Analog user parameter” setup window,
x is the 12 bit binary representation of the input voltage.
Figure 7-28 Typical circuit diagram

Instruction Manual

7.2.10 Digital Inputs and Outputs
Eight bidirectional digital channels (numbered 0-7) are located on the Connection Interface
board CI 1748A as illustrated in Figure 7-29
Logic levels: TTL, can be used with voltage up to 28VDC.
Output impedance: Open collector with 5kOhms pull-up resistor.
Digital inputs can be read and digital outputs can be set in the RMM program.
Figure 7-29 Digital input/output connections

Instruction Manual

Digital inputs and outputs - CI 1748A.
Figure 7-30 Equivalent circuit diagrams
Instruction Manual

7.2.11 Auxiliary Digital Inputs
Four dedicated digital inputs are available in Terminal block T3.
The inputs are:

• Intruder
• Fire
• Air_con
• Spare
They correspond to optional LEDs on the RCA 1750 remote control, and are also available in
the RMM system.
A closed or low input, (input connected to ground) will give a normal indication, an open or
high input will give a warning.
Logic levels: TTL with internal 100k pull-up resistor, can be used with input voltages up to
28VDC.
Figure 7-31 Digital Inputs

Instruction Manual

Figure 7-32 Digital Input
Instruction Manual

7.2.12 Battery Warning
Two inputs for main power supply failure (backup battery active) are sited on the PC 1749
connection interface board as illustrated in Figure 7-33
Logic levels: Normally high 5V or 0V =battery warning.
Suitable female connectors are Weidemüller BLZ-5.08/4 or equivalent.
Figure 7-33 Battery warning connections

Instruction Manual

7.2.13 Remote control connections
The remote control is connected to the corresponding ILS either by leased lines using the built
in modem or by line or fiber using COTS modems connected to the RS232 interface available.
The connectors for leased line and the RS232 signals for the COTS modems are available on
the MB 1753 remote control motherboard and on the CI 1748 connection interface in the ILS
cabinet. These are shown in Table 7-1 and Table 7-2. Since the MB 1753 provides interface
for up to four remote controls, there are also four pairs of connectors, one pair for each ILS
cabinet (see 7.2.1.14 for pinout).
Select the same protocol on CI 1748 and RCA 1750, reference tables Table 7-15. Normally
Protocol 1 is used for internal modems, and Protocol 2 is used for external modems.
CI 1748 pin Signal MB 1753 pin

P29 (1) (GND) P6, P7, P8 and (1)
RC/RMM line 2 Line_P (tip) P9 2
4 pole weid 4 pole weid
3 Line_N (ring) 3
(4) (GND) (4)
Table 7-1 RC Line Connection
CI 1748 pin Signal

P31 1 DCD_0
RC/RMM DTE 2 RXD_0
RS-232
9 pin male D- 3 TXD_0
sub 4 DTR_0
5 GND
6
7 RTS_0
8 CTS_0
9 DCD_0
MB 1753 pin Signal

P10, P11, P12, 1 DCD_0
P13 2 RXD_0
DTE RS-232 9
pin male D-sub 3 TXD_0
4 DTR_0
5 GND
6
7 RTS_0
8 CTS_0
9 DCD_0
Instruction Manual
Table 7-2 RC RS-232 connection

1 - GND
2 - LINE_P
3 - LINE_N
CI 1748 4 - GND
FSK
ANALOG PORT #1
ANALOG PORT #2
AUX DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL I/O #1
DIGITAL I/O #2
150mA
FUSE
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
INDR.
VACN
VACP
GND
GND
GND
GND
SPARE
GND
GND
FIRE
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
GND
TO MODEM
USER DIG 6
USER DIG 4
USER DIG 2
ANLG3P
ANLG2P
ANLG1P
USER DIG 5
USER DIG 1
USER DIG 0
+5V FUSED
USER DIG 7
USER DIG 3
OUTDOOR
+5V FUSED
INTRUDER
AIR CON
RC/RMM LINE
+27V
GND
LED 354-359
Line_N
LED 403-401 FUSE
FUSE Line_P
200mA
200mA
Strap inserted = X
PC 1749 #1
S401 S402 S403 RC Protocol Data Speed Connection
RCA 1750 RC+RMM 2400 Line
X RCA 1750 RC+RMM 9600 RS 232
X RCA 1750 RC Only 1200 Line
X X RCA 1750 RC Only 9600 RS 232
X SI 1614 RC Only 1200 Line
TURN OFF CHARGERS AND ISOLATE BATTERIES BEFORE X X SI 1614 RC Only 1200 RS 232
REMOVING THIS COVER AND PUT THE COVER BACK X X SI 1614 RC Only 9600 RS 232
X X X RCA 1240 RC Only 300 RS 232
IN PLACE AFTER SERVICING Strap S404 inserted: RC Error delay = 30s
PC 1749 #2
DC LOOP RMM RMM RMM LOCAL RMM REMOTE RC/RMM
DME I/O CH 1 & 2 CH 3 & 4 CAN BUS NOT USED REMOTE 2 LOCAL USB RS 232 RS 232 RS 232
CH_2 CH_4
OUT_DMEN GND GND
OUT_DMEP OUT OUT
IN_DMEN IN IN
IN_DMEP GND GND
ACT_DMEN OUT OUT
ACT_DMEP IN IN
CH_1 CH_3
HBK2022-3
1 - DCD_0
2 - RXD_0
5 3 - TXD_0
9
4 - DTR_0
5 - GND
6 6 - Not Connected
1
7 - RTS_0
8 - CTS_0
9 - Not Connected
Figure 7-34 Connectors for remote control interface on CI 1748
Figure 7-35 Connectors for Remote Control interface on MB 1753A

Instruction Manual

Figure 7-36 Connectors for Remote Control interface on MB 1801A
Instruction Manual

7.2.14 MB 1753 and MB 1801 connections
MB 1753 and MB 1801 are motherboards for the Remote Control RCA 1750 and the Cat Sta-
tus unit CSA 1816. The MB 1753 has 4 slots, while MB 1801 has 2 slots.
Normally, the LOC remote control is placed in first slot from the left and the GP remote control
in the second slot. If the Cat Status unit CSA 1816 is used, it is normally placed in the right-
most slot on MB 1753. However, if may also be used in any slot of a MB 1801 set to the same
address as the corresponding MB 1753, and connected to the same CAN bus. Refer to chap-
ters 7.3.8.5 and 8.2.11 for configuration and connection of the CSA 1816.
The pin assignments shown in the table refers to use with RCA 1750A.
MB MB
1801 1753
J11 J11 9-pin female D-sub, CAN_L 2
CAN1 CAN1 CAN bus connector, CAN_GND 3
Common for all four (two) RCA’s CAN_SHLD (only on D-sub) 5
GND 6
CAN_H 7
CAN_V+ (24V fused) 9
P5 P5 5-pin male Weidm. type terminal CAN_GND 1

CAN2 CAN2 CAN Bus connector, CAN_L 2
Common for all four RCA’s: CAN_SHLD - optional 3
CAN_H 4
CAN_V+ (24V fused) 5
Note that this pinning is differ-

ent from “Indra standard” pin-
out such as the Power con-
nector (P16 and P17) and LL
(P6-P9)
Instruction Manual

MB MB
1801 1753
J5 J5 25p female D-sub GND 1
SLAVE1 SLAVE1 IN/Outputs to SF 1344/SP 1394/SP SLAVE_1_ALARM 14
1548 version, connectors for RCP 1 SLAVE_1_WARNING 2
and RCP 2 SLAVE_1_NORMAL 15
SLAVE_1_STBY_ALARM 3
SLAVE_1_COMMS 16
SLAVE_1_BUZZER 4
SLAVE_1_ON_OFF 17
SLAVE_1_SILENCE 5
SLAVE_V24P (Fused) 18
GND 6
GND 11
SLAVE_2_ALARM 19
SLAVE_2_WARNING 7
SLAVE_2_NORMAL 20
SLAVE_2_COMMS 21
SLAVE_2_BUZZER 9
SLAVE_2_ON_OFF 22
SLAVE_2_SILENCE 10
GND 12
INTERLOCK_IN_1 24
INTERLOCK_IN_2 25
- J6 25p female D-sub GND 1
SLAVE2 IN/Outputs to SF 1344/ SP 1394/ SP SLAVE_3_ALARM 14
1548 version, connectors for RCP 3 SLAVE_3_WARNING 2
and RCP 4 SLAVE_3_NORMAL 15
SLAVE_3_COMMS 16
SLAVE_3_BUZZER 4
SLAVE_3_ON_OFF 17
SLAVE_3_SILENCE 5
GND 6
GND 11
SLAVE_4_ALARM 19
SLAVE_4_WARNING 7
SLAVE_4_NORMAL 20
SLAVE_4_COMMS 21
SLAVE_4_BUZZER 9
SLAVE_4_ON_OFF 22
SLAVE_4_SILENCE 10
GND 12
INTERLOCK_IN_3 24
INTERLOCK_IN_4 25
P6 P6 4 pin Weidm. terminal LINE_A (TIP) 2
LL LL Leased line – 2wire for RCP 1 LINE_B (RING) 3
GND 1, 4
Instruction Manual

MB MB
1801 1753
P7 P7 4 pin Weidm. terminal LINE_A (TIP) 2
LL LL Leased line – 2wire for RCP 2 LINE_B (RING) 3
GND 1, 4
- P8 4 pin Weidm. terminal LINE_A (TIP) 2
LL Leased line – 2wire for RCP 3 LINE_B (RING) 3
GND 1, 4
- P9 4 pin Weidm. terminal LINE_A (TIP) 2
LL Leased line – 2wire for RCP 4 LINE_B (RING) 3
GND 1, 4
P10 P10 9 pin male DTE D-sub ALTLINK_1_IN_DCD 1
MODEM MODEM RS232 Connector for use with radio ALTLINK_1_IN_RXD 2
links or optional modem for RCP 1 ALTLINK_1_OUT_TXD 3
ALTLINK_1_OUT_DTR 4
SG 5
ALTLINK_1_OUT_RTS 7
ALTLINK_1_IN_CTS 8
P11 P11 9 pin male DTE D-sub ALTLINK_2_IN_DCD 1
MODEM MODEM RS232 Connector for use with radio ALTLINK_2_IN_RXD 2
links or optional modem for RCP 2 ALTLINK_2_OUT_TXD 3
ALTLINK_2_OUT_DTR 4
SG 5
ALTLINK_2_OUT_RTS 7
ALTLINK_2_IN_CTS 8
- P12 9 pin male DTE D-sub ALTLINK_3_IN_DCD 1
MODE RS232 Connector for use with radio ALTLINK_3_IN_RXD 2
M links or optional modem for RCP 3 ALTLINK_3_OUT_TXD 3
ALTLINK_3_OUT_DTR 4
SG 5
ALTLINK_3_OUT_RTS 7
ALTLINK_3_IN_CTS 8
- P13 9 pin male DTE D-sub ALTLINK_4_IN_DCD 1
MODE RS232 Connector for use with radio ALTLINK_4_IN_RXD 2
M links or optional modem for RCP 4 ALTLINK_4_OUT_TXD 3
ALTLINK_4_OUT_DTR 4
SG 5
ALTLINK_4_OUT_RTS 7
ALTLINK_4_IN_CTS 8
J7 J7 9 pin female DCE D-sub RMMLINK_1_OUT_DCD 1
RMM RMM RS232 RMM Link via RC to RMM RMMLINK_1_OUT_RXD 2
PC, for RCP 1 RMMLINK_1_IN_TXD 3
RMMLINK_1_IN_DTR 4
SG 5
RMMLINK_1_IN_RTS 7
RMMLINK_1_OUT_CTS 8
Instruction Manual

MB MB
1801 1753
J8 J8 9 pin female DCE D-sub RMMLINK_2_OUT_DCD 1
RMM RMM RS232 RMM Link via RC to RMM RMMLINK_2_OUT_RXD 2
RMMLINK_2_IN_DTR 4
SG 5
RMMLINK_2_IN_RTS 7
RMMLINK_2_OUT_CTS 8
- J9 9 pin female DCE D-sub RMMLINK_3_OUT_DCD 1
RMM RS232 RMM Link via RC to RMM RMMLINK_3_OUT_RXD 2
RMMLINK_3_IN_DTR 4
SG 5
RMMLINK_3_IN_RTS 7
RMMLINK_3_OUT_CTS 8
- J10 9 pin female DCE D-sub RMMLINK_4_OUT_DCD 1
RMM RS232 RMM Link via RC to RMM RMMLINK_4_OUT_RXD 2
RMMLINK_4_IN_DTR 4
SG 5
RMMLINK_4_IN_RTS 7
RMMLINK_4_OUT_CTS 8
P14 P14 DB15 male GND 1
AUX1 AUX1 Auxiliary signals – discrete I/O AUX_RC_1_OUT0 (evt. FFM 9
Common connector for RCP 1 and Alarm)
RCP 2. AUX_RC_1_OUT1 (evt. FFM 2
Warn)
AUX_RC_1_OUT2 (evt. Ident 10
synch)
AUX_RC_1_IN0 3
AUX_RC_1_IN1 11
AUX_RC_1_IN2 4
GND 12
AUX_RC_2_OUT0 (evt. FFM 5
Alarm)
Warn)
synch)
AUX_RC_2_IN0 14
AUX_RC_2_IN1 7
AUX_RC_2_IN2 15
GND 8
Instruction Manual

MB MB
1801 1753
- P15 DB15 male GND 1
AUX2 Auxiliary signals – discrete I/O AUX_RC_3_OUT0 (evt. FFM 9
Common connector for RCP 3 and Alarm)
RCP 4 AUX_RC_3_OUT1 (evt. FFM 2
Warn)
synch)
AUX_RC_3_IN0 3
AUX_RC_3_IN1 11
AUX_RC_3_IN2 4
GND 12
Alarm)
Warn)
synch)
AUX_RC_4_IN0 14
AUX_RC_4_IN1 7
AUX_RC_4_IN2 15
GND 8
P16 P16 4p Weidm. Type conn. GND 1
PWR IN PWR IN Power Input – from 24V DC pwr or V24P_IN 3
other panel, Common for backplane
P17 P17 4p Weidm. Type conn. GND 1
PWR PWR Power Output to other panels, V24P_OUT 3
OUT OUT
Instruction Manual

MB MB
1801 1753
P18 P18 15 pin male D-sub. CAN_INTERLOCK_OUT_1 1
INTERL INTERL Interlock Inputs (from RSU or CAN_INTERLOCK_OUT_2 2
jumped from output) and outputs CAN_INTERLOCK_OUT_3 3
(CAN signal from Slave) (MB 1753 only)
CAN_INTERLOCK_OUT_4 4
TRUE_OFF (1-4) (output to RSU) is (MB 1753 only)
same as on P19 TXOFF below TRUE_OFF_OUT_1 5
TRUE_OFF_OUT_2 6
INTERLOCK_IN (1-4 (2)) are the TRUE_OFF_OUT_3 7
same signals as on P25-P28 (P23- (MB 1753 only)
P24) TRUE_OFF_OUT_4 8
(MB 1753 only)
INTERLOCK_IN_1 9
INTERLOCK_IN_2 10
INTERLOCK_IN_3 11
(MB 1753 only)
INTERLOCK_IN_4 12
(MB 1753 only)
GND 13
GND 14
GND 15
- P19 4x2 pin row for 2 pin jumper plugs. TRUE_OFF_OUT_1 1
TXOFF For use with GP: TX_OFF_IN_2 2
- - TX_OFF Input on GP can be inter- TRUE_OFF_OUT_2 3
connected to associated TX_OFF_IN_3 4
- - TRUE_OFF output from LOC TRUE_OFF_OUT_3 5
(Ex. interconnect 1-2) TX_OFF_IN_4 6
- - TRUE_OFF_OUT_4 7
TX_OFF_IN_1 8
P19 - 4x2 pin row for 2 pin jumper plugs. TRUE_OFF_OUT_1 1
TXOFF For use with GP: TX_OFF_IN_2 2
and - TX_OFF Input on GP can be inter- TRUE_OFF_OUT_2 3
ADDR connected to associated TX_OFF_IN_1 4
- TRUE_OFF output from LOC N.C 5
(Ex. interconnect 1-2) N.C 6
- Strap out: Corresponds to left part of GND 7
1753
Strap in: Corresponds to right part of CFG_ADDR_1 8
1753
Instruction Manual

MB MB
1801 1753
J12 J12 DB15 female GND 1
OPT1 OPT1 Optional I/O signals – discrete I/O OPT_RC_1_OUT1 9
Common connector for RCP 1 and OPT_RC_1_OUT2 2
RCP 2. OPT_RC_1_OUT3 10
OPT_RC_1_IN1 3
OPT_RC_1_IN2 11
OPT_RC_1_IN3 4
OPT_RC_1_IN4 12
OPT_RC_2_OUT1 5
OPT_RC_2_OUT2 13
OPT_RC_2_OUT3 6
OPT_RC_2_IN1 14
OPT_RC_2_IN2 7
OPT_RC_2_IN3 15
OPT_RC_2_IN4 8
- J13 DB15 female GND 1
OPT2 Optional I/O signals – discrete I/O OPT_RC_3_OUT1 9
Common connector for RCP 3 and OPT_RC_3_OUT2 2
RCP 4. OPT_RC_3_OUT3 10
OPT_RC_3_IN1 3
OPT_RC_3_IN2 11
OPT_RC_3_IN3 4
OPT_RC_3_IN4 12
OPT_RC_4_OUT1 5
OPT_RC_4_OUT2 13
OPT_RC_4_OUT3 6
OPT_RC_4_IN1 14
OPT_RC_4_IN2 7
OPT_RC_4_IN3 15
OPT_RC_4_IN4 8
P22 P22 2 pin row for 2 pin jumper plugs. CAN_TERM (on backplane) 1-2
(S35) (S35) Configuration strap for CAN termina-
tion resistor
P23 P25 2 pin Molex INTERLOCK_IN_1 1
Interlock input 1 GND 2
P24 P26 2 pin Molex INTERLOCK_IN_2 1
- P27 2 pin Molex INTERLOCK_IN_3 1
- P28 2 pin Molex INTERLOCK_IN_4 1
Instruction Manual

7.2.15 Connecting Markers or DME to OPT inputs
The OPT1 (J12) connector on MB 1753/MB1801 can be used as inputs and outputs for the
slave panel SP 1754. This allows status and on/off signals from marker beacons and DME to
be connected to the Remote control sub-rack and transferred to the SP 1754 slave panel. Sig-
nals on the OPT_RC_1_INx/OUTx will be sent to position 4 on the slave panel, while signals
on the OPT_RC_2_INx/OUTx will be sent to position 3 on the slave panel. General configura-
tion information is given in 7.3.8.4.
This chapter gives examples for use with Marker Beacons and Fernau 2020 DME.
Marker Beacons
When Marker Beacons are used, the RFA 1766C remote sub-rack should be used. It contains
one MB 1801 motherboard for the LOC and GP remotes (RCA 1750) and two MB 1346 moth-
erboards for Middle Marker and Outer Marker remotes (RCA 1240).
The slave outputs P3 of the MB 1346 motherboards can then be connected to J12 on MB
1801 by the cable shown in Figure 7-37. Switch settings on SP 1754 are shown in Table 7-3
J1 P3
1 GND 1
Connect to MM - RC
3 WARN 7
MB 1346A – P3
MB 1753A – J12 or MB 1801A – J12
NORMAL
Connect to LOC – GP RC
4 14
12 BATT 8
19 ON/OFF 5
21 SILENCE 6
J2
3 WARN 11
Connect to OM - RC
MB 1346A – P3
4 NORMAL 3
12 BATT 12
19 ON/OFF 9
21 SILENCE 10
DSUB 25F DSUB 15M
HBK 2074-1
Instruction Manual
Figure 7-37 Cable MKR-MB 1753A/1801A

Switch Setting Item Function

SW8-4 ON POS3 2 OPT Position 3 on the slave panel will be controlled by the OPT
inputs of the equipment in position 2 in the corresponding
remote control shelf. (POS 2 PRST must be on.)
SW8-2 ON PULSE This is only applicable if POS3 2 OPT is on. When the on/off
POS3 buttons is pressed, a pulse will set for 1 sec on OPT 1 output.
SW8-1 ON PULSE This is only applicable if POS4 1 OPT is on. When the on/off
POS4 buttons is pressed, a pulse will set for 1 sec on OPT 1 output.
SW7-6 ON POS1 PRST The slave panel expects to receive messages from equipment
in position 1 (left) in the corresponding remote shelf. If not, a
com failure will be generated.
SW7-4 OFF POS3 PRST The slave panel does not expect to receive messages from
equipment in position 3 (left) in the corresponding remote shelf.
If received, these will not be handled
Table 7-3 Switch settings for SP 1754
DME
When the Fernau DME 2020 is used, the Remote Status Panel RSP 79-FAU.14A can be
placed in a free slot in the remote control sub-rack RFA 1766. The status and control signals
available on PL1 of the Fernau RSP can be connected to MB 1753/MB 1801 by the cable
shown in Figure 7-38. The DME can be connected to position 3 or position 4. Pin numbers for
position 4 is shown in brackets. The cable also contains the connection needed for ident sync
through the remote control, refer to Table 7-4 shows switch settings in SP 1754 for position 3,
and Table 7-5 for position 4.
Instruction Manual

J1 P2
4 GND 1
Connect to MB 1753A / MB 1801A – J12

10 OFF 13 (2)
12 ON 5 (9)
Connect to FERNAU RSP PL1
15 FAULT 15 (4)
16 TRAN 7 (11)
17 BATT 8 (12)
NORMAL
18 14 (3)
19 DSUB 15M
J3
MB 1753A / MB 1801A
DME KEY 10
Connect to
2
P14
11 GND 12
DSUB 25F DSUB 15F
HBK 2075-1
Figure 7-38 Connections for Fernau RSP to MB 1753A/1801A

SW8-2 OFF PULSE This is only applicable if POS3 2 OPT is on.
POS3 When the on/off button (in 3rd position on slave panel) is
pressed, a pulse will set for 1 sec on OPT_RC_2_OUT2 output
(OFF signal to DME) if OPT_RC_2_IN1 input (NORMAL from
DME) is set. If not (i.e. DME is in ALARM or OFF) the pulse will
be on the OPT_RC_2_OUT1 output (ON signal to DME).
Instruction Manual
Table 7-4 DME in position 3


SW8-1 OFF PULSE This is only applicable if POS4 1 OPT is on.
POS4 When the on/off button (in 4th position on slave panel)is
pressed, a pulse will set for 1 sec on OPT_RC_1_OUT2 output
(OFF signal to DME) if OPT_RC_1_IN1 input (NORMAL from
DME) is set. If not (i.e. DME is in ALARM or OFF) the pulse will
be on the OPT_RC_1_OUT1 output (ON signal to DME)
Table 7-5 DME in position 4
NOTE: For configuration of the rest of the switches on SP 1754 please refer to 7.3.8.4 Slave
Panel
SP 1754A/B configuration, Table 7-17 DIP switches options.
Instruction Manual

7.2.16 Automatic shutdown of GP
If required, the GP can be configured to shut down automatically when the LOC is off. Con-
nect a link on MB 1753A - P19. Refer to 7.2.14 - P19.
Instruction Manual

7.2.17 Remote slave connection
The RCA 1750 Remote Control with MB 1753 Backplane can interface SF 1344 and SP 1394
type slave panels via discrete lines, or the SP 1754 type slave panel via CAN bus.
The RCA 1750 Remote Control with MB 1753 Backplane be connected to the SP 1754 type
slave panel via CAN bus or to the SF 1344 and SP 1394 type slave panels via discrete lines.
7.2.17.1 Slaves connected via CAN bus
SP 1754 Slave Panel contains indicators and controls for all the four remote controls that can
be connected to the MB1753 and is interconnected via the common CAN bus interface availa-
ble on the 9-pin female D-sub connector J11 or alternatively the 5-pin male Weidmuller type
terminal P5.
SP 1754 (Weidmüller
MB 1753/MB 1801 Pin Signal SP1754 Pin Pin
type)
J11 2 CAN_L P2 2 P2 2
9-pin female D-sub 3 CAN_GND 9-pin male 3 5-pin male Weidmüller 1
5 CAN_SHLD D-sub 5 3
6 GND 6
7 CAN_H 7 4
9 CAN_V+ 9 5
(24V fused)
Table 7-6 CAN Bus connections
Figure 7-39 Slave Connector J11

Instruction Manual

SP 1754 (Weidmüller
MB 1753/MB 1801 Pin Signal SP1754 Pin Pin
type)
P5 2 CAN_L P2 2 P2 2
5-pin male Weidm 1 CAN_GND 9-pin male 3 5-pin male Weidmüller 1
3 CAN_SHLD D-sub 5 3
4 CAN_H 7 4
5 CAN_V+ 9 5
(24V fused)
Table 7-7 CAN Bus Connections
Figure 7-40 Slave Connector P5, MB 1753

Instruction Manual

SP 1754 P2 CAN connector1:
Connector type: 9pin DSUB male or 5-pin Weidmüller, depending on SP1754 hardware revi-
sion.
Note: Pin numbering for Weidmüller type connectors: Pin 1 is the rightmost pin when the "wavy" part
of the connector points upwards:
Figure 7-41 SP 1754 Connector pinout
# Signal
1
2 CAN_L
3 CAN GND
4
5 SHLD (optional)
6 GND (optional)
7 CAN_H
8 CAN GND*
9 CAN_V+ (24V fused)
5-pin Weidmüller
# Signal
1 CAN_GND
2 CAN_L
3 CAN_GND
4 CAN_H
5 CAN_V+ (24V Fused)
Table 7-8 Connector P2

Instruction Manual

A remote control sub-rack and a slave panel belonging to the same runway end on the CAN
bus must have the same address. On the remote control sub-rack, the address is set by the
rotary switch SW1. On the slave panel, the address is set by the DIP switches AD0 - AD2.
Refer to Table 7-17. The valid address range is 0-7. If more than one remote control shelf is
connected to the same bus, each shelf must have a different address. Often, the most practi-
cal solution is to use separate buses for each runway end. The smaller MB 1801 remote con-
trol motherboard has an additional strap P19, 7-8. When it is open, the motherboard address
correspond to the two left-most slots in the MB 1753, and when the strap is inserted it corre-
sponds to the two right-most slots.
Up to 10 slave panels can be connected to the same remote control shelf; however only one
slave can control interlock, refer to 7.3.8.4.
The CAN bus shall have a linear topology with the units connected along the cable. Both ends
shall be terminated by a 120 ohm resistor. Twisted pair cable shall be used. According to the
CAN specification, the cable shall have a characteristic impedance of 120Ω; however in prac-
tice normal Cat5 network cable is widely used. The maximum bus length is 500m, and drop
cables to units shall be less than 2m, refer to Figure 7-42. If more than one slave is used, the
connection can either be daisy-chain style with CAN out on one panel connected to CAN in on
the next, or drop cables can be connected to CAN in on each slave
Note that the remote control sub-rack does not need to be at one end of the bus; in some con-
figurations it may be more practical to put the sub-rack in the middle, and use the two ends to
reach different slave locations.
All units have built in termination resistors. On the MB 1753/MB 1801 motherboard in the
remote control sub-rack, the termination resistor is connected by strap P22. On SP 1754, the
termination resistor is connected by strap S6, just below the "CAN OUT" connector. The
straps are normally inserted and must be removed on units that are not at the ends of the bus.
Power to the slaves is normally supplied from the remote control sub-rack by connecting the
GND, CAN_GND and CAN_V+ lines to the remote control sub-rack. However, if the distance
is more than 200m for s single slave panel, a separate power supply shall be used at the slave
panel position. If more than one slave panel is used on one CAN bus, the approximate maxi-
mum length without a local power supply is given by the formula:
Cable length (m) = 200/(number of slave panels)

Instruction Manual

Bus length max 500m
CAN H
120Ω 120Ω
CAN L
GND
Drop Cable
max length 2m All cables
shall be
twisted pairs
Unit with Unit with
terminating terminating
resistor resistor
Unit without Unit without

terminating terminating
HBK 2076-1 resistor resistor
Figure 7-42 CAN Bus
Instruction Manual

7.2.17.2 Slaves connected via discrete lines
SF1344/1394 slave panels for the two left most remote control panels are connected to J5 on
MB 1753 while the two right most are connected to J6. Interconnection will be according to fol-
lowing table (see 7.2.14 for pinout):
Only signals shown in bold are normally used.
MB 1753/
Pin Signal SP1344/SP 1394 Pin
MB 1801
1, 11 GND 1
14 SLAVE_1_ALARM 2
2 SLAVE_1_WARNING 3
15 SLAVE_1_NORMAL 4
3 SLAVE_1_STBY_ALARM P1 5
16 SLAVE_1_COMMS 25pin male
4 SLAVE_1_BUZZER D-sub 25
J5 17 SLAVE_1_ON_OFF 19
25pin 5 SLAVE_1_SILENCE 21
female 18 SLAVE_V24P (Fused) 15
D-sub 24 SLAVE_1_INTERLOCK 23
6, 12 GND 1
19 SLAVE_2_ALARM 2
7 SLAVE_2_WARNING 3
20 SLAVE_2_NORMAL 4
22 SLAVE_2_ON_OFF 19
10 SLAVE_2_SILENCE 21
23 SLAVE_V24P (Fused) 15
25 SLAVE_2_INTERLOCK 23
Instruction Manual

MB 1753 Pin Signal SP1344/SP 1394 Pin

1 GND 1
14 SLAVE_3_ALARM 2
2 SLAVE_3_WARNING 3
15 SLAVE_3_NORMAL 4
J6 17 SLAVE_3_ON_OFF 19
25pin 5 SLAVE_3_SILENCE 21
female 18 SLAVE_V24P (Fused) 15
D-sub 24 SLAVE_3_INTERLOCK 23
6 GND 1
19 SLAVE_4_ALARM 2
7 SLAVE_4_WARNING 3
20 SLAVE_4_NORMAL 4
22 SLAVE_4_ON_OFF 19
10 SLAVE_4_SILENCE 21
23 SLAVE_V24P (Fused) 15
25 SLAVE_4_INTERLOCK 23

Instruction Manual

7.2.18 Interlock switch connection
If interlock is used for two reciprocal runways, the interlock switch can be connected either to
the remote controls in the technical control room or to the slave panels in the tower.
Alternative configurations:
No interlock:
Jumpers shall be placed on the two pin Molex connectors MB 1753 - P25, P26, P27 and P28
or MB 1801 - P23 and P24
Interlock in the technical control room:
Interlock switch connected to MB 1753 - P25 and P26 or MB 1803 - P23 and P24.
Interlock switch in the tower, SP 1754:
On MB 1753 or MB 1801, P18 the following pins shall be connected: Pin 1 to pin 9 and pin 2
to pin 10 by using the supplied D-SUB female connector.
The interlock switch shall be connected to SP 1754 - P1
Interlock switch in the tower, SF 1344, SP 1394, SP 1548:
Connect the interlock switch to P2 on each slave panel.
Figure 7-45 Interlock connector P18

Instruction Manual

INTERLOCK
MB1346 / P1
SWITCH
OR
SF 1344 / P2
RWY A RWY B OR
SP 1754 / P1
OR
MB 1753 / P25/26/27/28
OR
MB 1801 / P23/24
1 INTERLOCK
5 4 2 1 2 GND
1 2 LOC runway B
LOC runway A
2 1
1 2 GP runway B
GP runway A
2 1
HBK2054-2
Figure 7-46 Interlock switch
Instruction Manual

7.2.19 Remote Control Auxiliary Channels
The Remote Control system has 3 uncommitted digital signals in each direction. These can be
used to transmit additional status and control signals between the remote control and equip-
ment rack. Please note that if the signals are connected to external equipment such as other
navaids or intrusion alarms, relays or optocouplers shall be used to provide a galvanic barrier.
For a number of purposes the NORMARC SK 1470 kit is suitable.
The signals are available on MB 1575, P15 in the ILS rack, and on MB 1753, P14 and P15 or
MB 1801, P14 in the remote control.
Also refer to 7.2.14, P14 and P15.
Connections from the ILS rack to the Remote Control:
Output in Remote Control, MB 1753, P14 or

Input in ILS rack, MB 1575, P15
P15/MB 1801, P14
Pin no. Signal name Pin no. Signal name
1 AUX_RI_IN0 9 (5) AUX_RC_OUT0
10 GND 8,12 GND
Connections from the Remote Control to the ILS rack:
Input in Remote Control, MB 1753, P14 or

Output in ILS rack, MB 1575, P15
P15/MB 1801, P14
Pin no. Signal name Pin no. Signal name
3 (14) AUX_RC_IN0 5 AUX_RI_OUT0
8, 12 GND 10 GND
Signal interfaces:
All inputs are TTL level with pull-up to 5VDC. Outputs are TTL buffers with a drive capability of
20mA maximum. Care must be taken to avoid overloading the outputs. This may occur if the
outputs are connected directly to external equipment without a galvanic barrier.
NOTE: Refer to 7.2.20 for additional information.

Instruction Manual

Figure 7-47 Connector location, MB 1753 (Remote Control) Aux channel
Instruction Manual

Figure 7-48 Connector Location, MB 1575 (ILS Rack)
Instruction Manual

Figure 7-49 Typical circuit diagram, Remote Control End
Figure 7-50 Typical circuit diagram, ILS Rack End
Instruction Manual

7.2.20 MB 1575A Configuration
LOC only:
The motherboard MB 1575A has a number of configuration straps. In LOC cabinets, they can
be used to connect various logical signals to the Remote Control Auxiliary channels:
Strap Strap/Signal name Comment Notes
S1 RXD 1-2 RXD to Local Port on CI Board Note 4
S2 RTS 1-2 RTS to Local Port on CI Board Note 4
S3 TXD 1-2 TXD to Local Port on CI Board Note 4
S4 CTS 1-2 CTS to Local Port on CI Board Note 4
S5 VOICE_ACT_1 ON No configuration / Default for GP
S6 VOICE_ACT_2 ON No configuration / Default for GP
S7 FFM_ALM_1 ON FFM Alarm from Mon 1 connected to AUX_RI_IN0 Note 1
S7 FFM_ALM_1 OFF AUX_RI_IN0 available for other use / Default for GP
S8 FFM_ALM_2 ON FFM Alarm from Mon 2 connected to AUX_RI_IN0 Note 1
S8 FFM_ALM_2 OFF AUX_RI_IN0 available for other use / Default for GP
S9 FFM_WARN_1 ON FFM Warning from Mon 1 connected to AUX_RI_IN1 Note 1
S9 FFM_WARN_1 OFF AUX_RI_IN1 available for other use / Default for GP
S10 FFM_WARN_2 ON FFM Warning from Mon 2 connected to AUX_RI_IN1 Note 1
S10 FFM_WARN_2 OFF AUX_RI_IN1 available for other use/ Default for GP
S11 DME_IDENT_OUT ON DME ident out connected to AUX_RI_IN2 Note 2
S11 DME_IDENT_OUT OFF AUX_RI_IN2 available for other use/ Default for GP
S12 REMOTE DATA 1-2 Default position Note 3
S12 REMOTE DATA 2-3 Future use Note 3
S13 DME ACTIVE 1-2 Default position Note 3
S13 DME ACTIVE 2-3 Future use Note 3
Note 1:
The straps S7, S8, S9 and S10 are used to connect the alarm and warning outputs of the
optional Far Field Monitor controller (refer to Appendix B) to the Remote Control Auxiliary chan-
nels; refer also to 7.2.19.
Note 2:
Strap S11 can be used to transmit DME ident synchronisation via the Remote Control Auxiliary
Instruction Manual
channels. The DME interface must be set to LOC as master and Ident type to PULSE if this
function is used, refer to 7.2.8.2, 7.2.19 and Appendix D, D.4.4.3 for details.

Note 3:
“1-2” means strap connected between Pin1 and centre pin, “2-3” means strap connected
between centre pin and Pin 3. S1 to S4 must be in the same position.
Note 4:
On cabinets that uses the RMA 1822A board the unit LR 1610A, that used to be mounted on
the right side on the front of the cabinet (giving a Local Port for RMM connection on the ILS
front), is no longer normally installed. The straps S1-S4 will therefore have no function on these
cabinets and should always be connected between pin 1-2.
Instruction Manual

7.3 Tests and Adjustments
7.3.1 Configuration Settings
Follow this procedure to set the configurations in the ILS according to the desired system con-
figuration.
7.3.2 ILS Configuration
Set the correct configuration for this ILS according to this table. The strap platforms U6 and
U13 for configuration of the Station Control and the Remote Control Interface are located on
Transmitter Control Assembly TCA 1218 (Figure 7-51).
1 Strap IN NOT interlock

Strap OUT Interlock
2 Strap IN NOT hot standby
Strap OUT hot standby
3 Strap IN 2 frequency ILS
Strap OUT 1 frequency ILS
4 Strap IN 1 of 2 voting
Strap OUT 2 of 2 voting (default)
5 Strap IN Lost contact with remote control will NOT turn off transmitters.
Strap OUT Lost contact with remote control will turn off transmitters. (default). Refer to
Table 7-2 for setting the shutdown delay.
6 Strap IN WRITE PROTECT switch in horizontal position generate service condition.
(default)
Strap OUT WRITE PROTECT switch in horizontal position does not generate service
condition.
7 Strap IN ACCESS grant switch on remote control must be in access grant position in
order to obtain access level 2 or 3 from the RMM system. (default)
Strap OUT ACCESS grant switch on remote control is overridden.
8 Strap IN Tells the RMS that this is a GP ILS.
Strap OUT Tells the RMS that this is a LOC ILS.
9 Strap IN Spare, Not in use.
Strap OUT Spare, Not in use.
10 Strap IN See description below.
Strap OUT DEFAULT.
Table 7-9 Setting ILS configuration platform U6

Instruction Manual

7.3.3 Resetting Master Password
Strap 10 is used for resetting the Master Password in case this has been lost. The procedure
is as follows:
• Power rack off
• Insert a temporary link for strap 10 on the configuration-block U6 on the TCA 1218
board
• Reinsert TCA 1218
• Power rack on
• Wait till you see the message “master password reset” on the RMS LCD panel
• Power rack off and remove strap 10
• The master passwords has now been set to:
master1 [space] master2 [space] master3

• Log in as MASTER from the PC using the three passwords above
7.3.4 Lost contact with RC configuration
The action following a lost contact with Remote Control is configurable with U6 and U13 in
combination according to Table 7-10 (applies from revision 3 of the TCA 1218 board) Corre-
sponding configuration applicable for the Remote Control versions RCA 1240G and H is
described in Table 7-10.
Note: If 2 sec or 30 sec delayed shutdown is set also set strap S27 on RCA 1750. If no shutdown is
set strap S27 on RCA 1750 shall be open.
Action U6 strap 5 U13 strap 5

No shutdown IN Don’t care
2 sec. delayed shutdown (default) OUT OUT
30 sec. delayed shutdown OUT IN
Table 7-10 Setting RC link shutdown delay
7.3.5 Changeover configuration
Normally a changeover does not influence the Main/Standby transmitter selection. However
by setting straps according to Table 7-11, a Changeover from Remote Control will in addition
to changing transmitter-on-air also redefine the main and Standby transmitters (similar to
pressing Main Select (TX1/TX2) and Changeover on Local Control Panel) (applies from revi-
sion 3 of the TCA 1218 board).
Action U13 strap 1 U13 strap 2 U13 strap 4

Normal operation (default) OUT OUT OUT
Main select at changeover IN IN IN
Instruction Manual
Table 7-11 Setting RC Main select at changeover

7.3.6 Service mode configuration
During Service mode of operation, transmitting ILS equipment is normally not shown as a
green Normal LED on the Remote Control panel, only the red Alarm LED will be lit. A special
Service Mode for the Remote Control display has been implemented for interfacing with cus-
tomized Remote Control and Monitoring Systems. In this configuration the Alarm, Warning
and Normal LED will be showing system status as during normal operation and the Remote
Control panel will indicate that the ILS equipment is in Service mode by a lit Access LED,
often re-labelled as SERVICE instead of ACCESS. This mode is configured as shown in Table
7-12 (applies from revision 4 of the TCA 1218 board) .
Action U13 strap 3

Normal Service mode indication (by Alarm LED) OUT
(Default)
Service Mode indicated by Access IN
Table 7-12 Setting RC indication in Service Mode
10
9
8 8
7 7
6 6
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
U13 U6 HBK592-3
Figure 7-51 Transmitter Control strap platforms
7.3.7 Remote Ports Access Level Configuration
The allowed access levels on REMOTE ports 1, 2 and Ethernet on the RMS can be config-
ured by setting jumpers S1-S4 on the Transmitter Control Assembly TCA1218A (Figure 7-51)
according to Table 7-13.
Jumper in means that access level is allowed.
Jumper out means that access level is denied.
PORT ACC. LEVEL 2 ACC. LEVEL 3

Remote 1 Strap S1 Strap S2
Remote 2 and Strap S3 Strap S4
Instruction Manual
Ethernet
Table 7-13 Access level strap settings. Warning Configuration

Use the RMM Program to configure which warnings shall cause system warning, i.e. illumi-
nate the RC main warning lamp. The main warning lamp is the warning indication given on the
Slave Panel for the Air Traffic Controllers.
Instruction Manual

7.3.8 Configuration for CI 1748, RCA 1750, MB 1753 and SP 1754
7.3.8.1 Connection interface CI 1748 configuration
A strap field on this module controls use of the internal modem or an external modem, and the
protocol used for the link.
The strap field contains 8 configuration jumpers. The settings of these jumpers are read into
the micro controller using a shift register.
Strap. Default
Name Function
no setting
S401 CFG_PROTOCOL_1 Open Protocol No. LSB (See Table 7-15)
S402 CFG_PROTOCOL_2 Open Protocol No. (See Table 7-15)
S403 CFG_PROTOCOL_3 Open Protocol No. MSB (See Table 7-15)
S404 CFG_30S_DELAY Open Select delay for missing messages
from RC. Insert strap to set 30s delay
instead of default 2s
S405 CFG_MAP_BATT_LOW_TO_RC_AUX Open If this strap is set, and one of protocols
5-8 is selected, the status for the bat-
teries will be mapped to the AUX sig-
nals sent to the remote control (AUX
0=Batt 1 status and AUX 1=Batt 2 sta-
tus)
S406 N.A. Open Not used
S407 N.A. Open Not used
S408 (Boot loader) Open Only for firmware upgrade. Leave
open for normal operation
Table 7-14 Configuration options CI 1748
Protocol 1 is the default for use with RCA 1750A/B.
Note: The same protocol must be set on the CI 1748 and the RCA 1750.
Instruction Manual

The following interface protocols are supported (strap: 0=open, 1=set/installed):
Protocol strap
No Protocol Data Speed Modem I/F
3 2 1
1 0 0 0 UILS 423 RC+RMM 2400, N, 8,1 Internal
V.22 Bis
2 0 0 1 UILS 423 RC+RMM 9600, N, 8,1 External
3 0 1 0 UILS 423 RC only 1200, N, 8,1 Internal
V.22
4 0 1 1 UILS 423 RC only 9600, N, 8,1 External
5 1 0 0 SI 1614/ Old RC only 1200, N, 8,1 Internal
1618A V.22
6 1 0 1 SI 1614/ Old RC only 1200, N, 8,1 External
1618A
7 1 1 0 SI 1614/ Old RC only 9600, N, 8,1 External
1618A
8 1 1 1 UILS147 Old RC only 300, O, 8,1 External
Table 7-15 Protocol selection
“UILS423” means that it is compatible with RCA1750 Remote Control.
“SI 1618A/1614A” means that it is compatible with SI 1614A Serial Interface in the Remote
control end.
“UILS147” means that it is compatible with RCA 1210A Remote control using external
modems.
The functionality supported by the Remote Control depends on the protocol selection. Proto-
cols 5, 6, 7 and 8 do not provide LO BATT 1, LO BATT 2, TX1 ON AIR and TX2 ON AIR
parameters.
Instruction Manual

7.3.8.2 Remote Control Assembly RCA 1750B configuration
A number of features can be controlled by a strap field on the RC board.
Note: The same protocol must be set on the RCA 1750 and the CI 1748.
Strap Default
Name Function
no. setting
S1 PROTOCOL_1 Open Protocol No. LSB (see Table 7-15)
S2 PROTOCOL_2 Open Protocol No.
S3 PROTOCOL_3 Open Protocol No. MSB
S4 RST_RC_BUZ_ONLY Open When set the Remote Control silence switch will
silence the internal buzzer only.
When this strap is not set, the Remote Control
silence switch will reset both the internal and
external aural alarm.
S5 RST_SLAVE_BUZ_ONLY Open When set the external SLAVE_SILENCE input
will only reset the external (Slave) aural alarm.
When this strap is not set, the external
SLAVE_SILENCE will reset both the internal and
external aural alarm, while the CAN_SILENCE
will reset the internal aural alarm but not the
external alarm.
S6 BUZ_STBY_AL Cold When set an Aural Alarm will be given when
standby: Standby Alarm is active
Open
Hot
standby:
Set
S7 BUZ_WA_IDENT Set When set an Aural Alarm will be given when
Ident warning is active
S8 BUZ_WA_MAINS Set When set an Aural Alarm will be given when
Mains warning is active
S9 BUZ_STBY_ON_AIR Set When set an Aural Alarm will be given when
Standby on air warning is active
S10 BUZ_WA_MON_DIS Set When set an Aural Alarm will be given when
Monitor disagree warning is active
S11 BUZ_WA_MAINT Open When set an Aural Alarm will be given when
Maintenance warning is active
S12 BUZ_BATT Set When set an Aural Alarm will be given when Bat-
tery warning is active
S13 BUZ_INTRUDER Open When set an Aural Alarm will be given when
Intrusion alarm is active
S14 BUZ_AIR_CON Open When set an Aural Alarm will be given when Air
Conditioning failure is active
S15 BUZ_FIRE Open When set an Aural Alarm will be given when Fire
alarm is active
Instruction Manual

Strap Default
Name Function
no. setting
S16 BUZ_INTEGRITY Set When set an Aural Alarm will be given when
Integrity warning is active
S17 BUZ_SERVICE Set When set the Aural Alarm will be disabled when
SERVICE mode is active. Entering or leaving
SERVICE will however always cause Aural
Alarm.
S18 BUZ_UPGRADE Open When this strap is set, Aural Alarm will be given
by any change of ALARM, COMMS, SERVICE
and Warnings configured to give Aural Alarm
(CAP670 mode).
When this strap is not set, Aural Alarm will be
given only when ALARM, COMMS, SERVICE
and Warnings configured to give Aural Alarm, are
turned ON (activated).
S19 BUZ_IN_OFF Open When this strap is not set and the equipment is in
ALARM state and not in SERVICE with
BUZ_SERVICE set, the Aural Alarm will only be
re-triggered (see BUZ_UPGRADE) by MAINS 1
or 2 and COMMS.
S20 SLAVE_OUTPUT_INVERT Open If this strap is open, the discrete Slave outputs
(ALARM, WARNING, NORMAL, STBY_ALARM,
COMMS and BUZZER) will be pulled low when
the corresponding signal is active. If the strap is
set, these outputs will be high when the signals
are active.
S21 IL_BLNK_LED Open This strap controls the action of the front panel
Indicator LEDs and slave outputs when the Inter-
lock state is not active (i.e. RWY not selected):
If this strap is not set, the status Indicator LEDs/
signals show the LOC/GP status
If this strap is set, the Indicator LEDs/signals
except COMMS, LO_BATT_1, LO_BATT_2,
MAINS_1, MAINS_2, SERVICE indicator LEDs
and AUX_RC signals, will be inactive, and a radi-
ating ILS (Normal status signal from the
LOC/GP that should be off) will be indicated by
NORMAL LED blinking at 2 Hz.
S22 SERVICE_M1 Open Selects between 3 display modes in SERVICE
S23 SERVICE_M2 Open (i.e. Maintenance).
M2/M1 (1=set, 0=open):
00 SERVICE LED lit and all other indicator
LEDs inactive
01 SERVICE and ALARM LED lit and all other
Indicator LEDs inactive
10 SERVICE LED lit and other Indicator LEDs
functioning as in normal operation
11Undefined mode, this will be displayed by
SERVICE LED blinking at 4 Hz
S24 CAN_ENABLE Set Slave Panel CAN bus interface and associated
Instruction Manual
functions are enabled when this strap is set.

Strap Default
Name Function
no. setting
S25 CAN_COM_ERR Open If messages are not received on CAN-bus (CAN
com-fail) and this strap is set, the
CAN_INTERLOCK_OUT output and
CAN_ACCESS_GRANT signal will go inactive
after 30 seconds.
If strap is not set, the CAN_INTERLOCK_OUT
output and CAN_ACCESS_GRANT signal will
keep status according to the last valid CAN-bus
message.
S26 COM_ERR_DLY Open Sets holding time (delay) at communication fail-
ure with ILS to 2 sec. (open) and 30 sec. (set).
S27 TRUE_OFF Set If strap is not set the TRUE_OFF output will be
set active (low) only when the ILS equipment is
OFF/ALARM and there is no COMMS failure.
This mode is the correct TRUE_OFF. This is to
avoid that the GP is turned off immediately if the
LOC Comms fail, and should be used when the
LOC and GP cabinet is configured to not turn off
on Comms failure
If strap is set the TRUE_OFF
output will be set active (low) when the ILS equip-
ment is OFF/ALARM and there is no COMMS
failure; or a COMMS failure has been active for
30 seconds. This should be used when the LOC
and GP cabinet is set to turn off after a delay of
30 seconds on Comms failure.
S28 SW_ENABLE Open This strap is for future use intended for enabling
downloading of configuration/set-up parameters
via serial port (RS-232 modem port or RMM
port).
S29 HOT_STBY_ENABLE Cold
standby:
Open
or
Hot
standby:
Set
S30 FFM_ENABLE Open FFM Alarm, Normal and Warning parameters on
CAN bus are enabled when strap is set. These
are derived from AUX signals from the ILS equip-
ment as follows:
FFM Alarm active when RCP_TO_RC0 is 1,
FFM Warning active when RCP_TO_RC1 is 1,
FFM Normal active when RCP_TO_RC0 is 0
S31 CAN_SLAVE_COMMS Open If messages are not received on CAN-bus (CAN
com-fail) and this strap is set, the
CAN_SLAVE_COMMS signal will be active. This
strap setting is only applicable where Interlock is
to be received via CAN bus.
Instruction Manual

Strap Default
Name Function
no. setting
S32 CFG_AUX2_OUTPUT_INVERT Open When this strap is set, the AUX2 output will be
inverted in the Remote Control. Useful for inter-
facing ident sync from the LOC to the Fernau
RSP.
S33 Buzzer_LEVEL_1 Open Sets the internal Aural Alarm Buzzer level where
S34 Buzzer_LEVEL_2 Set one position (both open) is no sound.
Table 7-16 Configuration settings for RCA 1750
Instruction Manual

7.3.8.3 Motherboard MB 1753A Configuration
CAN bus address
The motherboard address must be set by the rotary switch on the back of the motherboard.
This address must be the same as on the corresponding slave panel if SP 1754 is used.
The default setting is 0. If more than one motherboard is connected to the same CAN bus, the
address settings must be different.
CAN bus termination
When the strap marked P22 is installed (default), a termination resistor is connected onto the
CAN bus. This shall be used in each endpoint unit on the CAN bus.
Instruction Manual

7.3.8.4 Slave Panel SP 1754A/B configuration
A number of options can be set on DIP switches, see the table below.
Note: The CAN address must be set to the same value as on the corresponding Motherboard
MB 1753.
WARNING: If more than one slave panel use the same address (displays the same runway),
only one can have Interlock input (SW 8-5 = on).
Switch Item On Off Default

SW9-8 AD0 The settings of these switches determine the module address for Off
SW9-7 AD1 this unit. See table below. Off
SW9-6 AD2 Off
SW9-4 ALARM OFF A CAN comfailure will turn off A CAN comfailure will turn off On
the NORMAL, WARNING and the NORMAL, WARNING and
ALARM LEDs. on the ALARM LEDs
SW9-3 CSU MAINT The buzzer will work normally INTL_BUZ setting will be used Off
BUZ for CSU MAINT independent of for CSU MAINT
SW 9-1 INTL BUZ
SW9-2 OPT1 BUZ The buzzer will work normally INTL_BUZ setting will be used Off
for POS4 1 OPT independent of for POS4 1 OPT
SW 9-1 INTL BUZ
(Typically used if POS4 is used
for enroute DVOR or DME)
SW9-1 INTL BUZ The buzzer will be disabled for Service, com failure and mains Off
changes to service com failure failure will activate the buzzer
and mains failure when inter- independent of the interlock
lock is not selected status
SW8-8 BUZ MAINS A new mains failure will activate A new mains failure will not On
the buzzer. activate the buzzer.
SW8-7 BUZ ALL A new general warning will acti- A new general warning will not On
vate the buzzer. activate the buzzer.
SW8-6 BUZ UPG When a general warning goes When a general warning goes On
inactive or an upgrade mes- inactive or an upgrade mes-
sage is received from the CSU, sage is received from the CSU,
the buzzer will be activated. the buzzer will not be activated.
SW8-5 INT MSG The slave panel will send a The slave panel will not send a On
message with the interlock message with the interlock
input status each 250ms. input status.
SW8-4 POS3 2 OPT Position 3 on the slave panel Position 3 on the slave panel Off
will be controlled by the OPT will be controlled equipment in
inputs of the equipment in posi- position 3 in the corresponding
tion 2 in the corresponding remote control shelf.
remote control shelf. (POS 2
PRST must be on.)
Instruction Manual

Switch Item On Off Default

SW8-3 POS4 1 OPT Position 4 on the slave panel Position 4 on the slave panel Off
will be controlled by the OPT will be controlled equipment in
inputs of the equipment in posi- position 4 in the corresponding
tion 1 in the corresponding remote control shelf.
remote control shelf. (POS1
PRST must be on.)
SW8-2 PULSE POS3 This is only applicable if POS3 This is only applicable if POS3 Off
2 OPT is on. When the on/off 2 OPT is on. When the on/off
buttons is pressed, a pulse will button is pressed, a pulse will
set for 1 sec on OPT 1 output. set for 1 sec on OPT 2 output if
OPT 1 input is set. If not the
pulse will be on the OPT 1 out-
put.
SW8-1 PULSE POS4 This is only applicable if POS4 This is only applicable if POS4 Off
1 OPT is on. When the on/off 1 OPT is on. When the on/off
buttons is pressed, a pulse will button is pressed, a pulse will
set for 1 sec on OPT 1 output. set for 1 sec on OPT 2 output if
OPT 1 input is set. If not the
pulse will be on the OPT 1 out-
put.
SW7-8 ALARM DIM ALARM LEDs will be dimmed ALARM LEDs will always have On
when the LAMP DIM button is highest brightness when on.
pressed.
SW7-7 DIS ONOFF All on/off buttons are disabled. All on/off buttons are enabled. Off
SW7-6 POS1 PRST The slave panel expects to The slave panel does not On
receive messages from equip- expect to receive messages
ment in position 1 (left) in the from equipment in position 1
corresponding remote shelf. If (left) in the corresponding
not, a com failure will be gener- remote shelf. If received, these
ated. will not be handled.
SW7-5 POS2 PRST See above. See above. On
SW7-2 CSU PRST The slave panel expects to The slave panel does not Off
receive messages from a CSU. expects to receive messages
If not, a com failure will be gen- from a CSU. If received, these
erated. will not be handled.
SW7-1 LED WARN- The warning LED on the panel The warning LEDs on the pan- Off
ING OFF will always be dark els will indicate warning status
Table 7-17 DIP switches options

Instruction Manual

P5: Plug for Programming (JTAG)
AD2 AD1 AD0

Module address
SW9-6 SW9-7 SW9-8
0 Off Off Off
1 Off Off On
2 Off On Off
3 Off On On
4 On Off Off
5 On Off On
6 On On Off
7 On On On
Table 7-18 Module address
Strap Item IN OUT Default

S1 Not Used Not Used Not Used Off
S3 RC COMM AL Suppress Alarm LED indica- Normal Alarm LED indica- Out
tion for RC-ILS comms fail tion for RC-ILS comms fail.
S6 Termination 120 ohm Termination of CAN No CAN Bus Termination On
Bus Inserted
Table 7-19 Straps
Strap S34 In S34 Out

S33 IN 1,5 dB Sound Level Louder Default Sound
S33 OUT 13 dB Sound Level Lower No Sound
Table 7-20 Buzzer Attention

Instruction Manual

7.3.8.5 Category Status Unit CSA 1816A Configuration
The following configuration straps located on the RC 1752 board are used to change/set vari-
ous configuration alternatives available. "0" means strap out, "1" means strap in. Default set-
tings are shown in bold.
Strap
Name Logic level Function
no.
S32 CFG_BOOTLOADER Activate bootloader when strap inserted.
S31 CFG_FFM_DISABLE 531 = 0 Normal FFM handling
531 = 1 FFM input ignored
S30 CFG_EXT2_ALARM_SOURCE_0 S29=0, S30=0 EXT 2 disabled
S29 CFG_EXT2_ALARM_SOURCE_1 S29=0, S30=1 EXT2 alarm from RC w/unit ID=4,
S29=1, S30=0 CAN_TRUE_OFF
S29=1, S30=1 EXT2 alarm from LOC_CAN_OPT_IN_1, “1”=active
EXT2 alarm from LOC_CAN_OPT_IN_1, “0”=active
S28 CFG_EXT1_ALARM_SOURCE_0 S27=0, S28=0 EXT 1 disabled
S27 CFG_EXT1_ALARM_SOURCE_1 S27=0, S28=1 EXT1 alarm from RC w/unit ID=3,
S27=1, S28=0 CAN_TRUE_OFF
S27=1, S28=1 EXT1 alarm from GP_CAN_OPT_IN_1, “1”=active
EXT1 alarm from GP_CAN_OPT_IN_1, “0”=active
S26 CFG_SKIP_CAT_II S26=0 CAT II allowed
S26=1 Skip CAT II. CAT II shall give CAT I
S25 CFG_MAIN_WARN_ENABLE S25=0 Do not use mains warning for downgrade
S25=1 Use mains warning for downgrade according
to S2, S3, S4, S9, S10 and S11
S24 CFG_LOC_NOT_OFF S24=0 Comms failure on GP gives max OFF status
S24=1 Comms failure on GP gives max LOC Status
S23 CFG_MAX_CAT_0 S22=0, S23=0 Max Category: Maintenance
S22 CFG_MAX_CAT_1 S22=0, S23=1 Max Category: CAT I
S22=1, S23=0 Max Category: CAT II
S22=1, S23=1 Max Category: CAT III
S21 CFG_BUZ_ON_UPGRADE S21=0 Do not activate buzzer on upgrade
S21=1 Activate buzzer on upgrade
S20 CFG_RECIPROCAL_DISABLE S520=0 Normal reciprocal handling
S520=1 Reciprocal input ignored
S19 CFG_INTERLOCK_DISABLE S519=0 Normal Interlock handling
S519=1 Interlock input ignored
S18 CFG_HIDE_FFM_IF_DESELECTED S18=0 Always show FFM status
S18=1 Hide FFM status if deselected
S17 CFG_SLAVE_SILENCE_DISABLE S17=0 Slave silence button stops CSU buzzer
S17=1 Slave silence button does not stop CSU buzzer
S16 CFG_FFM_ALARM S16=0 LOC FFM Alarm gives max. CAT I
S16=1 LOC FFM Alarm gives max. CAT II
S15 CFG_LLZ_TX_ON_0 S14=0, S15=0 No stby TX available for LOC gives max. CAT I
S14 CFG_LLZ_TX_ON_1 S14=0, S15=1 No stby TX available for LOC gives max. CAT I
S14=1, S15=0 No stby TX available for LOC gives max. CAT II
S14=1, S15=1 No stby TX available for LOC gives max. CAT III
S13 CFG_LLZ_DISAGR_0 S12=0, S13=0 LOC monitor disagree gives max. CAT I
S12 CFG_LLZ_DISAGR_1 S12=0, S13=1 LOC monitor disagree gives max. CAT I
S12=1, S13=0 LOC monitor disagree gives max. CAT II
S12=1, S13=1 LOC monitor disagree for LOC gives max. CAT
III
Instruction Manual
S11 CFG_LLZ_BW1_AND_BW2 S11=0 LOC LowBatt1 AND LowBatt2 gives max. CAT I
S11=1 LOC LowBatt1 AND LowBatt2 gives max. CAT II

Strap
Name Logic level Function
no.
S10 CFG_LLZ_BW1_OR_BW2_0 S9=0, S10=0 LOC LowBatt1 OR LowBatt2 gives max. CAT I
S9 CFG_LLZ_BW1_OR_BW2_1 S9=0, S10=1 LOC LowBatt1 OR LowBatt2 gives max. CAT I
S9=1, S10=0 LOC LowBatt1 OR LowBatt2 gives max. CAT II
S9=1, S10=1 LOC LowBatt1 OR LowBatt2 gives max. CAT III
S8 CFG_GP_TX_ON_0 S7=0, S8=0 No stby TX available for GP gives max. CAT I
S7 CFG_GP_TX_ON_1 S7=0, S8=1 No stby TX available for GP gives max. CAT I
S7=1, S8=0 No stby TX available for GP gives max. CAT II
S7=1, S8=1 No stby TX available for GP gives max. CAT III
S6 CFG_GP_DISAGR_0 S5=0, S6=0 GP monitor disagree gives max. CAT I
S5 CFG_GP_DISAGR_1 S5=0, S6=1 GP monitor disagree gives max. CAT I
S5=1, S6=0 GP monitor disagree gives max. CAT II
S5=1, S6=1 GP monitor disagree for LOC gives max. CAT III
S4 CFG_GP_BW1_AND_BW2 S4=0 GP LowBatt1 AND LowBatt2 gives max. CAT I
S4=1 GP LowBatt1 AND LowBatt2 gives max. CAT II
S3 CFG_GP_BW1_OR_BW2_0 S2=0, S3=0 GP LowBatt1 OR LowBatt2 gives max. CAT I
S2 CFG_GP_BW1_OR_BW2_1 S2=0, S3=1 GP LowBatt1 OR LowBatt2 gives max. CAT I
S2=1, S3=0 GP LowBatt1 OR LowBatt2 gives max. CAT II
S2=1, S3=1 GP LowBatt1 OR LowBatt2 gives max. CAT III
S1 CFG_AUTOMATIC_UPG S1=0 Manual upgrade only
S1=1 Automatic upgrade
Table 7-21 CSA 1816A Configuration
Instruction Manual

7.4 Using Modems
7.4.1 About using modems
When equipment with CI 1748 and RCA 1750 is used, there is normally no need for external
modems between the shelter and the technical room unless special telecom requirements
applies, or fiber-optic networks are used. If an additional RMM connection is used or separate
RC and RMM connections are required, external modems must be used. External leased line
or dialup modems are also required for the RMM only connection if it is used to connect to a
remote location.
7.4.1.1 Leased line using Westermo TD-36
This description applies to Westermo TD-36 modems.
The TD-36 modem is intended for use in pairs and may not be compatible with other modems.
7.4.1.1.1 DIP switch settings
In the tables below, 1 indicates that a DIP switch is ON, 0 indicates OFF.
SW1: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Description
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps, 8 databits, 1 stop bit
ILS 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Leased line, answering
PC 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Leased line, calling
ILS and PC 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 Term transceiver/receiver, RTS/CTS flow control
ILS and PC 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 V32bis, 9600 bps, DTR disconnected
Instruction Manual

7.4.1.1.2 Initializing the PC modem
The PC modem must be initialized before connecting it to the cabinet. This is done by con-
necting it to a standard PC that has communication or terminal software installed (for example
HyperTerminal in Windows XP).
1. Connect the modem to a PC, and use for example HyperTerminal in Windows XP to
send the following init string to the modem: ATS7=40&W
2. Check that the modem responds with OK to the init string
3. Connect the modem to the cabinet as described below and power on the modem
7.4.1.1.3 Connecting the modem to the cabinet
The modem must be connected to Remote Port 1 or Remote Port 2 on the connection inter-
face board in the ILS cabinet. The bit rate for this port must be 9600 bps (this is the default
setting). There is no need to configure any modem init strings in the ILS.
It is recommended to use Remote Port 2 on the ILS, because this port has a 16 byte FIFO that
reduces the CPU load caused by the serial communication handling. RMS version 12 or later
should be installed when remote port 1 is used (earlier RMS versions does not drive RTS
active so this signal must be strapped to DSR on the modem side.) Also note that the ILS
does not drive DTR active on remote port 1, therefore the modem is set up to ignore this sig-
nal.
7.4.1.1.4 Connecting the modem to the PC
The modem must be connected to a RS-232 serial port. The "Connect method" in the RMM
software must be set to "Direct", and the bit rate to 9600 bps. There is no need to configure
any initialization strings in the RMM.
7.4.1.2 Dial-up using Westermo TD-36
This description applies to Westermo TD-36 modems.
The TD-36 modem is intended for use in pairs and may not be compatible with other modems.
7.4.1.2.1 DIP switch settings
ILS and PC 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 9600 bps, 8 databits, 1 stop bit
Instruction Manual
ILS and PC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PSTN, RS-232, 2-wire

ILS and PC 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Termination disabled, use stored values for flow con-
trol
ILS 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 V32bis, 9600, DTR disconnected
PC 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 Automatic line speed
7.4.1.2.2 Initializing the ILS modem
The ILS modem must be initialized before connecting it to the cabinet. This is done by con-
necting it to a standard PC that has communication or terminal software installed (for example
HyperTerminal in Windows XP).
1. Connect the modem to a PC, and use for example HyperTerminal in Windows to send
the following init string to the modem: ATS0=1E0&C1&D2&W
2. Check that the modem responds with OK to the init string
3. Connect the modem to the cabinet as described below and power on the modem
7.4.1.2.3 Connecting the modem to the cabinet.
The modem must be connected to Remote Port 1 or Remote Port 2 on the connection inter-
face board in the ILS cabinet. The bit rate for this port must be 9600 bps (this is the default
setting). There is no need to configure any modem init strings in the ILS.
It is recommended to use Remote Port 2 on the ILS, because this port has a 16 byte FIFO that
reduces the CPU load caused by the serial communication handling. RMS version 12 or later
should be installed when remote port 1 is used (earlier RMS versions does not drive RTS
active so this signal must be strapped to DSR on the modem side.) Also note that the ILS
does not drive DTR active on remote port 1, but the modem is set up to ignore this signal.
7.4.1.2.4 Connecting the modem to the PC
The modem must be connected to a RS-232 serial port on the PC. The "Connect method" in
the RMM software must be set to "Dial up", the bit rate to 9600 bps and the init string should
be:
ATX3&C1&D2\N5&W
Instruction Manual

7.4.1.3 Optical fiber line using Westermo ODW-720
This description applies to Westermo ODW-720 modems. Identical DIP switch settings are
used in both ends of the optical fiber. The same settings are used for RMM, RCA 1240 and
RCA 1750.
In the table below, 1 indicates that a DIP switch is ON, 0 indicates OFF.
DIP switch S1: All switches are OFF for point-to-point applications.
DIP Switch S2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
7.4.1.4 Optical fiber line using Westermo ODW-621
This description applies to Westermo ODW-621 modems.
7.4.1.4.1 DIP switch settings are the same in both ends of the optical fiber
7.4.1.4.2 DIP switch settings for use with remote control
ILS and Remote Control 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 300 bps, 8 data bit, 1 parity, 1 stop bit, no
handshake
ILS and Remote Control 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Start bit controlled, error port any link error
7.4.1.4.3 DIP switch settings for use with RMM
ILS and PC 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 9600 bps, 8 data bit, no parity, 1 stop bit, RTS/CTS con-
trol
ILS and PC 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Start bit controlled, error port any link error
Instruction Manual

7.5 Transmitter Setup
Test Equipment required:

• NORMARC 3710/7710 PIR (with 20dB attenuator)
• BNC Test Cable
Carry out the alignment steps in the order outlined below:
7.5.2 RF output level
7.5.3 LF phase check
7.5.4 SDM adjustment
7.5.5 DDM adjustment
7.5.6 CSB/SBO phase adjustment
7.5.7 Course Sector adjustment
7.5.8 Ident Morse code
7.5.9 Ident modulation adjustment
7.5.10 Flight Check value setting
7.5.1 Transmitter setup
The following sub paragraphs describe the System alignments. Two options are given for
each adjustment. The first "initial installation" is the one to be carried out during installation of
a new ILS. The second one "Replacement" is to be carried out if an LPA/GPA module has
been replaced.
Instruction Manual

7.5.2 RF output level
Open Transmitter settings window. Select Signal adj. tab.
Select the parameter for the transmitter to be adjusted.
HBK 1412-1
Figure 7-52 RF output level
Open Maintenance measurements window.
Observe the CSB forward power for the trans-

mitter.
Adjust COU (CLR) RF until the correct output

power is achieved.
7.5.2.1 Replacement
The CSB power should normally be set to the

nominal value.
LOC Course 20W nominal

5-25W range
LOC Clearance 20W nominal
5-25W range
GP Course 6W nominal
3-8W range
GP Clearance 0,6 nominal
0.1-1W range
Table 7-22 Normal operating power level
HBK 1408-1
Instruction Manual
Figure 7-53 Maintenance Measurements

7.5.3 LF Phase Check

DEMODULATION CSB: NORMAL DEMODULATION CSB 10° LF PHASE ERROR
Figure 7-54 LF phase CSB illustration
Connect oscilloscope channel A to the BNC test connector labelled CSB located on LPA/GPA
Course 1 (2). (LPA CLR1(2))
Set oscilloscope input mode to DC.
If adjustment is necessary, set the RMM program to “Factory mode” (File/Preferences) and
open the Transmitter settings window
Adjust 90 Hz COU phase in the RMM program (Transmitter setting/signal adj.) observing
oscilloscope channel A until the waveform equals left hand graph in Figure 7-54.
A significant indication of correct LF phase is that the pair of the intermediate peaks are equal
in amplitude.
For two- frequency LOC, repeat for CLR 90 Hz phase.
Deselect factory mode after adjustment
Instruction Manual

7.5.4 SDM adjustment
HBK 1414-1
Figure 7-55 SDM Adjustment
7.5.4.1 Initial installation
Connect a calibrated DDM-meter / PIR to the relevant test BNC jack on the ventilation cover.
Observe the measured SDM.
Adjust COU (CLR) SDM until the correct SDM measurement is achieved.
7.5.4.2 Replacement
Open Monitor Measurements and observe CL (CLR) SDM reading.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the SDM reading. Adjust the COU
(CLR) SDM of the new transmitter until the SDM readings are within +/- 0.02%SDM of the
other transmitter.
Instruction Manual

7.5.5 DDM adjustment
HBK 1411-1
Figure 7-56 DDM Adjustment
Connect a calibrated DDM-meter / PIR to the relevant test BNC jack on the ventilation cover.
Observe the measured DDM.
Adjust COU (CLR) DDM until the correct DDM measurement is achieved.
7.5.5.2 Replacement
Open Monitor Measurements and observe CL (CLR) DDM reading.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the SDM reading. Adjust the COU
(CLR) DDM of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5µA of the other
transmitter.
7.5.6 CSB / SBO phase adjustment
The SBO phase can be adjusted via two different windows.

1. Open Transmitter settings window. Select Signal adj. tab
or
Instruction Manual
2. Open Flight Check window
The first is preferred for LOC while the second must be used for GP since phasing of GP
requires inserting of 90 degree stub.

HBK 1415-1
Figure 7-57 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (Transmitter settings)
1. Insert
90° stub
2.Observe 3. Adjust
1b
2b
HBK 1406-1
Figure 7-58 CSB/SBO Phase Adjustment (flight check)
During antenna system adjustments the CSB/SBO phase will be adjusted. Please refer to the
antenna systems handbooks for detailed procedure.
Instruction Manual
Select the first option mentioned above for LOC and the second option for GP.

7.5.6.2 Replacement
LOC:
Connect the DDM-meter / PIR to the test connector on the ADU.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the DDM reading. Adjust the SBO
phase of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5µA of the other transmit-
ter.
GP:
Connect the DDM-meter / PIR to the monitor return cable lower antenna (M1).
Open Flight Check window, insert 90 degree stub or, alternatively, connect the 90 degree
cable stub in the SBO cable.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the DDM reading. Adjust the SBO
phase of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5µA of the other transmit-
ter.
7.5.7 Course Sector adjustment
HBK 1413-1
Figure 7-59 Course Sector Adjustment

Instruction Manual

During antenna system adjustments the Course Sector will be adjusted. Please refer to the
antenna systems handbooks for detailed procedure.
Adjust COU (CLR) SBO level until the correct Course Sector is achieved.
7.5.7.2 Replacement
Open Monitor Measurements and observe DS DDM reading.
Change between the transmitter 1 and 2 and compare the DDM reading. Adjust the COU
(CLR) SBO level of the new transmitter until the DDM readings are within +/- 0.5uA of the
other transmitter.
7.5.8 Ident Morse code
Check the Morse code value. If it is not correct, push the Edit button and type in the correct
code.
7.5.9 Ident modulation adjustment
Adjust Tx1 first with Tx1 to air, repeat for Tx2.
Connect the PIR to the CSB COU (CLR) test connector on the ventilation cover through a 20
or 30dB attenuator.
Open Transmitter settings window. Select Modulation tab. Set the Morse signal to Cont. (con-
tinuous).
Select Signal adj. tab. Select COU 1020Hz level (CLR 1020Hz level). Push Edit and adjust the
modulation level
On the PIR read IDENT MOD. The nominal reading should be 10% MOD, alternatively the
same value as previous recording. (If voice modulation is applied the Ident modulation shall
be 5% modulation depth.)
7.5.10 Flight Check value setting
The values in the Flight Check window will normally be set during the Commissioning flights to
give signal values that correspond to the alarm limits.
To set the signal values, open the Flight Check window, select the transmitter on air (Tx1|Tx2)
and Alarm limit check. Set values as required for alarm limit checks.
Instruction Manual

HBK 1405-1
Figure 7-60 Flight Check value setting
7.6 Antenna System Adjustments
After the transmitters has been aligned correctly the antenna system must be aligned. This
includes mechanical adjustments of the Antenna System, electrical adjustments (phasing)
and adjustments of the ADU and MCU.
For details, refer to the adjustment procedure for each antenna system.
Instruction Manual

7.7 Monitor Alignment
Refer to paragraph 7.8 for monitor limits.
Before the monitors are aligned, the transmitters and the antenna system must be adjusted so
that the correct default signals are used as inputs to the monitors.
For establishing the correct input to the stand by monitor, please refer to Ch.7.7.1
Test Equipment required:

• Oscilloscope, general purpose
• PIR e.g. 7710 Field Test Set (with 20dB attenuator)
• BNC Test Cable
• Digital Voltmeter, 4 digits, DC
Step-by-step adjustment procedure
Below follows a step-by-step procedure for setting up the monitors from scratch.
LOC/GP selection:
The monitors must be set up as LOC or GP. This parameter can be found from the menu:
ILS settings - Monitoring - Monitor configuration.
The value is stored on the MF boards. Please set "MONx TYPE_GP" to LOC (0) or GP (1),
depending on type of system. This will select the either LOC or GP RF filter on the MF boards.
Repeat for both or all three monitors
Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual

Frequency settings:
This parameter can be found from the menu: ILS settings-Monitoring-Monitor configuration.
The value is stored on the MF board. Select channel 1-40 to match the frequency of the ILS.
The frequencies are as defined in ICAO Annex 10, volume 1, fifth edition, with the LOC fre-
quencies listed in ascending order with the matched GP frequency. Repeat for both or all
three monitors.
Note: Channel 0 and 41 are for test purposes only and shall not be used.
RF level adjustment and alarm limits:
RF level nominal value:
The RF level shall be adjusted to 0dB in the RMM program (corresponding to 3 volts in older
NORMARC 7000 systems) by setting the offset for the parameter and monitor in question.
From the menu, select ILS Settings - Monitoring - Monitor limits - Calibrate measurement.
Instruction Manual

The easiest way to adjust is to set the offset to 0dB for each parameter and monitor, read the
RF level for the parameter and note the monitor reading with transmitter on. If the monitor
reads -30.44 dB, then enter this number with opposite sign, that is 30.44 dB, in the offset field
and apply to the monitor that is being adjusted
This procedure must be repeated for all monitors and all channels in use, i.e. CL, DS, CLR
(dual frequency equipment only) and NF (if installed).
RF level alarm limits:
From the menu, select ILS Settings - Monitoring - Monitor limits - Edit
Set the alarm limits for RF, see Chapter 7.8 for guidance. Repeat for all monitors for CL, DS,
CLR (if applicable) and NF (if applicable).
Instruction Manual

RF unit:
When all monitors in use have been adjusted to 0dB and the alarm limits are set correctly, the
preferred unit for RF level may be changed. If V (Volts) is selected the nominal value will be
3.0 Volts, backward compatible with older NORMARC 7000 systems.The program will auto-
matically calculate the alarm limits back and forth when switching RF level unit.
SDM adjustment and alarm limits:
SDM nominal value:
Adjust SDM to the same value as read on the PIR connected to the monitor input signal. The
nominal value will normally be 40% (LOC) or 80% (GP). Use the offset to fine-adjust the
measured value to the same as read on the PIR.
If the monitored SDM (on PIR) differs more than a few tenths from the transmitter SDM then
the system should be checked for faults.
Instruction Manual
This procedure must be repeated for all monitors and all channels in use, i.e. CL, DS, CLR
(dual frequency equipment only) and NF (if installed).

SDM alarm limits:
Set the alarm limits for SDM, see chapter 7.8 for guidance. Repeat for all monitors for CL, DS,
CLR (if applicable) and NF (if applicable).
DDM adjustment and alarm limits:
DDM nominal value:
Verify that the DDM is the same value as read on the PIR connected to the monitor input
signal. The nominal value is normally be 0 µA for CL and NF,150uA or 75 µA for DS and 280-
343 µA for CLR.
Use the offset setting to adjust the measured value to display 0 µA if desired. The picture
below shows the setting for LOC DS with 150 µA as monitored value. The monitor will then
read 0uA with 150 µA input.
Setting the nominal value to 150µA and offset to 0µA will display 150µA as the monitored
value in a properly adjusted system.
If the monitored DDM (on PIR) differs more than a few µA from the value at the relevant field
check point then the system should be checked for fault.
DDM alarm limits:
Set the alarm limits for DDM, see Chapter 7.8 for guidance. Repeat for all monitors for CL,
DS, CLR (if applicable) and NF (if applicable).
Continuously running integrity checks
The monitors are digital, and strict safety measures have been taken to ensure the integrity of
Instruction Manual
the FPGA's. All four RF channels are continuously monitored for stuck bits and other faults.
In order for these internal tests to run smoothly, the monitors must be told which channels are

in use, i.e. if there is a signal there.
From the menu, select ILS Settings - monitoring- monitor configuration
The MONx_TEST_CONF/STBY_TEST_CONF parameters define which channels shall be

checked continuously for integrity faults. Use the following table for determining the monitor
setup and note that the scheme for STBY monitor may differ from MON1 and MON2.
Parameters set up with alarm limits OFF shall be omitted from this test. I.e. in a NORMARC
7014B configuration the hot standby monitor will normally be set to "Disable NF test (no STBY
NF installed) and MON1/MON2 set to "All enabled"
MONx_TEST_CONFIG Use for

Disable NF&CLR test Single frequency equipment without NF. CLR and NF alarm limits
OFF
Disable CLR test Single frequency equipment with NF *). CLR alarm limits OFF
Disable NF test Dual frequency equipment without NF. NF alarm limits OFF
All enabled Dual frequency equipment with NF *)
*) NF normally not monitored for hot standby, test config may differ from MON1/MON2
The picture below shows typical settings for MON1, MON2 and STBY MON for a LOC hot
standby
Instruction Manual

7.7.1 Stand by Monitor alignment
Before the standby monitor is aligned, the correct input to the standby monitor must be estab-
lished. This cannot be carried out until the transmitter and antenna system have been cor-
rectly adjusted.
When the transmitter and antenna system have been correctly adjusted, the DS and CLR out-
put from the changeover section (CO 1837B) to the standby monitor must be adjusted to its
correct DDM value.
• Adjust the LOC/GP, Frequency, RF level and SDM for the standby monitor CL, DS,
NF and CLR channels as described earlier
• Adjust the DS DDM Nominal and Offset on the standby monitor to 0.0%DDM/0µA
• Look at the standby monitor DS DDM measurement and adjust the small potenti-
ometer to the left of the J10 connector (on the Course CO 1837B/CO 1838B board
at the back of the cabinet - the right hand side board seen from behind) until the
DDM is as close to 15.5%DDM/150µA on LOC or 8.75%DDM/75µA on GP as pos-
sible
• On LOC; adjust the CLR DDM Nominal and Offset on the standby monitor to
0.0%DDM/0µA. Look at the standby monitor CLR DDM measurement and adjust
the small potentiometer to the left of the J10 connector (on the CLR CO 1837B
board at the back of the cabinet - the left hand side board seen from behind) until
the DDM is as close to 27.0%DDM/261µA as possible
• Use the offset settings on CL, DS, NF and CLR to adjust the measured value to
display 0.0%DDM/0µA if desired
Figure 7-61 Part of CO 1837B showing the potentiometer

Instruction Manual

7.8 Factory Default Configuration Settings
7.8.1 Cat I monitor LIMIT configuration
Factory default alarm, warning-limits and nominal values are shown in Table 7-23.
DDM values are in% DDM (which is the default DDM measurement unit in the RMM software).
Limit values are relative to the configured nominal value. The nominal values for DDM meas-
urements can be configured by the user. Other nominal values can not be modified by the
user.
Monitor 1 and monitor 2 are always configured equally and according to Table 7-23. The
standby monitor are also configured according to this table, but with a few exceptions, see the
notes following the table.
Note that for the CL, DS, NF, CLR, and FFM channels the alarm limits are fine-tuned during
commissioning and flight tests to match each site installation.
For information on using the RMM software to set the monitor limits, see Appendix D.
LOC GP
Channel Signal Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H
CL DDM 0A ±15A 75% 0A ±35A *) Note 75%
3
CL SDM 40%SDM ±4%SDM 75% 80%SDM ±5%SDM 75%
CL RF 0.0dB*) 1f: -3/+3dB 75% 0.0dB 1f: -3/+3 dB 75%
*) Note 5 2f: -1/+1dB 2f: -1/+1 dB
NF DDM 0A ±15A 75% 0A ±45A 75%
NF SDM 40%SDM ±20%SDM 75% 80%SDM ±20%SDM 75%
NF RF 0.0dB*) -5.1/+3.0 75% 0.0dB -6.1/+3.3 dB 75%
*) Note 5
DS DDM 150A ±25A 75% 75A*) Note ±18A *) Note 75%
*) Note 1 4 4
DS SDM 40%SDM ±20%SDM 7% 80%SDM ±20%SDM 75%
DS RF 0.0dB*) -5.1/+3.0 75% 0.0dB -6.1/+3.3 dB 75%
*) Note 5
CLR DDM *) Note 2 1f: Off 1f: 100% *) Note 2 1f: Off 1f: 100%
2f: ±38A 2f: 75% 2f: ±45A 2f: 75%
CLR SDM 40%SDM 1f: Off 1f: 100% 80%SDM 1f: Off 1f: 100%
2f: ±4.0 2f: 75% 2f: ±5 2f: 75%
CLR RF 0.0dB*) 1f: OFF 1f: 100% 0.0dB 1f: OFF 1f: 100%
*) Note 5 2f: -1/+1 dB 2f: 75% 2f: -1/+1 dB 2f: 75%
DF 10 kHz 1f: Off 1f: 100% 15 kHz 1f: Off 1f: 100%
2f: ±4 2f: 75% 2f: ±4.5 2f: 75%
CLR ID ACT 1 +/-0 Or off +/-0 Or off 1 Off Off
CLR ID CODE 1 +/-0 Or off +/-0 Or off 1 Off Off
Instruction Manual
CLR ID MOD 10.0% Off 100% 0.0% Off Off

CL ID ACT 1 +/-0 Or off +/-0 Or off 1 Off Off

LOC GP
Channel Signal Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H Nom Alarm L/H Warn L/H
CL ID CODE 1 +/-0 Or off +/-0 Or off 1 Off Off
CL ID MOD 10.0% Off +/-3% 0.0% Off Off
Self test DDM 0A ±50A 100% 0A +/-60A 100%
Self test SDM 40%SDM +/-10% 100% 80%SDM +/-20% 100%
Self test RF 0.0dB +/- 3dB 100% 0.0dB +/- 3dB 100%
*) Note 5
FFM ChA 0A ±15A 75% 0A ±35A 75%
*) Note 6 DDM
FFM ChA 40%SDM ±4%SDM 75% 80%SDM ±5%SDM 75%
*) Note 6 SDM
FFM ChA RF 0.0dB -10dB -8dB/off 0.0dB Off Off
*) Note 6
FFM ChB 0A ±15A 75% 0A Off 100%

*) Note 6 DDM
FFM ChB 40%SDM ±4%SDM 75% 80%SDM Off 10%
*) Note 6 SDM
FFM ChB RF 0.0dB -10dB -8dB/off 0.0dB Off Off
*) Note 6
FFM EXE AL NA NA NA NA NA NA
*) Note 6
Table 7-23 CAT I alarm and warning limits
*) Note 1: The alarm limit should be ±17% of the nominal value
*) Note 2: The CLR nominal value should be set to whatever is measured as a DDM value on the CLR
signal in to the monitor
*) Note 3: The value ±35A is derived from a combined situation of wide DS alarm simultaneously with
a low GP angle alarm condition to satisfy the ICAO Annex 10 requirement of an alarm at 7.5%
change of GP angle
*) Note 4: The alarm limit should be ±25% of the nominal value i.e. if the nominal monitor point is set to
150A, limits should be ±37A
*) Note 5: Alarm limits listed in dB's. The user can switch back to Volts after RF level adjustment has
been carried out
*) Note 6: FFM Executive Alarm is normally used only if FFM monitor is used as replacement for NF
monitoring in CAT I installations. If FFM Executive alarm is desired this must be activated from
Monitor Settings-Monitor Configuration
• Unused DC-loop channels: Set monitor alarm limits OFF and warning limits to 100%
• Unused Far Field Monitor (FFM) channels: Set monitor alarm limits to OFF and warn-
ing limits to 100% (RF warning to ±100)
• Unused VOICE channels: Set alarm limits to OFF and warning limits to ±204
Instruction Manual
• Standby monitor: Always disable alarms and warnings on the following channels: Near
Field, DC-loop, Far Field Monitor, and Voice

7.8.2 DC-loop Alarm Limits (LOC Only)
Please note that the DC-loop 1 to DC-loop 4 are numbered DL 0 to DL 3 in some contexts
including RMM versions below 3.0.
Since the DC-loop is getting voltage in parallel from both MO-boards, both monitors must be
installed and work correctly for the DC-loop to detect error.
If one MO-board is out, the DC-loop will not detect faults.

NM 7220A/
NM 3523B NM 3524 NM 3525 NM 3526 NM 7212A/C B/C NM 7232A
NM7216A/C
Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High Low High
DC-L0 2 42 2 42 2 42 2 42 20 905 20 1003 20 593
DC-L1 2 42 2 42 2 42 2 42 20 920 20 1003 20 593
DC-L2 Off Off Off Off 2 42 2 42 Off Off 20 1003 20 593
DC-L3 Off Off Off Off 2 42 2 42 Off Off 20 1003 20 593
Warning Low/High 100%

Table 7-24 DC-Loop alarm Limits (LOC Only)
7.8.3 Description of the FFM EXE AL limits
FFM Executive Alarm is normally not used.
If a Far Field Monitor is present for a Localizer, the Far Field parameters can be set up with
alarm limits for SDM/DDM and RF as normal. Make sure that the FFM delay is set long
enough to filter out e.g. aircraft taxiing.
Instruction Manual

In order to get a changeover/shutdown due to Far Field Alarm, the FFM Executive must be set
to 1 in the monitor settings window, as shown below
Instruction Manual

7.8.4 Description of the CL IDENT and CLR IDENT limits
CL ID ACT and CLR ID ACT
The CL ID ACT and CLR ID ACT parameters measures the modulation levels and sets the
output to OFF (0), KEYED (1) or CONTINUOUS (2). If the modulation level the last second is
less than 3%, then the parameters are set to OFF. If the modulation level is greater than 3%
for the last second the parameters are set to CONTINUOUS. Otherwise, they are set to
KEYED.
The nominal value for LOC is 1 (KEYED). Set the warning limits to +/-0 if CONTINUOS Ident
or No Ident shall give an Ident warning. Otherwise set to OFF. The same applies for (Execu-
tive) Ident Alarm. Note that during ident pauses this parameter will be measured to OFF, and
the ident delay must be set longer than the expected pause in the sequence, typically some
seconds, in order to avoid ident warning and alarm toggling on and off.
If the LOC ident is going to be collocated with a DME ident (LOC transmitting 3 ident words
and DME transmitting the forth word) the Ident delay must be long enough to avoid generation
of an Ident alarm when the DME is transmitting the ident
The GP has no ident, and the alarm and warning limits must be set to OFF.
CL ID CODE and CLR ID CODE
The CL ID CODE and CLR ID CODE parameters decodes the Morse code in the monitors and
compares to the expected value. The value is set to 1 (Nominal) if the correct code is
decoded. After a decoding sequence, the parameters are set to 0 before a new decoding
sequence is started.
In order for this to work, the ident delay must be set longer than the expected pause in the
sequence, the nominal value must be set to 1 (correctly decoded Morse code) and the warn-
ing and alarm limits must be set to either +/-0 or OFF, depending on whether wrong code shall
lead to warning or alarm.
In addition, the monitors must be told what the expected Morse code is. From the RMM menu,
select
ILS Settings - Monitoring - Monitor configuration. The parameters MONx IDENT_CODE and
STBY IDENT_CODE shall be set to the same ident code as used by the transmitters. These
values must match for the ident code to be correctly decoded.
The GP has no ident, and the alarm and warning limits must be set to OFF
Instruction Manual

7.8.5 Cat II monitor LIMIT configuration
For Cat II equipment the monitor limits are configured as for Cat I (see Table 7-23), with the
exceptions shown in Table 7-25. (Only the LOC limits are different.)
LOC
Channel Signal Nom Ala H/L Wa H/L
CL DDM 0.µA ±10µA 75%
NF DDM 0.µA ±10µA 75%
Table 7-25 Alarm and warning limits for Cat II equipment
7.8.6 Cat III monitor LIMIT configuration
For Cat III equipment the monitor limits are configured as for Cat I (see Table 7-23), with the
exceptions shown in Table 7-26. (Only the LOC limits are different.)
LOC
Channel Signal Nom Ala H/L Wa H/L
CL DDM 0.µA ±8µA 75%
NF DDM 0.µA ±8µA 75%
Table 7-26 Alarm and warning limits for Cat III equipment
7.8.7 Executive Monitor delay configuration
The factory default delay configuration for Cat I and II/III (values compliant with ICAO Annex
10) are shown in Table 7-27.
Note: That Annex 10 specifies the total changeover + shutdown delay after an alarm. The delay val-
ues used in the NORMARC 7000 RMM software are the time delay between the detection of
an alarm and the resulting changeover or shutdown. When a changeover takes place the delay
counters are reset. The values entered in the RMM software are therefore set to the Annex 10
value divided by two. The "Integrity Test - Monitor Delay Verification" delay shall be set to the
total changeover-shutdown time + 1 second (2*GEN delay + 1s).
The NF delay is used for alarms on the NF DDM, SDM and RF parameters. The IDENT delay
is used on the CL/CLR IDENT ACT, MOD and CODE parameters. The FFM delay is used on
all FFM parameters. The GEN delay is used on all remaining parameters..
See Appendix D for information on delay configuration using the RMM software.
LOC GP
Channel Cat I Cat II/III Cat I Cat II/III
GEN 5s 1s 3s 1s
NF 20 s 20 s 20 s 20 s
IDENT *) 20 s 20 s N/A N/A
FFM 60 s 60 s 60 s 60 s
Instruction Manual
INTEGRITY TEST 11s 3s 7s 3s
Table 7-27 Factory default delay values

*) It is recommended to use minimum 30 seconds as the delay for IDENT on the standby mon-
itor on both Cat I and II/III. This is recommended in order to ensure that the RMS detects the
toggling of the IDENT measurements from the standby monitor. Detecting the toggling is
required in order not to generate IDENT warning. Some (short) ident codes may else cause
the ILS to generate IDENT warnings on the standby monitor.
7.8.8 Maintenance parameter configuration
This following sub-sections describes the maintenance measurements collected by the RMS
for diagnostic purposes. Default warning limits is also defined for each measurement type.
The warning limit for digital measurement point, are set to the “normal” state of the measure-
ment point. For example, for a measurement point that is normally “HIGH”, the warning limit is
set to “HIGH”.
For analog measurement points the limits are specified as “low limit”/”high limit”.
See Appendix D for information on using the RMM software to set these limits.
Set the low/high limits to:

• 1/1 generate warning when the input pins is open (not connected together)
• 0/0 generate warning when the input pins is shorted
• 0/1 do not generate warning
Instruction Manual

7.8.8.1 Oscillator 1 and 2 (OS 1706)
Measurement Warn. limit. Description

COU OUTPUT LEVEL HIGH Detects low output level from the board. May cause
low radiated power.
COU TUNEVOLT HIGH Voltage Controlled Oscillator parameter drift.
COU SYNTH LOCK HIGH The phase locked loop has been out of lock. (May
be reset by turning the TX off/on.)
COU LOCK DETECT HIGH Output frequency is unstable.
CLR OUTPUT LEVEL HIGH Detects low output level from the board. May cause
low radiated power.
CLR TUNEVOLT OK HIGH Voltage controlled oscillator parameter drift.
CLR SYNTH LOCK HIGH The phase locked loop has been out of lock. (May
be reset by turning the TX off/on.)
CLR LOCK DETECT HIGH Output frequency is stable/not stable.
7.8.8.2 LF generator 1 and 2 (LF 1576)
Measurement Warn. limit Description

-15 V 0/0 (Normally low) -15 V supply voltage status.
+15 V 1/1 (Normally high) +15 V supply voltage status.
+2.5 V 0/0 (Normally low) +2.5 V supply voltage status.
+3.5 V 0/0 (Normally low) +3.5 V supply voltage status.
Watchdog 0/0 (Normally low) Watchdog status. This signal is set to 1 if the watch-
dog has reset the DSP.
DSP execution 1/1 (Normally high) DSP software execution status. This signal is set to
0 if the DSP does not access the FPGA.
DSP memory check 0/0 (Normally low) DSP memory status. This signal is set to 1 by the
DSP software if it detects any failure in the external
flash program memory or the internal RAM.
EEPROM parity 0/0 (Normally low) Parity check status of the configuration data
EEPROM. This signal is set to 1 by the DSP soft-
ware if a parity error is detected in any of the config-
uration settings.
Instruction Manual

7.8.8.3 TX 1 and 2, Course and Clearance

+5 V 1/1 (Normally high) +5 V supply voltage status.
+8.5 V 1/1 (Normally high) +8.5 V supply voltage status.
+27 V CSB 22/28 Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the
CSB power amplifier stage.
+27 V SBO 22/28 Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the
SBO power amplifier stage (not applicable for clear-
ance transmitters in GP equipment).
-15 V 0/0 (Normally low) -15 V supply voltage status.
TX1 COU CSB current LOC: -0.10/4.5A Measurement of the supply current to the power
GP: -0.10/3.5A amplifiers.
NM 7033B-34B:
COU -0.10/3.5A
CLR -0.10/1.5A
TX1 COU SBO current LOC: -0.10/1.5A Measurement of the supply current to the power
GP: -0.10/1.5A amplifiers.
NM 7033B-34B:
COU -0.10/1.5A
CLR N/A
CSB forward power LOC: 15W/26W Measurement of the forward power on the CSB out-
GP: 4W/9W put.
NM 7033B-34B:
COU 4W/9W
CLR 0.04W/1W
CSB reverse power 0W/2W Measurement of the reverse power on the CSB out-
NM 7033B-34B: put.
COU 0W/2W
CLR 0W/0.5
SBO forward power LOC: 0.2W/2W Measurement of the forward power on the SBO out-
GP:0.04W/1W put.
NM 7033B-34B:
COU 0.04W/1W
CLR n/a
SBO reverse power LOC: 0W/0.3W Measurement of the reverse power on the SBO out-
GP: 0W/0.3W put.
NM 7033B-34B:
COU 0W/0.3W
CLR N/A
CSB I-phase drive LOC: -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB I
GP: -0.5V/4.5V modulator
CSB Q-phase drive LOC: -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB Q
GP: -0.5V/4.5V modulator
SBO I-phase drive -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO I
NM 7033B-34B: modulator
COU -0.5V/3V
CLR 0V/0V
SBO Q-phase drive -0.5V/3V Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO Q
NM 7033B-34B: modulator
COU -0.5V/3V
CLR 0V/0V
Temperature -10/95 Measurement of the temperature of the power
Instruction Manual
amplifier assembly in degrees Celsius.


Reverse power status 1/1 (Normally high) Reverse power shutdown status. If the CSB or SBO
reverse power rises about a predetermined limit, this
status signal will toggle between OK and Fail with a
period of about 5 seconds as the power amplifier
drive signals are turned off and on to avoid overheat-
ing.
7.8.8.4 RF front-ends for monitor 1, 2 and standby monitor (MF 1821)

+8,5V HIGH Measures that the 8,5V is present
+15V HIGH Measures that the 15V is present
VINT HIGH Detects that all internal voltages are OK
FPGA RESET HIGH Tells if the FPGA is stuck in reset
FPGA STAT LOW Detects errors in the FPGA signal processing
SEU ERROR HIGH Detects Single Events Upsets in the FPGA
ADU ERROR LOW Detects error in both of the AD Converters
PLL ERROR LOW Detects PLL lock errors
FLASH ERROR LOW Detects CRC errors or read/write errors in the flash
Instruction Manual

7.8.8.5 Monitor 1, 2 and standby (MO 1820)

FPGA STAT LOW Detects errors in the FPGA signal processing
CPLD STAT LOW Detects errors in the CPLD signal processing
+5V HIGH +5 V supply voltage ok/not ok.
+15V HIGH +15 V supply voltage ok/not ok.
VINT HIGH +Internal voltages ok/not ok.
DS 180 HZ*) 0% (Lo) 1 (Hi) 180Hz content in DS Signal
CLR 180 HZ*) 0% (Lo) 1 (Hi) 180Hz content in CLR Signal
CL PHASE -1 deg/+1 deg Number of degrees between CL 90 and CL 150
Hz tone, see ICAO Annex 10 para 3.1.5.3.3
CLR PHASE -1 deg/+1 deg Number of degrees between CLR 90 and CLR
150 Hz tone, see ICAO Annex 10 para
3.1.5.3.3
30 HZ PHASE DIFF -1 deg/+1 deg Measures the LF phase between the CL and
CLR LF signals, based on the combined 90
and 150 Hz curve forms
CL RF FREQ LOC: -7kHz/7 kHz Measures the frequency of the CL carrier rela-
GP: -10 kHz/10kHz tive to the nominal carrier frequency. Note: In
single frequency equipment this value is the
same as the carrier frequency
CLR RF FREQ LOC: -7kHz/7 kHz Measures the frequency of the CLR carrier rel-
GP: -10 kHz/10kHz ative to the nominal carrier frequency. Note: In
single frequency equipment this value is N/A
DS VOICE 0% LO, 2% Hi with Measures the frequencies in the range 300Hz-
Voice OFF 3000 Hz
DS NOISE 0% LO, 1% Hi Highest measured value in the range 10-300
Hz, except the 90/150/180/270 and 300 Hz fre-
quencies.
CLR VOICE 0% LO, 1% Hi Measures the frequencies in the range 300Hz-
With voice OFF 3000 Hz.
CLR NOISE 0% LO, 1% Hi Highest measured value in the range 10-300
Hz, except the 90/150/180/270 and 300 Hz fre-
quencies
*) These parameters must be measured in manual mode, and with all other transmitters turned
OFF
Instruction Manual

7.8.8.6 Transmitter control board (TCA 1216)

EPROM PARITY CHECK LOW EPROM parity check ok/not ok.
INTEGRITY CHECK LOW Integrity check ok/not ok.
RC LINK STATUS HIGH Remote control link status ok/not ok. A warning
is generated if the TXC board does not receive
a valid data stream from the RC unit.
INTERNAL CL DDM LOC:-1/1 Measurements on the Course CSB signal out-
GP:-1.5/1.5(%DDM) put from the cabinet. Only measured on hot
standby systems. These signals are not asso-
ciated with the TCA 1216 board in the auto-
matic diagnostic functions.
INTERNAL CL SDM LOC: 36/44 See description for INTERNAL CL DDM.
GP: 76/84(%)
INTERNAL CL RF 2.6/3.4 (V) See description for INTERNAL CL DDM.
7.8.8.7 Remote monitoring board (RMA 1822)

RMS +5 LEVEL 4.3/6 (V) +5V voltage measurement (Volt).
RMS LI BATT LEVEL 2.4/3.5 (V) Clock and RAM battery voltage measurement
(Volt).
7.8.8.8 Power supply 1 and 2 (PS 1227)
The measurements listed here are displayed in the DC SUPPLIES maintenance window in
the RMM software.

V15N LEVEL -16.8/-13.8 Measurement of -15 V output voltage (Volt).
(V)
V5P LEVEL 4.6/5.9 (V) Measurement of +5 V output voltage (Volt).
V8P5P LEVEL 8.2/9.4 (V) Measurement of +8.5 V output voltage (Volt).
V15P LEVEL 13.8/16.8 (V) Measurement of +15 V output voltage (Volt).
7.8.8.9 External power
The measurements listed here are displayed in the DC SUPPLIES maintenance window in
the RMM software.

BATTERY V27P LEVEL 23/28 (V) Measurement of 27 V battery supply voltage.
BATTERY CURRENT -2/15 (A)
POWER CURRENT -1/20 (A)
Instruction Manual
CHARGER 1 STATUS ON Battery charger 1 status input.

CHARGER 2 STATUS ON Battery charger 2 status input.

7.8.8.10 User defined inputs
No default settings are defined for these parameters.
Measurement Description
USER_DIG0 - 7 8 user definable digital inputs/output.
TEMP_OUTDOOR Analog input for outdoor temperature sensor.
TEMP_INDOOR Analog input for indoor temperature sensor.
AC_LEVEL Analog input AC power level measurement.
ANA_CH1 - 3 3 user definable analog inputs.
7.8.9 Maintenance delay configuration
The factory default maintenance delays are as follows:
GEN delay: 20 seconds
EXT delay: 50 seconds
7.8.10 Morse code configuration
The factory default Morse code are “TST”.
Instruction Manual

7.9 Typical TX Adjustments values
Table 7-28 lists typical values entered in the RMM software (menu item ILS | TX settings | TX
adjustments) entered in the RMM software for LOC and GP equipment.
Note that the adjustment values incorporate both a modulation level setting and a small,
unpredictable, correction for individual variation on the low frequency generator boards
(LF1576). The correction is shown after the “±” sign in Table 7-28.
Parameter Values for LOC (20 W) Values for GP (6 W/0.6 W)

Course RF Power 14.2 ± 1 12.7 ± 1
Course DDM 0 ± 0.1 0±1
Course SDM 40 ± 1 80 ± 1
Course Mod Id. 10 ± 1 N/A
Clearance RF Power 14.2 ± 1 12 ± 1
Clearance DDM 0 ± 0.1 40 ± 1
Clearance SDM 40 ± 1 80 ± 1
Clearance Mod Id. 10 ± 1 N/A
Table 7-28 Typical TX adjustment values
NOTE:
GP CLR DDM can be increased up to 80% for only 150Hz modulation. Recommended range
40-55.
7.10 User administration configuration
The following user are set up on new equipment:
Username: MASTER
Password number 1: MASTER1
These passwords may be changed if the user prefer to do so. Se 7.3.3 for resetting of the
MASTER password.
Instruction Manual

7.11 Frequency configuration strap settings
This section defines the strap settings on the RF oscillators OS 1706A (LOC) and OS 1706B
(GP) for the standard ICAO Annex 10 ILS frequencies.
The strap settings for each frequency and equipment type are shown in Table 7-29 and Table
7-30
On the OS 1706 boards the upper group of straps numbered from 1 to 6 are used for fre-
quency configuration. Strap no 1 is the bottom strap (when the board is held as inserted in the
cabinet). Straps 1 to 6 will configure the COU and the CLR frequencies.
Strap 7 shall be inserted in single frequency cabinets.
Strap 8 shall be inserted for OS 1706 #2 (the board in the rightmost slot in the cabinet) in two
frequency cabinets in order to improve the channel isolation between TX1 and TX2.
An “X” character in the table means that the strap must be inserted.
Refer to 5.3.4.1 for frequency adjustment.
Instruction Manual

7.11.1 OS 1706A Strap settings for LOC systems
Ch. No LOC freq Straps no 1- 6 (Channel configuration) System Configuration

[MHz] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 108.1 X 1) 2) 3)
2 108.15 X 1) 2) 3)
3 108.3 X X 1) 2) 3)
4 108.35 X 1) 2) 3)
5 108.5 X X 1) 2) 3)
6 108.55 X X 1) 2) 3)
7 108.7 X X X 1) 2) 3)
8 108.75 X 1) 2) 3)
9 108.9 X X 1) 2) 3)
10 108.95 X X 1) 2) 3)
11 109.1 X X X 1) 2) 3)
12 109.15 X X 1) 2) 3)
13 109.3 X X X 1) 2) 3)
14 109.35 X X X 1) 2) 3)
15 109.5 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
16 109.55 X 1) 2) 3)
17 109.7 X X 1) 2) 3)
18 109.75 X X 1) 2) 3)
19 109.9 X X X 1) 2) 3)
20 109.95 X X 1) 2) 3)
21 110.1 X X X 1) 2) 3)
22 110.15 X X X 1) 2) 3)
23 110.3 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
24 110.35 X X 1) 2) 3)
25 110.5 X X X 1) 2) 3)
26 110.55 X X X 1) 2) 3)
27 110.7 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
28 110.75 X X X 1) 2) 3)
29 110.9 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
30 110.95 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
31 111.1 X X X X X 1) 2) 3)
32 111.15 X 1) 2) 3)
33 111.3 X X 1) 2) 3)
34 111.35 X X 1) 2) 3)
35 111.5 X X X 1) 2) 3)
36 111.55 X X 1) 2) 3)
37 111.7 X X X 1) 2) 3)
38 111.75 X X X 1) 2) 3)
39 111.9 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
40 111.95 X X 1) 2) 3)
1) Strap 7 no.: Insert strap for single freq. Systems
2) Strap 8 no.: Insert strap for CLR frequencies higher than COU frequencies.
This is a default setting for OS 1706 #2
Instruction Manual
3) Strap no.9: Insert strap if needed to make total number of straps even
Table 7-29 OS 1706A strap settings for 2-frequency LOC

7.11.2 OS 1706B strap settings for GP systems
Ch. No GP freq Straps no 1- 6 (Channel configuration) System Configuration

[MHz] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 334.7 X 1) 2) 3)
2 334.55 X 1) 2) 3)
3 334.1 X X 1) 2) 3)
4 333.95 X 1) 2) 3)
5 329.9 X X 1) 2) 3)
6 329.75 X X 1) 2) 3)
7 330.5 X X X 1) 2) 3)
8 330.35 X 1) 2) 3)
9 329.3 X X 1) 2) 3)
10 329.15 X X 1) 2) 3)
11 331.4 X X X 1) 2) 3)
12 331.25 X X 1) 2) 3)
13 332.0 X X X 1) 2) 3)
14 331.85 X X X 1) 2) 3)
15 332.6 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
16 332.45 X 1) 2) 3)
17 333.2 X X 1) 2) 3)
18 333.05 X X 1) 2) 3)
19 333.8 X X X 1) 2) 3)
20 333.65 X X 1) 2) 3)
21 334.4 X X X 1) 2) 3)
22 334.25 X X X 1) 2) 3)
23 335.0 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
24 334.85 X X 1) 2) 3)
25 329.6 X X X 1) 2) 3)
26 329.45 X X X 1) 2) 3)
27 330.2 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
28 330.05 X X X 1) 2) 3)
29 330.8 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
30 330.65 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
31 331.7 X X X X X 1) 2) 3)
32 331.55 X 1) 2) 3)
33 332.3 X X 1) 2) 3)
34 332.15 X X 1) 2) 3)
35 332.9 X X X 1) 2) 3)
36 332.75 X X 1) 2) 3)
37 333.5 X X X 1) 2) 3)
38 333.35 X X X 1) 2) 3)
39 331.1 X X X X 1) 2) 3)
40 330.95 X X 1) 2) 3)
) Strap 7 no.: Insert strap for single freq. Systems
2) Strap 8 no.: Insert strap for CLR frequencies higher than COU frequencies.
This is a default setting for OS 1706 #2
Instruction Manual
3) Strap no.9: Insert strap if needed to make total number of straps even
Table 7-30 OS 1706B GP frequency settings and configuration

SECTION 8 DETAILED TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION
8 Section 8 Detailed Technical Description
8.1 Main Cabinet
This Section gives a detailed description of the assemblies and modules in the NORMARC
70XXB.
Notations in the block diagrams:
~ - Active low signal.
[7:0] - Signal bus numbering system. Here, an eight bits bus, numbered from
seven down to zero.
The following paragraphs describe the electronics modules located in the main cabinet.
8.1.1 MF 1821A Monitor Front-end
General description:
The MF 1821A module contain four identical analog RF frontends (CL, NF, DS and CLR) each
consisting of two parallel RF band-pass-filters for LOC and GP, respectively. The LOC/GP-bit
that selects the LOC or GP filter is stored in on-board config flash and can be altered from the
RMM program.
For each frontend the RF filtered signal is fed into a transformer followed by a 12-bit AD con-
verter. The AD converters use undersampling to extract the envelope of the AM signal. The
sampling frequency is 90 MHz for LOC and 120 MHz for GP. The digitized envelope is fed into
the FPGA on the MF-board.
The FPGA contain four Signal Processing Units (SPU) that extract the 90 and 150 Hz modula-
tion levels, DC levels representing RF power and maintenance data like voice, noise and 90/
150Hz harmonics for the four monitored channels. After the SPU's, still inside the FPGA, the
SDM, DDM and RF level is calculated, as well as ident level/code, difference frequency and
various maintenance parameters. The primary (monitor) and secondary (maintenance)
parameters are multiplexed and sent to the MO 1820A Monitor board.
The internal blocks in the FPGA are described below.
Block diagram:
(See Figure 8-1, Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3)

Instruction Manual

!
"
#$
%
" "
,

!"
%}
!

$
% "
!## 1$/&
!

) 1
!
%}
!

!" "
© Indra Navia AS
'() + '()
#
! !
"

!
!

$
%
{%|

!
%} **
" " ! 2
73892-I8/Rev.2/05-Apr-17
**

!
! !

" "
$
" " '' ''

! (

()

'(') (
'+*
(

(

'(+
!
~) !

'+' ##
'+
###

##

##
'()
! ##

##

##!
'*'/
'+)

&

" "
'(
!

!"
q#
''0 !
'+
!

$v

!
Figure 8-1 MF 1821A Block Diagram

!
&$'(

!
'(/
! ! !

" " !

!

2"2k( "
#2k( '(0 '(.
"2k( !

. !
#
/0* # '((

- )z &

$%&
'(*
)
'-
$%&
, - '(
)*+* )
$%&
) " "

*+*$
,#( !
! !
)#,
Page 8-2
NORMARC 7011B-7034B
Instruction Manual

© Indra Navia AS
#-7 !

$5

###

* *

+ +

73892-I8/Rev.2/05-Apr-17

8

8

!

$5

$%

4

$

&**

3 '
+

&*+ %&
*
'

0
&* '

*
$5

&*',-) ##&'

# $.
#-7 ##

/

1
0
'
1
0

'
)
*66# 1
0

1

(!*66 $5

8 1 ##',

3
8

#-7


#

!

!
,-

$.

3
###()

/

$5

#-7

!

8

8

###

#

2

#

&+*

3

&++ %(
+

&+ '

&+',-)

Figure 8-2 MF 1821 FPGA Block Diagram

#-7 "

1
0

1
0

8
.
8

$

1

2
15

3 #
)#,

Page 8-3
NORMARC 7011B-7034B
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS

!

" !

122

73892-I8/Rev.2/05-Apr-17

# . ,- #
.- ,
.-/,-
. , &'()*+ &'()*+ 4*
."0/,0

$ % $ %
. .
12
'1
21216 '9
212163>
212163>*1)(*
'9:'23>
'93>*1)(*
4*3>*1)(*
9'1*; 9'
:'2 97

!

!
5,3+'4
9'1*; , #, 3+'4'
97 >*1*+2+
=:99*+
.-
.0 ,
5 3+'4
9 3+'4
5
*?@ <
.

8. "#
5,41

,8

5 12'
*
; 41'
:'23>*1)(* >
=:99*+
9*1)(* .
562'*
>
*(* < 41
';
5,
7
57+4
'!
21216
'9 3'21(*
'>1)(2! !
Figure 8-3 MF 1821 SPU Block Diagram

4* '9 '9
:'2 *+'9''21)(2!/*
+'6*+ :'2 :'2

> !
1*+1(
'>1(
9 $ %

%& 37'
97 13:2:3:32+
, # /
9'1*; ,8
9' 1/ 37
, # /
';
*
*1)(* 7
*

*(

*
2:
*
';2:
)#,
Page 8-4
NORMARC 7011B-7034B
Instruction Manual
Block Diagram description:
(See Figure 8-1)
Power supply
The unit uses the +15V and +8.5V system voltages as input for the internal switching regula-
tors. The +15V is used for the 1.8V ADC supply voltage and FPGA I/O voltage. The +8.5V is
used for the rest: +1.2V FPGA core voltage and +3.3V general voltage. The +2.5V FPGA LDO
voltage is generated from the +3.3V source.
Voltage Monitor
The voltage monitor checks both the external and internal voltages, and any faults will gener-
ate a Power Good Fault that is fed to the Watchdog & reconfig block.
Three LEDs at the front (D13 on the top, D11 on the bottom) of the board indicates the status
of the voltage monitoring.
D13: Internal voltages (3.3V/2.5V/1.8V/1.2V) - OK
D12: Input voltage +8.5V - OK
D11: Input voltage +15V - OK
Watchdog & reconfig
This block checks the watchdog update signal from the FPGA and the Power Good signal
from the Voltage Monitor Block. Faults to any of these lines will reset the FPGA. CRC errors
and SEU errors (Single Event Upset due to e.g. cosmic rays) will also reset the FPGA.
Selftest
The self test section provides information about FPGA status and internal/external voltages
through an I2C interface.
Config flash
The config flash stores the FPGA image loaded upon start-up. The LOC and GP images are
stored in different memory locations. The FPGA will by default load the LOC image and use
this to determine whether LOC or GP is selected. If GP is selected, the GP image is loaded
instead
Clocks
A standard 20 MHZ VCTCXO is used as reference clock. The tolerance of the reference clock
is determined by the requirements for RF-frequency measurement accuracy, 1 kHz, which
corresponds to 3ppm at 330MHz. Analog Devices ADF4360-8 is used as PLL for generating
the sample frequencies of 90 MHz for LOC and 120 MHz for GP.
Instruction Manual
Test interface
Dual analog outputs are provided for on-site testing/debugging with oscilloscope. Various
combinations of the FPGA internal IF and audio signals can be selected with a Hex-switch,

and output to the DACs. The signals are available at two SMB jacks J13 and J14 at the front
of the cards. The J9 connector outputs the reference clock.
RF Frontend
The frontend consist of four channels, DS, CL, CLR and NF. At the input there is a pi attenua-
tor for improving input match and attenuating the RF signal to an adequate level. The band
switching (LOC or GP) is done with Hittite HMD544E switches. At the GP input there is
another switch to provide good isolation to the LOC section. After band selection there is
another pi attenuator, followed by a Chebychev filter 72-158 MHz LOC / 272-384 MHz GP and
a new Hittite bandselect switch. A MiniCircuits ceramic low pass filter is added before the ADC
in order to attenuate above 800 MHz.
A/D Converters
The theoretical input range is 0 to -45 dBm. Including peak power and back-off, the dynamic
range of the AD is 55 dB. To achieve this a 12 bit AD is used.
The optimum sampling frequencies to ensure aliasing-free digitization are:
LOC: 88.0-146.7 MHz
GP: 147.6-189.7 MHz or 102.2-120.7 MHz
The sampling frequencies are set to 90 MHz (LOC) and 120 MHz (GP). The frequency ranges
for the digitized RF-signals are 18-22 MHz (LOC) and 24-32 MHz (GP).
Linear Technologies LT2145-12 is used as AD.
A transformer-based input circuit is used for single-ended to balanced conversion as recom-

mended in the data sheet. The following transformers from Mini-Circuits are chosen: TC1-1-
13MX+ and TC2-72+.
FPGA
(See Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3)
The FPGA used is Altera Cyclone III series EP3C40F484I7N. The FPGA has the following
key parameters:
Logic elements 39600.
Multipliers (18x18) 126
Memory blocks (9x1024) 126
PLLs 4
Core Voltage 1.2V

Instruction Manual
Process technology 65nm
The device has error-detection facilities which are taken advantage of:

• Frame-based CRC check of configuration data when loading the image

• Run-time soft error detection
The latter detects changes in the internal configuration RAM. Dedicated circuitry continuously
computes the CRC (32bit IEEE 802) of the configured content, and compares it to a precom-
puted value loaded at configuration time. Detection of a CRC error will set the output pin,
CRC_ERROR. This triggers a master reset which initiates device reconfiguration.
SPU
The FPGA contain four SPU's; one for each of the CL, DS, NF and CLR channels. Each SPU
does the same:
The digitized, sampled signal is fed from the AD and into a down-converter mixer with an I-
and a Q-output. After two decimation filters the sampled rate is 3MS/s and this signal is fed to
a Hilbert transformer. The output is mux'ed into a channel filter and another mux before reach-
ing the AM-detector. The AM-detected data is output to a mux at a rate of 50kS/s and fed into
an audio filter.
The output is fed to a mux as well as to a test generator, which generates a secondary set of
periodically degenerated samples for each channel. This data from the Test Generator will be
used by the MO 1820 to check that the data channels are alive.
All these data are fed into a Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) that outputs data at 10S/s to
amplitude- and phase calculator blocks. The outputs from these blocks are the DC level (RF
power), 90 and 150 Hz mod depth for CL, DS, NF and CLR, as well as the test signals (period-
ically degenerated) and voice, noise and harmonic modulation depths and LF phase data for
the same channels.
Primary Data buffer/modulation calc/RF level calc
The data from the four SPU's are fed into the primary data buffer and used by the modulation
calc and RF level calc blocks to calculate the raw values for SDM, DDM and RF level as can
be seen in the RMM program. The data is sent to a mux and further to a FIFO and CRC/seri-
alizer block, ready for transmission to the Monitor MO 1820 board.
Maintenance parameters
Besides the primary parameters, another block counts the Rf frequency for the CL and CLR
channels that are needed for calculating the Difference Frequency. Also, the ident modulation
depth and Morse code is calculated/checked. These parameters constitute, along with the
SDM/DDM and RF, the primary parameters to the Monitor MO 1820.
The RF frequency relative to carrier for the CL and CLR signals, the LF phase for the CL and
CLR signals and the voice/noise and harmonics modulation depths constitute the mainte-
nance data that are sent to the MO 1820.
MO/MF data interface
The monitor parameters are multiplexed and put into a FIFO before adding a packet CRC in
Instruction Manual
the serializer block. The same applies for the maintenance data.

8.1.1.1 Monitor frontend adjustment points
Figure 8-4 Monitor frontend adjustment points
J9 and R95:
R95 is used for fine-tuning the ADC clock frequency. This clock is factory adjusted and shall
normally not be changed. But due to ageing the frequency can change a few ppms and R95
may be used for fine-tuning. If desired, connect a frequency counter to J95 with a 50 ohm
cable with a SMB jack. Use R95 to tune the frequency to 20 MHz +/-3ppm (60 Hz).
J13, J14 and SW1 (only for debugging purposes):
The SMB test Connectors J13 and J14 have 250mVpp nominal level in 50 ohm load. With the
use of hex switch SW1 the following signals are routed to J13 and J14 for test and debugging
purposes:
The audio channels display demodulated waveforms, while the IF channels show the ILS sig-
nals at an Intermediate Frequency (10 Ks/S). All signals are the output of the Signal Process-
ing Units in the MF FPGAs.
DAC_SEL (SW1) DAC channel 1 DAC channel 2

0x00 Power down Power down
0x01 NF audio DS audio
0x02 CL audio CLR audio
0x03 NF IF DS IF
0x04 CL IF CLR IF
0x05 NF audio NF IF
0x06 CL audio CL IF
0x07 CLR audio CLR IF
0x08 DS audio DS IF
0x09-0x0f Power down Power down
Instruction Manual

8.1.2 MO 1820A Monitor
The monitor module MO 1820A receives primary and maintenance parameter data from the
monitor front-end MF 1821A and the FFM, and in addition comprises circuitry for antenna DC-
loop generation and detection. The module features an FPGA which processes all input
parameters and provides the monitor comparator function for station control. A separate
CPLD is providing the compare and alarm generation for the terminator. The FPGA interfaces
to the RMS bus for parameter/status readout and module configuration. The module contains
FPGA-independent self-test circuitry and voltage monitoring.
Block diagram:
(See Figure 8-5, Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7)
Instruction Manual


3'2
%

%

%

)*

% $! $!

$

%
%

)
)*

>

, -#).,&!(

! ),

! )-

#
! " # #$

#
:; - #
3 :&
#
! " #
" #
'3
#

#
! " #
''

'
,
&!

+
< =

!

$!

'
!

((((

%%&'(
**

' !'(##) **

$2

)*
%
%

%

)*
% $! $!

%

#

#
3'8
#
)*

# #% &! &!
" " #

# )! )!
#
)*

$ 4

!" %

7
%

7 3'9)
!
$

7

)*

7

? #&!(
35( *

)*

*
* )+

*

*6
7

*6
(('
7
* % *

*6
* #
*
7

*6

#

7 )*

*'+,
0
&$

#
#

)
/

&$&!

( 4 )*

%
1

)#, *

Instruction Manual
Figure 8-5 MO 1820A Block Diagram

#$
-0#$!B4##1% 5
<#=#!
!#!
&'(2*
<6<#<
© Indra Navia AS
! ;$ !
1 !/
. ?$ .
!/
$ $ @' !
!1
73892-I8/Rev.2/05-Apr-17
11
0!1

,00
B 9$ !8

!
AB

:$

0! $ ;. 0$ ;.

0!
;.

!
;.
>
1

,00 01 ! #!

B #AB 1
! AB AB 1 >
AB ! !
0 ;.
A
0 0!

AB8 AB A$ !$!

!
<!8 !
11

$ %&

01 !1 !8

081
#!
0

3-4# 5 !!

7
0! ''

$/

0!1 1!11

7
&'(..* 0! 00!1
1!11

- 0! 001 A 0! .

6 #
,5 01 00
-0
6 6 0 00 1 1
1! 000!!
, 0 0!
/ 00</
! -.

00/
,7
' ,7
! -'
00<!1
,7
. ,7

'
001
%0/1 .
00!1
" 001 #$
!%
&'(+*
00 001

Figure 8-6 MO 1820 FPGA Block Diagram

00 01

,

00
0
&'()*

. 0

00
,
. ! &'(2* 0! %0/1

,&'(* 01

,
0$ A 081
<!111 &'()* 0$ "11 -'
AB <!111 -.
!B#1# #

#7
!B 0! 0!
7
' -
-&'(*
!B"" 7
. AB8 -

-&'(*

- !
!B
&'(.* 1
!B 7
81 !
#1#

111# "

;. )#,

Page 8-11
NORMARC 7011B-7034B
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS
73892-I8/Rev.2/05-Apr-17
! "
:$4$ $)2>))+$; ! #

%( )*)
)$3

(?()(
& % $

$+
/ $$$+'

0 % $
$+
+ $+

,
!
5
, 78 !"

- $%$
, ! "! &' 4 &'

, 6

, 9,-'

, 9,-
, - % $
&'
, ' .
4 +
33 )$3 ,!-
!)12 +
12 12 ! + .
% $ &'
, !: 1 ;
1
1 ;

!
125 12 1$$
$%
33
($% 5 %
++

1 ,!-
4 $+ 5
12 ,!-
Figure 8-7 MO 1820 CPLD Block Diagram

, ' $$$+'

,!-
125
33 <7-=' , ,!--

$+ <7-=8 4 , " =, ,!-9

)#,
Page 8-12
NORMARC 7011B-7034B
Instruction Manual
Block description:
(See Figure 8-5)
Power Supply
The unit uses the +15V and +5V system voltages as input for the internal switching regulators.
The internal voltages are mainly +3.3V, +2.5V, +1.8V and +1.2V. The -15V and +8.5V system
voltages are not used by this module.
Voltage Monitor
The voltage monitor checks both the external and internal voltages, and any faults will gener-
ate a Power Good Fault that is fed to the Watchdog & reconfig block.
Three LEDs at the front (D12 on the top, D29 on the bottom) of the board indicates the status
of the voltage monitoring.
D12: Input voltage +15V - OK
D13: Input voltage +VDD - OK
D29: Internal voltages (3.3V/2.5V/1.8V/1.2V) - OK
Watchdog and reconfiguration
This block checks the watchdog update signal from the FPGA and the Power Good signal
from the Voltage Monitor Block. Faults to any of these lines will reset the FPGA. CRC errors
and SEU errors (Single Event Upset due to e.g. cosmic rays) will also reset the FPGA.
DC-Loop
This part of the board generates the four DC-loop reference voltages that are fed to the
Antenna Distribution Unit (ADU), antennas and Monitor Combining Unit (MCU). The returning
voltage is buffered and digitized before being fed to the FPGA. Faults in any antenna will lead
to a displacement in one of the DC-loop voltages; and thus it is possible for the monitor to
detect which antenna that is faulty. The DC-loop system is designed to be compatible with the
older MO 1212.
Self Test
The self test section provides information about FPGA and CPLD status and internal/external
voltages through an I2C interface.
Config Flash
The config flash stores the FPGA image loaded upon start-up. An Altera serial flash is used
for image storage. The image can be downloaded to the configuration device trough the
FPGA, via JTAG.
Instruction Manual

EEPROM
Non-volatile memory is required for storage of alarm limits, delays and calibration/ configura-
tion values. The total amount of memory needed is ≥1024bytes. From a safety perspective
using an EEPROM device is preferred. Parallel interface EEPROMs have very limited availa-
bility so an ON Semiconductor serial device CAT25640VI-G is chosen.
All alarm limits are stored in two locations in EEPROM, one to be used for the FPGA (to Sta-
tion Control) and one set for the CPLD (Terminator). Various safety measures have been
taken in order to ensure the integrity of the alarm limits.
Clock
A standard 20MHz low power XO is used as the fundamental reference clock.
FPGA
The FPGA used is Altera Cyclone II series EP2C8F256I8N. The FPGA has the following key
parameters:
Logic elements 8256
Memory blocks (9x512bit) 36
PLLs 2
Core Voltage 1.2V
The internal blocks of the FPGA are described later in this chapter.
CPLD
For the terminator comparator an Altera 5M2210ZF256I5N MAX V CPLD is used. The advan-
tage is very low power consumption and non-volatile configuration memory (flash). The CPLD
has the following key parameters:
Logic elements 2210
Equivalent macro cells 1700
User flash [kbits] 8
Core Voltage 1.8V
The internal blocks of the CPLD are described later in this chapter.
Instruction Manual
FPGA
(See Figure 8-6 and Figure 8-7)

MO/MF Data interface
This section receives measured data from the MO/MF, both monitor and maintenance data,
deserializes the data, checks packet CRC, buffers the data and send it to the Primary Data
Preprocessor and Sequencer. The maintenance data is sent to the maintenance data
sequencer.
Primary data pre-processor and sequencer
This block outputs the deserialized data: The alarm ID (internal number) of the data, the
parameter ID, parameter measured data and the CRC. This is sent to the Station Control
block for checks versus alarm limits. In addition, the data is sent to the Parameter Integrity
Check block.
Parameter integrity check
This block checks the received data for stuck bits by comparing all SDM, DDM and RF for CL,
NF, CLR and DS for toggling (Toggle check). This data is generated in the MF FPGA by sam-
pling the main SDM, DDM and RF and periodically degenerating the data. When the degener-
ation of all this data is verified after reception in the MO, the data channels are adjudged to be
alive
Another part of the block calculates the CRC of the block and verifies it against the appended
CRC.
A third part of the block (test signal check) performs advanced calculation to look for stuck
low-order bits that are not visible in the toggle check.
The status from these three integrity checks are sent to the station control, and failure to either
of these is assumed so safety critical that the Station Control block will set all alarm parame-
ters to raw alarm to for one second, effectively forcing the system into a changeover/shut-
down.
MO/MF Control interface
The MO/MF control interface reads status from extended registers on the MF1821. The regis-
ters are used for reading misc status from the MO/MF, reading/writing MF calibration parame-
ters and activating maintenance tests.
DC-Loop ADC Interface
This block receives digitized DC-loop voltages from the AD, adds ID and CRC and send them
to the Station Control/Terminator for alarm checking.
FFM interface
This interface receives data from external FFM controller via an UART. The message is
checked for CRC errors and split into data packets for monitor (RF/DDM/SDM) that is checked
in the station control and terminator. Another data packet is sent to the maintenance section.
Instruction Manual

TX Status Interface
This section checks the feedback signals from the course transmitters for bouncing and puts
the monitored signals in alarm for a few seconds if these signals change state too quickly.
Clocks and reset
The reference clock is fed into a PLL that provides the master clock signal as well as a reset
signal.
TEST_RF calc
The TEST_RF preprocessing block normalizes the TEST_RF_LEVEL by subtracting the

CL_RF_LEVEL from the input value.
EEPROM interface/bus matrix
The EEPROM interface reads data (alarm limits) from EEPROM and make them available for
station control and terminator. When rms_level_1 is low and the RMS request alarm limits
change, this interface write new limits to the EEPROM. It also handles CRC checking and
CRC generation.
Configuration controller
The configuration controller reads stored data from EEPROM and provides it to the various
parts of the monitor. This includes:
NF_CLR_TEST_COMNFIG: tells the monitor if CLR and NF is installed
MO_CONF: tells the monitor which IDRENT_KEY it shall check against

and whether FFM is executive, i.e. FFM Alarm shall give
shutdown
RMS Interface
The RMS interface receives status on access level, determining if write protection is on. It
communicates with the RMS board, from which commands to the monitors are sent and all to
which the maintenance parameters are sent. The RMS board also receives status from the
extended registers.
Comparator Station Control
The comparator receives measurement data for the primary monitor parameters (RF, SDM,
DDM for all channels, Difference frequency, CL and CLR Ident level and states, DC-loop, FFM
SDM/DDM and RF as well as the toggling of the test channels.) and checks the values against
the alarm limits. Any parameter outside the limits will lead to raw alarm for that parameter and
start the delay counter. If the raw alarm stays, the delay counter will count upwards until the
delay limit is reached, after which the parameter is set to delayed alarm.
The alarm status is sent to the Station Control block of the Transmitter Control Module (TCA
Instruction Manual
1218). In case of any delayed alarm the TCA will request a changeover or shutdown.

As a safety measure, the Station Control section contain a block named HRA, which stands
for Held Raw Alarm. This block will put all parameters into raw alarm for one second in case of
the following events:
• Toggle Error from the Parameter Integrity Check section.
• Test Signal Check from the Parameter Integrity Check section.
• CRC check from the Parameter Integrity Check section.
• Communication error with the MF board (mf_al_err)
• Wrong parameter ID received from the MF board (id_err)
CPLD
(See Figure 8-7)
The CPLD is basically a duplication of the Parameter Integrity Check and Station Control sec-
tions of the FPGA. Another device family is chosen for the CPLD in order to ensure strong
independence while working on the same data set. The CPLD communicates with The Termi-
nator-part of the TCA 1218A. For more information about the Station Control and Terminator
of the TCA 1218, please see the appropriate chapter.
Instruction Manual

8.1.3 TCA 1218C Transmitter Control Assembly
The TCA 1218C Transmitter Control Assembly consists of the transmitter control TC 1216A
and Local Control (front panel) LC 1217C.
Block diagram:
See Figure 8-8 and Figure 8-9. All blocks except Local Control are located on TC 1216A.
Description of selected signals:
MON1 SC ALARM BUS:
Station control alarm bus from monitor MO 1820A no.1. Consists of M1S_AL_ID[4:0],
~M1S_AL_RDY, M1S_AL, ~M1S_AL_N and M1S_AL_RAW.
MON2 SC ALARM BUS:
Station control alarm bus from monitor MO 1820A no.2. Consists of M2S_AL_ID[4:0],
~M2S_AL_RDY, M2S_AL, ~M2S_AL_N and M2S_AL_RAW.
STBY MON ALARM BUS:
Station control alarm bus from standby monitor MO 1820A. Consists of ~MSTBYS_AL_RDY
and MSTBYS_AL. Only used for hot standby configurations.
RMS BUS:
Interface to the RMS. Consists of IOD[7:0], IOCS, IOS[2:0].
MON1 TRM ALARM BUS:
Terminator alarm bus from monitor MO 1820A no.1. Consists of M1T_AL_ID[4:0],

~M1T_AL_RDY, M1T_AL, ~M1T_AL_N and M1T_AL_RAW.
MON2 TRM ALARM BUS:
Terminator alarm bus from monitor 2. Consists of M2T_AL_ID[4:0], ~M2T_AL_RDY, M2T_AL,

~M2T_AL_N and M2T_AL_RAW.
RC_BUS:
Interface to the line interface circuits for the remote control interface on CI 1748A (Section
8.1.10/ 8.1.10). Consists of SDIN, SDOUT, ~CD.
STATION CONTROL (SC MON DATA DETECTOR, SC STATE MACHINE CONTROL, SC

EVENT DETECTION):
Instruction Manual
Interprets the alarm bus from the monitors MO 1820A and generates alarm (and standby
alarm for hot standby configurations). These signals together with inputs from local controls
(on LC 1217C), remote controls (via CI 1748A), RMS inputs and configuration setup (in
EEPROM and jumper settings) determine the state/state change for the NORMARC 70xxB

transmitter state. Status information are generated and sent to local control panel (LC 1217)
and remote control panel (via CI 1748A). The RMS can poll the state of the station control at
any time. State changes generate an interrupt signal to the RMS. STATION CONTROL can
shut off the transmitters LPA 1580A (LOC), GPA 158A (GP) and GPA 1582A (NM 7033B-
7034B Only) by turning off the RF-oscillators OS 1706A (LOC) and OS 1706B (GP).
Most of the functionality of STATION CONTROL is handled by three FPGAs NMP 104A, NMP
105A and NMP 106A described in Sections 8.1.3.1 - 8.1.3.3.
TERMINATOR:
Interprets the alarm bus from the monitors MO 1820A and generates alarm. This signal
together with local controls (on LC 1217C), remote controls (via CI 1748A), RMS inputs and
configuration setup (in EEPROM and jumper settings) determine the state of the terminator
alarm (TRM_AL) output. TERMINATOR has an extra 1s delay, so that the STATION CON-
TROL has time to fulfil transmitter state changes before the terminator shuts the NORMARC
70xxB down. Terminator alarm shuts the NORMARC 70xxB down by disconnecting the power
supply from the output stage of the transmitters LPA 1580A (LOC), GPA 158A (GP) and
GPA 1582A (NM 7033B-7034B Only).
Most of the functionality of TERMINATOR is handled by FPGA NMP 107A described in Sec-
tion 8.1.3.4.
REMOTE CONTROL IF:
This unit converts signals from the station control and terminator to serial messages (1 mes-
sage is 2 bytes long). This is done continuously (approximately 10 messages/s). The serial
input from the remote control is converted to parallel format. Messages from the remote con-
trol are accepted only if two equal messages are received in sequence. If no valid message is
received within 2s, the remote control interface asserts a failure signal to inform the station
control and terminator that the link to the remote control is broken. Depending on the configu-
ration setup, this will turn the NORMARC 70xxB off.
Block description:
Most of the functions of REMOTE CONTROL IF is handed by FPGA NMP 109A in section
8.1.3.5
CONFIG
Jumper plugs for configuration of the NORMARC 70xxB.
DEBOUNCE
Consists of debouncing circuitry for signals from switches on LC 1217C and jumper plugs for
setting access levels for remote control.
LOCAL CONTROL
Consist of keys, switches, switch locks lamps and indicators located on LC 1217C used to
Instruction Manual
control and indicate operational status of the NORMARC 70xxB.

8.1.3.1 NMP 104A Station Control Monitor Data Detector
NMP 104A is a FPGA within the STATION CONTROL block. It serves as a monitor alarm/error
detection and monitor alarm voting unit. NMP 104A is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA.
For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 data sheet.
Block description:
MON.1 ALARM & ERROR DETECTION
This block decodes the MON1 SC Alarm bus and generates alarm if the monitor MO 1820A
no 1 has set the alarm flag for any of the 32 parameters received in a set. Error checks
includes parameter identity sequence check, AL_N negated of AL, test channel alarm toggling
and time-out for RDY-signal. Any alarm/error will set the monitor alarm output (M1_ALARM)
for the duration of next 32 parameters, meaning that 32 parameters without alarm/error must
be received in sequence before the alarm output is reset.
Same as for MON.1 ALARM & ERROR DETECTION, but for MON2 SC alarm bus.
VOTING
This block provides monitor alarm (VALARM) to the NMP 105A depending on jumper configu-
ration (1 of 2 or 2 of 2 voting) in the CONFIG block and inputs from the two MO 1820A moni-
tors (not including standby monitor). When configured for 2 of 2 voting, both MO 1820A
monitors must give alarm to set the VALARM output. When configured for 1 of 2 voting, alarm
from one of the two MO 1820A monitors is sufficient to set VALARM.
STBY ALARM DETECTION
Alarm flag for any parameter sets the alarm immediately. The alarm will be reset when 32
parameters are received in sequence with no alarm flag set.
PUSH-BUTTON ONESHOTS
To prevent locking up of push button keyboard signals, this block translates the input signals
from the switches on LC 1217C from levels (high or low) to pulse stream.
Instruction Manual

8.1.3.2 NMP 105A Station Control Event Detection
NMP 105A is a FPGA within the STATION CONTROL BLOCK. It serves as an event detection
and control unit. The NMP 105A also includes the station control RMS-interface. The event
information is output to the station control state machine controller NMP 106A. NMP 105A is
based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 data sheet.
Block Description:
RMS INTERFACE
The RMS interface provides interface to the RMS BUS
LAMP STATUS GENERATION
This block generates lamp status information for the LOCAL CONTROL and REMOTE CON-
TROL IF blocs.
RMS LEVEL DETECT
This block decodes RMS access levels 2 and 3 using access configuration in CONFIG block,
write disable switch lock information from LOCAL CONTROL, access grant from Remote
Control IF and access requests from the RMS.
EVENT DETECT
The event detect unit checks for valid events (for example key press, alarm interlock etc.), and
sends valid event number to the station control state machine controller NMP 106A. Events
not valid for the current mode of operation are ignored. Events are given priorities with inter-
lock as the highest priority. The alarm event has the next priority, while the other events are
polled one by one. The event detect unit also has a built in integrity check. This function works
when the ILS is in normal operational mode (automatic mode with transmitters on and no
alarm). When the ON/OFF is pressed, a FORCE_AL signal is output. This signal turns off all
transmitters (LPA 1580A (LOC), GPA 158A (GP) and GPA 1582A (NM 7033B-7034B Only))
without notifying the rest of the system. The loss of transmitted signal will be detected by the
monitors (MO 1820A) and cause monitor alarms to the STATION CONTROL.This alarm will
result in a TX changeover initiated by STATION CONTROL, but since STDBY TX is also
turned off, monitor alarm will remain and cause TX shutdown after alarm delay. This sequence
ensures that the monitoring circuits and shutdown mechanisms operates as intended. If the
integrity check function should fail, a time-out function shuts the ILS down.
INTERRUPT DETECT
This block detects transmitter state changes and stores the event causing the change. Trans-
mitter feedback and coax relay position is also stored. An interrupt is generated to inform the
RMS that a transmitter state change has occurred.
TX 20 SEC DELAY
Instruction Manual
This function ensures that no transmitters are allowed to transmit for 20 seconds after an
alarm shutdown has occurred.

MAIN SELECT STORE
This block stores the information regarding which transmitter that is selected as main transmit-
ter.
INTERLOCK DELAY
This block turns on the transmitters 20 seconds after the interlock signal from the REMOTE
CONTROL IF block has been deactivated.
Instruction Manual

8.1.3.3 NMP 106A Station Control State Machine Control
NMP 106A is a FPGA within the STATION CONTROL block. It serves mainly as a state
machine controller (states are stored in an EPROM) for transmitter on/off control. NMP 106A
is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the ACT1020 data
sheet.
Block description:
SEQUENCER
This block generates strobes and control signals for running the state machine. New states
are triggered based on received new data from NMP105A (on the STO_BUS). This block also
generates reset to the hardware watchdog safeguarding and controlling the station control
reset.
EVENT CHECK
This block checks event and main select signal received from NMP 105A. Two identical event/
main select signals must be received in sequence before the event/main select is acted upon.
TIMER
Used by the state machine for delays/time-outs for state changes.
DELAY
Delays the coax relay position feedback in state change sequences. Ensures that the coax
relay (Section 8.1.7) will not change position while the transmitters are transmitting.
PARITY CHECK
This block checks the parity of each byte read from the state machine content EPROM. Parity
failure results in transmitter shutdown.
LOCKUP DETECT
This block detects failures in the state machine sequence. It will trigger if the state machine
doesn’t become idle within a specified time. Failures results in transmitter shutdown.
EPROM READ DATA ADDRESS
This block is an address counter setting the address for the state machine EPROM during
reading through the RMS. The RMS can either reset or increment the address counter. The
feedback from these control strobes, address bit 0 and EPROM data byte are transferred to
the NMP 105A for reading by the RMS.
Instruction Manual

TX ON/OFF CONTROL
This block controls the on/off state of the transmitters. Default is leaving the transmitters in the
state reported by their feedback signals, thereby providing no change in transmitter state.
However, if PARITY CHECK failure or event LOCKUPDETECT failure is detected, the trans-
mitters are turned off.
LOCAL LAMP STATUS
Local panel lamp outputs to the LOCAL CONTROL BLOCK are provided based on coax relay
position, TX main select, transmitter status and station status received from NMP105A.
EPROM ADDR MUX
This block selects EPROM addressing either for STATE MACHINE or RMS read control.
Instruction Manual

8.1.3.4 NMP 107A Terminator
NMP 107A is a FPGA providing most of the TERMINATOR function. The terminator function is
to provide a transmitter shutoff function if the STATION CONTROL should fail to do so.
NMP 107A is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see the
ACT1020 data sheet.
Block description:
RMS INTERFACE
The RMS interface provides the interface to the RMS BUS.
RMS LEVEL DETECT
This block decodes RMS access levels 2 and 3 using access configuration in CONFIG block,
write disable switch lock information from LOCAL CONTROL, access grant from REMOTE
CONTROL IF and access requests from the RMS.
EVENT DETECT
The event detect unit checks for valid events (for example on/off-key, alarm, interlock etc.),
and sends valid events to the terminator state check. Events not valid for the current mode of
operation are ignored.
TERMINATOR STATE CHECK
This block acts upon events/states received from the EVENT DETECT block. Alarm/interlock
states are allowed to be active for 1 second before terminator alarm is activated. The termina-
tor alarm is then reset if an on/off-event is detected, thereby starting a new 1 second time-out.
The STATION CONTROL must now stabilise the ILS with no alarm within this 1-second period
of time if a TERMINATINATOR shutdown should be avoided. If terminator is triggered by
alarm or interlock while transmitters are transmitting, an interrupt is generated. The RMS can
then read the cause of the interrupt through the RMS BUS.
INTERLOCK FILTER
This block overrides the interlock signal in interlock override mode of operation. To enable
interlock override mode of operation the interlock override switch lock must be activated, the
local/remote switch must be in local position and the auto/manual switch must be in manual
position.
This unit decodes the MON1 TRM ALARM BUS and generates alarm if the monitor MO
1820A no. 1 has set the alarm flag for any of the 32 parameters received in a set. Error checks
includes parameter identity sequence check, AL_N negated of AL, test channel alarm toggling
and time-out for RDY-signal. Any alarm/error will set the monitor alarm output (M1ALARM) for
Instruction Manual
the duration of the next 32 parameters, meaning that 32 parameters without alarm/error must
be received before the alarm output is reset.

Same as for MON.1 ALARM & ERROR DETECTION but for MON2 TRM ALARM BUS.
VOTING
This block provides a monitor alarm (~VALARM) depending on jumper configuration (1 of 2 or

2 of 2 voting) in the CONFIG block and inputs from the two MO 1820A monitors (not including
STDBY monitor). When configured for 2 of 2 voting both MO 1820A monitors must give alarm
to set the ~VALARM output. When configured for 1 of 2 voting alarm from one of the two
MO 1820A monitors is sufficient to set the ~VALARM.
Instruction Manual

8.1.3.5 NMP 109A Remote Control Interface
NMP 109A is a FPGA providing most of REMOTE CONTROL IF function. The NMP 109A
transfers data between STATION CONTROL and TERMINATOR and the remote control (via
CI 1748A). NMP 109A is based on the Actel ACT1020 FPGA. For electrical specifications see
the ACT1020 data sheet.
Block description:
STBY LAMP FILTER
This block provides the standby lamp information to be sent to remote control by the TX
UART.
TX UART
Converts parallel data to 2-bytes serial messages. Protocol for the serial data SDOUT (sent
via CI 1748A) is start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, odd parity.
RX UART
Converts serial data SDIN received from remote control (via CI 1748A) to parallel data (2
bytes).
MESSAGE DETECTOR
Messages from RX UART are accepted only if two identical messages are received in
sequence. If so, the data output latch is updated and a new-message pulse is generated.
NEW MESSAGE TIMER
Checks whether an OK message from MESSAGE DETECTOR and carrier detect signal from
CI 1748A is present. Missing message or no carrier detect for 2 seconds or more gives time-
out signal to DATA FILTER.
DATA FILTER
In case the NEW MESSAGE TIMER has signalled a time-out (indicating missing messages)
this block will modify the data received from the MESSAGE DETECTOR by forcing the
TX_OFF signal to on (configurable). If configuration enables interlock, the interlock signal is
also forced active.
Instruction Manual

Figure 8-8 TCA 1218C Block Diagram

Instruction Manual

Figure 8-9 Connection Diagram TCA 1218C
8.1.4 LF 1576A Low Frequency Generator
LF 1576A provides the audio signals to be modulated onto the carrier signal in the transmitter.
The levels of the 90Hz, 150Hz, RF level, ident level and ident Morse code is programmable
from the RMS.
The setup for generating the baseband output signals is stored in non-volatile memory on
board, and consists of values in numeric form for all the frequency components of the signals.
The low-frequency output signals are continuously calculated by the DSP using a formula that
takes into account modulation levels, phase and ident signalling. The user can alter the setup
when logged in with access level 3 (or higher).
Block diagram:
See Figure 8-10. The block descriptions refer to the names on the block diagram.
Block Description: Digital
This block is composed of all the digital parts of the design (except for the self-test function)
I/O SYSTEM
The I/O-system basically consists of the FPGA NMP 137, and does the following tasks:
• Generates status to the IIC INTERFACE (SELFTEST)
• Passes protocol messages between the RMS and the DSP by converting data
between the RMS bus and the DSP DATA bus
• Limits write access to the memory, so that the DSP cannot alter the sources for the
Instruction Manual
signal generation while not allowed by the system access level of the system
• Generates 30Hz test signal (controlled by the DSP)

• Converts RMS bus data to PA IIC control data (LOCAL DATA BUS on block sche-
matic) and vice versa
• Calculates Voice and DME control output
PA IIC CTRL, UTILITY
Converts LOCAL DATA BUS from the I/O SYSTEM to PA IIC BUS data, and vice versa. It also
generates 16 digital spare outputs, which again is controlled by the DSP.
DSP
This block consists of a Digital Signal Processor with supporting circuits. An oscillator at
32.768 MHz clocks the DSP.
The DSP runs the program NMS 221. The program basically generates the LF-values sent to
the two four-channel DACs in the analog part. This is done by calculating the frequency com-
ponents in real-time based on stored values in the memory system. The scaling of the fre-
quency components and the behaviour of the analog outputs can be altered by the RMS
through a dedicated RMS-DSP protocol. NMS 221 also generates the 30Hz test signal.
MEMORY
Is the memory in the system, and consists of a FLASH device with the DSP program NMS 221
(loaded at start up), and an EEPROM for storing non-volatile data. The EEPROM is not per-
mitted to be written to unless in access level 3 (see I/O SYSTEM).
SERIAL (optional)
This is a serial interface used for debugging the software, and is not present for ordinary pro-
duction line boards.
IIC INTERFACE (SELFTEST)
The internal self-test systems are an IIC device with eight inputs. Four of them are dedicated
for the status of the internal voltages (2.5V, 3.3V, 15V and -15V). The other four inputs are
dedicated for the status of the digital system (DSP alive, RMS alive, DSP Flash memory fail
and DSP EEPROM memory fail). These inputs are read by the RMS on the IIC bus.
Block Description: Analog
Comprises the analog circuitry of the board (amplifiers, filters etc.) plus the DAC circuits. In
addition a high precision voltage reference is provided.
COU BASEBAND MOD and CLR BASEBAND MOD

• Converts serial data from DSP to the actual signals sent to the transmitter. This
includes:
• Digital to analog conversions for CSB, SBO I and SBO Q
• Mixing of voice signals onto baseband
Instruction Manual
• Selecting between analog and digital voice input

• Generation of ident signals (filtered from CSB baseband)

COU DAC and CLR DAC
Digital to Analog Converters that converts serial data from the DSP to actual LF outputs. The
resolution of the DACs used is 14-bits.
VOLT REF (10V)
Reference voltage used by the analog circuitry.
Instruction Manual

,,&%86
9
9 ,,&
9 ,17(5)$&(
9
6(/)7(67
67$786
506 /2&$/
'$7$ '$7$%86
3$,,& 3$,,&%86
%86 &75/
,26<67(0 6<65(6(7 87,/,7<
103$ 3$,,&567
767
92,&(&75/
'0(,'(17287
:5&75/
RS232
'63'$7$%86
0(025<
COU Ident
CLR Ident
'63 6(5,$/
237,21$/
',*,7$/
6(5,$/'$7$ %$6(%$1'
6,*1$/6
&28&6%
$ ]

5() &286%2,
%
92,&( $&
,1
&
5()'
'
&28'$&
&28%$6(%$1'02'
&/5&6%
$ ]

5() &/56%2,
%
$&
& &/56%24
5()'
' 63$5($1/*
&/5'$&
&/5%$6(%$1'02'
92/75()
9 $1$/2*
/)$
HBK 1284-1
Instruction Manual
Figure 8-10 LF 1576A Block Diagram

8.1.5 RF Oscillators
The oscillators generate the RF carrier frequencies (LO signals) for the transmitters.
Block diagram:
PROGRAMABLE
FREQUENCY DIVIDERS
ADJUST
X-TAL
OSC
12 dB
PHASE LOWPASS BANDPASS OSC_COU_RF
DETECTOR FILTER VCO FILTER
RF LEVEL
TO IIC BUS
WINDOW VCO TUNE VOLTAGE TO IIC BUS
COMP.
LOCK SCHM.TR LOCK DETECT HISTORY TO IIC BUS

CHANNEL DETECT LATCH
SELECT
LOCK DETECT TO IIC BUS

SCHM.TR
COU Tx ON/OFF
PROGRAMABLE
DIVIDERS
FREQUENCY
ADJUST
X-TAL
OSC
12 dB OSC_CLR_RF
PHASE LOWPASS BANDPASS
DETECTOR FILTER VCO FILTER
RF LEVEL
TO IIC BUS
WINDOW VCO TUNE VOLTAGE TO IIC BUS
COMP.
LOCK SCHM.TR LOCK DETECT HISTORY TO IIC BUS

DETECT LATCH
LOCK DETECT TO IIC BUS

SCHM.TR
CLR Tx ON/OFF HBK1793-1
Figure 8-11 OS 1706A/B Block Diagram

Instruction Manual

Block description:
The RF- signal is generated by a voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) controlled by a digital

phase locked loop (PLL) IC via a low pass filter. This IC performs frequency divisions of the
signals from the voltage tuned temperature compensated x-tall oscillator (VTCXO) reference
oscillator and the feedback signal from the VCO by two separate programmable frequency
dividers.
A frequency/phase detector inside the IC compares the outputs from the two dividers and gen-
erates an output voltage that will tune the VCO to the frequency that makes the two inputs to
the phase detector to be equal in frequency and phase. By changing the number of frequency
division of the VCO signal the VCO must change frequency in order to make the inputs to the
phase detector equal. Thus by changing the division number of the VCO feedback signal the
output frequency will be changed and the frequency stability will be equal to that of the tem-
perature compensated x-tall reference oscillator.
were fref is the frequency of the reference oscillator,

R is the division factor of the reference signal,
N is the division factor of the VCO (output frequency)
The PLL is designed to generate the frequencies to be used by ILS systems. The positions of
the jumpers in the front of the module select the desired ILS channel, in addition the configu-
ration of one or two frequency systems with the frequency of the Course signal to be 5 kHz
higher than the channel frequency and the Clearance 5 kHz lower. The frequencies of the
COU and CLR signals can also be configured to be swopped.
A micro-controller reads the position of the straps and converts the information to appropriate
data that are transferred to the PLL IC at power up of the module. The table of jumper settings
for the various frequencies and configurations is found in Table 7-28.
The signal from the VCO is connected to a dual gate MOS FET amplifier stage via a PIN diode
switch, these two elements form a two stage switch controlled by the COU_OFF input signal
and the Lock Detect signal (see below). A 12dB RF amplifier and a low-pass complete the RF
path.
The PLL IC generates a lock detect (LD) signal that is high when the frequency of the output
signal is correct, if the PLL should go out of lock the LD will go low and make the output latch-
ing of comparator go low. This low signal (LD history) will turn off the PIN diode switch and the
dual gate MOS transistor amplifier stage resulting in turn off of the RF output signal.
Should the PLL go into lock again the LD will go high again but due to the latching function of
the comparator the LD history signal will not change and the RF output will remain shut off.
The latching comparator is reset by a negative transition of COU_OFF input signal and/or
turning the power off and on.
The status of the LD and the LD history are read by the IIC expander IC and transmitted to the
RMM system via the IIC bus. Also the status of RF signal level is available for the RMM.
The module comprises two identical and separate circuits that generate the course and clear-
Instruction Manual
ance LO signals, only the frequency programming parts are common.

8.1.6 LPA 1580A Localizer Power Amplifier Assembly, GPA 1581A GP COU Power
Amplifier Assembly and GPA 1582A GP CLR Power Amplifier Assembly (NM 7033B-34B
Only)
The Localizer Power Amplifier Assembly LPA 1580A consists of CB 1579A and PA 1577A
mounted together as shown on Figure 8-12
The Glide Path Power Amplifier Assembly GPA 1581A consists of CB 1601A (GP) and
PA 1578A mounted together as shown on Figure 8-12.
The Glide Path Power Amplifier Assembly GPA 1582A consists of CB 1601B and PA 1578B
for NORMARC 7033B-7034B Only as shown in Figure 8-12.
The LPA 1580A, GPA 1581A and GPA 1582A receives RF signals and LF signals from the
OS 1706A (LOC) OS 1706B (GP) Oscillator (Section 8.1.5) and LF 1576A low frequency gen-
erator (Section 8.1.4) respectively. The outputs from the LPA 1580A, GPA 1581A and
GPA 1582A are carrier sideband (CSB) signal and sideband only (SBO) signal. GPA 1582A is
used for GP CLR and only comprises the CSB path.
Detected samples of the CSB and SBO signals are available on the BNC connectors on the
front panel. Power measurements and status signals are interfaced to the RMS.
Block diagram:
See Figure 8-13 and Figure 8-14.
Description of operation:
The CSB input signal is supplied to both I and Q inputs in the CSB amplifier. In the SBO ampli-
fier, separate inputs are used for I and Q to allow phase adjustment of the SBO signal.
The difference between the modulating I and Q signals and the feedback signals is amplified
through the Error amplifier. The I and Q error signals are mixed with an in-phase and a quad-
rature LO signal in the Modulator. LP filtering is applied to remove harmonic mixer products.
The resulting RF signal is then amplified to a suitable signal level for the PA input. A forward
coupled signal from the directional coupler at the PA output is BP filtered at the Demodulator
input. The RF signal is then mixed with an in-phase and a quadrature LO signal. LP filtering is
applied on the resulting I and Q baseband signals to remove residual RF. DC offset is elimi-
nated from I and Q feedback signals before they are subtracted from the I and Q input signals.
This effectively forms a control loop that tracks and eliminates amplitude and phase errors
made by the PA, although a small error will always be present. This linearisation- technique is
known as Cartesian Feedback.
Block description:
AGC and splitter

Instruction Manual
The AGC ensures that the modulators and demodulators are supplied with a constant LO sig-
nal independent of the oscillator output level. The AGC has a dynamic range of approximately
6dB. The splitters first split the modulator and demodulator paths, and then split each in CSB
and SBO paths

Phase control
• Mosfet based phase compensator with 270 degrees of phase adjustment
• The phaseshift is obtained by changing the voltage across a varicap, controlled from
the IIC bus
• The phaseshifted LO signal is buffered with a second FET stage and a gainblock.
Hence the proper signal level and isolation is obtained
• The uncompensated branch is buffered with a gainblock only
• Buffering of LO signal to give sufficient LO level, and give isolation between the modu-
lator and demodulator LO inputs
Error amplifier
• The difference between I/Q signals and I/Q feedback signals is amplified and fed to the
I/Q modulator and to the Maint. Monitor (I-drive, Q-drive)
• Differential inputs eliminates DC offset on the baseband signal
• A precision Op Amp with sufficient bandwidth compared to required loop bandwidth
has been deployed as error amp. The op-amp operates as an integrator
• Switches are included for open-loop and unity gain settings in the alignment process,
controlled by the IIC bus
• In the CSB path I-off and Q-off signals allow adjustment of the I-path and Q-path sepa-
rately, controlled by the IIC bus
• Protection mechanism for high VSWR and high temperature power down. Attenuation
of the input signal to the error-amplifier to turn off the PA output, in case of high VSWR
or temperature
• Protection mechanism to delay the loop gain until the PA is fully powered
Modulator
• Direct modulation by means of Gilbert-cell mixers. Baseband and LO input, modulated
RF output
• The LO to the I and Q modulators is provided by a 90º hybrid
PA
• Input power: 6 dBm
• The CSB amplifier uses a driver stage with 2 RF mosfet transistors, and an output
stage with one push-pull double RF mosfet transistor. The SBO amplifier uses 2 RF
mosfets
• The CSB amplifier for GP CLR uses 2 RF mosfets
• A hybrid coupler is located on the PA board. Forward coupled signal is attenuated and
split to a monitor output and to the feedback loop. Reverse coupled signal is detected
on the PA board. Reverse signal controls VSWR power down switches on the Error
amp board
Instruction Manual

Splitter/attenuators
• A resistive splitter splits the forward coupled signal in one path to the demodulator and
one path to the power measurement and test connector circuits
Demodulator
• Direct demodulation by means of Gilbert-cell mixers. RF and LO input, baseband out-
put
• The LO to the I and Q demodulators is provided by a 90º hybrid
• DC offset adjustment eliminates DC offset from the I and Q demodulator output in the
feedback loop
• Gain adjustment to set equal gain in I and Q paths
• The circuit is composed of Op-amps and digital controlled variable resistors. The vari-
able resistors are controlled through an IIC bus
• Low-pass filters on the output of the demodulator to prevent RF overload of the base-
band sections
Maintenance circuits
• A 8-input A/D converter measures forward and reverse power in the CSB and SBO
outputs. It also reads the I and Q drive level to the modulators (normal operation) or
the output from the demodulators (test mode)
• A temperature sensor IC provide temperature measurements, and also can provide an
over-temperature signal to the error amplifier
• The measurements are sent to the RMS system through the IIC bus
Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual
Figure 8-12 LPA 1580A, GPA 1581A and GPA 1582A Assembly

Instruction Manual
Figure 8-13 LPA 1580A, GPA 1581A and GPA 1582A CSB Block Diagram

Instruction Manual
Figure 8-14 LPA 1580A and GPA 1581A SBO Block Diagram

8.1.7 Changeover Unit CO 1837/ CO 1838
CO 1837B (LOC) and CO 1838B / CO 1838C (GP) are Changeover modules used to connect
one transmitter to the antenna and one transmitter to dummy load in the NORMARC 7000B
ILS. The units also include outputs for monitoring purposes.
They are located at the back of the rack, above the transmitter's power amplifiers LPA/GPA.
The changeover units consists of PIN diodes for RF switching, each switch comprises 12 PIN
diodes. Within there are also integrated couplers for monitoring and signal combiner for DS/
CLR readout for the standby monitor.
The Changeover module consists of one basic design which is reused in the different configu-
rations, by one or two modules in one rack. Depending on LOC or GP they will be differently
populated. A set up of the different configurations are given below in Table 8-1.
LOC:
CO 1837B consists of switches that switches the Tx1 to air and Tx2 to dummy or opposite. On
two frequency systems, two units are used. Each unit has 4 inputs, 2 for CSB and 2 for SBO.
The units generates DS/CLR signals for hot standby monitor.
GP:
CO 1838B consists of switches that switches the course Tx1 to air and course Tx2 to dummy
or opposite. There are 4 inputs, 2 for CSB and 2 for SBO. The units generates DS signal for
hot standby monitor.
CO 1838C consists of one switch that switches the CLR CSB Tx1 to air and Tx2 to dummy or
opposite. There are 2 inputs for the CSB. The units generates CLR signal for hot standby
monitor.
Remarks CO 1837B CO 1838B CO 1838C

NORMARC 7011 Changeover LOC cold standby 1
NORMARC 7012 Changeover LOC hot standby 1
NORMARC 7013 Changeover LOC cold standby-2 Freq. 2
NORMARC 7014 Changeover LOC hot standby-2 Freq. 2
NORMARC 7031 Changeover GP cold standby, COU signal 1

NORMARC 7032 Changeover GP hot standby, COU signal 1
NORMARC 7033 Changeover GP cold standby-2 Freq. CLR signal 1 1
NORMARC 7034 Changeover GP hot standby-2 Freq, CLR signal 1 1
Table 8-1 The different configurations of changeover units in the ILS

Instruction Manual

A block schematic of the change over unit for CO 1837B and 1838B is shown in Figure 8-15
J8
Att 1. CL Stby
J2 J5
Att 2 NF Stby
CSB Tx1
J9 J6
Dummy Coupler Switch Coupler CSB
Load 1 1 2 Antenna
J1 J7
CSB Tx2 COU/CLR
CSB Test
Att 3
Φ1 Att 5
J10
SUM Att 7 DS/CLR
Stby Mon
Φ2 Att 6
Att 4 R4
J4
SBO Tx1
J11
Dummy Coupler Switch SBO
Load 3 2 Antenna
J3
SBO Tx2
HBK 2261-2
Figure 8-15 Block schematic for CO 1837B and CO 1838B
8.1.7.1 CO 1837B/CO 1838B only
Block description:
Refer to Figure 8-15 above. After the switch (Switch 1), the main CSB signal is routed to the
antenna output (J6) through a dual directional coupler (Coupler 2). The coupling in all the cou-
plers on the unit are 32dB for LOC and 22dB for GP. One of the coupled signals (J7) is taken
to the CSB test connector on the front of the cabinet. The other signal from the directional cou-
pler is attenuated and routed to the NF channel (J5) on the standby monitor. This signal is
used as an additional maintenance monitoring of the main transmitters CSB signal.
The standby CSB signal is going through a dual directional coupler (Coupler 1) before it is ter-
minated in a 50 ohm dummy load (J9). On hot standby localizers, the dummy load is mounted
on the top of the cabinet to improve the heat dissipation. On the rest of the cabinets, the
dummy load is mounted directly on the J9 connector.
One of the signal from the Coupler 1 is attenuated and used as a CL monitor signal (J8) for
the standby monitor. The other signal is combined with the standby SBO signal to generate
DS/CLR signal for the standby monitor.
The main SBO signal is after the switch (Switch 2) routed to the antenna output (J11). The
standby SBO signal is going to an internal 50 ohm dummy load after the directional coupler
(Coupler 3). Due to the low power on the SBO, no external dummy load is needed.
Instruction Manual
The coupled standby SBO signal is combined with the standby CSB signal to generate DS/
CLR signal for the standby monitor.

To get a correct DS/CLR signal for the standby monitor, the RF phase of the standby CSB and
the standby SBO have to be in phase to each other before they are combined. This is
achieved by the two phase delays, Φ1 and Φ2. For LOC Φ1 is 0° and Φ2 is -90°. For GP both
phase delays Φ1 and Φ2 are -90°. In addition, the attenuators (Att 3, 4, 5 and 6) are used to
get the correct DDM value of the signal to the standby monitor.
ESBO
DDM  2
ECSB
DDM expressed in absolute value, ESBO and ECSB given in relative voltage values.
The adjustable attenuator R4 is provided for accurately setting of the DS/CLR DDM value.
8.1.7.2 CO 1838C
Block description:
The CO 1838C consist only of the switch to the GP CSB CLR signal.
Refer to Figure 8-16. After the switch (Switch 1), the main CLR CSB signal is routed to the
antenna output (J6) through a directional coupler (Coupler 2). The coupled signals (J7) is
taken to the CLR CSB test connector on the front of the cabinet.
The standby CLR CSB signal is going through a directional coupler (Coupler 1) before it is ter-
minated in a 50 ohm dummy load (J9).
The signal from the Coupler 1 is attenuated and used as a CLR monitor signal (J8) for the
standby monitor.
CLR
J8
Att 1. CLR
Stb Mon
J2
CSB Tx1
J9 J6
Dummy Coupler Switch Coupler CSB/CLR
Load 1 1 2 Antenna
J1
CSB Tx2 J7
CSB/CLR
Test
HBK 2270-2
Figure 8-16 Block schematic for CO 1838C

Instruction Manual

8.1.8 PS 1227 Power Supply
PS 1227 supplies the NORMARC 70xxB cabinet with +27V, ±15V, +8.5V and +5V, from a
+27V input.
Block diagram:
T R M _ A L
V 2 7 P V 2 7 _ C S B _ C O U 1
A
I2 7 _ C S B _ C O U 1
G N D
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C O U 1
A
I2 7 _ S B O _ C O U 1
V 2 7 _ C S B _ C L R 1
A
I2 7 _ C S B _ C L R 1
V 2 7 _ S B O _ C L R 1
A
I2 7 _ S B O _ C L R 1
D C V 1 5 P
S Y N C D C V 1 5 P _ M E A S
V 1 5 N
D C
V 1 5 N _ M E A S
D C
V 9 P
D C
V 9 P _ M E A S
D C
V D D
D C
H B K 1 2 9 0 -2 V D D _ M E A S
D C
Figure 8-17 PS 1227 Block Diagram
Block description:
The ±15V, +8.5V and +5V supplies are provided by DC/DC converters.
PS 1227 can operate in redundancy with a second power supply using or'ing diodes. The out-
put voltages are measured prior to these or'ing diodes, to be able to identify a power failure.
The four 27V outputs supply the LPA 1580A, GPA 1581A and GPA 1582A power amplifiers.
The current drains are converted to a voltages used for current measurement. The ILS output
signals may be shut down by cutting off the 27V supplies. This is done by the TERMINATOR
alarm signal (TRM_AL) (Section 8.1.3.4).
Instruction Manual

8.1.9 RMA 1822A RMS Assembly
The RMA 1822A is a microprocessor based assembly that contains the RMS software, and
also forms the basis for the NORMARC 7000B RMM system. The RMA 1822A consists of
KD 1824A front panel with keyboard and display, and the RM 1823A the RMS module.
The KD 1824 is attached to the RM 1823 via a 50-pin flat cable connector between
RM 1823/P10 and KD 1824/P11. The display is connected to the KD 1824 board via a semi-
flex cable attached to J20.
Block diagram:
Instruction Manual
Figure 8-18 RMA 1822A Block Diagram

Figure 8-19 RMA 1822A Front Panel (KD 1824A)
Instruction Manual

Block description
POWER SUPPLY
The input voltages to the board are 5V, +15V, -15V and Digital ground from the ILS.
The RM unit uses 5V as input for the on-board switching regulators from Linear Technology. A
LTC3614 unit produces 3.3V, a LTC3615 produces 1.8V and 1.0V and a LT3060 produces
1.5V for the display system. The CPU uses 1.0V, 1.8V and 3.3V. Most of the Logic on the
board is 3.3V with 5V level-converters to the rest of the ILS.
Only the AD system utilizes the +/-15V voltages from the ILS.
CPU
The CPU is the Power PC processor MPC8308 from Freescale. The processor is running at a
core frequency of 400MHz with a 266 Mword/s (133 MHz clk) interface to the DDR2 SDRAM.
In addition to the CPU core, the MPC8308 includes several advanced peripheral controllers
and busses. The use of them are listed below:
DDR2 Memory Controller to three DDR2 devices
Local Bus: RMS bus, FLASH, LCD controller and UARTs
TSEC1 Controller 10/100 base-T TX Ethernet Port
TSEC2 Controller I/O used as GPIO
SD-Interface Used as GPIO
SPI controller Routed to KD-board
USB controller to USB transceiver, which is connected to the USB con-

nector
PCI Express (not used)
UARTs UART1 used for local bus, UART2 communicates with

TCA1218
I2C controllers IIC1 is local I2C-bus, IIC2 is the global I2C bus
IRQs Used for power down pre-warning, UARTs and Keyboard

Interrupt
JTAG Used for flashing program data
Chips selects Used for accessing NOR flash, RNMS bus, LCD controller
and DUART
Instruction Manual
GPCM General Purpose Chip Select Machine

The interrupt inputs to the CPU are as follows:

• IRQ0_n: Power down pre-warning.
• IRQ1_n: UART_A, active high
• IRQ2_n: UART_B, active high
• IRQ3_n: Keyboard interrupt
ECC DRAM / NOR FLASH
The board has 256 Mbyte DDR2 RAM of type Micron MT47H64M16HR-3 IT:H (ref 25120).
The CPU interfaces three DDR2 devices (including one for ECC support).
A 512 Mbit (64 Mbyte) NOR FLASH, organised as 32 M x16 bit, is used for Non-volatile stor-
age of Program code and logged measurement data. The CPU is set up to boot from the top
boot sector. The Program code is transferred to the DDR2 memory and thereafter executed
from the DDR2 memory.
The MPC8308 provides a 32 bits DDR2 RAM controller with ECC support. The RM1823A pro-
vides 256 Mbyte of DDR2 Memory. Three 64Mx16 bits DDR2 chips forms the DDR2 memory
array. Only 8 data bit lines of the ECC memory chip are used. The DDR2 controller operates
at 133 MHz, and is therefore able to support 266 Mword/s data transfer rate. The DDR2 mem-
ory is used as program and data memory.
The layout and the DDR2 RAM controller also support 512 Mbyte of DDR2 memory by using
three 128Mx16 devices.
WATCHDOG AND RESET
A watchdog circuitry safeguards the program performance. The MPC8308 CPU has an inter-
nal watchdog unit. The unit can be configured by software to give a non-maskable interrupt or
a hard reset on watchdog timeout. If the VDD_IN (+5V) falls below 4.2V, an interrupt (power
down pre-warning) is generated to the MPC8308 (IRQ0n).
In case any MPC8308 supply rails rise higher than the specification, an overvoltage reset sig-
nal is generated. This assures that the MPC8308 do not perform unpredictable operations
during the overvoltage condition.
The power rails, 3.3V, 1.8V, 1.5V and 1.0V are monitored by a power supply monitor,
LTC2938 (U103). The Over voltage protection signal is gated with the 1V5 supply rail on the
LTC2938. The LTC2938 generates a Power On reset (PORESETN) to the MPC8308 at power
up. If any of the supplies falls below a defined threshold, PORESETN is generated.
The Green CPU POWER GOOD LED (D102) will be turned off in case the power monitor gen-
erates reset.
In addition, all power supply rails may be measured via the on board A/D converter
LCD CONTROL
Instruction Manual
The LCD controller is located on RM 1823 and is based on the Epson S1D13781 LCD. The
controller is accessed via the local bus and chip select CS2n is used for accessing the control-
ler. The LCD controller is configured for 16-bit direct mode1 bus operation.

The outputs from the Epson in 16-bit RGB data on ports PDT[15:0]. The upper 8 output bits
PDT[23:16] are used as GPIO control lines to the display. In addition, VSYNC, HSYNC, DE
and DOTCLK lines are provided between the display controller and display.
Based on the 24 MHz CLKI input clock, the internal PLL is set up to generate a 40 MHz inter-
nal MCLK.
PFDCLK = CLKI/18h = 1 MHz (reg[12h] = 17h)
MCLK = POCLK = PFDCLK * 28h = 40 MHz (reg[14h] = 27h)
KEYPAD AND DISPLAY
The LCD display is of type Sharp LQ035Q3DW02 (or equivalent) 3.5'' and is located on the
KD 1824.
The keypad is located on KD 1824 and consists of five push-buttons (up, down, left, right and
OK), directly connected to a TCA6416A device that communicates with the RM-board via the
local I2C bus. The keypad is used for menu selection at the front panel in case a computer
connection with the RMM program is not available. The other push-buttons are QUICKREAD,
which provides instantaneous access to readout of the primary parameters, and BACK. The
BACK push-button return the user to the previous screen.
USB
A SMSC USB3300-EZX USB transceiver is used for connection to the USB connector on the
KD 1824 front panel. The USB connector can be used as a local port for connecting to the
RMM program.
DUART / RS-232 DRIVERS
UART1 is used for the Local port buffered with V.28 buffer
UART2 is used for communication with TCA 1218. Buffered with +5V CMOS buffer.
LCS3 is used for accessing the DUART (SC16C2552B).
The RM 1823A module provides 4 asynchronous serial ports. All ports are connected to the
back plane connector P1. 2 ports are implemented by means of an external DUART
(ST16C2552). The last 2 serial ports are supported by the 2 internal UARTs in the MPC8308.
The use of the ports are listed below:
UART1: Local Port
DUART1: Remote port1
DUART2: Remote port2
UART2: To TCA 1218

Instruction Manual

IIC CONTROLLER / IIC-IF
IIC1 is used for internal devices and IIC2 for the global I2C-bus.
The board has two I2C interfaces provided by the I2C controllers in the CPU. One, I2C-1, is
used for local on-board I2C devices.
I2C-2 is provided to the board connector to be used for external I2C devices (boards). The
I2C-2 bus is level translated to +5V signal levels by means of the PCA9306.
The TCA6416 IO expander provides 16 GPIO that is accessible via the on board I2Cbus
(IIC1). The output level for the GPIO is 3.3V. All GPIOs are configured as inputs at power up
The RTC provides time data and can run on both battery and external 3.3V voltage (V3P3)
The A/D converter has eight input channels, one is for collecting maintenance data from other
boards and some of the others are used for measuring internal voltages.
The TCA 6416A #1 (there may be two such devices on the same bus) provides control signals
- address and enable - for the AD system, the battery measurement function and speaker
selection.
The TCA 6416A #2 is located on the KD1824 and is connected to the keypad.
ETHERNET-IF
The TSEC1 Controller is used as a10/100 base-T TX Ethernet Port and interfaces through a
DP83848K single port ethernet transceiver. The Ethernet port is located at the back of the
motherboard MB 1575 inside the ILS cabinet.
The device uses auto negotiation to select 10Mb/s or100 Mb/s half/full duplex,
CPU GPIO AND CONFIG/PCB/ID
The GPIO circuitry is used for the following purposes:

• Four lines are used as interrupt inputs from TCA 1218 and the three Monitor boards
(MON1/MON2/STBY MON)
• Interface to user config platform U303. The dipswitch provides various boot options
and shall normally not be changed, i.e. they shall be set to the factory setting all
switches OFF (or '1111', no connections to GND)
• Four lines used for PCB ID. These are hardcoded to determine the version of the mod-
ule
REAL TIME CLOCK AND BATTERY
The board has a real time clock circuit (RTC) with battery backup to be used for display and
time stamping of events and it has also a RAM that is used for storage of data such as events
and measurements. A jumper plug can be removed to disconnect the battery to avoid draining
during long timer storage.
Instruction Manual
Two components (diodes/resistors) are mounted in series with the battery for protection
against overheating in case of short circuit.

The RTC communicates with the CPU via the I2C No. 2. Battery voltage is monitored by the
RMS via the A/D circuitry. To prevent discharging of the battery, the voltage is sampled by the
AD only when an activation signal opens the transistor of an optocoupler.
Battery Jumper S101:
Jumper installed: Battery connected to RTC
Jumper not installed: Battery disconnected from RTC
During storage and transportation, jumper shall not be installed on S101
The battery can be disconnected by removing jumper S101 when the module is being stored.
The battery voltage is measured using an optocoupler switch in order not to discharge the bat-
tery. The battery provides approximately one month of memory retention at continuous use
(system power turned off). RMS battery status is reported by the RMS system as Maintenance
Parameter RMS BATTERY.
When replacing this battery please note below Warning text regarding handling of Lithium bat-
teries.
Warning Lithium Battery Safety Hazard
CAUTION:
Danger of explosion if incorrectly replaced. Install with + pole facing out as marked on
battery holder. Replace only with CR2032 or equivalent type.
Following precautions for Safe Handling and Use of Lithium Batteries should be noted:
Do not disassemble, crush, expose to fire or high temperatures/sunlight
Do not short or install with incorrect polarity
Dispose in accordance with appropriate regulations.
ANALOGUE INTERFACE
The analogue interface block contains two analogue multiplexers and an A/D-converter. The
main function of this block is to measure analogue signals provided from several measure-
ment points in the NORMARC 70xxB equipment. The analogue multiplexers are connected to
the same address bus with separate enable bits. This allows the analogue inputs to be meas-
ured separately as single ended signals, or to be paired for differential measurements.
The AD converter is the LTC2309 from Linear Technology. It is an 8 channel, 12 bit A/D with
I2C interface. The LTC2309 includes a 2.5V reference. The 2.5V reference is internally ampli-
fied to 4.096V and provided on the REFCOMP pin. The LTC2309 is configured for single
ended unipolar mode, with input range 0-4.096V. The AD converter is used for monitoring all
supply voltage rails, the backup battery for RTC and to measure the selected analogue input.
SPEAKER WITH AMPLIFIER
The module has a speaker to be used for monitoring of the Ident tones received from the LF
boards via the backplane. There are four sources, CL and CLR from both LF1 and LF2 that
that can be selected as audio through an analogue MUX by digital inputs from the I/O circuitry.
The signals in are named PAA_KEY[3:0].
Instruction Manual

The signal source for the speaker is amplified by means of an OP-AMP. 3 different volume
settings are supported. The volume is set by means of jumper-setting on S700 header.
Sound Level S700 programming

High Jumper shorts pin 1 and 2
Medium Jumper shorts pin 3 and 4
Low Jumper shorts pin 5 and 6
LEDS
D102 - CPU POWER GOOD LED will be turned off in case the power monitor generates
reset.
D412 - Green LED Indicates that the software is running properly
Instruction Manual

8.1.10 CI 1748A Connection Interface
The CI 1748A Connection Interface (CI) module unit provides a connection point for all signals
except RF signal and high current signals into to the ILS cabinet. The CI module is located in
the rear of the ILS cabinet. The CI module is used together with one or two PC 1749 modules
that handles the power input and associated signals.
The CI module is connected to the cabinet backplane MB 1575 through a flat cable.
All lines to external equipment are protected against surges and over-voltages.
A block diagram is shown in Figure 8-20
The CI module is one circuit board with the following blocks.

• DME interface
• Analogue multiplexer
• USB to serial converter
• RS-232 drivers and receivers
• Micro controller
• Digital multiplexers (mux)
• Modem
• Shift registers
• LEDs
• Configuration
• CAN Driver
• Connectors (including a JTAG and a Test connector)
The main task of the CI module is to provide connection points for external signal for the ILS
cabinet. It interfaces the external signals (voltages) to levels that can be handled by the inter-
nal modules in the cabinet. The Connection Interface also formats serial data to and from the
remote control depending on the configuration.
Instruction Manual

CI 1748 Block diagram
To PC 1749 #1
HBK 2034-2 Battery 1 Low
Battery 1 Isolated
DC Loops
Mains Warning 1
0 1 2 3
Mains Warning 2
PC Sense 1
Intruder
Spare
To PC 1749 #2
Fire
Air
User I/O Battery 2 Low
Battery 2 Isolated
Mains Warning 3
Mains Warning 4
PC Sense 2
Configuration Shift registers TEST
RS-232 Driver RC/RMM RS-232

Mux
IIC - bus IIC
Modem RC/RMM LINE
TC Data Select
Micro controller
Select MPX
RMM CAN CAN Driver CAN
RS-232 Driver Mux
C JTAG
I RS-232 Driver Remote 1 RS-232
-
Remote 2 RS-232
C
A Local interface
RS-232 Driver Local RS-232
B RS-232 Driver Mux
L USB interface Local USB
E 5V
Select
15V
-15V
Mains_Fail 1-2 To PC 1749 #1
Analog out Analogue
Multiplexer IBATT 1
Control VBATT 1
V27P1
OUT DME
To PC 1749 #2
IN DME DME Interface IBATT 2
(Optocoupler)
ACT DME VBATT 2
V27P2
VAC
Indoor
Temp
Outdoor
1
OUT DME
IN DME
ACT DME
Analog
2
Inputs
3
Figure 8-20 CI 1748 Block Diagram
Block description:
DME interface
Instruction Manual
The DME interface is used to connect the DME equipment to the ILS. This interface has opto-
couplers to isolate the equipment. These signals are routed from the CI module to the TX con-
trol in the cabinet. The DME interface is configurable using straps.

Analogue multiplexer
The analogue multiplexer is used to select one of more analogue inputs. The select input is
controlled by the RMS. The outputs are routed to the RMS. All external voltage inputs are
adjusted to correct ranges before measured. The interface can select values such as outdoor
and indoor temperature, mains voltage (trough a transformer), external analogue voltages,
battery and battery charger voltages and currents. The CI module does not interpret the
measured values.
USB interface
This is an multiplexer that select either the RS-232 input or the USB input to the RMS. When a
PC is connected to the USB connector and the com port is opened the USB input is selected.
When the USB com port is de-selected or the USB cable is removed, then the RS-232 input is
selected.
RS-232 Drivers/Receivers
This block converts the signals between logical levels and RS-232 levels.
Micro controller
This block consists of an AVR micro controller. Most serial data are routed trough this control-
ler. How to route and change format of this data is decided from the configuration, see Table
7-15
The RC data to/from the TX control is always routed through the micro controller and then to
the internal or external modem. If configured, the micro controller will include RMM data from
the RMS in the same data stream. If not configured, the RMM data will be routed to Remote 1.
Depending on the configuration different formats on the data and bit rates will be selected.
This block also include external RAM and an address latch, and a strap to reset the micro con-
troller.
Watchdog
The micro controller has a built in watchdog. This watchdog has its own oscillator that gener-
ates a clock that is divided down. This divided value runs a counter. If this counter overruns,
the micro controller will be reset. This counter will be reset in the programs main loop if the
program runs correctly.
Mains failure
The micro controller reads in all the Mains Warnings signals from the PC 1749 cards. If one
PC 1749 is connected (PC 1749 Sense 2 is open/high), the micro controller will route Mains
Warning 1 and 2 to Mains Failure 1 and 2. If two PC 1749s are connected (PC 1749 Sense 2
is low), the micro controller will route Mains Warning 1 to Mains Failure 1 and Mains Warning
3 to Mains Failure 2.
Instruction Manual

RMM data
When RMM data is combined with TC data, the TC data has priority. The micro controller uses
hardware flow control to control the input of RMM data. This is done by deactivating the CTS
signal on the RMM port when there are 64 bytes or less free space in the RMM data input
buffer. The CTS signal is activated again when 32 bytes or less remain in the input buffer.
Digital multiplexers
These blocks are used to route digital signals. There are a total of three digital multiplexers.
• One used to multiplex RMM data to a connector (Remote1) or to the micro controller
• One used to multiplex RC(/RMM) data to the internal or external modem
• One used to multiplex data from RS-232 or from USB local connector
Modem
This block converts logic level serial signals to and from V.22/1200bps or V.22bis//2400bps
level leased line signals depending on protocol selected for interface. The modem is con-
trolled on the same serial lines as the data, using AT commands.
Shift registers
This is the interface for digital signals, this block contains shift registers used to convert paral-
lel/discrete inputs and outputs to serial form read/written by the micro controller. This block
also contains pull-ups for the inputs.
The following shift registers are present in this block

• One output register used to control the output of the User I/O
• One output register used to generate mains failure to the RMS and to control 6 LEDs
• One input register used to read the status of the User I/O
• Two input registers used to read the status from the PC 1749 card(s), read auxiliary
information (Intruder, Fire_Al, Air, Spare) and to read two test inputs.
The status from the inputs are sent to the RMS using the IIC bus, or sent to the remote con-
trol.
LEDs
There are a total of 9 LEDs on the Connection Interface. 3 of these are connected to the micro
controller, while the other 6 are connected to the shift registers. These are inside the micro
controller block and shift register block and are not visible on the block diagram.
Configuration
This block contains 8 configuration jumpers. The settings of these jumpers are read into the
micro controller using a shift register. Only three are defined, the rest are for future expan-
sions.
Instruction Manual
For a description of interface protocols, refer to 7.3.8.1, Table 7-15.

CAN Driver
This block contains interface circuit (driver) for CAN bus interface. This will normally not be
used but is present for future expansions.
Connectors
Pin outs of all connectors are listed in chapter 7.2.1. I addition to connectors used during nor-
mal operation, there is a 10 pin connector with AVR JTAG pin out located on the CI module.
This interface is used for programming and debugging during manufacturing. A test connector
used for debugging or for future use is also included.
Instruction Manual

8.1.11 PC 1749A Power Connection
The PC 1749A is used in either single or dual configuration to provide the following features:
• Power connection from one or two external chargers.
• Power connection to/from one battery bank
• Power connection to one or two PS 1227 power supplies.
• Battery protection for one battery bank
• Voltage and current measurements for charger/battery
• Connection for external battery switch
• Connection for charger warning inputs
• Modem power output (to CI 1748A).
Block diagram:
Instruction Manual
Figure 8-21 Block Diagram PC 1749A

Block description:
Power connections for external charger/battery and internal power supplies
The J1 contact on the right side of the board is intended for connections to/from external AC/
DC-chargers and battery bank.
The J2 contact on the upper side of the board is intended for connections to the internal PS
1227 power supplies.
One or two PC 1749A boards may be present in the system, as well as one or two external
chargers and one or two battery banks. For details regarding connection in the various config-
urations, please see Ch. 7.2.2.
Battery protection
The module will disconnect the battery if the battery voltage drops below a preset voltage,
normally 22VDC. The trigger voltage may be adjusted between 20V and 24V and by adjusting
R107. There is also a similar high voltage cutoff circuit present, the cutoff voltage is adjusted
by R103. The voltages are set at the factory.
Voltage and current measurement
The circuits U102, U103 and U104 are current sense chips that measures the current supplied
by external charger and the current flowing to or from the battery bank. The U107-U109 IC's
are used for voltage measurement and scaling of the current measurements. The voltage and
current measurements are available as RMM maintenance parameters.
Battery switch / battery charger warning
The P3 connector is intended for connection to battery switch and mains warning inputs from
external chargers. For details regarding connection, please see 7.2.2.
Straps S1 and S2 provides an option for selecting the input to the RMM maintenance parame-
ter Mains Fail from either external or internal source:
Pos 1.2: using external mains warning inputs (connected to P3)
Pos 2-3: using internal sensing of the polarity of battery current
S1 and S2 are connected to separate inputs on P3 when in pos 1-2. They use the same input
when set in position 2-3.
Modem power (to CI 1748A)
The module also provides fused power output to modem or other external equipment.
Using diodes this output is supplied from both charger/battery banks and these diodes also
prevent a reverse current from one battery bank to the other.
The modem power connector is located on CI 1748A.

Instruction Manual

8.1.12 MB 1575A Monitor Section Motherboard
MB 1575A is the backplane for the 19” sub-rack in the NORMARC 70xxB cabinet. MB 1575A
is a passive motherboard that provides all interconnections between the printed circuit board
in this sub-rack and all interface for external signals except from RF (Coax) cabling.
Table 8-2 shows the plug-in module connectors.
Section # Module
Monitor 1 1 MO 1820A
1 MF 1821A
1 External Front-end 1
Monitor 2 1 MO 1820A
1 MF 1821A
1 External Front-end 2
Standby Monitor 1 MO 1820A
1 MF 1821A
Station Control 1 TCA 1218C
RMS 1 RMA 1822A
Transmitter 1 1 LF 1576A
1 OS 1706A/B
Transmitter 2 1 LF 1576A
1 OS 1706A/B
Power Supply 2 PS 1227
Table 8-2 MB 1575A plug-in module connectors
Instruction Manual

Instruction Manual
Figure 8-22 Connection Diagram

8.1.13 Coaxial Cabling
Figure 8-23 to Figure 8-26 shows the coaxial cable connection for NORMARC 70xxB.
the cabinet (top of the base part).

NM 7011B = 1 pcs. CO 1837B
NM 7012B = 1 pcs. CO 1837B

DL01 is mounted outside
DL01 is mounted inside
Additional cables,
in NM 7012B:
the cabinet.
COU
CO 1837B
HBK2319-1
Instruction Manual
Figure 8-23 Coax Cable Connection - NORMARC 7011B-7012B

© Indra Navia AS
73892-I8/Rev.2/05-Apr-17
CO 1837 CO 1837 NM 7013B:

DL01 and DL02 are mounted inside
the cabinet.
CLR COU NM 7014B
DL01 and DL02 are mounted outside
the cabinet (top of the base part).
Additional cables,
in NM 7014B:

HBK2320-1
Page 8-64
NORMARC 7011B-7034B
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS
73892-I8/Rev.2/05-Apr-17
CO 1837B
NM 7031B - DL01 is mounted inside
the cabinet.
COU
NM 7032B - DL01 is mounted
outside the cabinet (top of the base part).
Additional cables,
in NM 7032B:

HBK2321-1
Page 8-65
NORMARC 7011B-7034B
Instruction Manual
© Indra Navia AS
73892-I8/Rev.2/05-Apr-17
NM 7033B
GSA 1896A / 1 pcs DL01
and 1 pcs. DL02 are mounted
insode the cabinet.
MB 1575
NM 7034B
GSA 1897A / DL01
and DL02 are mounted
outside the cabinet.

CO 1838C CO 1838B
Additional cables,
in NM 7034B:
CLR COU
Page 8-66
NORMARC 7011B-7034B
Instruction Manual
8.2 Tower Equipment
The following paragraphs describe the modules to be located in the control tower.
8.2.1 RCA 1750 Remote Control Assembly
The RCA 1750B Remote Control Assembly is used for all configuration and consists of the RC
1752A Remote Control board and RF 1752B Front Panel mounted and connected together.
They provide the user’s interface to the ILS Cabinet from the control tower or technical equip-
ment room. All interconnection is provided by the MB 1753A Backplane that can interface up
to 4 RCA 1750 assemblies.
RC 1752A
R
F
17
51
B
RC 1752A
R
F
M
17
B
51
17
B
53
RC 1752A A
R
F
17
51
B
RC 1752A
R
F
17
51
B
HBK 2325-1
Figure 8-27 RCA 1750 on MB 1753 (without frame)
The Remote Control unit's purpose is to provide an interface for the ILS cabinet from the con-
trol tower (where normally a Slave Panel is located), or technical equipment room at the air-
port. The remote control provides the ILS cabinet with user inputs and selections and displays
the status of the ILS.
The Remote Control is communicating with the ILS cabinet via a serial link over a telephone
line using an integral modem in the Remote Control, or via an external modem. Inputs from
the front panel switches such as ON/OFF, Changeover and Access Grant and Interlock signal
Instruction Manual
from an operational runway direction selector are sent to the ILS cabinet (Transmitter Control)
and ILS status and other information is received and displayed on LED indicators or other out-
puts.

The remote control system typically comprises the RCA 1750 Remote Control with MB 1753
Backplane described here, and SF 1344, SP 1394 or SP 1754 Slave Panel and IL 1379 or IL
1380 Interlock Switch module to be located in the control tower. Other special panels/systems
such as Category Status panel (CSU) and Runway Selector Unit (RSU) module can also be
connected. Installations for two runway directions are shown on block diagram Figure 8-28
and Figure 8-29.
In addition to providing the control signal interface between the ILS cabinet and the Remote
Control, the RCA 1750 can be configured to operate on protocols that combines the remote
control data and the RMM data for the RMS system over the same serial channel thus saving
modem and line cost. This protocol is only possible when the ILS cabinet is equipped with
Connection Interface CI 1748.
Figure 8-28 Remote Control with SP 1754 Slave Panel

Instruction Manual

Figure 8-29 Remote Control with SF 1344 or SP 1394 slave panel
Instruction Manual

RCA 1750 Block diagram
Figure 8-30 RCA 1750 Block Diagram
Block description:
AVR
This block consists of an AVR microcontroller that interprets serial data from the ILS cabinet
and generates status outputs to front panel LEDs, slave panel, and buzzer signal based on
the received status. Failure in data from ILS results in alarm condition. Inputs from the front
panel keyboard, control/AUX inputs and Slave Panel are collected and sent to the ILS rack as
serial data. The microcontroller also handles the multiplexing and de-multiplexing of the com-
bined RC and RMM data protocol when selected. A watchdog function (enabled in SW) is also
part of this controller. The AVR operates on 16 MHz.
SWITCH
This is an electronic switch that select between internal modem and RS 232/external modem
for interface with the ILS cabinet depending on protocol selected for interface.
INT MODEM
This block is the internal modem and converts logic level serial signals to and from V.22/
Instruction Manual
1200bps or V.22bis/2400bps level leased line signals depending on protocol selected for inter-
face.

EXT MODEM and RMM
These blocks convert logic level serial signals to and from RS 232 level signals for connection
to external modems or direct RS-232 connections.
SHIFT IN and SHIFT OUT
These blocks contains shift registers used to convert parallel/discrete inputs and outputs to
serial form read/written by the AVR.
LEDs
These blocks contain the Front Panel LEDs used to indicate the operational status of the ILS
and status LEDs on the RC board for maintenance.
SWITCHES
This block contains the push-buttons and switches used for operator input on the Front Panel.
SPEAKER
This block contains a speaker and circuitry for setting volume of the audio alarm signal pro-
vided by the AVR.
IN and OUT
These blocks contain interface circuitry for input and output signals.
PWR
This block contains a DC/DC converter for converting the 27V input to 5V supply for the
boards.
CAN
This block contains interface circuits for the CAN bus interface.
CONFIG
This contains jumper plugs for configuration of various functions provided by the unit.
Slave Interface
The following slave panel outputs are provided:

• ALARM - Alarm/OFF
• NORMAL - Normal/operating
• WARN - general Warning
• STBY ALARM - Standby transmitter Alarm/OFF
Instruction Manual
• COMMS - Communication link failure from ILS cabinet

• External Audible alarm

• 28VDC Fused supply for Slave Panel
The following slave panel inputs are provided:

• ON/OFF - On/off push-button switch
• SILENCE - External Aural alarm reset, push-button switch
Refer to Chapter 7.2.14 and 7.2.17 for lists of connectors and signals. These signals are for
interfacing SF 1344/SP 1394 slave panels to be interfaced via discrete signals and their func-
tion is similar to the same function found on the Front Panel except from the audible Alarm
and Silence that can be configured for individual operation. These panels have LED indicators
that will be turned on when output signal is low. Two slave panels (LEDs) operated on 28V
might be connected in parallel. Current limiting resistors are located on the slave panels.
CAN Interface
See 7.2.14 and 7.2.17 for lists of connectors and signals. These signals are for interfacing
SP 1754 slave panels to be interfaced via the CAN bus.
The Remote Control CAN bus operates on 50kbps providing a range up to 1000m over a
twisted pair.
The CAN bus interface is available on 2 connectors providing all status information from the
ILS as output to the CAN bus; and Access Grant, ON/OFF, Changeover, Silence, Interlock
and TX_OFF as input from the CAN bus.
In addition to the information shown on the front panel (with optional signals), Monitor warning
signal (from MO or MF) is also available from the ILS cabinet and provided on the CAN bus.
Four uncommitted inputs and three outputs are also transferred between each remote control
and the CAN-bus and are available for connection on the backplane (see 7.2.14, J12 and
J13).
The address for the data between the remote controls and the slave panel is on the form xxx-
yyyy. xxx is the back plane address and can have any value between (and included) 000 to
111. yyyy indicates the unit (within the back plane) that have sent this message. All the remote
controls send data with the same structure.
See Table 8-3 for yyyy values and assigned units.
Data from the remote located left most in the remote frame assembly will be displayed left
most on the Slave Panel etc. This means that the Slave Panel does not need to have any
information regarding the source of the data. The Slave Panel will display the information from
the remote in the third left most position in the remote frame assembly regardless of if it is a
DME remote or OM remote.
Instruction Manual

yyyy IO value from remote back plane Unit to send/receive data

0000 None (reserved)
0001 11 (left most in the remote) LOC (if FFM information is present)
0010 10 (second left most in the remote) GP (if DME information is present)
0011 01 (third left most in the remote) DME/OM/MM
0100 00 (fourth left most in the remote) DME/OM/MM
0101 Position independent (hard coded CSU
in unit)
0110 Interlock status from slave
Table 8-3 CAN Address
CANopen requires each node to either send heartbeat messages or implement a node-guard-
ing protocol. Heartbeat messages shall be sent every second by the RC unit.
Also note that the termination strap CAN_TERM described in 7.2.14 (P22) must be installed in
each end unit on the CAN bus.
CANopen messages containing ILS status and control are sent and received every 250 ms .
The interlock signal transferred from the slave to the remote control is a status (typically active
low level) signal and will be sent from only one source (Slave), while the other controls mes-
sages might be received from multiple sources (Slave Panels). Integrity of the CAN messages
is ensured by CRC.
Interlock
See 7.2.18 (P18) for connectors and signals.This interface is used for external Interlock (run-
way select) switch or RSU. An output corresponds to the Interlock signal from the CAN bus
typically provided by the Slave Panel. This signal (active low) can be looped back to the Inter-
lock input on the Remote Control directly or via an RSU as shown on Figure 8-28 and sent to
the associated ILS cabinet(s). Figure 8-29 shows similar interconnection using "old" slave
panels.
TX OFF and TRUE OFF
See 7.2.14 and 7.2.17 for connectors and signals There is a TRUE_OFF signal as output indi-
cating (when low) that the ILS equipment is not radiating and there is a TX_OFF input that is
transmitted to the associated ILS equipment. When TRUE_OFF output on the LOC RC is con-
nected to TX_OFF input on the associated GP RC on the TX OFF connector, the GP will auto-
matically shut down when LOC shuts down.
The TRUE_OFF signal is also available on the INTERL (interlock) connector to be used by
other equipment such as RSU and Category Status panels.
JTAG interface
Instruction Manual
A 10 pin connector with AVR JTAG pinout is located on the RC 1752 board. This interface is
used for programming and debugging during manufacturing.

AUX channels
See 7.2.17 (P14 and P15) for connectors and signals. There are 3 discrete outputs represent-
ing signals AUX OUT[2:0] received from the ILS equipment and there are 3 inputs
AUX_IN[2:0] (active low) that are sent to the ILS equipment.
OPT input and output signals
See 7.2.14 (J12 and J13) for connectors and signals This interface is used for transfer of dis-
crete signals between the Remote Control and the CAN bus, typically used by the Slave
Panel. One application is interfacing DME status and control signals between the Fernau RCP
and the Slave Panel.
ILS cabinet interface
See 7.2.6 and 7.2.13 for connections and signals. The Remote Control can interface with the
ILS cabinet either using the internal modem by connecting the 2-wire leased/telephone line to
the LL connector, or via an external modem connected to the MODEM connector. The AVR
will route the interface to the internal or external modem depending on protocol selected (see
Table 7-15).
The internal leased line modem conforms to V.22 (1200 bps) and V.22bis (2400 bps) standard
for use with ordinary 2-wire 600 ohm telephone line. The transmitter level is -10 dBm, and the
receivers dynamic range is from -10 dBm to -34 dBm. External modem shall be connected to
the MODEM RS232 DTE pinout connector with parameters as shown in Table 7-15. HW
handshake (RTS/CTS and DTR/DCD) is supported.
The microcontroller will automatically configure the internal modem as required by AT com-
mands via its serial interface, while the external modem will need to be configured manually
by DIP switches and/or AT commands.
For a description of interface protocols, refer to 7.3.8.1, Table 7-15.
RMM data
See 7.2.6 for connectors and signals. The Remote Control will transfer RMM data over the
same interface line as the Remote Control data when protocol 1 or 2 is selected
(see Table 7-15). RMM PC shall be connected to the RMM RS232 DCE pinout connector with
parameters 9600, N, 8, 1. HW handshake (RTS/CTS and DTR/DCD) is supported. DCD is
activated only when a connection has been established with the ILS cabinet. The microcon-
troller uses hardware flow control to control the input of RMM data. This is done by deactivat-
ing the CTS signal on the RMM port when there are 64 bytes or less free space in the RMM
data input buffer. The CTS signal is activated again when 32 bytes or less remain in the input
buffer.
RMM data transferred from the ILS cabinet to the RC are compressed using zlib and the RC
decompresses this data before sending to the RMM serial port.
Power Supply
The Remote Control operates on 24 V DC nominal, range 21 - 30VDC and other voltages are
Instruction Manual
generated within the unit. There are 24V outputs available on the connectors for Slave Panel
and CAN bus fused on the backplane.

Failure detection
As described above there are different indications for failures. COMMS will indicate that the
link with the ILS cabinet is broken. CAN ERR indicates low level communication error on the
CAN bus or missing interlock signal from the CAN Slave Panel. CAN ERR will only be acti-
vated if CFG_CAN_ENABLE strap is inserted. Missing interlock information from CAN Slave
Panel (interlock) will only be reported if both CFG_CAN_ENABLE and
CFG_CAN_SLAVE_COMMS are inserted.
The AVR has built-in testing mechanisms that will indicate errors by a non-operational RC and
with front panel LEDs blinking at 4 Hz according to the following table:
LED Reported failure

MON DIS RAM test failure
MAINT Flash memory failure
IDENT SPI shift register loopback failure
SERVICE Invalid service mode (SERVICE_M1/M2) configuration strap settings.
In addition to the front panel LEDs, there are 4 LEDs on the RC 1752 board that can be used
for diagnostics. The first (closest to the front panel) amber LED blinks each time a message is
sent to the ILS cabinet. The second amber LED blinks each time a message is received from
the ILS cabinet.
The function of the green and red LEDs follow the CANopen Indicator Specification (CiA DS-
303):
LED function RUN LED (green) ERR LED (red)

Off N/A The device is in working condition.
Blinking The device is in state PREOPER- N/A
(200 ms on, 200 ms off) ATIONAL.
Single flash The device is in state STOPPED. At least one of the error counters
(200 ms on, 1000 ms off) of the CAN controller
has reached or exceeded the
warning level (too many error
frames).
On The device is in state OPERA- The CAN controller is in bus off
(1000 ms on, 200 ms off) TIONAL. state.
Alternative inputs
Some functions such as ON/OFF, Changeover, Access Grant can be operated via different
inputs, i.e. from Front Panel or Slave Panel (old or new). These inputs will be "OR-ed", mean-
ing that they have the same priority.
Instruction Manual

8.2.2 MB 1753A Motherboard
Chapter 7.2.14 describes interface signals available on connectors on the MB 1753. To ease
the interface/wiring, similar signals belonging to 2 or 4 Remote Controls are gathered on some
connectors. The CAN ID signal related to slot position is hard-coded by 0-ohm resistors while
the “Runway” ID switch is available on the rear side of the board
Figure 8-31 MB 1753 Interconnection Diagram
Instruction Manual

8.2.3 CSA 1816A Category Status Unit
The Category Status unit's purpose is to display and control the status of one runway, includ-
ing the current operational ILS category. The operational status is displayed on LEDs located
on the front panel of the module.
The Category Status collects status from LOC RC, GP RC, FFM and optionally two other
external equipments like a DME or a MKR in addition to status from the opposite runway. This
status is then used to calculate the ILS category for which the runway will operate under.
The category status shown on the front panel are sent on CAN-bus as a separate message,
intended primarily for the slave panel.
The category status panel contains an RC 1752A Remote Control and an CF 1815A front
panel module to be located in a rack including LOC and GP Remote Controls. The rack will
normally be located in the control tower.
Typical Setup:
IL
SP SP
SW
ILA ILB
CAN
CAN
RMM
x2/x3
CAB
x2/x3
EXT1/2 LOC/GP
status RECIPROCAL
NOTE1: If EXT1 RC not connected,

TXOFF EXT1 status (sent to 3rd position on
slave panel) may come from OPT1
connector (OPT_RC_2 signals) on GP
MB1 RC (if enabled)
NOTE2: If used, EXT2 status (Sent to 4th

position on slave panel) must come from
OPT1 connector (OPT_RC_1 signals) on
EXT1 EXT2 LOC RC (if enabled)
LOC GP
RC CSA
RC RC
(opt) (opt)
HBK 2071-2
Figure 8-32 Typical set up example with one or none external/additional remote controls
Instruction Manual

IL
SP SP
SW
ILA ILB
CAN
CAN
RMM
x2/x3
CAB
x2/x3
CAN
LOC/ GP
RECIPROCAL
Slave signals
TXOFF
MB1 MB2
Note: MB 2 must
have same
runway id as MB1
LOC GP
EXT1 EXT2 SP CSA N.U.
RC RC
HBK 2169-1
Figure 8-33 Typical set up example with two external/additional remote controls
Connections:
In addition to the connections through the CAN bus, the CSA 1816A need signals from the
reciprocal LOC and GP:
Signal RC 1752A name RC 1752A P1 pin MB 1753A conn/pin
RECIPROCAL LOC OPT_IN_1 76 J13 pin 14

RECIPROCAL GP OPT_IN_2 44 J13 pin 7
Connect RECIPROCAL LOC to TRUE_OFF_OUT_1 (P18 pin 5) and connect RECIPROCAL

GP to TRUE_OFF_OUT_2 (P18 pin 6) on the MB 1753A for the reciprocal runway.
For reciprocal systems using RCA 1240, connect RECIPROCAL LOC to *ALARM (P9 pin 2)
on the MB 1346A for LOC and connect RECIPROCAL GP to *ALARM (P9 pin 2) on the
MB 1346A for GP.
If there is no reciprocal system, or the function is not desired, insert strap S20.
Instruction Manual

Interface for conventional Category Status panels:
The CSA 1816A can be connected to the Cat Status panels CP 1511, CP 1723 and SP 1548.
The status of the front panel LEDs are available on the backplane connectors of MB 1753A/
1801A as shown in Table 8-4:
Signal RC 1752A name RC 1752A P1 pin MB 1753A conn/pin

SLAVE CAT III SLAVE_ALARM 54 J63 pin 19
SLAVE CAT II SLAVE_WARNING 85 J6 pin 7
SLAVE CAT I SLAVE_NORMAL 86 J6 pin 20
SLAVE LOC SLAVE_STBY_ALAR 20 J6 pin 8
M
SLAVE OFF SLAVE_COMMS 21 J6 pin 21
SLAVE MAINT SLAVE_BUZZER 52 J6 pin 9
SLAVE COMMS FAIL AUX_RC_OUT0 80 P15 pin 5
SLAVE_RECIPROCAL AUX_RC_OUT1 79 P15 pin 13
SLAVE_BUZZER AUX_RC_OUT2 48 P15 pin 6
SLAVE_FFM_ALARM OPT_OUT1 5 J13 pin 5
SLAVE_FFM_WARNING OPT_OUT2 13 J13 pin 13
SLAVE_FFM_NORMAL OPT_OUT3 6 J13 pin 6
SLAVE_SILENCE SLAVE_SILENCE 84 J6 pin 10
SLAVE CAT II SLAVE_WARNING 85 J6 pin 7
Table 8-4 Category Status panel interface
Module configuration:
Please refer to Ch.7.3.4.5
Instruction Manual

CSA 1816 Block diagram:
CF 1815A RC 1752A
LEDs
Out
Shift
LEDs
Out
Shift CAN
Vdd Out
Switch
Shift In
es
Watch
Vdd
Connects to MB 1753A
dog
μC
Spea
ker
Shift In
In
Config Vdd
PWR
HBK 2072-2
Figure 8-34 CSA 1816 Block Diagram
Block description:
AVR
This block consists of an AVR microcontroller that interprets serial data from the ILS cabinet
and generates status outputs to front panel LEDs, slave panel (through CAN-bus), and buzzer
signal based on the received status. Failure in data from expected present remote controls
(through CAN-bus) results in comm. fault. The displayed status for the CSU is sent in a CAN-
bus message. A watchdog function (enabled in SW) is also part of this controller. The AVR
operates on 16 MHz.
SHIFT IN and SHIFT OUT
These blocks contains shift registers used to convert parallel/discrete inputs and outputs to
Instruction Manual
serial form read/written by the AVR.

LEDs
These blocks contain the Front Panel LEDs used to indicate the operational status for the run-
way and status/diagnostic LEDs on the RC 1752A board for maintenance.
SWITCHES
This block contains the push-buttons and switches used for operator input on the Front Panel.
SPEAKER
This block contains a speaker and circuitry for setting volume of the audio alarm signal pro-
vided by the AVR.
IN and OUT
These blocks contain interface circuitry for input and output signals.
PWR
This block contains DC/DC converter for converting the 27V input to 5V supply for the boards.
CAN
This block contains interface circuits for the CAN bus interface.
CONFIG
This contains jumper plugs for configuration of various functions provided by the unit.
CAN interface
These signals are for interfacing to LOC RC, GP RC, EXT1/2 RC (optional) and slave panel.
The CAN-interface is available as two pins on the backplane connector P1 on RC 1752A.
CANopen defines a standard for exchange of information between modules connected on a

CAN bus. Using it for the remote control data, it allows interfacing to for example I/O units
from other manufacturers.
CANopen is based on the CAN-bus data link layer and high-speed transceiver as specified in
ISO 11898, part 1 and 2. In addition, CANopen specifies bit-timing and recommends pin-
assignments for connectors. Manufactures follow guidelines in the CANopen specification
producing devices with characteristics which will operate with each other. There are a number
of bit rates based on bus length: (based on 5nS/m cable propagation delay).
125kbps up to a 500 meter maximum bus length, 50kbps up to a 1000 meter, 20kbps up to a
2500 meter length, 10kbps up to a 5000 meter maximum bus length
The Category Status Assembly CAN bus operates on 50kbps providing sufficient range and
data capacity.
Instruction Manual
The CAN bus interface is available on the back plane connector providing all ILS status infor-
mation from LOC/GP/EXT1 (optional)/EXT2 (optional) remote controls as inputs from the CAN
bus; and Access Grant, ON/OFF, Changeover, Silence, Interlock and TX_OFF as input from

the slave panel connected to the CAN bus. The CSU provides for front panel status as output
on the CAN-bus, and sends updated status messages four times/sec.
The address for the data between the category status unit and the remote controls/slave panel
is on the form xxxyyyy. xxx is the back plane address for the remote controls, and can have
any value between (and included) 000 to 111. yyyy indicates the unit (within the back plane)
that have sent this message. All the connected remote controls send data with the same
structure.
See the table below for yyyy values and assigned units.
yyyy IO value from remote back plane Unit to send/receive data

0001 11 (left most in the remote) LOC RC, required
0010 10 (second left most in the remote) GP RC, required
0011 01 (third left most in the remote) EXT1 RC (DME/OM/MM), optional
0100 00 (fourth left most in the remote) EXT2 RC (DME/OM/MM), optional
0101 Not used CSU (CSA 1816A)
CANopen requires each node to either send heartbeat messages or implement a node-guard-
ing protocol. Heartbeat messages shall be sent every second by the CSU.
Info: Note that the termination strap CAN_TERM on MB 1753 must be installed in each end
unit on the CAN bus.
CANopen messages containing LOC/GP status and control are sent and received every 250
ms. The interlock signal transferred from the slave to the remote control is a status (typically
active low level) signal and will be sent from only one source (Slave), while the other controls
messages might be received from multiple sources (Slave Panels). Integrity of the CAN mes-
sages is ensured by CRC.
Interlock
The interlock signal used on the CSA 1816A will be extracted from the LOC RC status mes-
sage on the CAN-bus. If the interlock is not used, it can be disabled by inserting strap S19.
JTAG interface
See Table 8-5 A 10 pin connector with AVR JTAG pinout is located on the RC 1752A board.
This interface is used for programming and debugging during manufacturing.
RECIPROCAL inputs
See Table 8-5. This interface is used to read the RECIPROCAL status inputs on OPT_IN_1
(reciprocal LOC) and OPT_IN_2 (reciprocal GP). The signals are active low and fail safe,
meaning that a low input signals a "TRUE OFF" -situation from the respective reciprocal
inputs. The reciprocal inputs can be disabled by inserting strap S20.
Instruction Manual

Power Supply
The Remote Control operates on 24 V DC nominal, range 21 - 30VDC and other voltages are
generated within the unit. There are 24V outputs available on the connectors for Slave Panel
and CAN bus fused on the backplane.
Failure detection
As described above there are different indications for failures. COMMS will indicate that the
link with the LOC/GP remote controls is not received for more than a specified amount of time,
or that the validation of the message content fails.
Four internal LEDs are available for status and diagnostic use on the RC 1752A:
• Debug/diagnostics 1: D2, amber
• Debug/diagnostics 2: D3, amber
• CAN RUN: D4, green, indicating state of CAN-bus operation
• CAN ERR: D5, red, indicating CAN-bus error
The AVR has built-in testing mechanisms, such as Flash and RAM test. In addition a shift-reg-
ister test is performed (sent bytes are also chained into the SPI read sequence).
Instruction Manual

Connector pinout:
Conn. Description Signals Pin

96 pin DIN41612 connector, male on CSU, female on backplane
P1 conn. To CAN bus CAN_L 93
CAN_H 29
Optional inputs OPT_IN_1 (RECIPROCAL LOC) 76
to Slave Panel(s) OPT_IN_2 (RECIPROCAL GP) 44
OPT_IN_3 (N.U.) 12
OPT_IN_4 (N.U.) 77
Optional outputs OPT_OUT_1 (N.U.) 45
from Slave Panel(s) OPT_OUT_2 (N.U.) 13
OPT_OUT_3 (N.U.) 78
Configuration inputs from CFG_ADDR0 (LSB board position, N.U.) 90
backplane position/switch for CFG_ADDR1 (MSB board position, 58
N.U.)
CAN/RWY addressing CFG_ADDR2 (LSB switch), N.U. on 26
CSU
CFG_ADDR3 , N.U. on CSU 91
CFG_ADDR4 (MSB switch) , N.U. on 59
CSU
Supply input V24P 2
V24P 17
V24P 31
GND 65
GND 82
GND 96
P2 to P3 10 p flat cable between RC and GND 1
Conn RF RF GND 2
to RC SDO 3
PL 4
SCK 5
SDI 6
RCK 7
SPARE (to pads on RC and RF) 8
Vdd 9
Vdd 10
P23 2x5p flat cable conn. TCK 1
internal JTAG test Connector: TDO 3
TMS 5
TDI 9
Vtref 4
GND 2, 10
NSRST (target system reset) 6
NTRST (not connected) 8
Vcc 7
Instruction Manual
P24 inter- Test connector – 3 spare pins on Alternatively add pins on P20 row
nal AVR for test, on prototype only
Table 8-5 Connectors and Signals


8.2.4 SP 1754A and SP 1754B Slave Panel
The Slave Panel module purpose is to provide tower personnel with status information from
equipment such as Localizer, Glide Path, Far Field Monitor (1754B only), Category Status
(1754B only), DME and DVOR equipment. The Slave Panel receives information from several
RCA 1750 Remote Controls over one CAN-bus. These Remote Controls are usually located
in a technical control room. The Slave Panel also sends data to the Remote Controls, includ-
ing information about the state of the push buttons (pressed/not pressed) and interlock input.
The Slave Panel is powered from the Remote Controls power supply, using separate wires, or
it is powered locally. A block diagram over the Slave Panel is shown in Figure 8-35.
The Slave Panel module consists of a front panel and a circuit board. The module contains the
following blocks:
• Microcontroller
• LED drivers
• LEDs
• Buzzer driver
• Buzzer
• CAN Driver
• CAN Terminator
• Power
• Connectors
• Configuration
Instruction Manual

8.2.4.1 SP 1754 Block diagram
Figure 8-35 SP 1754 Block Diagram
Microcontroller
This block consists of an AVR microcontroller. This microcontroller handles all input and out-
put on the Slave Panel. Input is data from the CAN bus, interlock signal and the push buttons,
output is the CAN bus, the LEDs and the buzzer. The AVR uses a 16.000MHz clock.
Rotary Switch
The Rotary Switch (Sw) generates a 4 bit digital output depending on the setting. The value
from this switch sets the Slave Panel address corresponding to the backplane address for the
Remote Controls.
LED drivers
This block contains transistors to drive the LEDs.
LEDs
These are the LEDs on the front of the Slave Panel.
Buzzer driver
This block contains an operational amplifier to drive the speaker.

Instruction Manual
Speaker
This is the (alarm) sound generator.

CAN Driver
The CAN driver is a block that consists of a CAN transceiver and a common mode filter.
CAN Terminator
This block contains the terminator of the CAN bus. This terminator shall only be connected to
the bus if this is the end device on the bus.
Power
This block converts the 21-28V DC input to a stable 5V.
Configuration
A number of dip switches are used to configure the functionality of the Slave Panel. These are
read into the microcontroller using shift registers.
JTAG:
The Slave Panel has a JTAG connector used for software programming and debugging.
Connectors
P1 Interlock:
Connector type: Molex 6410-02A or equivalent 2-pin flat cable connector.
Pin Function
1 Interlock
2 GND
Instruction Manual

P2 CAN connector 1:
Connector type: 9pin DSUB male or 5-pin Weidmüller, depending on SP1754 hardware revi-
sion.
Note: Pin numbering for Weidmüller type connectors: Pin 1 is the rightmost pin when the "wavy" part
of the connector points upwards:
# Signal
1
2 CAN_L
3 CAN GND
4
5 SHLD (optional)
6 GND (optional)
7 CAN_H
8 CAN GND*
5-pin Weidmüller
# Signal
1 CAN_GND
2 CAN_L
3 CAN_GND
4 CAN_H
Instruction Manual

J3/P6 CAN connector 2:
Connector type: 9pin DSUB female (J3) or 5-pin Weidmüller (P6), depending on SP1754
hardware revision.
# Signal
1
2 CAN_L
3 CAN GND
4
5 SHLD (optional)
6 GND (optional)
7 CAN_H
8 CAN GND*
5-pin Weidmüller
# Signal
1 CAN_GND
2 CAN_L
3 CAN_GND
4 CAN_H
Table 8-8 Connector J3/P6
*Not according to CANOPEN Specification.
P4 Power In: Connector type: 2-pin Weidmüller.
Pin Function
1 V24P_IN
2 GND

Instruction Manual

Mechanical layout::
The location of the components on the PCB for the Slave Panel is organised so two different
fronts can be used. See Figure 8-38 and Figure 8-39. The figures only show the functionality
of the layout not the final placement. The front panel has a field where a label can be inserted
to indicate the type of equipment this Slave Panel is connected to.
NORMARC
SERVICE
ALARM ALARM COM
FAILURE
WARN WARN MAINS
FAILURE
NORM NORM RUNWAY
SELECTED
SILENCE
LAMP DIM
ON
OFF
HBK2033-2
Figure 8-38 SP 1754A Slave Panel Front
NORMARC
CAT STATUS
CAT III
FFM CAT II SERVICE
COM
ALARM ALARM CAT I FAILURE
MAINS
WARN WARN LOC
FAILURE
NORM NORM OFF RUNWAY

SELECTED
SILENCE LAMP DIM
ON
OFF
Instruction Manual
HBK2032-2
Figure 8-39 SP 1754B Slave Panel Front

Functionality:
The Slave Panel will display status information from different equipments, all this information
is received over the CAN bus connected to the Slave Panel. The Panel has two CAN bus con-
nectors, this enables that more than one Slave Panels can be connected to the same bus in a
chain. The last panel on the bus must terminate the bus. Power to the Slave Panel is sourced
on the same bus using a separate cable pair or on a separate connector on the slave.
Addressing:
To select the associated Remote Control unit, the Slave Panel has a rotary switch that gener-
ate a four bit data word (only three are used, i.e. eight combinations). This switch must be set
to the same value as the switch on the backplane where the Remote Controls are located for
this Slave Panel.
The address for the data between the Remote Controls and the slave panel is on the form
xxxyyyy. xxx is the back plane address and can have any value between (and included) 000 to
111. yyyy indicates the unit (within the back plane) that have sent this message. All the
Remote Controls send data with the same message structure.
See the Table 8-10 for yyyy values and assigned units.
Data from the Remote Control located leftmost in the remote frame assembly will be displayed
leftmost on the Slave Panel etc. The user will have information of the equipment connected to
the Slave Panel from the label on front.
yyyy Position in remote Unit to send/receive data

0001 1 - Left most in the remote LOC/GP/DME/DVOR/OM/MM
0010 2 - Second left most in the remote LOC/GP/DME/DVOR/OM/MM
0011 3 - Third left most in the remote LOC/GP/DME/DVOR/OM/MM
0100 4 - Fourth left most in the remote LOC/GP/DME/DVOR/OM/MM
0101 CSU
0111-1111 Future units
Table 8-10 Addresses
Far Field Monitor status:
The Slave Panel will use the information in the FFM bits in the CAN message with yyyy =
0001 (i.e. the LOC Remote Control must be located in position 1 when FFM is used) to control
the FFM LEDs on the front.
Alternative control input/output:
Position 3 LEDs on the Slave Panel can be controlled from the OPT_IN1-4 bits on the Remote
Control with yyyy = 0010 and position 4 can be controlled the same way but from the Remote
Instruction Manual
Control with yyyy = 0001. For each of the two positions, a dip switch will select the source
input. Table 8-11 shows the mapping of the signal and the front LEDs. The ALARM LED is the
inverted value of the NORMAL LED. The SERVICE and MAINS FAIL LEDs will be a ‘or’ func-

tion between other SERVICE and MAINS FAIL signals.
Bit in CAN message LED on front

CAN_OPT_IN1 NORMAL (inverted ALARM)
CAN_OPT_IN2 WARNING
CAN_OPT_IN3 SERVICE
CAN_OPT_IN4 MAINS FAIL
Table 8-11 Alternative inputs (POS3-4)
Table 8-12 shows the alternative output. The slave will send one CAN message with the
CAN_OPT_OUT1 bit set while the ON/OFF button is pressed when the CFG_PULSE_POS
dip switch is set.
If CFG_PULSE_POS is not set the slave will send one CAN_OPT_OUT1 or one
CAN_OPT_OUT2 message when the ON/OFF button is pressed. CAN_OPT_OUT1 will be
sent of Normal Lamp is active, else CAN_OPT_OUT2 will be sent.
Output CFG_PULSE Output

Bit in CAN message Input
(set) CFG_PULSE (not set)
CAN_OPT_OUT1 TX ON/OFF ON/OFF ON (only if NORMAL is off)
CAN_OPT_OUT2 TX ON/OFF OFF (only if NORMAL is on)
CAN_OPT_OUT3 SILENCE SILENCE SILENCE
Table 8-12 Alternative outputs (POS3-4)
Pressing SILENCE will send one CAN_OPT_3 message.
After a message with CAN_OPT_OUT1-3 set is sent, then one message with the same bit
cleared is sent.
Com Failure:
The Slave Panel have 5 dip switches used indicate to the Slave Panel if a Remote Control or
CSU is present. The Remote Controls/CSU sends out a status message on the CAN. If this
message is not received within 300ms from Remote Controls/CSU and it is configured to be
present, the COM FAIL lamp will be lit. The NORMAL/WARNING LED for corresponding
equipment will be turned off and the ALARM LED will be turned off or on depending of a con-
figuration dip switch. When a valid message is present again, the COM FAIL will go off. The
COM FAIL will also go on if the COMMS bit in the received message from a Remote Control is
set.
CAT Status (SP 1754B):
The CAT status LEDs are information derived from the status of the associated ILS equip-
ment. This status is received from the CAN-bus. It is necessary to have a category status unit
connected to the CAN-bus to generate this information.
Instruction Manual
Mains Fail:
The Mains Failure LED is generated by the logic ‘or’ function between the Mains Failure 1 and
2 from all the Remote Controls (including OPT_IN4 bits if configured).

Service:
The Service LED is generated by the logic ‘or’ function between the Service from the Remote
Controls (including OPT_IN3 bits if configured).
Runway Selected:
The Runway Selected LED is the CAN_INTERLOCK_IN signal from the left most Remote
Control (yyyy = 0001).
Interlock:
In a system with more than one Slave Panel, only one Slave Panel must transmit the interlock
status message. The other slave will be configured to not to send this message. If more than
one interlock switch will be used, this must be solved by hard wiring. The interlock status mes-
sage will be sent from the Slave Panel each 250ms. The interlock signal is received on a con-
nector on the Slave Panel.
ON/OFF:
The ON/OFF push buttons on the front can be disabled if the CFG_DIS_ONOFF dip switch is
set.
Dim functionality:
The LEDs on the Slave Panel can be set to reduced intensity be pressing the front LAMP DIM
push button. Three levels exists. When the minimum level has been reached, the next level
will be maximum.
Audible Alarm:
The Slave Panel has a speaker that generates an audio alarm. This alarm is turned on
-if a Remote Control sets the alarm bit
-if a Remote Control clears the CAN_OPT_IN1 and the alternative inputs are config-
ured to be used
-if a Remote Control or the CSU stops sending messages and it is configured to be
present
-if a Warning occurs and the CFG_BUZ_ALL_W is set
-if a Mains Fail is set and the CFG_BUZ_MAINS_W is set
-if a COM FAIL is present
-if the CFG_UPGRADE is set and one of the remotes deactivate an alarm or when one
of the remotes deactivate a warning (including Mains Warning 1 or 2) or when Com
Failure is deactivated
-if the CSU sets the UPGRADE bit
-if the CSU sets the DOWNGRADE bit
Instruction Manual
The alarm is turned off when the SILENCE push-button on the front is pressed.

8.2.5 IL 1379 / IL 1380 Interlock switch
The interlock switch is used if the runway has two ILS’s for opposite runway directions that
shall be interlocked.
The interlock switch consists of a key-operated changeover switch, and is connected to the
RCA 1750 Remote Control (Section 8.2.1).
SP 1754 Slave Panels (Section 8.2.4) of the affected localizer and glide path equipment.
IL 1379 and IL 1380 are identical modules apart from mechanical dimensions. The IL 1379 is
3 height units by 10 length units (approx. 12.8x5cm). The IL 1380 is 2 height units by 9 length
units (approx. 8.4x4.5cm).
Figure 8-40 shows the Interlock switch connections.
INTERLOCK
MB1346 / P1
SWITCH
OR
SF 1344 / P2
RWY A RWY B OR
SP 1754 / P1
OR
MB 1753 / P25/26/27/28
OR
MB 1801 / P23/24
1 INTERLOCK
5 4 2 1 2 GND
1 2 LOC runway B
LOC runway A
2 1
1 2 GP runway B
GP runway A
2 1
HBK2054-2
Figure 8-40 Interlock switch connections

Instruction Manual

8.2.6 DS 1512A DME status interface
The DS 1512A is designed to be mounted as a backplane in the RFA 1353 remote control
sub-rack.
The DS 1512A acts as an interface between the equipment that give the DME or other
navaids status (DME/DVOR/other remote control) and the equipment that need the equipment
status.
The status interface is used to display the status of an equipment on status panels in the
Tower and the Technical Control Room (TCR). The status signals are:
• Normal
• Alarm
• Warning
• Maintenance
On transition from Normal to Alarm, a control signal for an alarm buzzer is set. The buzzer is
reset by a reset signal or transition back to Normal. The status interface is also used to pro-
vide the status to other equipment.
Dimensions:
129.5 x 50 mm, mounted as a motherboard in a 3U 19" sub-rack.
Connector P1:
P1 is a 4-pin Weidmuller connector used for power in.
Pin no Signal name Function

1 GND Power Ground
2 VDD 5V in
3 V24P 24V-27V in
4 V_DIM Lamp power (10-27V)
Connector P2:
Connector P2 is intended to be connected to inputs from RCA 1240 via MB 1346A,
Connector P6:
10-pin header, internal serial diodes and pull-up to VDD or to status outputs on a DME remote
control. Suitable for connection to TTL outputs and relay / opto outputs.
Instruction Manual


1 AUX_RC_OUT0 * NORMAL
2 AUX_RC_OUT1 *WARNING
3 AUX_RC_OUT2 *MAINTENANCE
5 AUX_RC_IN0 *ON
6 AUX_RC_IN1 *OFF
4, 9, 10 GND
Connector P3:
P3 is a 10-pin header
The output in connector P3 uses opto isolator and to preserve an electric isolation it needs
VCC (5V) from the equipment it shall be connected to. It is intended to be connected to an
external status system, It has opto outputs, Collector pull-up for 2mA at 5V.

1 *ALARM_OPTO Opto open collector
2 *WARNING_OPTO Opto open collector
3 *NORMAL_OPTO Opto open collector
4 *MAINTENANCE_OPTO Opto open collector
6 OPTO_VCC Pull-up resistors common
10 OPTO_GND Emitters common
Connector P4 and P5:
25-pin DSUB for connection to Slave Panels, duplicated on the front and back of the module.

2 *ALARM_OUT
3 *WARNING_OUT
4 *NORMAL_OUT
9 *MAINTENANCE_OUT
25 *BUZZER
1, 7, 13 GND Power Ground
15, 16 V24P 24V-27V to panel
21 *SILENCE Buzzer reset
24 V_DIM Lamp power (10-27V)
19 (P4 only) *ON On signal, to P2-5
22 (P4 only) *OFF Off signal, to P2-6
All outputs are open collector to drive LEDs (Min. 100mA. 27V).
Instruction Manual

MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS
SECTION 9 APPENDIXES
Appendix A Monitor and Maintenance Parameters
A.1 Monitor Parameters
These are ILS parameters measured by the monitors. An alarm on any of these parameters
can be configured to cause changeover/shut-down.
Channel Parameter Description

CL DDM Course Line - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Course Line - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Course Line - RF level
DS DDM Displacement Sensitivity - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Displacement Sensitivity - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Displacement Sensitivity - RF level
NF DDM Near Field - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Near Field - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Near Field - RF level
CLR DDM Clearance - Difference in depth of modulation
SDM Clearance - Sum of depth of modulation
RF Clearance - RF level
- DF Difference Frequency
IDENT CL ACT IDENT activity signal from CL monitor (LOC only)
CLR ACT IDENT activity signal from CLR monitor (LOC only)
CL ID MOD IDENT signal modulation on CL monitor (LOC only)
CLR ID MOD IDENT signal modulation on CLR monitor (LOC only)
CL ID CODE IDENT signal Morse code on CL monitor (LOC only)
CLR ID CODE IDENT signal Morse code on CLR monitor (LOC only)
TEST DDM Monitor self test signal
SDM Monitor self test signal
RF Monitor self test signal
SELF TEST Monitor self test signal from TX control (derived from monitor
self test parameters)
DC-LOOP DC-LOOP 1 DC-LOOP for antenna element group 1 (LOC only)
DC-LOOP 2 DC-LOOP for antenna element group 2 (LOC only)
FFM DDM Ch. A Far Field Monitor Ch. A DDM
(only with SDM Ch. A Far Field Monitor Ch. A SDM
FC 1927) RF Ch. A Far Field Monitor Ch. A RF
DDM Ch. B Far Field Monitor Ch. B DDM
SDM Ch. B Far Field Monitor Ch. B SDM
RF Ch. B Far Field Monitor Ch. B RF
Execute Alarm Select Non-Exec / Exec alarm
Instruction Manual
Table A-1 Monitor Alarm/Warning Parameters
73892-IAPA/Rev.1/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B
©Indra Navia AS Page A-1

A.2 Maintenance Parameters
These parameters may cause maintenance warning and can be used for fault isolation pur-
poses.
Originates Gives WARNING when

Parameter
from module (with default warning limits setting):
MO 1820 FRGA STAT Detects errors in the FPGA signal processing
CPLD STAT Detects errors in the CPLD signal processing
+5V +5V supply voltage ok/not ok
+15V +15V supply voltage ok/not ok
VINT + Internal voltages ok/not ok
DS 180 HZ *) 180Hz content in DS Signal
CLR 180 HZ *) 180Hz content in CLR Signal
CL PHASE *) Number of degrees between CL 90 and CL 150 Hz tone, see
ICAO Annex 10 para 3.1.5.3.3
CLR PHASE *) Number of degrees between CLR 90 and CLR 150 Hz tone,
see ICAO Annex 10 para 3.1.5.3.3
30 HZ PHASE DIFF Measures the LF phase between the CL and CLR LF signals,
based on the combined 90 and 150 Hz curve forms
CL RF FREQ Measures the frequency of the CL carrier relative to the nomi-
nal carrier frequency. Note: In single frequency equipment this
value is the same as the carrier frequency
CLR RF FREQ Measures the frequency of the CLR carrier relative to the
nominal carrier frequency. Note: In single frequency equip-
ment this value is N/A
DS VOICE Measures the frequencies in the range 300Hz-3000 Hz
DS NOISE Highest measured value in the range 10-300 Hz, except the
90/150/180/270 and 300 Hz frequencies
CLR VOICE Measures the frequencies in the range 300Hz-3000 Hz
CLR NOISE Highest measured value in the range 10-300 Hz, except the
90/150/180/270 and 300 Hz frequencies
MF 1821 +8,5V Measures that the 8,5V is present
+15V Measures that the 15,5V is present
VINT Detects that all internal voltages are OK
FPGA RESET Tells if the FGA is stuck in reset
FPGA STAT Detects errors in the FPGA signal processing
SEU ERROR Detects Single Event Upsets in the FPGA
ADC ERROR Detects errors in both of the AD Converters
PLL ERROR Detects PLL lock errors
FLASH ERROR Detects CRC errors or read/write errors in the flash
LF 1576 -15 V OK -15 V supply voltage status
Instruction Manual
+15 V OK +15 V supply voltage status

+2.5 V OK +2.5 V supply voltage status

Originates Gives WARNING when

Parameter
from module (with default warning limits setting):
Watchdog Watchdog status. This signal is set to 1 if the watchdog has
reset the DSP
DSP execution DSP software execution status. This signal is set to 0 if the
DSP does not access the FPGA
DSP memory check DSP memory status. This signal is set to 1 by the DSP soft-
ware if it detects any failure in the external flash program
memory or the internal RAM
EEPROM parity Parity check status of the configuration data EEPROM. This
signal is set to 1 by the DSP software if a parity error is
detected in any of the configuration settings
OS 1706 COURSE OUTPUT RF level output to COURSE transmitter is below a predefined
LEVEL level
COU TUNEVOLT COURSE tune voltage outside predefined limits
COURSE SYNTH Synthesizer has been out of lock since COURSE transmitter
LOCK WARN was turned on
COURSE LOCK COURSE synthesizer is out of lock
DETECT
CLR OUTPUT RF level output to CLR transmitter is below a predefined level
LEVEL
CLR TUNEVOLT CLR tune voltage outside predefined limits
CLR SYNTH LOCK Synthesizer has been out of lock since CLR transmitter was
WARN turned on
CLR LOCK CLR synthesizer is out of lock
DETECT
Table A-2 Maintenance Parameters (Part 1)
*)These parameters must be measured in manual mode, and with all other transmitters turned OFF
Originates from
Parameter Description
module
TX LPA/GPA +5 V OK +5 V supply voltage status
+27 V CSB Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the CSB power
amplifier stage
+27 V SBO Measurement of the +27 supply voltage fed to the SBO power
amplifier stage (not applicable for clearance transmitters in GP
equipment)
-15 V OK -15 V supply voltage status
CSB forward power Measurement of the forward power on the CSB output
CSB reverse power Measurement of the reverse power on the CSB output
SBO forward power Measurement of the forward power on the SBO output
SBO reverse power Measurement of the reverse power on the SBO output
CSB I-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB I modulator
CSB Q-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the CSB Q modulator
SBO I-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO I modulator
SBO Q-phase drive Measurements of the peak voltage to the SBO Q modulator
Instruction Manual
Temperature Measurement of the temperature of the power amplifier assembly

in degrees Celsius

Originates from
module
RMA 1215 RMS +5V +5V voltage measurement (Volt)
RMS BATTERY Clock and RAM battery voltage measurement (Volt)
PS 1227 PS1 -15V Measured value of -15V supply voltage from PS1227 #1
PS2 -15V Measured value of -15V supply voltage from PS1227 #2
PS1 +5V Measured value of +5V supply voltage from PS1227 #1
PS1 +8.5V Measured value of +8.5V supply voltage from PS1227 #1
PS2 +8.5V Measured value of +8.5V supply voltage from PS1227 #2
TX1 CLR I SBO Measured value of current through TX1 CLR SBO amplifier
TX1 CLR I CSB Measured value of current through TX1 CLR CSB amplifier
TX1 COURSE I SBO Measured value of current through TX1 COURSE SBO amplifier
TX1 COURSE I CSB Measured value of current through TX1 COURSE CSB amplifier
TX2 CLR I SBO Measured value of current through TX2 CLR SBO amplifier
TX2 CLR I CSB Measured value of current through TX2 CLR CSB amplifier
TX2 COURSE ISBO Measured value of current through TX2 COURSE SBO amplifier
TX2 COURSE I CSB Measured value of current through TX2 COURSE CSB amplifier
CI 1748 AIR CON Air condition status input
FIRE Fire alarm status input
INTRUDER Intruder alarm status input
SPARE AUX User defined input
PC 1749 - upper CHARGER STATUS 1 Main supply OK/not OK
BATT CURRENT 2 Measured value of battery current (negative if charging)
POWER CURRENT 1 Measured value of battery current flowing from this charger
PC 1749 - lower CHARGER STATUS 2 Main supply OK/not OK
(hot standby or dual
power only)
BATT CURRENT 2 Measured value of battery current (negative if charging)
POWER CURRENT 2 Measured value of battery current flowing from this charger
Table A-3 Maintenance Parameters (Part 2)
Originates from
module
CI 1748 Temp in Inside temperature (if installed)
Temp out Outside temperature (if installed)
AC voltage Mains voltage (if installed)
User defined 3 user defined analog inputs
Table A-4 User Defined Analog Inputs Maintenance Parameters
Originates from
module
CI 1748 User defined 8 user defined logical inputs/outputs
Instruction Manual
Table A-5 User Defined Logical Inputs/Outputs Maintenance Parameters

FAR FIELD MONITOR - (LOC ONLY)
Appendix B Far Field Monitor - (LOC Only)
B.1 System Description
B.1.1 Functional Description
Monitor 1
Ext. Control
FFM Controller and data Monitor
FC 1927 MO 1820
FFM Monitor
Configuration
status parameter
FFM command and status
data
and data
Transmitter Status to
FFM
FFM Interface Control Remote RMS
NORMARC RS-232 Control
FI 1392 RMA 1822
7720
TCA 1218
Monitor
FFM Configuration
parameter
Monitor 2 status and status
data
FFM Controller Monitor

FC 1927 Ext. Control MO 1820
and data
HBK 1363-2
Figure B-1 NORMARC 7000B Block Diagram for FFM interface
The Far Field Monitor interface for NORMARC 7000B consists of a common FFM Interface
(FI 1392) and one FFM Controller (FC 1927) for each of the two main monitors. The FI 1392 is
located on the wall-mounted part of the cabinet (above connection interface CI 1748 inside
the cabinet), while the FC 1927 cards are placed next to their corresponding monitor
MO 1820.
The FFM parameters integrates with the other monitor parameters for monitor data storage
etc.
B.1.2 Detailed Description FC 1927
General Description
The FC 1927 is a FFM controller that interacts with the connected FFM through serial data
messages. The FFM parameter values are extracted from the received FFM messages, and
sent to the corresponding MO 1820 via high speed UART. The values are compared against
the alarm limits, and the alarm status is then delayed according to the specified FFM alarm
delay. If any of the FFM parameters are outside the set limits, the MO 1820 generates an
alarm signal for the station control on the TC 1216.
Instruction Manual
73892-IAPB/Rev.1/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B
©Indra Navia AS Page B-1

Block Diagram
FC 1927
Status
LEDs
RxD0 UART + I/O MO 1820

FFM Interface TxD0
FI 1392 Alive
Microcontroller I2C RMS

NMS 283 Bus RMA 1822
Station control Access level
TC 1216 TX Status
Configuration
Bootloader JTAG
HBK 1364-2
Figure B-2 FC 1927 Block Diagram
Signal Description
RxD0 Serial data from FFM.
TxD0 Serial data to FFM.
Alive Toggling signal from FC #1 to the FI 1392.
JTAG. JTAG interface for firmware upgrade.
I2C Bus RMS data bus. Used for maintenance parameters for the
RMS and for setting FFM controller configuration
UART Serial data between FC 1927 and MO 1820.
I/O Discrete data lines between the FC and MO. Used for FC
status and alarm/warning output to RC via aux. channels.
Access Level RMS access level as decided by the station control.
TX Status Transmitter status feedback (TX ON or OFF).

Instruction Manual

Block Description
Microcontroller/NMS 283
This block consists of an AVR microcontroller with peripheral circuits (RAM, buffers etc.)
The microcontroller sends commands to and receives FFM data from, the NM 7720 FFM via
the FI 1392 board. FFM data is extracted from the serial messages, and the raw parameter
values are transmitted to the MO 1820 boards via high speed UART. Discrete I/O is used for
some parameter exchange between the FC and MO 1820. System parameters and FFM con-
troller configuration data is exchanged with the RMA 1822 board via the I2C bus
Configuration
The following parameters can be configured on the FC 1927. See Appendix D for more
details.
Setting: Value Description

FFM communication 0-255 sec. Sets the timeout before lost communication with the FFM will
error timeout generate a "FFM Comm. fail" parameter warning
FFM communication(*) Normal Data from the FFM is requested every 500ms, and the battery
status is updated every 5th second
Slow Data from the FFM is requested every 1000ms, and the battery
status is updated every 10th second if at least one of the TX
feedback signals are active
Status LEDS
The status LEDs show the operating mode of the FFM controller. In normal operation, the four
LEDs have the following functions:
LED 1: Off when there is no FFM alarm, on when there is one or more alarms.
LED 2: Off when there is no FFM warning, on when there is one or more
warnings.
LED 3: On for a period of 100ms each time a message is sent to the FFM.
LED 4: On for a period of 100ms each time a message is received from the
FFM
LED fault indications
The FC 1927 has some built in test functionality. Program- and volatile memory CRC checks
are executed on boot-up, and at least once per 60 seconds. If any of these tests fail, the serial
interface will be disabled, LED3 and LED4 will flash at 4Hz, and the FFM_ERROR status bit
will be sent to the MO 1820.
• JTAG
Used for programming device firmware. Special hardware required.

Instruction Manual
• Bootloader
The built-in bootloader in the firmware is used for module testing and firmware upgrades

B.1.3 Detailed Description FI 1392B
General Description
The FI 1392B is an interface board between the FFM controller and the connected
NORMARC FFM. The board contains RS-232 drivers for logic level conversion between TTL
and RS-232, and circuitry which selects which FC 1927 sends commands to the FFM.
Block Diagram
FI 1392B
Mon 1 RxD
RS-232 RxD
FFM RS 232
controller Alive drivers RS-232 TxD
FC 1927 M1 TxD NM 7720
FFM
Command
Mon 2 select
FFM M2 TxD
Use either
controller RxD of the two
FC 1927 interfaces
HBK 1365-2
Figure B-3 Block Diagram FI 1392B
Signal Description
RxD Serial data from FFM to FC 1927.
M1 TxD Serial data from FC 1927 #1 to FFM.
M2 TxD Serial data from FC 1927 # 2 to FFM.
Alive Toggling signal for detecting that FC 1927 in position 1 is

alive.
RS 232 RxD RS 232 input signal from FFM.
RS 232 TxD RS 232 output signal to FFM.
Block Description
Command select Selects which of the two TxD signals from the FFM con-
trollers that shall be transmitted to the FFM.
RS 232 drivers RS-232 line drivers. Converts data between RS-232 and
TTL level logic.
Instruction Manual

B.2 Installation
B.2.1 Mechanical and electrical installation
FC 1927
Two FC 1927 cards are inserted in the vacant slots to the right of monitor 1 and monitor 2
respectively.
FI 1392
The FI 1392B is located above the connection interface CI 1748 inside the wall mounted part
of the cabinet. Two flat cables are connected from P1/P2 on FI 1392 to P9/P10 on MB 1575,
respectively.
The FI 1392B has one connector for interfacing to a NORMARC 7720 FFM. P5 is a standard
9 pin D-sub used for RS-232 interface to a NORMARC 7720.
B.2.2 Interfacing the NORMARC 7720 Far Field Monitor
The NORMARC 7720 FFM is connected to the NORMARC Localizer using a RS-232 inter-
face, usually using external modems, fibre-optic modems, Ethernet device servers, radio
modems or similar devices.
The NORMARC 7720 FFM comes with the required type of modem installed in the FFM cabi-
net, with all necessary cabling (except the external interface) connected.
In the Localizer cabinet, the chosen type of modem can be mounted on the DIN-rail in the bot-
tom of the door (wall mounted part) of the cabinet. 27V power (2A max) for the modem is sup-
plied from pin #1 (+27V) and #2 (GND) on "ANALOG PORT #2" on the CI 1748 board. Refer
to the CI 1748A protection cover. See figure B-4 for suggested modem placement. Note that
some features have been omitted for clarity.
Instruction Manual

Figure B-4 FFM modem mounted in ILS cabinet
The communication equipment (external line modems, fibre-optic modems, radio modems)
must be capable of operating in transparent mode, since the equipment software will not send
any initialisation or control strings.
Connect a standard 1:1 RS-232 modem cable between the serial port on the modem and con-
nector P5 on the FI 1392 (approximate position shown in figure B-4).
Jumper settings on FI 1392:
S1 S2 S3 S4
N/A 3-4: Selects RS-232 3-4: Selects RS-232 1-2: !CTS pulled low
operation operation
The NORMARC 7720 FFM receiver must be set up to use the same baud rate as the
FC 1927A; 9600 bps. The NORMARC 7720 always communicate using 8 data bits, no parity
and 1 stop bit
Instruction Manual

POWER SUPPLY
Appendix C Power Supply

This chapter describes alternative Power supplies/Chargers as applicable for the deliveries of
LOC/GP cabinets. These supplies are normally based on COTS AC/DC converters with cable
harness mounted on the Wall Mount under the ILS cabinet.
BC 1361K - described in C.1 and in attached Suppliers Documentation for cold standby LOC/
GP cabinets.
BC 1361 L - described in C.1 and in attached Suppliers Documentation for hot standby LOC/
GP cabinets.
C.1 BC 1361 K and L
C.1.1 Description
The two variants of this type of Power Supply are used as follows:
Figure C-1 ILS cabinet with BC1361 K (left) and 2 pcs of BC 1361L (right)
• For hot standby cabinets 2 pcs of BC 1361L are used
• For cold standby cabinets BC 1361K is used
The main advantages with this Power Supply are:

• Separate Circuit Breaker for Batteries, DC Output(s) and Mains input(s)
• Modular design (DIN-rail)
Instruction Manual
• Redundancy of sub-units inside the power supplies

• Sub-modules inside Power Supply are hot swappable
73892-IAPC/Rev.1/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B
©Indra Navia AS Page C-1

POWER SUPPLY
• Based on proven COTS units with high MTBF

• Maintenance free compact batteries with 12 years battery life and front terminals (M6)
will normally be supplied
• Additional monitoring features
C.1.2 Details
The Power Supplies are based on the Micropack power system from Eltek Valere.
This system consists of standard modules easily mounted on a DIN rail. Several blocks have
been combined in the BC 1361K, L to create the perfect combination for ILS use.
C.1.2.1 Rectifier
The Micropack 24/240 WOR Rectifier Module is convection cooled

for system installation in harsh and noise sensitive environments.
It provides an output of 24V DC 240W, normally adjusted to about

27V depending on battery type (21.5-36VDC adjustment range).
C.1.2.2 Compack Controller
The Compack Controller is the monitoring and control unit for the rectifiers.
The controller has

• LEDs for local visual alarming (Major, Minor, Power ON)
• Ethernet for remote or local monitoring and control via
WEB Browser
• Ethernet port with HP Auto MDI/MDI-X for detection and
correction for straight-through and crossover cables.
Eliminates confusion whether to use straight cable or
crossover between controller and PC
• SNMP protocol with TRAP, SET and GET on Ethernet.
Email of TRAP alarms
• 3 programmable relay outputs for "traditional" remote
monitoring. One is used for generation of the "Battery
Warning" in the ILS cabinet
• 3 programmable multipurpose inputs (temperature, "digital inputs" or analog signals)
The controllers in the BC 1361K,L are programmed for use with the ILS with indications and
monitoring on ILS (RC and RMM).
Instruction Manual
For advanced customers there are numerous possibilities for enhanced monitoring and con-
trol of the Power Supply by using the controller's built in functionality in the Web browser.

POWER SUPPLY
C.1.2.3 Layout of BC 1361K and L
The BC 1361K is a 0,96kW and BC 1361L a 0,72kW Power System for 24VDVC with 4 recti-
fier slots.
These power supplies consist of:

• 4 pcs 24V Rectifier Modules in the BC 1361K, i.e 0.96kW
• 3 pcs 24V Rectifier Modules in the BC 1361L i.e. 0,72kW
• 1 pcs Control Unit Compack
• 1 pcs 1 phase 230VAC TN Mains input on a 2 pole 10A C char. circuit breaker (CB1)
• 1 pcs Load/output breaker, 32A C char. (CB2)
• 1 pcs Battery breaker, 32A D char. (CB3)
• Cables and accessories for interconnection to ILS cabinet and batteries
BC 1361K only
Rectifier Module
Controller Module
CB1 CB2 CB3
HBK 2156-3
Figure C-2 BC 1361K and BC 1361L Battery Charger, with and without cover
ILS/ BATT
- +
- -
T2 CB2 T4 T3 CB3
T1 CB1
- + N L
- +
Battery Load/ILS Mains Input
Instruction Manual
HBK 2157-1
Figure C-3 Circuit Breakers and connection terminals

POWER SUPPLY
C.1.3 Redundancy
In the BC 1361K (Cold Standby systems) 4 pcs 240W AC/DC Rectifier units are connected in
parallel to provide the power. However 2-3 units provide enough power for the ILS cabinet. If 1
of the Rectifiers units becomes faulty the ILS will still be fully operational but with some reduc-
tion in output power headroom. If 2 or more of the units become faulty a Battery Warning indi-
cation on the ILS will be given.
In the BC 1361L there are 3 240W AC/DC Rectifier units installed in each cabinet, thus two
such supplies are used.
The first group/supply is charging battery bank 1 and providing power to Tx1 while the second
group is charging battery bank 2 and providing power to Tx2. This gives full redundancy
between the two groups/supplies and in addition 1 Rectifier unit can be broken in each group
and the ILS will still be in full operation but with some reduction in output power headroom. If
2 or more of the units in each group become faulty a Battery Warning indication on the ILS will
be given.
This design means that the BC 1361K, L have extremely high MTBO.
A separate alarm output can be monitored providing information to the ILS cabinet also when
only one rectifier is faulty in which case the Power Supply is fully operational but with some
reduction in output power headroom. Normally this alarm is wired to User I/O channel 2 for
BC 1361K, and user I/O Channel 2 and 3 for BC 1361L.
Note that the Controller is not redundant within the BC 1361K,L however this unit is not vital
for the operation of the power supply. In case it is faulty, the charger units will operate as nor-
mal and a Battery Warning will be provided to the ILS cabinet.
C.1.4 Batteries
The Marathon FT backup batteries that will be normally supplied with these power supplies
are maintenance free and have a 12 years design life (80% remaining capacity) Battery oper-
ation will be provided for more than 4 hours (from each battery bank).
Instruction Manual

POWER SUPPLY
C.1.5 Operation
The Power Supply has Circuit Breakers available on the front panel providing following func-
tions:
• Mains ON/OFF - disconnects mains input(s)
• Load ON/OFF - disconnects the 27V DC output from the rectifiers to the ILS cabinet.
Note that this output powers the ILS cabinet and also provides the charging current to
the batteries
• Battery ON/OFF - disconnects the backup batteries from the ILS cabinet (for charging
and backup operation)
• BC 1361K and L have one circuit breaker for each function
The BC 1361K and L are mounted on the wall mount frame used for the ILS cabinet. These
charger cabinets have a removable front cover for access to the charger modules and inter-
connection terminals. Cable is entered through the cable glands in the bottom of the power
cabinet.
The Rectifier and Controller modules can be removed (hot swappable) from their back panel
by pressing in the lock in the front handle and lifting this up (see Quick Installation Guide)
Instruction Manual

POWER SUPPLY
C.1.6 Configuration
The power supply and associated ILS cabinet are supplied tested and configured from
Indra Navia AS.
Following situations might require configuration on site:
C.1.6.1 Replacing the Controller with a spare unit
The only difference in configuration between the controller in the BC 1361H-L Battery Charger
is that the controller in BC 1361H and BC 1361K is configured to expect 4 rectifier modules
while the controller in BC 1361J and BC 1361L is configured for 3 rectifier modules. Also the
temperature monitor function shall be disabled in the controller for the BC 1361K and
BC 1361L unless the optional temperature probe is supplied. Apart from this setting, the spare
controllers provided by Indra Navia AS are supplied with all settings required for all versions of
the power supply.
To perform this configuration use the Web Interface built into the Controller as follows:
• Connect the controller to a computer directly with a (crossed) network cable or via a
LAN.
If the IP address of the Controller unit is not known, it is necessary to download the
EVIPSetup Network Utility program from Eltek Valere and run this initially:
• Start the Network Utility program
HBK 2162-1
• The IP adress(es) of the Controller/cabinet will now be shown

• Highlight the controller and press the Web Interface button
The Web Interface program should then pop up with the logon window. Use admin as pass-
word and admin as user.
Following screen should then be shown:

Instruction Manual

POWER SUPPLY
• Open the System Conf. ->Rectifier window:
• Check that the Number of Rectifiers Installed is correct (3 for BC1361J and L or 4 for
BC 1361H and K)
• If the number is wrong, correct the number of rectifiers and click the Save icon in the
lower right corner
Instruction Manual

POWER SUPPLY
• Open the Battery Configuration window:
• Check that the Temperature Compensation Active box is checked for BC 1361H and J
or unchecked for BC 1361K and L. Modify if necessary and click the Save icon in the
lower right corner.
• Save the new setting and exit the program
A Users Guide for the Compack controller can also be downloaded from Eltek Valere for fur-
ther assistance.
C.1.6.2 Updating/full configuration
This requires a more extensive process to perform step by step since there are such a lot of
parameters to configure/check. The best solution is therefore to use an alternative program
PowerSuite that can be downloaded from Eltek Valere by which a full configuration can be
downloaded to the controller from file, for example first uploading the configuration from a
functioning controller to file and then downloading this to the new controller (use the import/
export configuration selection under the Tools menu). Remember to set correct number of rec-
tifiers according to .
C.1.6.3 Configuring the Digital User input on ILS
As mentioned under C.1.3 a separate warning from the Controller unit in the power supply is
wired to the ILS Digital User I/O channel 2 and 3 (BC 1361J and L only) on the CI 1210/
CI 1748 in the ILS. This is used for giving a Maintenance Warning indication on the ILS in
case a single rectifier module is failing.
Instruction Manual
To achieve this use the RMM program and configure the used Digital user input (in RMM;
ILS-Settings - Settings - Maintenance - User defined I/O) to:
• Name the input to Rectifier 1 or Rectifier 2

POWER SUPPLY
• Signal direction set to “Input”

• “Map to Maint warning LED” checked
• “Warning when signal is high” selected
Refer to C.2 Suppliers’ Documentation
Instruction Manual

POWER SUPPLY
C.2 Suppliers’ Documentation
Suppliers documentation for Eltek Valere Micropack Power System, Micropack 24/240 WOR
Rectifier Module and Quick Installation Guide is attached as applicable.
Instruction Manual

Micropack
Power System
GREAT SMALL POWER
The Micropack power system is
designed for smaller loads, yet with a
heavy functionality. With few standard
building blocks easily mounted on a DIN
rail, the system is fully on-site
configurable.
Product Description Micropack Rectifier

The Micropack power system extends your network one The rectifier is convection cooled for system installation in
step further. With load ranges typically between 250W and harsh and noise sensitive environments. A wide input
1000W, the Micropack is perfect for broadband extension operating range and temperature range give the system a
and other high speed data and telecom applications. true wide data and telecom network application approach.
Suitable for both indoor and outdoor applications. Refer to rectifier module datasheet for further information.
With a few DIN rail mountable building blocks , the Micropack

power system is design for on-site configuration and
assembly. This allows fast and efficient logistics and
enhanced flexibility.
Broad functionality including ethernet based remote

monitoring is provided by the Compack controller.
System Building Blocks

Power Core
The power core consists of 2 or 4 plug-in positions for
Micropack rectifiers and one position for Compack controller.
The core also includes AC mains connection, internal
signaling and redundant DC current output.
Compack Controller
Battery Distribution A small, compact and simple controller with all the
The battery distribution is configurable with plug in style functionality expected from a large complex control system.
breakers. Battery connection terminals and low voltage See the Compack datasheet for further information.
battery disconnect (LVBD) are rated for optimal battery
backup.
Load Distribution
Distribution is on-site configurable with plug in style breakers
and can be used in series with more distribution blocks if
needed.
Bulk feed option
The bulk feed option is available for a non-load distribution
power solution or with self made wired standard DIN rail
breaker distribution.
Compack Controller bilde

See reverse side for specifications
www.eltekvalere.com
Micropack Power System
Additional Technical Specifications
Power Core (2-pos / 4-pos)
AC Input o 1x Single Phase
o 85VAC – 300VAC (185 – 275VDC, no power derating)
o Screw terminals, 2.5 mm2 [12 AWG]
AC Connector
o Top entry
DC Output Power
2-pos 500W
4-pos 1000W
Bulk 1000W
DC Output Earth Configurable, default positive (+)
Dimension (W) 205 mm [8”] (2-pos) / 295 mm [11.6”] (4-pos). Including Battery Distribution
Weight 160 g [0.4 lbs] (2-pos) / 250 g [0.5 lbs] (4-pos)
Coding YES, to prevent use of incompatible rectifier models
Load Distribution (4 x MCB) Battery Distribution (2 x MCB + LVBD)

Breakers o Plug-in style (IPA series from Airpax™) Breakers o Plug-in style (IPA series from Airpax™)
o 2A to 15A o Up to 30A
Max no of Max no of
4 per block 2 per block
breakers breakers
Load Battery Screw terminals, max 10.0 mm2 [6 AWG]
Screw terminals, max 4.0 mm2 [10 AWG]
Connector Connector Reverse polarity protection
LVLD No LVBD 50A
Dimension (W) 72 mm [2.8”] Dimension (W) 82 mm [3.2”]
Weight 165 g [0.4 lbs] (excl. MCBs) Weight 270 g [0.6 lbs] (excl. MCBs)
Common Specifications
Dimensions (H x D) 89 mm (2U) x max. 150mm (incl. DIN rail) mm [3.5 x 5.9 ”]
Mounting 35mm DIN rail

Remote Monitoring Ethernet 10/100 BASE-T (refer to Compack datasheet for details)
Local Monitoring 3 x LEDs (major alarm, minor alarm, power on)

3 x Form C dry contacts
Cover material Plastic V0 rated and aluminum
Operating temp -40 to +65°C (-40 to +149°F) Storage temp -40 to +85°C (-40 to +185°F)
Applicable Standards
Electrical safety IEC 60950-1
UL 60950-1
CSA C22.2
EMC IEC 61000-6-1
IEC 61000-6-2
IEC 61000-6-3 /A1
IEC 61000-6-4
ETSI EN 300 386 v1.3.3
FCC Part 15B Subpart 109
Environment 2002/95/EC (RoHS) & 2002/96/EC (WEEE)
ETS 300 019-2-1 Class 1.2
ETS 300 019-2-2 Class 2.3
ETS 300 019-2-3 Class 3.2
Specifications are subject to change without notice 24120.90X.DS3 – vA
Part no. Description

241120.901 Micropack Power Core 2 position
241120.902 Micropack Power Core 4 position
241120.910 Battery Distribution (2 x MCB + LVBD)
241120.920 Load Distribution (4 x MCB)
www.eltekvalere.com
Headquarters:
Eltek Valere
661 N Plano Rd Suite 300 Richardson, TX. 75081, USA
Phone: +1 (469) 330-9100 Fax: +1 (469) 330-9101
Micropack 24/240 WOR
24VDC & 30VDC Rectifier Module
GREAT SMALL POWER
Convection cooled rectifier for system

installation in harsh and noise sensitive
environments.
The module operates with DC as well as

AC input, making it even more flexible.
Product Description
With an output voltage range of 21.5-36VDC, the Micropack 24/240 WOR covers
both traditional 24 and 30VDC systems as well as 24V system with NiCad batteries
which requires high boost charging voltage.
Wide ranges of both input voltage and operating temperature give the system
superior availability. High current ability for selective fuse tripping, keeps the other
load running when there is a short circuit in a load branch. Micropack rectifiers are
also designed to have the highest possible immunity level and fulfill the IEC61000-6-
5 (immunity, power station and substation) which is unique in the Industry.
The Micropack 24V/240W is a power supply for small power systems. Suitable for
load ranges typically between 240W and 960W. Perfect for control cabinets, safety
systems and building automation applications.
Whether you are in need of a simple standalone power supply or a complete power
system with battery backup, distribution, remote control and monitoring, the
Micropack family is the perfect choice. Its modularity with DIN rail mountable building
blocks allows for high flexibility, on site configuration and assembly.
Micropack rectifiers are CE marked and UL recognized. Accompanied by a small DIN

railed mounted filter the rectifiers can also be used in marine and offshore
applications.
See last page for specifications

www.eltekvalere.com
AC/DC application examples
DC/DC application examples
www.eltekvalere.com 2(4)
AC/DC applications Selective load fuse tripping – to avoid all loads going down when one
The Micropack 24/240 WOR on mains branch is short circuited
DC/DC System with controller SBF
ü Bulk feed or -24V 2-30A breakers The Micropack 24/240 WOR has a selective quick tripping feature; it is
ü Battery backup on output able to deliver 55A for 35ms to help tripping the fuse of the short
ü Active current sharing circuited load before the short circuit pulls down the DC supply voltage
ü Accurate control of output for the other loads.
voltage
ü Module monitoring The number of rectifiers, type and size of the load breaker which needs
ü N+1 redundancy for rectifier to be tripped sets the maximum length of the load cables. This is
ü Secondary side load fuse specified in the table below.
monitoring
ü Secondary side current Calculated Maximum loop length (m)
monitoring Wire size (mm2)
ü Monitoring and alarms through breaker type 0,8 1 1,5 2,5 4 6 10
Ethernet and/or relay signal system size 10A
C2 13 17 26 43 69 104
AC/DC stand alone
ü Paralleling for redundancy and C4 8 11 15 28 44 67 112
passive load sharing option B6 8 11 17 29 46 70 116
ü DC ok signal system size 20A
ü DC output voltage set by C2 21 28 42 71 114 171
pot.meter C4 8 11 16 28 44 67 112
C6 2 3 4 8 13 19 33
DC/DC applications B6 17 22 34 57 91 137 228
The Micropack 24/240 WOR running on a B10 9 13 23 36 55 92
battery backup DC supply (85-300VDC) B13 5 9 15 23 38
DC/DC System with controller system size 30A
ü Active current sharing C2 24 32 49 81 130
ü Accurate control of output C4 11 15 23 38 61 92
voltage C6 5 7 11 18 29 44 74
ü Module monitoring B6 20 26 40 67 107 161 269
ü N+1 redundancy for converter B10 13 19 33 53 79 133
ü Secondary side load fuse B13 11 19 31 47 79
monitoring B16 11 18 27 46
ü Secondary side current system size 40A
monitoring C2 26 34 52 87 139
ü Monitoring and alarms through C4 13 17 26 43 69 104
Ethernet and/or relay signal
C6 7 9 14 23 38 57 95
C10 5 8 13 20 34
Multiple DC/DC stand alone B6 21 29 43 72 116 174 291
ü N+1 redundancy for converter B10 15 23 38 61 92 154
and supply breaker B13 15 25 40 60 100
ü Passive load sharing B16 16 26 40 67
ü Serial DC ok signal B20 15 22 37
ü DC output voltage set by
pot.meter
Single DC/DC standalone

ü DC ok signal from converter
ü DC output voltage set by
pot.meter
www.eltekvalere.com 3(4) 241120.200.DS3 – v4
Micropack 24/240 WOR
Additional Technical Specifications
AC Input Other Specifications
Voltage 85-300 VAC (Nominal 185 – 275 VAC) Efficiency >92% at 50-90% load
Linear output derating below 185VAC Isolation 3.0 KVAC – input and output
Frequency 0 to 66Hz(1) 1.5 KVAC – input earth
Maximum Current 1.2 Arms maximum at 230VAC at full load 0.5 KVDC – output earth
1.3 Arms maximum at 85VAC and 100W Alarms: Low mains shutdown
load High temperature shutdown
Maximum earth 2.0 mA at 250VAC/50Hz Rectifier Failure
leakage Overvoltage shutdown on output
Low voltage alarm at 21.7V
Power Factor 0.99 at 75% load or more
CAN bus failure
THD < 5% at nominal input and 50-100% Warnings: Low temperature shutdown
load Rectifier in power derate mode
Input Protection Varistor for transient protection Remote battery current limit activated
Mains fuse in both lines (2x 2.5A) Input voltage out of range, flashing at
Shut down above 300 VAC overvoltage
Loss of CAN communication with control
DC Output unit, stand alone mode
Voltage Default: 27.2 VDC
Float/Boost: 24.0-36.0VDC Visual Green LED: ON, no faults
Standby test range: 21.5 – 24.0VDC indications Red LED: rectifier failure
Yellow LED : rectifier warning
Stand alone: adj. range: 21.5-30.0 VDC Alarm output NO (+positive terminal)
(isolated) COM (-negative terminal)
Pb batteries Float/Boost charge: 2.0 – 2.4 VDC/cell 60V / 100mA max
(24V or30V) Standby/Test: 1.8 – 2.0 VDC/cell Operating -40 to +60°C (-40 to +142°F), derating linear
temp above +45°C to 80W at +60°C
NiCd batteries Float charge: 1,40 – 1.45 VDC/cell
Storage temp -40 to +85°C (-40 to +185°F)
(48V) Boost charge: 1.45 – 1.65 VDC/cell
Standby/Test: 1.05 – 1.2 VDC/cell Cooling Convection
MTBF > 480, 000 hours Telcordia SR-332 Issue I,
No of cells Pb: 12 (24V) or 15 (30V) method III (a) (Tambient : 25°C)
configurable in
Humidity Operating: 5% to 95% RH non-condensing
controller NiCd: 20 – 22 (24V)
Storage: 0% to 99% RH non-condensing
Output Power 240 W at nominal input
Dimensions 39.0 x 88.5 x 149mm (wxhxd)
100W at 85VAC
(1.54 x 3.48 x 5.87”)
Maximum Current 10 A at 24 VDC and nominal input
Weight 0.5 kg (1.1lbs)
15 A for 1min at 21.5V
→ Capacitive load start-up
55 A for 35ms < 5V Applicable Standards
→ Selective fuse tripping Electrical safety IEC 60950-1
UL 60950-1
Current Sharing ±5% of maximum current from 10 to
CSA 22.2
100% load
EMC ETSI EN 300 386 V.1.3.2
U/I Characteristics Constant Power: 21.5 - 36VDC
EN 61000-6-1 (immunity, light
Constant Current: 21.5 - 5VDC
industry)
Selective fuse tripping < 5VDC
EN 61000-6-2 (immunity, industry)
Static voltage ±0.5% from 10% to 100% load EN 61000-6-3 (emission, light industry)
regulation EN 61000-6-4 (emission, industry)
Dynamic voltage ±5.0% for 10-90% or 90-10% load EN 61000-6-5 (immunity, power
regulation variation, regulation time < 10ms station and substation)
Hold up time > 20ms; output voltage > 21.5 VDC at Mains Harmonics EN 61000-3-2
240W load Environment ETSI EN 300 019-2-1 Class 1.2
Ripple and Noise < 200 mV peak to peak, 30 MHz ETSI EN 300 019-2-2 Class 2.3
bandwidth ETSI EN 300 019-2-3 Class 3.2
< 5 mV rms psophometric ETSI EN 300 132-2
RoHS compliant
Output Protection Overvoltage shutdown
Hot plug-in - Inrush current limiting Marine compliant DnV Rules for Classification of Ships,
Short circuit proof (w/ additional filer High Speed & Light Craft and DnV
High temperature protection module)
Offshore Standards
Fuse
Specifications are subject to change without notice
(1)
from SW revision 1.2.
Part no. Description 241120.200.DS3 – v4
241120.200 Micropack 24/240 WOR
241120.900 Stand alone DIN rail fixing
241120.930 Marine Filter
CTOU0x02.xxxx CTO configured Micropack system
www.eltekvalere.com
Eltek Valere
Gråterudv. 8, PB 2340 Strømsø, 3003 Drammen, Norway
Phone: +47 32 20 32 00 Fax: +47 32 20 32 10
Home
Quick Installation Guide
Micropack, Integrated DC Distribution

356820.103
390mm 45mm
DC Power Supply System on DIN Rail

Low Power Applications 88mm
45mm
Tools 150mm Min. Clearances
PZ2 Micropack PS System, Integrated DC Distribution
2 or 4 Rectifiers, Controller, LVBD Contactor & 2 Battery MCBs, 4 Load MCBs
PZ1
Flat
Parts Overview
(Black)
(1,2,…)
Torque Recommendations
Type Torque (1-4) (1-4)
& Size (Nm)
T1 Screws M4 2.0
T2 Screw E 1.0
T3 AC, I/O 0.4
T4 Battery 1.2
T5 Load 0.5
Note: General tolerance: ±10% A1: A2: A3: A4: A5: A6:
241120.902 (4pos) 241120.910 241120.920 241120.100 242100.400 nnnnnn
241120.901 (2pos)
Power Core (A1) 1-7
1
All Coding Pins Inserted
4x(1-4) Factory Coding
1
1
2 DIN Rail
A1 2
1
1
2 M4+
2
Rear
3
4
3 6
4
3
4
3 4
M4- 4
E PZ2(2x)
Flat (”Open” 5x) 5 2 A1

3 PZ1
7 Flat
(”Closed” 5x)
Rear
Remove Coding Pins
System Type In BW Card
Front 48VDC 2 and 3
24VDC 1 and 4
Never remove coding pins on rectifiers!
“Open” Coding Pin

Coding Pin Inserted
Removed
“Closed”
Battery Distribution (A2) 1-8

A1 8 CAN Bus Termination
(120Ω end-of-line resistor plugged)
A2 A2
7
E PZ1
1
(T2)
+ + 4 Flat
(”Closed”)
2 M4+ 5
DC Earth DC Earth M4-
(TE) (TE)
3 – –
Flat (”Open") “Floating Earth” 48 & 60VDC Systems
PZ2 (2x) 6
(T1)
Load Distribution 1-6
A3
A2 4
A1
A3
1
2 5
Flat (”Closed”)
6
3 Flat (”Open") PZ2 (2x)
(T1)
Plug
Electrical Connections 1-7

External AC Fuses AC Mains
Recommended Rating Max 10mm2(6AWG)
(OFF)
Type Hy/Mag
1
16A-C (Europe) Max 2.5mm2(12AWG) (T4)
20A (USA) (T3)
3 Correct 4
Fasten
6=Dig 3– Polarity
Fasten
5=Dig 3+ Pin 1
Inputs
4=Dig 2–
3=Dig 2+ N-L
Pin 1 2
2=Dig 1– Max 4mm (10AWG)
1=Dig 1+ (T5) Batteries
A1, A2
Ethernet DC Load
& A3
9=AL3-nc
8=AL3-no 5
7=AL3-c
2
6
Fasten
Outputs
6=AL2-nc
5=AL2-no
4=AL2-c I/O Alarms Fasten
Contacts
3=AL1-nc shown with Max 1.5mm2 (14AWG)
2=AL1-no de-energized (T3)
1=AL1-c coil (Alarm) (Plug-in
Terminals)
7
+,+,–,–
A5 +,+,+,+ –,–,–,–
Start Up 1-5
3
A1, A2 AC Mains
PC & A3 (ON)
Correct
Optional change of Polarity
Factory Setup I/O Alarms
BW Card (A1)
DC Load
Batteries
Flat A5
A4
A6
1
WARNING: (2x & 4x)
Do NOT switch Mains ON before mounting the
rectifiers (A4)! As inserting the locking arms
unintentionally in the Power Core (A1) sockets, may
2
(4x)
OFF(0)
Electric Technical Specifications, 4 Pos
cause terminal injury! Shock AC Input 100-250V, 6.4Amax
Frequency 45-66Hz
4 DC Output 53.5V, 18.8A
Technical Specifications, 2 Pos

5
ON(1) AC Input 100-250V, 3.2Amax
(2x & 4x) Frequency 45-66Hz
(2x) (Cut-outs) DC Output 53.5V, 9.4A
Copyright © Eltek Valere, 2009

This document may be changed without notice
This product is CE marked and complies with all current Art. No. 356820.103, Issue 1.0, 2009 June
requirements for relevant standards and directives. Published 2009-06-25
www.eltekvalere.com
Headquarters:
Eltek Valere Eltek Valere
1303 E. Arapaho Rd, Richardson, TX. 75081, USA Gråterudv. 8, Pb 2340 Strømsø, 3003 Drammen, Norway
Phone: +1 (469) 330-9100 Fax: +1 (469) 330-9101 Phone: +47 32 20 32 00 Fax: +47 32 20 32 10
WINDOWS RMM PROGRAM
Appendix D Windows RMM Program
Instruction Manual
73892-IAPD/Rev.1/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B
©Indra Navia AS Page D-1

WINDOWS RMM PROGRAM
Instruction Manual
73892-IAPD/Rev.1/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B
©Indra Navia AS Page D-2

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D. User's guide
D.1 Overview of the NORMARC 7000 RMM
This information has been updated for version 3.0 of the software.
The NORMARC® 7000 RMM is a Microsoft Windows based program that provides access to
all the data and functions made available by the ILS remote monitoring subsystem.
By connecting to the ILS remote monitoring subsystem, the program lets the user do the
following:
• View the current status and measurements done by the ILS.

• Configure ILS monitor and transmitter settings.
• View reports that shows the current operational status and configuration of an ILS.
• Download historical data from the ILS and browse through individual data sets.
• Download and view events to see the operational history of the ILS.
• Connect to the ILS with a null modem cable (direct), dial-up connection or leased line
connection.
The figure below shows a screen dump of the main program window.
WINDOWS RMM SOFTWARE
IMAPPD/Rev.14/10-Feb-17 User's Guide

© Indra Navia AS Page 1
NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.1.1 Revision history
Version 3.0 Released: 2017-02-10
1. New features:
1. Support NORMARC 7000B3 (RMA 1822) in addition to NORMARC 7000B and
NORMARC 7000
2. Note:
1. New configuration file format for supporting RMA 1822 and RMA 1215 RMS
boards.
2. Downloaded warning and alarm historical data now stored in the database
instead of separate files.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.1.2 System requirements

• Operating system: 32 bit or 64 bit Microsoft Windows 7 (with SP1), Windows 8/8.1,
Windows 10
• Operating system language: English or French
• CPU/RAM: Same as for the selected operating system
• Hard disk: About 30 MB for program and initial database. Database size may increase
up to 2 GB for storing downloaded historical data.
D.1.3 Installing the software
To install the software, just run the NM7000RMM.msi setup. Follow the instructions in the setup
wizard. You need to enter the assigned license information during setup.
D.1.3.1 Installation notes

The database is by default stored in this folder (CommonAppDataFolder):*
C:ProgramDataIndra NaviaNORMARC 7000 RMM 3.0
Enter %programdata%Indra Navia in the Start menu search field to open the parent of the
above folder.
It is not possible to use configuration files and database file from versions prior to 3.0 with
this version. In case there is a need to use older configuration files and databases, it is
possible to install versions 1.2 and 2.x on the same computer which is running version 3.0.
When opening the database, the program will first try to open a ODBC system DSN with name
NM7000RMM, if that fails then it will try to open NM7000RMM.MDB stored in the
SupportFilesDir defined in the registry (see below) or in the installation folder of the program,
if that also fails it will try in the CommonAppDataFolder as defined above.
D.1.3.2 Driver for the USB port on the RMA 1822
The driver for this port is located in the USB-RMA1822A folder under the installation folder of
the RMM software.
D.1.3.3 Driver for the USB UART IC on CI 1748
In order to use the USB port on the CI 1748 connection interface board a driver needs to be
installed on the PC. The driver is located in the USB-CI1748A folder under the installation
folder of the RMM software.
Driver updates can be downloaded from this FTDI Chip page.
After installing the driver and connecting the PC to the USB connector on the CI 1748, a new
serial port (COMx) will be available for the RMM software to use. In order to find the new serial
port number installed, open the Windows Start menu, right-click on My computer, select
Manage, select “Device Manager” and expand the “Ports (COM & LPT)” item. You may remove
and attach the USB cable to see which COM port that appears while connected to the CI 1748.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.1.3.4 Customizable registry values
Users looking for additional configuration settings may want to read the Readme.txt file in the
folder named “Registry” in the installation folder for information about additional settings that
are customizable by the user.
D.1.4 Data security
Connection to external equipment or networks, including the Internet, is the responsibility of

the customer; it must be ensured that no malicious or unauthorized software enters the system.
D.1.5 Support contact information
NORMARC Support can be contacted at the following addresses and telephone numbers:
E-mail: support@indra.no
Web-site: support.indra.no
Tel: +47 2318 0205 Fax: +47 2318 0210
D.2 General
D.2.1 The station list
The RMM software maintains a list of ILS stations. The list contains information that is used by
the software to identify and to connect to an ILS.
When the menu item File | Connect to station is selected, the station list window is opened:
The user can do the following from the Station list window:
• Connect to a station
• Add a new station
• Edit a station
• Delete a station.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
Each of these operations are described below.
D.2.1.1 Connect to a station
To connect to a station that has been set up in the station list, the station must first be selected
and then the “Connect” button clicked. The RMM software will connect to the station, before
the user is asked to log on to the ILS.
D.2.1.2 Add a new station
This function adds a new station to the station list. The settings for the new station are initialized
with default values. The user must select “Edit station” to customize the settings for the new
station.
D.2.1.3 Edit a station
To edit a station, select the desired station and click the “Edit station” button. The following
window will appear:
The following information has to be set correctly:
• Station name: Type in the desired name. The name may be up to 50 characters long.
• Port: Select the serial port on the PC that the connection shall use. The available
options are COM1 - COM32 and TCP/IP.
• Bitrate: Select the speed of the communication. The options are 2400, 4800 or 9600
bps. 9600 bps is the default bit rate.
• Connect method: Select Direct (null-modem), Dial up or Leased line connection.
Direct connection is the default connect-method.

• Phone number/IP addr:port: Type the phone number or IP address and TCP port
number for the connection. This field is valid only for Dial up and TCP/IP connections.
• Modem: Select the modem in the dropdown list that matches the actual modem used.
This affects the modem init strings that will be used for the connection types (dial up or
leased line). The user may also edit the modem settings <Using_modems> by clicking
the Edit button.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
• Enable automatic download: Check this box to automatically download the medium
time periodic storage from the ILS at the time you specify. Note that the storage will
only be downloaded if a user is logged on to the ILS at the specified time. Automatic
medium time storage download will not be performed if another storage download
(excluding event download) is in progress at the specified time.
D.2.1.4 Delete a station
In order to delete a station, select the station and click the “Delete station” button. The user is
asked to confirm before the deletion takes place. Note that the delete operation will also delete
all historical data stored in the database for the selected station. This may take a few seconds.
D.2.2 Logging on and off
After a connection has been established with an ILS the user must log on by entering the user
name and password(s).
The top panel of the ILS Logon window displays dial/connection progress, and when the
connection has been established it shows which port on the ILS the user is connected to, in
addition to the RMS software version of the ILS.
To log on the user must wait until the user name and password field becomes available for
input and then enter a valid user name and one or more passwords. The user name and
password(s) are not case sensitive.
The ILS will compare the entered username and password(s) with the information stored in the
RMS subsystem in the ILS. If invalid logon information is entered the RMS subsystem in the
ILS will not allow access. A window will be opened informing about what went wrong, and let
the user perform another logon attempt. If three attempts are used without success the ILS will
disconnect and not allow more login attempts for 3 minutes (Remote Port 1 and 2 only).
If the Auto-reconnect after communication loss checkbox is checked, the RMM software will
attempt to automatically reconnect and login to the ILS when it comes available after a
communication link drop out or ILS cabinet power loss.
Auto-reconnect is only available on “Direct-connect” connections and when logging in at

access level 1 only.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
Refer to the Access levels chapter for related information.
D.2.3 Access levels
The operations that are permitted to a logged on user depend on the logon access level.
The NORMARC 7000 ILS defines four access levels:
Access Number of
Allowed operations
level passwords
Readout of all measurements and all configuration data, except
Level 1 1
user passwords.
Level 2 2 Level 1 operations + turning transmitters and LF signals on/off.
Level 1 and 2 operations + setting all configuration data, except
Level 3 3
user passwords.
Level 1, 2 and 3 operations + setting/viewing users and
passwords, setting the ILS real time clock. Note that to logon at
access level 2 or higher, more than one password must be
entered. The passwords must be separated with a single space.
The user name and password(s) are not case sensitive. To logon
as MASTER, which is a special built-in administrative user, the
user name “master” and all three master passwords must be
MASTER 3
entered (logon at access levels 1 or 2 with the master user is
therefore not possible). The factory default master passwords
are: MASTER1 MASTER2 MASTER3. To logon at other access
levels a user account must be first be set up by the master user.
If the master user passwords have been lost, the Customer
Service department can help with resetting the master
passwords.
Note
In order to logon at access level 2 or higher, straps on the TCA board must be set to enable
this. Refer to the NORMARC 7000 Instruction Manual for more information about this.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.2.4 Viewing reports
When logged on to an ILS the user can view reports for the current ILS. The “View report”
window is opened by selecting the menu item File | View report.
There are four types of reports:
• A custom report. The user can select individual measurement groups and settings to
report. The predefined groups and settings have been selected according to the
maintenance procedures. The user can select what groups to include on the report.
The selection made by the user is saved, so the user does not need make the selection
each time a custom report is generated.
• A report for documenting the operational status, all monitor and all maintenance
measurements, and selected configuration data. Note that all configuration data is not
included on the report, the report is therefore not a replacement for the configuration
files.
• A report for showing the operational history. See Operational history for a description
of this.
• A report for listing all events that have occurred in a selected time period. The last 31
days are selected by default when the dialog is opened.
The reports are in HTML format and are automatically opened in the default Web-browser
when the user clicks the OK button. The user can print or save the report from the Web-
browser.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.2.5 Preferences
User preferences can be selected in the File | Preferences window. These settings are stored
in the user portion of the Windows registry and will be restored each time the program is
started.
D.2.5.1 Unit for DDM values
Selects the unit to use for DDM values. The options are percent DDM and µA. This controls
the unit used for all DDM value output (on the screen and printed report) and DDM value user
input (for example monitor limit adjustment). Note that the unit used for DDM values stored in
the database, in configuration or continuous data log files is always µA.
D.2.5.2 Unit for RF level values
Selects the unit to use for RF level values on the monitor system. This controls the unit used
for all RF value output (on the screen and printed report) and RF value user input (for example
monitor limit adjustment). Note that the unit used for RF values stored in the database, in
configuration and continuous data log files is always dB.
To change the unit for DDM values on the LCD of the cabinet refer to the System options
section.
D.2.5.3 Adjustment mode options
These options can be used to change the way the program displays measurements and
configuration settings. These options should be left un-checked when the program is used for
routine maintenance or monitoring.
• High decimal precision: Check this to display values and limits with an extra decimal.
• Factory mode: Check this to display all the defined ILS configuration parameters
independent of the actual ILS system configuration. This option should only be enabled
for configuring new monitor, RMS or LF-generator boards at the factory. It can also be
necessary to enable this option when a board is moved from one equipment to another
(for example from a LOC to a GP).

NORMARC 7000B ILS
• Enable alarm limit setting in level 3 from Test DDM/Flight check window: Check
this to display buttons in the Test DDM (NORMARC 7000A) and Flight check
(NORMARC 7000B) windows for changing the CL DDM and NF DDM monitor limits.
This option can be enabled for easy access to monitor limit setting during
commissioning and flight-check. Note that some civil aviation authorities may prohibit
the use of this option.
Note
The user must manually close and re-open measurement and configuration windows for the
options to take effect when any Adjustment mode option has been changed.
D.2.5.4 Language
The language to use in the user interface can be selected in this drop-down list. The list of
available languages is created dynamically when the Preferences window is opened by looking
for resint_*.dll files in the installation folder. The resint_*.dll files contain the translated strings
that is used in the GUI and on the report.
Note
The program must be restarted for a change in the language setting to take effect.
D.2.6 Using modems
The use of modems is required when connecting to an ILS over a public or private telephone
network. The connection can be either a dial-up connection or a leased line connection. In both
cases modems are connected to the PC and to an RS232 port on the connection interface
inside the ILS cabinet. Normally one of the REMOTE1 or REMOTE2 ports is used for this.
When the “Connect method” for a station is set to “Dial up” or “Leased line”, the modem
connected to the PC will be initialized with AT command strings set up for the selected modem.
The user can add new modem configurations and customize the AT command strings for
existing modems.
Procedures for using Westermo and USRobotics modems are described in chapter 7.3 in the
NORMARC 7000 Instruction Manual.
When the user clicks the Edit button in the “Edit station” window the following window will be
opened: WINDOWS RMM SOFTWARE

NORMARC 7000B ILS
This window lists the modems for which dial up and leased line initialization strings have been
set up. The list will by default contain settings for a few supported modems. If the modem that
is to be used is not found in the list, the user can add a new modem to the list by clicking the
Add button. The setup for the currently selected modem can be changed by clicking the Edit
button. Selecting Add or Edit will open the window shown below.
In this window the user can type in the init strings for dialup and leased line connections
respectively. The init string is sent to the modem before the actual call is started. These settings
require knowledge about the AT commands that are supported by the specific modem in
question, and should only be altered by a user familiar with modems. The technical manuals
for the modems will normally contain the necessary information on how to initialize the modem.
To delete a modem in the modem list, click the Delete button, and respond to the confirmation
dialog. Note that a modem cannot be deleted if it is selected for use by a station.
D.2.7 Date and time formats
The RMM software uses the regional settings set up in the Windows Control Panel to format
dates shown on the screen and on printed reports. The format used is the “Short Date” format.
This will make the displayed dates match the convention used in the user’s country.
The time format is not retrieved from the regional settings. The 24-hour format HH:MM:SS.S
is used instead. This shows hours, minutes, seconds and tenths of seconds.
In exported data (Continuous data logging) and in default filenames the date and time format
used is according to the international standard (ISO 8601), i.e. YYYY-MM-DD for dates and
HH:MM:SS.S for the time of day. WINDOWS RMM SOFTWARE

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.3 Viewing ILS data
D.3.1 Monitor measurements
Selecting the ILS-Data | Monitor menu item opens the monitor measurements window, which
is shown below. This window shows the executive monitor measurements that are valid for the
current ILS.
The individual measurements and groups are formatted with special characters and colours
according to the measurement status of each measurement.
Note that this window shows the defined monitor measurements for the current ILS, unless the
“Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type” option is checked in the
Preferences window.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.3.2 Maintenance measurements
Selecting the ILS-Data | Maintenance menu item opens the maintenance measurements
window, which is shown below. This window shows the “maintenance” measurements that are
valid for the current ILS.
The individual measurements and groups are formatted with special characters and colours
according to the measurement status of each measurement.
From this window it is also possible to toggle the state of digital user I/O ports that has been
configured as outputs. To toggle the output state double-click the text shown in the Meas
column.
Note that this window shows the defined maintenance measurements for the current ILS,
unless the “Display all monitor and tx parameters independent of ILS type” option is checked
in the Preferences window.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.3.3 Front panel
The front panel shows the system status for the ILS cabinet. The front panel is opened with
the ILS-Data | Front panel menu item.
The front panel shows the same information as the physical front panel on the ILS.
The user must be logged on with access level 2 or higher to be able operate the controls in the
window.
D.3.3.1 Monitor indicators
The “monitoring related” indicators are the following:
• SERVICE: Indicates that the ILS is under service. This may be caused by any of the
switches on the ILS is in service position.
• ALARM: Indicates that one or more of the monitor parameters in the ILS is in alarm
state.
• WARNING: Indicates that one or more of the sub-warning LEDs at the left side of the
front panels is activated, and the sub-warning is configured for generating main
WARNING.
• NORMAL: Indicates that there are no alarms present among the monitor parameters
in the ILS. This indicator will always be the opposite of the ALARM indicator.
Note that the ALARM, WARNING and NORMAL indicators for the STANDBY transmitter are
only visible if the ILS is configured for hot standby transmitter operation.
The sub-warning indicators are as following
• PARAM: Indicates that one or more of the monitor parameters is in warning state. Note:
If the “Signal integrity test failure on Param LED” system option) is enabled, the label
for this warning will be “INTGRT”.
• DISAGR: Indicates that one of the two monitors detect an alarm while the other monitor
sees a normal signal.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
• BATT: Indicates that the ILS is currently operating on battery.

• IDENT: Indicates that the IDENT is faulty. Valid only for LOC equipment.
• MAINT: Indicates that one or more of the maintenance parameters are in warning state.
Note: If the “Signal integrity test failure on Param LED” system option is enabled, this
warning will also be activated if a monitor parameter is in warning state.
• STBY: Indicates that the ILS is currently operating on the standby transmitter.
• LOW BAT: Indicates that the battery voltage is low (below 23 V) or has been
disconnected. This LED is only applicable for cabinets equipped with the CI 1748
connection interface and RMS version 21.0 or later.
These sub-warnings may be configured to generate a main WARNING.
D.3.3.2 Transmitter indicators and controls
The “transmitter related” combined indicators and controls are the following:
• COU and CLR transmitters ON/OFF status: Shows which transmitters are currently
turned on. When the equipment is in MANUAL (and the user has access level 2 or
higher), these lamps can be clicked to turn the transmitters on or off.
• TX TO AIR status: Shows the position of the coax relay.
• Main select: Shows the transmitter that is selected to be the main transmitter.
• NORMAL: Indicates that there are no alarms present among the monitor parameters
in the ILS. This indicator will always be the opposite of the ALARM indicator.
• ON/OFF button: Clicking this will turn the transmitters on/off.
• CHANGEOVER button: Clicking this performs a changeover between TX1 and TX2.
• MAIN select button: Clicking this toggles between selecting TX1 and TX2 as the main
transmitter.
• MANUAL/AUTO switch: When the manual/auto switch on the ILS cabinet is in the
AUTO position, this switch can be clicked to set the equipment in manual mode.
• INTERLOCK switch: This is an indicator showing the current state of the interlock
switch on the ILS cabinet. It can not be operated from the RMM.
• LOCAL/REMOTE switch: This is an indicator showing the current state of the
local/remote switch on the ILS cabinet. It can not be operated from the RMM.
• WRITE PROTECT switch: This is an indicator showing the current state of the write
protect switch on the ILS cabinet. It can not be operated from the RMM.
D.3.3.3 Other indicators
The following text labels can also appear in this window:
• “INTERLOCK-DESELECTED”: Indicates that the ILS is currently turned off with the
interlock switch.
• “REMOTE ACCESS GRANTED”: Indicates that the Remote RMM Grant/Deny switch
on the Remote Control is in the grant position.
• “RMS ACCESS ACTIVE”: Indicates that the RMS is operating at access level 2 or
higher. This may be caused by a user logged on to a serial port at access level 2 or
higher or with the use of the LCD menu at access level 2 or higher.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.3.4 Event list
Selecting ILS-Data | Event list will bring up the window shown below. This window displays
events that have been downloaded from the ILS. This includes log-in/out, configuration
operations, alarms- and warning notifications.
The displayed fields are:
• The date and time when the event occurred

• The user who caused the event or System or Remote
• The event description
The event list is downloaded and stored in the database each time a user logs on the ILS. The
RMM software will place the event “Possible loss of events” in the event list if it is detected that
there is no time overlap between already downloaded events and the events available from
the ILS. WINDOWS RMM SOFTWARE

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.3.5 Operational history
Selecting ILS-Data | Operational history will bring up the window shown below. This window
displays operational history entries that have been downloaded from the ILS and stored in the
database on the PC. All new entries are downloaded on each login to the ILS. The last 100
entries are stored in the ILS, while the last 2500 events may be viewed in the RMM. The
database file on the PC may contain several thousands of entries for each ILS station.
RMS version 20.5 or later is required to use this feature.
There are 3 types of entries that may be downloaded. These are:
1. “Clear history”. This entry is placed in the history list after a user has selected to clear
all operational history and if the RMS detect that the data stored in the battery backed
RAM is not valid. The last case may be the case after an upgrade to a new RMS version
of the layout the RAM has changed between RMS versions.
2. “Monthly report”. The RMS stores this entry on the first day of each month. Since the
operational time counter (hours) is also stored, this gives the user information about
the usage of the ILS the last month.
3. “Alarm shutdown”. This entry indicated that the ILS has performed a transmitter
shutdown due to an alarm condition detected by the executive monitors.
In addition to the above types, a “<Data loss>” entry will be stored in the database by the RMM
software if it detects that there is no overlap of entries stored in the database on the PC and in
the ILS. This informs the user that over 100 entries have been generated in ILS since the last
time the operational history was downloaded.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
Each entry has an “Outage” field. This field indicates whether the entry shall count as an outage
in MTBO calculations. Only entries of type “Alarm shutdown” may have this field set to “Yes”.
The user can change this to “No”. Note that if this is done, a comment should also be written
to describe why the shutdown should not count as an outage.
Use the Clear history... button to reset the operational time counter and to clear the operational
history stored in the ILS. This operation requires the user to logged on to an ILS and a login at
the master access level. A confirmation from the user is required before the operation is
executed. If desired, the user can also select to clear the operational history stored in the
database on the PC.
Use the Edit entry... button to change the Outage (on alarm shutdown entries only) and
Comment fields. The Edit entry function is enabled on all access levels, and also while viewing
downloaded medium time or long time data in the database. Note that the changed data is
stored in the database only; it is not uploaded back to the ILS.
D.3.6 Measurement status description
All measurements retrieved from the ILS are tagged with a status code. These codes are
displayed by using special characters and colours, according to the table below.
Measurement status codes

Code Colour Description
The measurement is not applicable for the current equipment type or
N/A (or # in
current equipment state (for example some maintenance
Cont. log
measurements are not applicable when the transmitters are turned
files)
off).
Normal. No code or special character displayed.
w (lower Raw warning. The measurement is currently outside the defined
Yellow
case) warning limits.
Delayed warning. Same as raw warning but the measurement has
W (upper
Yellow been in this state for longer than the configured delay for the
case)
parameter group.
a (lower Raw alarm. The measurement is currently outside the defined alarm
Red
case) limits.
Delayed alarm. Same as raw alarm but the measurement has been in
A (upper
Red this state for longer than the configured delay for the parameter
case)
group.
The RMS subsystem in the ILS is unable to provide the data. This
****** can be caused by a faulty MO 1212/1820 board or an IIC-bus error
in the ILS.
The RMM software has no connection to the ILS or the data is not
stored in the database or log file. This will also be displayed before
??????
the RMM software gets an updated monitor or maintenance data set

from the ILS.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4 Configuring the ILS
D.4.1 Configuration files
The RMM software can save ILS configuration data to a file on the user’s hard disk and later
upload the file to configure an ILS when required.
Access level 3 is required for using the Upload function. Saving configuration can be done at
all access levels.
When the menu item File | Save configuration is selected, a file selection window will be shown.
The user must select a filename for saving the configuration data in.
If File | Upload configuration is clicked the user must also select which boards in the ILS
configuration data should be uploaded for. This is done in the Configuration upload window
shown below. When Upload is clicked the upload process starts. Uploading may take several
minutes.
D.4.2 Monitor settings
D.4.2.1 Monitor limits
The Monitor tab in the Monitor settings windows shows the alarm and warning limits for the
monitor parameters. The list also shows the nominal value for each parameter. The displayed
limit values are relative to the nominal value. There are 32 parameters on each monitor board.
Depending on the monitor board and equipment type (e.g. one/two frequency, cold/hot
standby, etc) some of the parameters will be disabled (i.e. have limits set to OFF) and not
shown in the list. The user can select to display all parameters by enabling “Factory mode” in
the Preferences window.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
When the calibration settings and limits for a parameter on monitor 1, 2 and for the standby
monitor (for hot standby equipment) are equal, the limits for the parameter will be shown on a
single line in the list.
The values shown this window are example values. The complete list and description of all
monitor parameters can be found in chapter 7.7 in the NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.2.1.1 Changing monitor limits
In order to change monitor limits the user must be logged on at access level 3 or as master. In
these access levels the user can click the Edit button to open the Monitor limits edit window,
which is shown below.
The title of the window shows the name of the parameter selected for editing. The window has
fields for editing the low and high alarm and warning limits and the nominal value. The nominal
value can be changed only for DDM parameters. The unit (if the parameter has a defined
measurement unit) for the limits is also shown.
The Symmetric limits button is used for enabling/disabling symmetric input mode. In symmetric
input mode the user only enters the high limits, the low limits will be automatically set so that
the limits are symmetric about the nominal value. Symmetric input mode will be enabled by
default if the currently configured limits are symmetric when the window is opened.
The Set limits off button is used for setting all limits to OFF. This fills in the special values -
9999 and 9999 in the low and high limit fields, which is the same as disabling alarm and
warning generation on the parameter. -9999 or 9999 can also be entered by the user to disable
a specific limit.
For parameters where the warning limits are entered as a percentage of the alarm limits and
the alarm limit is set to 9999, it is not meaningful to use a warning limit other than 9999.
The Apply to ... drop down list is used for selecting which monitor to update with the new
values.
If the nominal value has been changed, the new values must be applied to both monitor 1 and
2, or to the standby monitor. The new values cannot be applied to e.g. monitor 1 and not to
monitor 2. This is because monitor 1 and 2 shares the same copy of the nominal values.
Clicking the OK or the Apply button will send the new values to the ILS. The OK button will in
addition close the Monitor limit edit window.
Cancel will close window without sending anything to the ILS.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.2.1.2 Monitor calibration
The Monitor calibration window is for calibrating monitor measurements (RMA 1822 only) and
set the nominal values.
The RMA 1822 stores a scale (gain) and offset value for each measurement. The user interface
software applies these values to the values read from or written to the monitors.
The “nominal value” defines the value which the alarm and warning limits and entered relative
to. The RMA 1822 stores a separate nominal value for each monitor and measurement. Each
nominal value can be configured by the user.
The RMA 1215 allows changing nominal values only for CL, DS, NF, CLR, FFM A/B DDM
measurements. In addition, monitor 1 and 2 shares the same nominal value. The remaining
monitor measurements have fixed nominal values.
The scale, offset and nominal values are considered “system parameters”. The values should
therefore not be changed if any module is replaced. The values should always be equal on
monitor 1 and 2.
D.4.2.1.3 Changing calibration data
In order to change calibration data the user must be logged on at access level 3 or as master.
In these access levels the user can click the Calibrate measurement button on the Monitor
limits tab in the Monitor settings window to open an edit window for the currently selected
parameter.
Clicking the OK or the Apply button will send the new values to the ILS. The OK button also
closes the edit window.
Cancel will close the window without sending anything to the ILS.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.2.2 Monitor configuration (MO 1820/MF 1821/FC 1927 only)
The Monitor configuration tab in the Monitor settings window shows the configuration data
stored on any MO 1820, MF 1821 or FC 1927 boards present in the system.
D.4.2.2.1 Configuration data
The following configuration data is stored on the monitoring boards:
Parameter Board Description

Equipment Defines whether the monitor frontend tunes to the LOC and GP
MF 1821
type frequency of the selected channel.
Channel MF 1821 Select ILS channel to monitor.
Selects monitor parameters to be included in internal self-test. NF
TEST config MO 1820 test shall be disabled on systems without NF monitoring and on the
STB monitor. CLR test shall be disabled on 1-frequency systems.
Sets the Morse code the monitor will accept as the correct code.
IDENT The measurement value for parameter CL ID CODE and CLR ID
MO 1820
config CODE are 1 when the decoded Morse code is correct. Should be
empty on GP systems.
Executive Enables or disables FFM alarm to cause transmitter changeover or
MO 1820
FFM shutdown.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
Parameter Board Description

Enables or disables a feature of the FC 1927 to reduce data traffic
between the FFM receiver and the LOC cabinet. When disabled,
the FC 1927 requests the FFM to send measurement updates 2
FC reduced times per second. When enabled, the FC 1927 requests the FFM
FC 1927
comm rate to send measurement updates once per second when the
transmitters are on, and once every 5 seconds when off. This
feature can be enabled to save bandwidth when used with e.g.
wireless communication links.
This option makes the FC 1927 swap the measurements received
for channel A and B. The MO 1820 will see FFM channel A on its
FC swap channel B input and vice versa. Disable this on MON1 and enable
FFM FC 1927 on MON2 and set desired limits on channel A and the limits on
channels channel B off to have 2/2 voting between FFM receiver channels A
and B. Disable (or enable) on both monitors to have 1/2 voting
(alarm on one channel results in alarm on both monitors).
Sets the time the FC 1927 will wait for FFM measurements before
it considers the communication link to have failed. When failed, the
FC comm FC 1927 sets all FFM measurements to zero and activates the
FC 1927
timeout COMM FAIL maintenance warning signal (which is shown under
“Monitor 1/2 FFM controller” board in the Maintenance
measurements window).
D.4.2.2.2 Changing configuration data
In order to change configuration data the user must be logged on at access level 3 or as
master. In these access levels the user can click the Edit button to open an edit window for the
currently selected parameter.
Clicking the OK or the Apply button will send the new values to the ILS. The OK button also
closes the edit window.
Cancel will close the window without sending anything to the ILS.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.2.3 Maintenance limits
The Maintenance tab in the Monitor settings window shows the warning limits for the
maintenance parameters. The parameters are organized in a tree view. The board names are
at the top level. Double click a board name to see the parameters on the board.
The figure below shows the Maintenance tab with the RMS board “expanded”. The complete
list and description of all maintenance parameters can be found in chapter 7.7 in the
NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual.
The Limit(s) column shows the configuration of the warning limits of each parameter. The
format of the displayed limits is depending on the parameter type. For analog measurements
the limits are shown as: LL/UL. Where LL is the lower limit and UL is the high limit. A
maintenance warning is generated when the measurement falls outside this interval.
Digital measurements will normally be shown as the text: “Default”. This means that the limits
are configured with the default limits. If the limits are not at the default setting, the field can
show any of the following texts:
• “Normally low” The limit has been changed from the default, which is that the
measurement is a logical high level, to a logical low level.
• “Normally high” The limit has been changed from the default, which is that the
measurement is a logical low level, to a logical high level.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
• “OFF” The limit has been set off, i.e. the measurement will not produce a warning.
• “Invalid” The limits for the parameter has been set to illegal values.
• “Fixed” The limits is fixed internally in the ILS.
The Edit button is used for changing the limits. Clicking the Edit button will bring up one of the
Maintenance limit Edit window shown below. Access level 3 is required to edit maintenance
limits.
Note
In order to edit digital (non-user) maintenance parameters, the “Display all monitor and tx
parameters independent of ILS type” Preferences option must be enabled. This option must
be enabled first because the user should not normally change these limits.
D.4.2.3.1 Editing non-user maintenance parameter limits
The figure below shows the window used for entering new maintenance limits. The window
has fields for the low limit, the high limit, and the defined unit for the parameter.
D.4.2.3.2 Editing analog user parameter limits
The figure below shows the window used for entering name, scale, offset and limit settings for
analog user parameters.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.2.3.3 Editing digital user parameter limits
The figure below shows the window used for entering name, signal direction and limit settings
for digital user parameters.
Note
The limits of Digital user parameters 1 and 2 cannot be edited when connected to RMA 1215.
These parameters are counters in the RMS firmware of this module.
D.4.2.4 Delays
The Delays tab in the Monitor settings window shows the configured delays for the executive
monitors and for the maintenance parameters. The delay values are in seconds.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.2.4.1 Monitor alarm verification delay
The RMS verifies that the transmitter control has detected alarm from the monitors after this
delay after an operator turns off the transmitters. The “Monitor verification” delay shall be set
to the total changeover-shutdown time + 1 second (i.e. 2 * GEN delay + 1 s). If the
transmitter control has not detected main and standby alarm after this time, the RMS activates
the Integrity warning signal.
D.4.2.4.2 Edit Delay window
The Edit buttons can be clicked to open a window, as shown below, for editing the selected
delay. Editing delays requires access level 3.
Valid input range in this window is 0 to 102.3 seconds for MO 1212 executive monitors and 0
to 1023 for maintenance delays on RMA 1215. For MO 1820 the maximum values are:
GEN=12.7 s, NF=51.1 s, IDENT=102.3 s, FFM=819.1 s. The maximum maintenance delay on
RMA 1822 is 3276.7 s. The minimum supported executive monitor delay is 0.4 s. The total
changeover-shutdown delay will be two times the executive monitor delay value.
Refer to chapter 7.7 in the NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual for the default values.
The Apply to ... drop down list is used for selecting which monitor to update with the new
values. This field is not applicable for maintenance delays.
D.4.2.5 Power scaling (NORMARC 7000A only)
The scaling values in this window should only be changed on racks with the first version of the
PA module (LPA 1230/GPA 1231/GPA 1232 version 1). On newer PA modules, the power
reading is pre-adjusted, and the scaling value should be set to 1.0.
The values in this window can be used to adjust the power measurements done on the
transmitters. (The measured values are displayed in the maintenance measurement window).

NORMARC 7000B ILS
The scaling values will normally be in the range 0.5-2.0.
These scaling values are stored in the RMS system in the ILS and not on the transmitters. This
means that the values will have to be changed if a PA module is replaced, and restored if the
RMS board is replaced.
D.4.3 Transmitter settings (NORMARC 7000A)
D.4.3.1 Modulation settings
The Modulation tab in the Transmitter settings window is shown below.
In this window the LF generator 90 Hz and 150 Hz signals may be switched on or off and the
Morse code settings may be changed (LOC only).

NORMARC 7000B ILS
The following table describes the effect of each Morse code setting.
Setting Transmitted ident.

Off None (silent)
Normal The configured Morse code (see the Adjustments tab)
Cont. Continuous 1020 Hz tone
TST The Morse code for TST
The CLR quadrature mod. setting controls whether the Clearance LF signal is quadrature
modulated.
The Signal modulation and Morse code requires access level 2, while the CLR quadrature
modulation option requires access level 3 to change the setting.
D.4.3.2 Transmitter adjustments
The following TX parameters can be changed for Course and Clearance (for two frequency
systems) for transmitter 1 and 2:
• 90Hz & 150Hz modulation balance (DDM)

• 90Hz & 150Hz modulation sum (SDM)
• RF power
• Ident modulation depth
• Runway Morse code identification (up to 4 letters)
To change TX adjustment values click the Edit button in this window. Access level 3 is required.
A dialog similar to the one below will be opened.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
This window shows the configured adjustment values for TX1 and TX2. The label above each
input field also indicates whether the transmitter is “on air” or not.
To change the parameter values the user has the following options:
• Click on the up and down arrows to increment/decrement the value.

• Press the up and down arrows on your keyboard to increment/decrement the value.
• Enter a new value in the numeric input field.
The ILS will be updated with new value(s) when the Enter key is pressed or the OK or Apply
buttons is clicked.
The TX-adjustment values are the positions of digital potentiometers used and stored in the
EEPROM on the LF generator boards. The values are unit-less integers in the range 0-4095.
Refer to the Operating Manual for a list of typical values used.
D.4.3.3 DME interface
The fields on this tab specify the operation of the DME interface (LOC only). Access level 3 is
required to change any of these settings.
The following tables describe each selection.
Keying master Effect

LOC LOC is the keying master
DME DME is the keying master
DME active Effect
Open Open circuit indicates active DME (enables colocation)
Closed Closed circuit indicates active DME (enables colocation)

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.4 Transmitter settings (NORMARC 7000B)
D.4.4.1 Modulation tab
The Modulation tab has controls for turning the 90 and 150 Hz signals on/off, selecting the
Morse code type, and whether the Voice shall be transmitted or muted.
The settings are read only at access level 1 and read/write at higher access levels. Default
settings will be restored when the user logs out.
Note 1: The “Morse signal” fields are visible only on LOC equipment.
Note 2: The “Voice signal” fields are visible only when the “Voice generator installed” system
option is enabled.
D.4.4.2 Signal adjustments tab
The Signal adjustments tab displays a list of the current LF generator adjustments. These
values are stored in an EEPROM on each LF generator board.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
The settings are read only at access level 1 and 2 and read/write at higher access levels.
Allowable range and typical values for each adjustment value are shown in the Edit dialog for
each parameter. Some parameters do not have a specific typical range.
The following signal adjustment parameters are available:
Parameter Unit Description Range Typical values

LOC:-
100 to
COU RF LOC: 10 to 15
dBV Sets COU CSB power level 15
level GP: 10 to 15
GP:-100
to 15
LOC: -
40 to 40 LOC: -1 to 1
COU DDM Sets DDM on COU
GP: -80 GP: -1 to 1
to 80
LOC: 15
to 50 LOC: 38 to 42
COU SDM Sets SDM on COU
GP: 30 GP: 76 to 84
to 90

NORMARC 7000B ILS

LOC: 0
COU IDENT LOC: 5 to 15
% Sets ident modulation depth. to 18
level GP: 0
GP: 0
0 (normally not
LOC: 0
COU VOICE used, use requires
% Sets voice level. to 100
level other installed
GP: 0
options)
LOC: -
Depending on
COU SBO 10 to 3
dB Sets SBO level relative to CSB level. antenna system
level GP: -10
and runway length.
to 0
LOC: -10 to 10
GP: -30 to 30
COU SBO -180 to
° Sets SBO phase relative to CSB phase. (when phase offset
phase 180
is correctly
adjusted)
When COU SBO phase is set to zero,
this value is used for setting the SBO
COU SBO -180 to
° phase equal to the CSB phase at the No typical values
phase offset 180
output of the cabinet. Only visible in
factory mode.
COU 90 Hz Sets COU 90 Hz phase relative to 150
° -1 to 1 -1 to 1
phase Hz. Only visible in factory mode.
LOC: 0
COU/CLR Sets 30 Hz phase between COU and to 40
° No typical values
LF phase CLR LF signals. GP: 0 to
0
LOC:-
100 to
CLR RF
dBV Sets CLR CSB power level. 15 No typical values
level
GP:-100
to 15
LOC: -
CLR DDM 40 to 40 LOC: -1 to 1
Sets DDM on CLR.
level GP: 40 GP: 55 to 60
to 95
LOC: 15
CLR SDM to 50 LOC: 38 to 42
Sets SDM on CLR.
level GP: 30 GP: 76 to 84
to 95
LOC: 0
CLR IDENT LOC: 5 to 15
% Sets ident modulation depth. to 18
level GP: 0
GP: 0
0 (normally not
LOC: 0
CLR VOICE used, use requires
% Sets voice level. to 100
level other installed
GP: 0
options)

NORMARC 7000B ILS

LOC: -
CLR SBO
dB Sets SBO level relative to CSB level. 10 to 3 No typical range
level
GP: N/A
LOC: -
CLR SBO 180 to
° Sets SBO phase relative to CSB phase. No typical range
phase 180
GP: N/A
When CLR SBO phase is set to zero,
LOC: -
this value is used for setting the SBO
CLR SBO 180 to
° phase equal to the CSB phase at the No typical range
phase offset 180
output of the cabinet. Only visible in
GP: N/A
factory mode.
LOC: -1
CLR 90 Hz Sets COU 90 Hz phase relative to 150 LOC: -1 to 1
° to 1
phase Hz. Only visible in factory mode. GP: N/A
GP: N/A
Sets the Morse code to be transmitted as
Morse code identification. This is a 0 to 4 character
string (A-Z and space are allowed).
By enabling factory mode in the Preferences window, the following test signal parameters will
also be displayed. The recommended way of changing these values is to use the Flight check
window.
Typical
Parameter Unit Description Range
values
LOC: -1.5
This value is added to the COU DDM value when No
COU DDM to 1.5
CL test signal 1 is activated in the Flight check typical
test value 1 GP: -4.5
window. values
to 4.5
Same as
This value is added to the COU DDM value when No
COU DDM COU
CL test signal 2 is activated in the Flight check typical
test value 2 DDM test
window. values
value 1
COU SDM
Currently not in use. Should be zero.
test value 1
COU SDM
Currently not in use. Should be zero.
test value 2
LOC: 0 to
COU SBO This value is added to the COU SBO level when No
4 dB
level test dB DS test is set to Narrow in the Flight check typical
GP: 0 to
value 1 window. values
4 dB
LOC: -4
COU SBO
This value is added to the COU SBO level when dB to 0
level test dB
DS test is set to Wide in the Flight check window. GP: -4 dB
value 2
to 0

NORMARC 7000B ILS
Typical
Parameter Unit Description Range
values
This value is added to the COU SBO phase when
the COU SBO 90° stub or the Middle ant. stub is
activated in the Flight check window. The value
should be -90 for LOC and non-optimized M-array
GP systems. This value can be changed only by
enabling factory mode and changing it in this LOC: -
LOC: -
COU SBO window. Note that, since the signal generation is 95° to -
90.0°
phase test ° digital, it should not be necessary to adjust this 85°
GP: -
value 1 value. If a 90° phase shift is not observed when GP: -180°
90.0°
the 90° stub is activated, check gain/offset to -180°
adjustment values in the COU SBO PA.
For optimized M-array systems, this value should
be configured to the value that gives a 90° phase
difference between COU and SBO on the middle
antenna.
For optimized M-array systems, this value should
be configured to the value that gives a 90° phase LOC: -
COU SBO difference between COU and SBO on the lower 180° to -
phase test ° antenna. 180°
value 2 For LOC or non-optimized M-array GP systems, GP: -180°
this value is not used and should be configured to to -180°
zero.
LOC: -6 LOC: -1
This value is added to the COU RF level when
COU RF test to 0 dB
dB Test RF attenuation is activated in the Flight check
value GP: -6 to GP: -1
window.
0 dB
CLR SBO
level test dB Currently not in use. Should be zero.
value 1
CLR SBO LOC: -5
This value is added to the CLR SBO level when
level test dB to 0
CLR test is set to Wide in the Flight check window.
value 2 GP: N/A
LOC: -
LOC: -
CLR SBO 95° to -
This is the same as COU SBO phase test value 1, 90.0°
phase test ° 85°
but used for CLR SBO instead. GP: -
value 1 GP: -125°
90.0°
to -85°
CLR SBO
phase test ° Currently not in use. Should be zero.
value 2
LOC: -6 LOC: -1
This value is added to the CLR RF level when
CLR RF test to 0 dB
dB Test RF attenuation is activated in the Flight check

value GP: -6 to GP: -1
window.
0 dB

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.4.3 DME interface tab
The DME interface tab provides options for the DME interface. The settings are read only at
access level 1 and 2 and read/write at higher access levels.
• “Keying master”: The options are “LOC” and “DME”

• “DME active signal”: The options are “Open” and “Closed”
• “Ident type”: The options are “Code” and “Pulse”
D.4.4.4 Voice tab
The Voice tab provides voice configuration settings. The settings are read only at access level
1 and 2 and read/write at higher access levels.
• “Enable voice slot” option: Voice will be transmitted in two of 8 ident slots when
checked.
• “Gate voice signal” option: Voice will be muted in Morse code slots when checked.
Note
The “Voice” tab is only visible when the “Voice generator installed” system option is enabled.
Note
Voice will only be sent if the keying master is set to “LOC”.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.4.5 PA adjustments tab
The PA adjustments tab provides options for adjusting/calibrating offsets, loop phase, power
and temperature measurements in the power amplifier assemblies. In factory mode, an
additional tab, gain is displayed. Gain should only be adjusted by specially trained personnel.
The settings are read only at access level 1 and 2 and read/write at higher access levels.
The transmitter to work with must be selected in the transmitter drop-down list.
The range of the potentiometer values is from 0 to 255.
D.4.4.5.1 Offset tab
The “Offset” tab is used for adjusting digital potentiometers that controls offsets in the PA-
assembly.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
When “Enable test mode” is checked a test mode is activated on the LF generator and in the
PA- assembly that result in the following signals being fed to either the I-input or Q-input on
the amplifier:
• CSB: 150 Hz sinus with 1.0 V amplitude. No DC offset.

• SBO: SBO signal with 1.5 V amplitude on each tone.
The text “Q off” or “I off” in blue colour denotes that either the Q or I input signals is disabled
by test modes in the PA-assembly.
D.4.4.5.2 Loop phase tab
The “Loop phase” tab is used for adjusting digital potentiometers that controls the I and Q loop
delays in the PA. When “Enable test mode” is checked a test mode is activated on the LF
generator that result in the following signals begin fed to the inputs on the amplifier:
• CSB: 3.5 V DC (no modulation signals)

• SBO: 1.5 V DC (no modulation signals) on the I and Q outputs.
Test modes that make the PA operate in “open loop” and measure the demodulator outputs
instead of the drive signals are activated on the selected PA (the text labels “Open loop” and
“Read-demod” shown in blue colour denote that these modes on the PA is active).
The “Demodulator meas.” frame shows the I and Q demodulator measurements converted to
polar representation. The actual I and Q voltage measurements can be displayed as pop-up
text by resting the mouse pointer over the value or angle fields.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.4.5.3 Cal pwr meas tab
The “Cal power meas” tab is used for calibrating the forward power measurements. The
reverse power measurements cannot be calibrated.
There is no test mode for adjusting these potentiometers, so the “Enable test mode” and the
“I-signal” and “Q-signal” radio buttons are always disabled.
D.4.4.5.4 Overtemp. tab
The “Overtemp” tab is used for adjusting the temperature levels of the automatic shutdown
function in the PA-assemblies.
The “Overtemp. turnoff limit” sets the temperature level in degrees Celsius at which the RF
output from the PA will be turned off. The “Overtemp. reset limit” sets the temperature at which
the RF output will be enabled again after the turnoff limit has been exceeded (this allows the
hysteresis to be configured).

NORMARC 7000B ILS
Recommended turnoff limit is 110 degrees Celsius. Recommended reset limit is 85 degrees
Celsius.
D.4.4.5.5 Gain tab (requires factory mode)
Note
Changing the Gain adjustments requires special measurement equipment, and must only be
done at the factory or by specially trained personnel.
The “Gain” tab is used for adjusting digital potentiometers that controls gain in the I and Q
signals path in the demodulator in the PA.
When “Enable test mode” is checked a test mode is activated on the LF generator and in the
PA- assembly that result in the following signals being fed to either the I-input or Q-input on
the amplifier:
• CSB: 3.5 V DC (no modulation signals)

• SBO: 2 V DC (no modulation signals) on either the SBO I or SBO Q outputs.
The text “Q off” or “I off” in blue colour denotes that either the Q or I input signals is disabled
by test modes in the PA-assembly.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.5 Test DDM (NORMARC 7000A)
The ILS-Settings | Test DDM function is for use when a DDM flight test is performed on the
system. The Test DDM window is shown in the figure below.
The window has the following fields and controls:
• Graphical readout of the current CL DDM and NF DDM measurement, and the low and
high alarm limits.
• Buttons for quick access to the monitor alarm/warning configuration dialog (only when
enabled in the Preferences </Preferences> window). Clicking one of these buttons will
open the Monitor limits edit window, which will have the currently measured DDM value
suggested as new alarm limit.
• Controls for activating the test signals.
• DDM adjustment “sliders” for adjusting dominance levels.
• Read only field that shows the position of the “sliders” relative to the CL modulation
balance value (see Transmitter adjustments).
The required access levels for the fields in this dialog is as follows:
• To change monitor limits requires access level 3.

• All other settings require access level 2.
The test DDM values are unit-less integers in the range 0-4095.
D.4.6 Flight check (NORMARC 7000B)
The Flight check window provides test modes and settings used during flight checks.
The test modes are read only at access level 1; can be activated at level 2 and the test mode
values can be changed at higher access levels.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
The upper half of the window displays the CL, DS and NF monitor measurements relative to
the configured alarm limits. There are “Set limits” buttons for setting the limits equal to the
current monitor measurement.
The lower half of the window has tabs for selecting the transmitter and whether to work with
“Alignment” or “Alarm limit check” functions. See the screen dumps below.
All test signals will be reset if the window is closed or communication between computer and
ILS is lost.
D.4.6.1 Alignment tab
The Alignment tab provides the following functions:
• Buttons for turning off the COU or CLR SBO signals (normally used during Modulation
Level and Modulation Equality flight checks). The text label left of the button will indicate
whether the SBO is on or off. Adjustment fields for modulation balance (DDM) and
modulation sum (SDM). These adjustments will normally be carried out to comply with
flight measurement feedback.

• Buttons for inserting a 90° stub into the COU or CLR SBO RF signal paths (Calibration
of this 90° stub is done from the Transmitter settings - Signal adj. tab when the RMM
program is in Factory Mode. The value used is the “COU SBO phase test value 1”.)
The stub is normally used for overall phasing. The SBO phase adjustment to the right
is then used for calibrating the phase for the system. The text labels left of the buttons
indicates whether the 90° stubs are inserted or not.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
Note that the angle shown for the stub is -90°. This indicates that the SBO signal is delayed
90° compared to the CSB signal, corresponding to inserting a physical 90° stub on the SBO
output from the cabinet.
• Input fields are provided for setting course-sector/sector-width (COU SBO level) and
CLR SBO level relative to the CSB level is provided. If reported course sector width is
too wide: increase COU SBO level by corresponding value. If reported course sector
width is too narrow: decrease COU SBO level by corresponding value.
D.4.6.2 Alignment tab for Optimized M-array systems
When Optimized M-array is selected on the system options tab in the General settings window,
the Alignment tab provides buttons for inserting two different stubs instead of the common
COU SBO 90° stub. The buttons are labelled “Middle ant. X° stub” and “Lower ant. Y° stub”.
The stubs are calibrated from the Transmitter settings - Signal adj. tab when the RMM program
is in Factory Mode. The values used for the middle and lower antenna stubs are respectively
the “COU SBO phase test value 1” and the “COU SBO phase test value 2” values.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.6.3 4.6.3. Alarm limit check tab
For setting and testing of alarm limits special controls are provided. One or more of the different
test signals can be applied simultaneously. The test signal types are described below.
D.4.6.3.1 CL test signals
Two test signals can be preset/adjusted. One will normally be offset to provide an alignment
alarm on 90 Hz side (GP: low angle) while the other will be offset to alignment alarm 150 Hz
side (GP: high angle). Fine-tuning of the presets can be done by pulling the sliders, clicking on
the arrows at each end of the sliders or clicking the up/down arrow to the side of the value
fields.
The visual indication in the upper half of the Flight check window will indicate the change in CL
and NF DDM readings and will also indicate how close to the alarm limits the signals are (alarm
limit is indicated by a red line in the graphical readout for each parameter).
If the alarm limit shows not to be correct when the alarm point is found, a new alarm limit for
the monitors can be set by clicking on the Set limits button between the Mon1 and Mon2
indication for the relevant parameter.
The monitored value for that parameter will then be suggested as a new alarm limit but can of
course be manually overwritten.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
The “Set limits” buttons will only be shown if the option “Enable alarm limit setting in level 3
from Flight check window” under the menu option File - Preferences is activated. Note: Activate
CL test signal 1 or 2 in order to enable the Set limits buttons.
D.4.6.3.2 DS test signals
For testing Narrow / Wide alarm limits, two settings can be preset/adjusted. Select either
Narrow or Wide test signals and adjust the SBO level until the correct alarm point is found.
The visual indication in the upper half of the Flight check window will indicate the change in
DS DDM reading and will also indicate how close to the alarm limits the signal is (alarm limit is
indicated by a red line in the graphical readout for each parameter).
If the alarm limit shows not to be correct when the alarm point is found, a new alarm limit for
the monitors can be set by clicking on the Set limits button between the Mon1 and Mon2
indication for the relevant parameter.
The monitored value for that parameter will then be suggested as a new alarm limit, but this
value can be manually overridden.
The “Set limits” button will only be shown if the option “Enable alarm limit setting in level 3 from
Flight check window” under the menu option File | Preferences is activated.
D.4.6.3.3 CLR test signals
For testing of CLR wide alarm a test setting is provided. By activating this, the CLR SBO will
be reduced. Fine-tuning of the setting can be done by clicking the up/down arrows to the side
of the value field.
Changes in the CLR DDM value can be observed in the ILS-Data | Monitor window.
If the alarm limit has to be corrected this can be done via the ILS-Settings | Monitoring window.
D.4.6.3.4 RF power alarm
For testing of the RF power alarm, test settings for both Course and CLR power have been
implemented.
By activating the test, the output level of the selected transmitter will be reduced with the level
selected.
Changes in the RF value can be observed in the ILS-Data | Monitor window.
If the alarm limit has to be corrected this can be done via the ILS-Settings | Monitoring window.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.7 Monitor integrity test
The Monitor integrity test window is for performing periodic integrity tests on the MO 1820
monitors.
The integrity test can be started on any of the present monitors while in access level 2 or
higher. The test includes testing of a number of RMS-induced errors on the monitor system.
The window displays progress information while a test is running.
Failed tests generate events in the event list with text that identifies the failed sub-test.
After the complete test is done an event is generated with summary of the complete periodic
test. The date/time and result of the most recent integrity test is also shown in this window until
the ILS cabinet is powered off.
D.4.7.1 4.7.1. Starting the integrity test
In order to start monitor integrity testing, first select which monitor to perform test on, or “All
monitors” to start on all present monitors. Ensure that you are logged on at level 2 or higher
and have activated manual mode on the Front panel in the RMM software or on the TCA front
panel.
Click the “Start test” button to start the test.


NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.8 General settings
D.4.8.1 ILS date and time
The Date/time tab in the General settings window is used for displaying and setting the current
date and time of the real time clock on the RMS board in the ILS. Master access level is
required to set the date and/or time.
D.4.8.2 User administration
The User adm tab in the General settings window is used for administration of the users and
passwords.
When logged in as a master user this window allows configuring of existing and new users
which shall be granted access to the RMM system. When logged in as an ordinary user, this
window only displays the last time each user was logged on.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
The LCD MENU and MASTER users are always set up, and cannot be deleted. The LCD
MENU entry is used for setting the four letter password required for entering access level 3
from the LCD menu on RMA 1215 or RMA 1822.
Restrictions:
• Passwords must be 6-8 characters in length (the LCD MENU must be 4 characters).
Both the username and passwords can only consist of characters in the ranges A-Z, a-
z or 0-9.
• The usernames for LCD MENU and MASTER cannot be changed.
• For the LCD MENU user only an access level 3 password is entered.
• For the MASTER user, no password field can be empty.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.8.3 Lamp mappings
At access level 3 the user may configure which of the small warning LED’s that are “mapped”
to the main (large) warning LED on the remote control panel (and slave panel) and on the local
panel (requires Factory Mode). The user may also configure the logic to be used between
mains 1 and 2 and between low batt 1 and 2 for activating the “batt/mains” and “low batt”
warning signals.
An “X”-mark to the left of the warning type indicates that an active warning of that type will
cause the main warning lamp to be activated.
The checkboxes below lamp mapping options, select between using OR-logic (checkbox not
checked) or AND-logic between mains 1 and 2 and between low batt 1 and 2.
The Mains and Low batt logic options and the LOW BAT lamp mapping option are only
applicable when connected to cabinets equipped with the CI 1748 connection interface board
and RMS version 21.0 or later.
If the configuration is changed, the Apply button must be clicked to send the new settings to
the ILS.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.8.4 Historical data
The Historical data tab in the General settings window shows user options for the historical
data stored in the cabinet.
D.4.8.4.1 Sample interval
Allows setting the interval between samples written to the medium time storage. The following
intervals way be selected:
Storage interval Total medium storage time

15 Minutes 24 Hours
30 Minutes 48 Hours
60 Minutes 4 Days
120 Minutes 8 Days
Access level 3 is required for changing the interval.
If the configuration is changed, the Apply button must be clicked to send the new settings to
the ILS.
D.4.8.4.2 Reset historical data in cabinet
These selections allow clearing historical data stored in the cabinet. These functions apply to
the medium time, warning, long time and alarm storages as well as the event and operational
history lists.
Delete only invalid historical - deletes samples that has a timestamp that is greater than the
current date/time of the ILS clock.
Delete all historical data - deletes all historical from the cabinet.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
Click the Clear data button to perform the selected delete operation.
Master access level is required for using this function.
D.4.8.5 Port setup
When the user selects “Port setup” in the General settings window the tab shown below is
displayed.
Note
The settings and functions of this window are only applicable when connected to a cabinet
with RMA 1215. The “Edit” and “Init modem” buttons are always disabled when connected to
a cabinet with RMA 1822.
The window displays the currently configured bit rates and init strings. Pressing the Edit button
brings up a dialog where you can change the bit rate and/or the init string for the selected port.
Note that it is no init string for the local port, since a modem is not supported for this port.
Pressing the Init modem makes the ILS send the modem initiation at the selected port.
If the init-string is left blank or the word “default” is written, the ILS will use a default init-string
that shall work on standard Hayes compatible modems under normal conditions.
Please consult the modem manual for further information about modem commands and
initialisation.
The init-string and Init modem function are only applicable when connected to RMA 1215.
D.4.8.6 Cabinet name
When the user selects “Cabinet name” in the General settings window the tab shown below is
displayed.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
The cabinet is displayed in the first row of the LCD panel. It is also used in the RMM system
for identifying the ILS. The cabinet name can only be configured in ILS cabinets with RMS
software version 13 or later.
The Master access level is required for changing the cabinet name.
D.4.8.7 System options
When the user selects “System options” in the General settings window the tab shown below
is displayed.
The user must be logged on as Master to make any changes to these settings. Factory mode
must be selected in the File | Preferences window to enable the hardware configuration
options.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
If any of these options are changed the RMS must be restarted (power the cabinet off and on).
The following sections describe each option.
D.4.8.7.1 Hardware configuration
D.4.8.7.1.1 Dual battery installed (NORMARC 7000B only)
Enable this option on racks that have dual battery banks. When enabled the RMM and RMS
software will show the maintenance measurements done on battery 2 and power supply 2:
BATTERY CURR 2, POWER CURR 2, and BATTERY VOLT 2. RMS version 20.5 or later is
required to use this feature.
D.4.8.7.1.2 Near Field Monitor not installed
This option is to be enabled when no NF monitor is installed on the ILS. It will hide all the NF
readings in the Monitor measurements window, hide all readings of Maintenance parameters
from monitor 1 MO and MF boards and remove the options for readout and setting of NF alarm
limits/warning limits/delay from the LCD menu.
Note
In addition to enabling this option the NF monitor alarm/warning limits must manually be set
OFF from the RMM software in factory mode to inhibit generation of NF alarm and warnings.
The maintenance limits for NF Baseband and NF RF level must also be set OFF. Use the
Preferences window to turn on factory mode.
D.4.8.7.1.3 Tilt sensor installed
This option is to be enabled when the tilt sensor is installed. When enabled, the RMS and RMM
software will display the tilt sensor measurements and limits. This option should only be used
on GP equipment. RMS version 13.3 or later is required to use this feature.
D.4.8.7.1.4 Voice generator installed
This option is to be enabled when the ILS is equipped with the voice module on the LF
generator boards (NORMARC 7000A) or an external voice generator (NORMARC 7000B). It
is used for enabling voice measurements and options in the RMS and RMM software.
D.4.8.7.1.5 High power GP CLR (NORMARC 7000B only)
Enable this option if COU transmitters (GPA 1581) are used to generate CLR signals (normally
generated by GPA 1582).
Note:
Using GPA 1581 transmitters this way, requires the 27V supply line for CLR SBO to be
disconnected. RMS version 20.5 or later is required to use this feature.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.8.7.1.6 Single Monitor system
This option is to be enabled in cabinets with one monitor. When enabled the RMS ignores IIC
read errors from monitor 2 and monitor 2 RF frontend and sets these measurements to N/A.
(The warning limits are ignored for any maintenance measurement that is N/A, so there is no
need to set the limits “off”). Monitor disagree warning (LED and event) is suppressed.
D.4.8.7.1.7 Single Transmitter system
This option is to be enabled in cabinets with one transmitter chain. When enabled the RMS will
ignore IIC read errors from TX2: OS, LF, and LPA/GPA COU/CLR, and sets the measurements
to N/A. (The warning limits are ignored for any maintenance measurement that is N/A, so there
is no need to set the limits “off”.)
D.4.8.7.1.8 Remote M-array tests
Enable this option to show the Remote M-array test controls in the Flight Check window. Using
these controls requires custom hardware to be installed.
D.4.8.7.2 User system options
D.4.8.7.2.1 Manual mode turns off ident
When enabled, the RMS will automatically turn off the ident (and voice, if present) when the
system enters “manual” mode. The ident will also be turned off about 1 second after startup if
the system is in manual mode when powered on. Also, the ident warning LED will not be
activated while in manual mode. The ident will also be turned on when the system enters “auto”
mode.
Note
The RMS automatically sets the ident mode back to “Normal” when logging out from access
level 2 or higher. On equipment with LF 1223 boards (used in NORMARC 7000A), the
NMP110B.02 FPGA is required for setting Normal ident if the RMS loses its access as a result
of Grant/Deny switch change or Local/Remote switch change.
D.4.8.7.2.2 Manual mode turns off tx for 20 s (NORMARC 7000B only)
Enable this option to make the RMS automatically turn the transmitters off when Manual mode
is activated. After 20 seconds the RMS will turn the transmitters on again.
D.4.8.7.2.3 Integrity test failure on Param LED (NORMARC 7000B only)
Enable this option to activate the Param LED if any of the integrity checks fails. When enabled,
any monitor parameter warnings will not activate this LED, instead any monitor parameter
warning will be indicated by the Maint LED. Refer to the handbooks for a description of the
integrity checks performed by the RMS.
D.4.8.7.2.4 µA DDM unit on LCD panel
When enabled, selects µA instead of %DDM as the DDM measurement unit on the LCD.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.4.8.7.2.5 NF warning on DIG USER 7 (NORMARC 7000B only)
When enabled, causes the RMS to pull down Digital User parameter 7 when a delayed warning
is active on NF DDM, NF SDM or NF RF on Monitor 1 or/and 2 (depending on 1/2 or 2/2 voting
configuration on the TCA board).
Note
Digital User parameter 7 is labelled USER_DIG_6 on the CI 1748 cover.
D.4.8.7.2.6 Back-to-back 1F Localizer (NORMARC 7000B only)
This option tell the user that the site is configured with two antenna arrays. This information is
currently not used by the software.
D.5 Historical data
D.5.1 About historical data
D.5.1.1 Historical data storage in the ILS
The ILS RMS subsystem has battery backed Random Access Memory (on the RMA 1215) or
flash (on the RMA 1822) that is used to store historical data. Four different types of historical
data logs is stored:
Medium time periodic storage:

One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters stored periodically at user
specified intervals (see Sample interval paragraph in the Historical data tab in the
General settings window). The storage contains the last 96 samples.
Long time periodic storage:
For every day through a 180 days period, the mean value and standard deviation of all
monitor and analog maintenance parameters are stored.
Warning storage:
One sample of all monitor and maintenance parameters at the instant when a warning
LED is activated. The 25 last warnings are stored.
Alarm storage:
Samples of all monitor and maintenance parameters for a period starting from 30
seconds before an alarm occurred and ending with the actual alarm sample. The last
seven alarms are stored in the ILS. Two alarms will be stored in the ILS for each alarm
condition that results in a transmitter changeover, which is followed by a shutdown.
In addition, the ILS stores an event list. See Viewing events for more information about the
event list.
Refer to Historical data settings for information on settings in the RMS that is related to
historical data.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.5.1.2 Historical data storage in the RMM software
The RMM software allows the user to download the historical data from the ILS. The
downloaded data are saved in a database (Access .MDB-file) on the PC.
The following sections describe how to download historical data and how to view the data once
it has been downloaded.
To delete historical data stored for a station in the database, requires the user to delete the
station from the station list. There is no option to delete historical data only.
D.5.2 Downloading historical data
Selecting the menu item File | Storage download opens the “Storage download” window shown
below. This window is used to select a historical storage and start downloading it from the ILS.
If there is no data in a historical storage it will not be possible to select it for download.
As it can be stored historical data for up seven alarms in the ILS, the user must select which
alarms to download. The time stamps shown in the window are the time of the last data set in
each storage (this time will be the same as the time of the changeover or shutdown of the
transmitters plus a few tenths of a second).
When a warning or alarm storage data is selected for download, a window will be opened in
which the user can select a folder and filename for saving the data to. When medium time or
long time period storage data is selected the data will be stored in the database.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.5.3 Viewing historical data
The menu item File | Open downloaded data is used to open and view downloaded historical
data. The window shown below is opened when this menu item is selected.
The user must select the type of historical storage to open and the station name (for medium
time and long time periodic data) or filename (for warning and alarm storage).
When the user clicks “Open” the historical data is opened. The main program window will then
change, and become similar to the window below.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
There are panels placed at the top and the bottom of the program window. The top panel
shows the station name and the station type along with a “Close” button to stop viewing the
historical data. The bottom panel contains browse controls for selecting the currently displayed
data set among the data available in the storage.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
The following ILS-Data menu items can be used to view data from the selected historical
storage:
• Monitor
• Maintenance
• Event list and operational history (only when viewing medium time periodic or long time
periodic historical data)
• Diagnostics
When viewing alarm storage data, the bottom panel will also have a drop-down list for selecting
the alarm storage to be browsed. Also shown is a text field that shows the result of the
automatically performed diagnose result for the selected alarm storage.
D.5.4 Continuous logging
The RMM program can be used to save the monitor and maintenance measurements that are
currently being received from an ILS directly to a file. This function is referred to as “Continuous
logging”.
The following points describe the major differences between Continuous logging and historical
data stored in the ILS:
• Data is logged real-time, i.e. only as long as the user is logged on to the ILS.
• Monitor and maintenance measurements must be saved to separate files.
• The user has control of the interval between saved data sets (specifying a data set
interval = zero seconds causes all received data to be saved).
• Data that has been saved with Continuous logging cannot be viewed from within the
RMM program. A text editor (for example Windows Notepad) or other third party
software (for example Microsoft Excel) must be used for opening and viewing the
contents of Continuous log files.
A typical utilization of the Continuous logging feature can be to find the cause of problems that
are not logged (or sufficiently logged) in the internal historical storages.
D.6 Fault diagnostics
D.6.1 About fault diagnostics
The RMM software has two algorithms to isolate a failure in the ILS. The algorithms are the
Current data diagnostics and the Alarm diagnostics.
D.6.2 Current data diagnostics
Current data diagnostics is invoked by selecting the menu item ILS-Data | Diagnostics. Based
upon the currently displayed data, which can originate from a live ILS connection or from
historical data storage, the program will suggest the faulty module(s), if any.
Refer to chapter 5.4 in the NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual for a description of the
algorithm used to isolate faults.

NORMARC 7000B ILS
D.6.3 Alarm diagnostics
This diagnostic function is automatically performed when an alarm storage is downloaded from
the ILS. The diagnose result is shown on the screen when historical alarm data is viewed.
Note that the alarm diagnostics algorithm works on alarms that causes a changeover to
standby transmitter. If the changeover is followed by shutdown, this information is used in the
algorithm for diagnosing the changeover alarm. It does not diagnose shutdown alarms as
standalone alarms.
Refer to chapter 5.4 in the NORMARC 7000B Instruction Manual for a detailed description of
the algorithm used to isolate faults.

Indra Navia AS
Olaf Helsets vei 6
NO – 0694 Oslo, Norway
T +47 2318 0200

F +47 2318 0210

7011B-34B Im 73892-012 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7011B-34B Im 73892-012 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

NORMARC 7000 ILS

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

Document part/Chapter Number Rev

INDRA NAVIA PROPRIETARY INFORMATION

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page -i

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page -ii

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page iii

- Page intentionally blank -

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page iv

1 SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION ........................................................ 1-1

2 SECTION 2 TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................................... 2-1

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page v

3 SECTION 3 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS .................................................... 3-1

4 SECTION 4 PERIODIC MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 4-1

5 SECTION 5 CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE .................................................. 5-1

5.2 Diagnostic functions........................................................................................ 5-1

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page vi

5.2.3 Alarm event diagnostics.................................................................................. 5-2

6 SECTION 6 PARTS LIST .......................................................................... 6-1

7 SECTION 7 INSTALLATION AND INITIAL SET-UP ......................................... 7-1

7.3.1 Configuration Settings .................................................................................... 7-67

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page vii

7.3.4 Lost contact with RC configuration ................................................................. 7-68

8 SECTION 8 DETAILED TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION ...................................... 8-1

8.1.9 RMA 1822A RMS Assembly........................................................................... 8-46

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page viii

8.1.12 MB 1575A Monitor Section Motherboard........................................................ 8-61

SECTION 9 APPENDIXES .......................................................................................... A-1

APPENDIX A MONITOR AND MAINTENANCE PARAMETERS .......................................... A-1

APPENDIX B FAR FIELD MONITOR - (LOC ONLY) ..................................................... B-1

APPENDIX C POWER SUPPLY .................................................................................. C-1

APPENDIX D WINDOWS RMM PROGRAM ................................................................. D-1

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page ix

-Page Intentionally Blank-

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page x

Figure 1-1 Typical ILS installation ............................................................................... 1-3

Figure 4-34 Flight profile - DS al. limit check................................................................. 4-56

© Indra Navia AS Page xi

Figure 5-3 Before adjustment ..................................................................................... 5-12

Figure 7-31 Digital Inputs .............................................................................................. 7-34

© Indra Navia AS Page xii

Figure 7-35 Connectors for Remote Control interface on MB 1753A............................ 7-38

Figure 8-24 Coax Cable Connection - NORMARC 7013B-7014B ................................ 8-64

© Indra Navia AS Page xiii

Figure 8-28 Remote Control with SP 1754 Slave Panel................................................ 8-68

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page xiv

Table 4-1 Periodic Maintenance Checks.................................................................... 4-1

Table 8-4 Category Status panel interface................................................................. 8-79

© Indra Navia AS Page xvii

Table 8-8 Connector J3/P6 ........................................................................................ 8-89

73892/Rev.1.2/05-Apr-17 NORMARC 7011B-7034B

© Indra Navia AS Page xviii